RAi 


IS  -  CARRUTH 


•■^^it.'^":  ^f^sKtWcsa^ie^ia 'V 


J.  Henry  Senger 


§-4? 

0'^% 
e 

^^m 


ELEMENTARY 


GERMAN     GRAMMAR 


CHARLES    P.    OTIS 


EIGHTH  EDITION 
DROUGHLY   revised   and   PRQyiDliD,^/^!^!! 
NEW   EXERCISES        *       '       '        ' 


WILLIAM  HERBERT  CARRUTH,  Ph.D. 

PROFESSOR  OF  GERMANIC  LANGUAGES  AND  LITERATURES  IN  THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  KANSAS 


NEW  YORK 
HENRY   HOLT   AND    COMPANY 

1905 


IN  MEMORIAM 


Copyright 

By  CHARLES  P.  OTIS 

1881,  1883,  1888 


Copyright,  1889,  1893,  1904 

BY 

HENRY  HOLT  &  CO. 


EDITOR'S  PREFACE. 


Professor  Otis's  Elementary  German  has  proved 
to  be  on  the  whole  such  a  serviceable  book  for  beginners 
in  German,  that  it  has  seemed  to  me  better  to  revise  it 
thoroughly  than  to  add  to  the  already  great  number  of 
such  handbooks  on  the  market. 

The  chief  features  of  the  revision  are  a  new  set  of 
Exercises  and  the  fusion  of  the  two  parts  into  one  con- 
tinuous series  of  thirty  lessons,  while  in  addition  some 
subjects  receive  a  fuller  treatment  in  the  book  as  it  now 
appears.  The  reasons  for  the  changes  will  appeal  to  all 
friends  of  Professor  Otis's  work.  The  best  of  exercises 
grow  hackneyed  and  wear  out.  The  new  exercises  are 
fuller  and  have  a  certain  continuity.  The  practical  ob- 
jection to  the  two  parts  is,  that  teachers  are  tempted  to 
slight  or  to  omit  the  second  part,  whereas  it  contains 
some  of  the  most  important  features  of  the  subject. 

The  handbook  as  it  now  stands  will  meet  all  the  needs 
of  high-school  students,  while  the  advanced  college 
student  will,  of  course,  need  a  more  complete  grammar 
for  reference. 

W.  H.  C. 

University  of  Kansas,  January,  1904. 

926706 


Digitized  by  tine  Internet  Archive 

in  2008  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/elementarygermanOOotisrich 


AUTHOR'S  PREFACE. 


This  manual  is  intended  to  serve  as  a  general  intro- 
duction to  German,  and  consists  of  a  brief  outline  of 
the  main  essentials  of  the  grammar,  with  exercises  and 
material  for  practice  and  illustration.  It  is  therefore  no 
new  method,  and  whatever  merit  it  may  have  consists 
in  the  manner  of  presentation.  It  is  based  on  the  con- 
viction, that,  while  a  systematic  though  brief  study  of 
the  structure  of  the  language  should  form  the  ground- 
work, there  should  be  as  much  practice  as  possible  with 
the  actual  language  both  as  talked  and  as  written.  Ac- 
cordingly, each  lesson  treats  of  some  essential  of  the 
grammar,  and  provides  material  for  practice  both 
written  and  oral. 

In  the  grammar  outline,  the  aim  has  been  to  present 
the  more  essential  facts  as  briefly  and  simply  as  pos- 
sible, and  in  the  order  best  favoring  the  early  practical 
use  of  the  language.  The  usual  order  of  presentation 
has  accordingly  been  deviated  from  in  introducing  the 
verb  earlier,  and  also  in  postponing  the  subjunctive 
mood  to  the  end.  Less  essential  facts  of  grammar  are 
given  in  notes  scattered  through  the  lessons,  which  do 
not,  however,  in  every  case  refer  to  the  topic  under  con- 
sideration in  the  particular  lesson. 


VI  AUTHOR  S    PREFACE. 

In  the  conversations^  the  arrangement  is  such  that  the 
question  suggests  the  answer.  As  indicated,  they  can 
be  still  further  extended  at  pleasure,  what  is  given  being 
rather  suggestions  for  treatment  by  question  and  answer 
than  any  attempt  at  exhaustion  of  the  theme.  Actual 
communication  in  the  new  language  is  thus  secured 
from  the  first,  and  the  pupil  enabled  to  realize  that  life 
which  the  oral  use  of  it  inspires,  and  to  gain  an  impres- 
sion of  its  spirit  and  character. 

At  the  end  of  each  lesson  is  a  short  and  simple  read- 
ing exercise.  This  is  so  arranged  with  translation  or 
notes,  that  the  pupil  will  at  once  see  the  meaning,  though 
he  may  not  understand  the  grammatical  construction. 
Indeed,  the  object  of  these  readings  is  not  grammar- 
drill,  but  to  furnish  material  for  practice  and  memorizing, 
and  to  gratify  the  natural  eagerness  of  the  beginner  to 
see  the  language  itself.  A  considerable  number  of  these 
selections  are  popular  German  songs.  Pupils  should  be 
encouraged,  if  not  required,  to  sing  these.  They  will  thus 
be  memorized  in  the  surest  and  most  agreeable  manner, 
and  will  prove  to  be  a  great  assistance  to  further  work 
and  in  the  cultivation  of  enthusiasm  for  the  study. 

C.  P.  O. 


NOTE  TO  THE  TEACHER. 


It  is  recommended  that  the  teacher  go  over  the  les- 
son with  the  class  in  advance,  explaining  the  grammar 
topic,  pronouncing  and  remarking  upon  the  exercises 
and  conversations,  and  giving  especial  attention  to  the 
vocabularies.  The  English  exercises  should  be  written 
at  home,  and  handed  in  for  correction.  When  corrected 
they  should  be  copied  into  a  book  kept  for  the  purpose 
and  memorized  for  recitation  the  following  day. 

The  class  may  then  be  called  upon  to  recite  the  pre- 
vious German  and  English  exercises,  the  latter  with 
books  closed,  the  sentences  in  each  at  the  same  time 
being  varied  so  as  to  introduce  other  forms  and  words. 

Blackboard-exercises  are  very  useful,  and  may  consist 
of  the  writing  of  the  English  exercise  for  the  day,  to  be 
corrected  by  the  teacher  with  the  help  of  the  class  while 
the  pupils  at  their  seats  correct  their  own  or  their  fel- 
lows^ work ;  in  the  writing  of  declensions,  forms  of  the 
verb,  or  other  grammar  facts,  German  sentences  from 
dictation,  or  English  to  be  put  into  German  on  dictation  ; 
also  the  writing  from  memory  of  proverbs,  or  a  reading 
piece  (the  title  being  given). 

The  conversation  exercise  concludes ;  here  not  only 
the  topic  for  the  day  is  to  be  gone  over,  but  previous 


Vlll  NOTE    TO    THE    TEACHER. 

ones  brought  up,  and  variations  and  additions  introduced 
as  the  pupil  advances  in  vocabulary  and  facility. 

The  conversation  exercise  may  be  greatly  extended 
by  means  of  questions  and  answers  based  upon  the 
reading  pieces. 

In  large  classes  it  will  be  found  necessary,  if  liberal 
use  is  made  of  drill  and  dictation  and  conversation,  to 
devote  two  recitations  to  each  lesson,  at  least  for  the 
first  fourteen  lessons.  In  this  case  the  division  may  be 
made  between  the  German  and  the  English  exercises, 
or  including  the  correction  of  the  latter  if  done  in  class. 

With  regard  to  the  pronunciation  at  the  beginning, 
after  learning  the  alphabet  with  the  name  and  approxi- 
mate sounds  of  the  letters,  the  class  may  be  directed  to 
turn  at  once  to  p.  ii.  The  teacher  himself  will  first 
pronounce  the  words  illustrative  of  the  vowel  a,  then 
let  the  pupil  do  the  same,  and  so  on.  In  practising  the 
lesson  at  home,  the  pupil  can  refer  to  the  exposition 
that  precedes. 

After  the  first  nine  lessons,  when  the  pupil  has  ob- 
tained a  general  view  of  the  verb,  translation  may  be 
taken  up,  and  alternated  with  the  lessons.  At  first  it 
would  be  well  for  the  teacher  to  translate  beforehand  to 
the  pupils.  At  each  lesson  in  translation  some  part  of 
speech  might  form  a  special  subject  of  study ;  at  first 
the  verb,  the  pupil  being  directed  to  look  out  and  study 
each  one. 


CONTENTS. 

Lesson  '  Pack 

I.  Alphabet  and  Pronunciation. 

Reading.  —  Ende  gut  alles  gut.     Lerne  recht    ...       14 

II.  Definite  Article  der.     Rules  for  Gender.     Present 

tense  of  sein. 
Note  i. —  Sie^  " you."    Note  2.  —  "I  speak,"  " I  do  speak," 

"  I  am  speaking  " 19 

Conversation.  —  Sprechen  Sie  Deutsch?  ....      20 
Reading.  —  Eile  mit  Weile.     Das  Gliick    ....      20 

III.  "  Der  "  Words.     Present  of  haben. 

Note  3.  —  "  Some  "  not  translated.     Note  4.  —  Article  for 

possessive .23 

Note  5.  —  Use  oi  man 25 

Conversation.  —  Sprechen  Sie  Deutsch  ?  ...      26 

Reading.  —  Ach,  wie  ist's  moglich  dann  ?   .        .        .        .26 

Ratsel 27 

IV.  Indefinite  Article  ein  and  **  ein  "  Words.     Pre- 

terit of  sein,  haben,  werden. 

Note  6.  —  "  They  have."     Note  7.  —  Es  gibt    ...  30 

Conversation.  —  Die  Hand 33 

Note  8.  —  Declension  of  ein T^^i 

Reading.  —  tjbung  macht  den  Meister.       Der  rechte  Le- 

benslauf.     Der  Esel  und  der  Wolf 34 

V.  Verbs.    New  Conjugation. 

Note  9.  —  "I  lived,"    "  I  was  living,"  "  I  did  live "  .         .  39 

Note  10.  —  Prepositions  with  the  Accusative      •        •        •  39 

Conversation.  —  Zahlen 41 

Reading  . —  Gleich  und  gleich  gesellt  sich  gern.   Was  sind 

das  fiir  Sachen !     Der  Esel  in  der  Lowenhaut  .        .  42 

VI.  Verbs.     Old  Conjugation. 

Note  II.  —  Prepositions  governing  the  dative     .        .        .  45 

Conversation.  —  Buchstabieren 48 

Reading.  —  Sprichwort 48 

Spruch.    Die  wilde  Taube  und  die  Biene       .  49 


X  CONTENTS. 

Lesson  Page 

VII.    Verbs.      Old  Conjugation;   Classes    and    Ir- 
regularities. 
Note  12.  —  Prepositions  with  dative  or  accusative    .        .       e^ 

Conversation.  —  Wort  und  Laut 55 

Reading.— Sprich wort.      Der  gute  Kamerad  .        .       56 

VTII.   Verbs.     Compound   Tenses.     Haben  and  sein  as 
auxiliaries. 
Note  13.  —  Infinitive  and  participle  at  end  of  sentence   .      61 
Conversation.  —  Die  Redeteile.     Sprichwort       .        .      64 
Reading.  —  Spruch.     Das  Wasser 65 

IX.  Compound  Tenses,  Correspondence  of  Tenses. 

Compound  tenses  of  sein^  haben,  werden. 
Note  14.  —  Use  oi  du.     Note  15.  —  Inversion  of  verb 

and  subject 70 

Conversation.  —  Die  Woche 72 

Reading.  —  Sprichwort.     Die  Wacht  am  Rhein      .        .      ^t^ 

X.  Nouns.     First  Declension.     Class  I. 

Note   16.  —  Transposition  of  the  verb.       Note    17. — 

Endings  -cheft  and  -lem 78 

Conversation.  —  Der  Monat.     Sprichwort  ...      81 

Reading.  —  Der  Tannenbaum 82 

XL      Nouns.     First  Declension.     Class  II. 

Note  18. —  Worin  for  m  was,  darin  for  in  dem,  etc.     .      84 
Note  19.  —  Time  when  ?  and  how  long  ?  ....      86 

Conversation.  —  Das  Jahr 87 

Reading.  —  Sprichwort 87 

Die  Jahreszeiten.     Deutschland  .        .        .       2>2> 
XII.     Nouns.     First  Declension.     Class  III.     Inter- 
rogative and  relative  pronouns. 
Note  20.  —  Declension    of    compound    nouns.      Note 
21.  —  Order  when  a  dative  and  accusative  depend  upon 

the  same  verb 91 

Note  22  —  Verbs  followed  by  a  dative  instead  of  an  ac- 
cusative   94 

Conversation.  — Das  Zimmer 94 

Reading.  —  Sprichwort    Zufriedenheit  .        ,        ,         94>  95 


CONTENTS. 


XI 


Lesson 
XIII. 


Page 


XIV. 


XV. 


XVI. 


Nouns.     Second  Declension.     Demonstrative 
and  possessive  pronouns. 

A  Table  of  Declensions 98 

Note  23.  —  Mensch  and  Mann.  Note  24.  —  Forma- 
tion of  feminine  nouns  in  -in.  Note  25.  —  Transla- 
tion of  "  a  cup  of,"  "  a  pair  of,"  etc 99 

Conversation.  —  Das  Zimmer loi 

Reading.  —  Reiter's  Morgenlied         ....       102 
Adjectives.     First  Declension. 

Conversation.  —  Die  Wohnung        ....       108 
Reading. — Wenn  die  Schwalben  heimwarts  ziehn     .       109 
Adjectives.     Second  Declension. 

Conversation.  —  Das  Haus 116 

Reading.  —  Sprichworter.      Du  bist  wie  eine  Blume      117^ 

Tischgebete 118 

Adjectives,  Comparison  of. 

Note  26.  —  Adjectives  irregularly  compared.  .  .  121 
Conversation.  —  Die  Beleuchtung  ....  123 
Reading.  —  Es  ist  bestimmt  in  Gottes  Rat         .        .       124 

XVII.  Verbs,  Inseparable. 

Note  27.  —  Plural  of  Mantt  in  compounds         .        .       129 

Conversation.  —  Die  Stadt 132 

Reading.  —  Die  Lorelei 133 

XVIII.  Verbs,  Separable. 

Note  28.  —  Separable  prefixes  used  inseparably.  Note 
29.  —  Expressions  for  the  time  of  day       .         .         .       136 

Conversation.  —  Die  Zeit 139 

Reading.  —  Sprichwort.     Der  Storch.      Der  Araber 

in  der  Wiiste 140 

Subjunctive  Mode,  Conjugation. 
Note  30.  —  Use  of  the  conjunction  w<?«;?    .        .        .       144 
Note  31.  —  Order  in  subordinate  clause      .        .        .       146 
Conversation.  —  Der  Spaziergang    ....      147 
Reading.  —  Andreas  Hofer 148 

Modal  Auxiliaries.     Ko.vnen  and  Durfen. 
Conversation.  —  Messer  und  Bleistift       .        .        .156 
Reading,  —  Die  seqhs  Wortlein  .        ,        ,        .        -157 


XIX. 


XX. 


xu 


CONTENTS. 


Lesson  Page 

XXI.  Modal  Auxiliaries  :  Mogen,  wollen. 

Conversation.  —  Bei  Tische         ....  164 

Reading.  —  Abschied 164 

XXII.  Modal  Auxiliaries  :  Miissen,  sollen. 

Conversation. —  Der  Tramwagen  .  .  .  170 
Reading.  —  Die  kluge  Maus 171 

XXIII.  Verbs.     Passive  Voice. 

Conversation.  —  Romane 177 

Reading.  —  Die  Frau  and  die  Henrie.    Gute  Lehre      178 

XXIV.  Reflexive  and  Impersonal  Verbs. 

Note  32.  —  Government  of  reflexive  verbs  .  .  182 
Conversation.  —  Gesundheit  und  Wetter  .  .  184 
Reading.  —  Freut  euch  des  Lebens         .        .        .       185 

XXV.  Order  of  the  German  Sentence:  Princi- 

pal Clauses. 
Conversation.  —  Die  Bootfahrt     ....       194 
Reading.  —  Der  Lowe  und  der  Hase       .        .        .       194 

XXVI.  Order   of  the   Sentence:    Inverted  and 

Transposed. 
Conversation.  —  Der  Lesestoff     ....      200 
Reading.  —  Der  Star 201 

XXVII.  The  Infinitive. 

Conversation.  —  Die  Reise 208- 

Reading.  —  Lebewohl 209 

XXVIII.  The  Participles. 

Conversation. — Der  Brieftrager  .  .  .  .  216 
Reading.  —  Das  zerbrochene  Ringlein  .        .        .      217 

XXIX.  The  Subjunctive:  Details. 

Conversation.  —  Der  Spaziergang.  .  .  .  222 
Reading.  —  Ein  Brief 223 

XXX.  The  Indeclinables. 

Conversation.  —  Vom  Studium  der  Sprache  .  233 
Reading.  — An  den  Mond 234 


CONTENTS. 

XIU 

APPENDIX. 

Page 

Gender,  Rules  for 

237 

Double,  Double  Plural 

238 

Article,  Use  of 

240 

Declension,  Exceptions  to  I,  Class  i           ... 

241 

«                    ((           «             "2 

242 

"           "             «     3          .         .         . 

.        242 

Cases,  Uses  of  Genitive 

.        243 

"          "      "  Dative 

243 

"          "      "  Accusative          

•        244 

Government  of  Verbs,  Genitive           .... 

245 

"             "         "      Dative 

246 

"            "    Adjectives,  Genitive  .         . 

.    246 

"             "             "          Dative      .... 

246 

"             ''             "          Accusative       .         .         . 

•        247 

Prepositions  governing  the  Genitive 

.        247 

"                    "           "     Dative     .... 

.        248 

"                    "           '*     Accusative 

.        248 

"                    "           "      Dative  or  Accusative 

.        249 

"              Discriminated 

.        249 

Prefixes,  Separable 

.        252 

Prefixes,  Separable  or  Inseparable      .... 

.       253 

Conjunctions,  Coordinating 

264 

"         **       Subordinating 

•        255 

Strong,  or  Irregular  Verbs,  List  of     . 

.        259 

German  Script 

.        271 

Vocabulary,  German-English 

277 

Vocabulary,  English-German          .... 

•       319 

Index        

343 

ELEMENTARY  GERMAN.. 


LESSON 

I. 

ALPHABET. 

LETTER. 

NAME. 

LETTER. 

NAME. 

St  a 

a 

d 

9J  n 

n 

en 

93b 

b 

bd 

D  0 

0 

0 

6  c 

c 

tsd 

5P|) 

P 

pd 

S)  b 

d 

dd 

a  q 

q 

ku 

(£  e 

e 

d 

$R  r 

r 

er 

gf 

f 

ef 

®  f§ 

s 

es 

®S 

g 

g^ 

2:  t 

t 

td 

§£) 

h 

hd 

U  u 

u 

u  ipo) 

3  t 

i 

e 

33  t) 

V 

fow^ 

Si 

J 

ybt 

aSto 

w 

vd 

S^  f 

k 

kd 

X  I 

X 

tx 

S  I 

1 

el 

?)  tJ 

y 

ipsilon 

3Km 

m 

em 

Umlauts, 

3  a 

z 

tset 

t 

a 

D  6 

ii 

it 

a 

6 

ix 

Remarks  on  the  Alphabet. 
2.     The  German  Printed  Character. — The    Ger- 
man character  is  used  in  newspapers  and  the  ordi- 
nary works  of  Hterature.     In  scientific  books  and 

*  ow  as  in  cow. 


2  ALPHABET.  [Les.  I. 

periodicals  it  has,  however,  been  almost  entirely 
.  superceded  by  the  Roman  type,  and  will  probably 
"'yield  sJt ill 'further  to  the  latter,  which  is  simpler  and 
p^ervaijs -.geh'erally  elsewhere.  The  German  type, 
'as  the*  sfyle  in  common  use  in  literary  journals  and 
books,  is  employed  both  in  our  Exercises  and  in  the 
Vocabulary. 

As  the  German  printed  character  closely  re- 
sembles our  "Old  English"  style,  the  individual 
letters  will  be  readily  recognized ;  yet  it  requires 
much  practice  to  become  familiar  with  them  in 
the  connected  text.  Special  attention  should  be 
given  to  letters  which  resemble  each  other.  These 
are : 

Capitals,'' S&.SS^)  ©,(£;  S),D,Q;  ®,@;  %%'Si. 
Small  letters,  6,  b,  f) ;  f,  f ;  !,  t ;  r,  j. 
Combined  forms,  ^  {ch),  d  {ck)\  ^  {sz),  ^  {tz), 
(For  Alphabet  in  German  script  see  Appendix.) 

3,  The  Umlauts  are  simple  sounds  like  the  other  vowels. 
They  are  of  later  origin  than  these,  and  this  name  is  given 
them  with  reference  to  their  being  modifications  of  other 
vowel  sounds.  As  capitals,  they  are  written  5(e,  De,  Ue,  or 
at  present  preferably  ^,  £),  U. 

4.  The  letters  c,  i  and  i),  borrowed  from  the  Roman 
alphabet,  rarely»occur  in  any  words  originally  German,  and 
c  only  in  the  combinations  c^,  c!  and  fc^. 

*  Capitals  /  and  /  are  identical  in  form :  the  first  may  be  known  by 
its  being  followed  by  consonants  chiefly ;  the  latter  is  followed  by  vowels 
only. 


Les.  I.]  PRONUNCIATIOM.  5 

5.  The  German  uses  capital  initial  letters  for  the  first 
word  in  a  sentence,  for  all  nouns  (and  words  used  as  nouns), 
for  adjectives,  pronouns,  and  ordinals  used  in  royal  titles, 
for  pronouns  employed  in  address,  especially  in  correspon- 
dence, for  adjectives  derived  from  names  of  persons,  and 
adjectives  ending  in  -er  derived  from  names  of  places. 
Usage  varies  considerably  however  in  this  matter.  Small 
initials  are  used  for  adjectives  of  nationality,  as  englifc^, 
"  English  ";  also  for  the  pronoun  id),  "  I." 

Pronunciation.* 

6.  The  German  language  as  written  is  much 
more  nearly  phonetic  than  is  English  or  French, 
and  in  so  far  the  difficulty  of  learning  its  pronun- 
ciation is  much  less. 

*  In  a  variety  of  points  there  is  no  one  single  and  only  correct  German 
pronunciation,  any  more  than  this  would  be  true  of  English.  There  was 
a  time  when  the  pronunciation  of  the  province  of  Hanover  was  regarded 
as  the  standard,  but  that  time  is  past.  However,  in  German  the  pro- 
vincial variations  are  greater  than  in  English.  In  general  there  are  two 
divisions  :  stage  and  every-day  pronunciation,  illustrated  in  the  difference 
of  final  g,  SB  eg  in  the  one  =  veck,  in  the  other  =  vech.  Again  there  are 
certain  marked  differences  between  the  North  and  South  German,  and 
while  the  former  is  apt  to  prevail  owing  to  the  national  capital  being  in 
North  German  territory,  it  is  itself  a  mark  of  provincialism  to  charac- 
terize the  pronunciation  of  any  large  number  of  educated  South  Germans 
as  inelegant  or  incorrect,  ©te  like  English  see  and  ©oet^e  like  English 
Kd-te  (almost)  are  South  German,  while  the  North  German  pronounces 
the  words  zee  and  Go-td. 

But  it  would  be  a  serious  error  for  the  student  to  assume,  on  account 
of  this  diversity,  that  it  is  a  matter  of  indifference  how  he  pronounces,  or 
that  he  cannot  acquire  a  good  German  pronunciation.  In  fact  it  is  easy 
for  a  flexible  American  youth  to  learn  to  pronounce  like  a  German.  In 
the  main  the  following  notes  will  be  a  safe  guide  to  the  average  German 
pronunciation,  though  they  must  be  interpreted  with  the  aid  of  imitation 
of  the  living  voice.     These  notes  must  overlook  a  vast  deal  of  precise 


4  "  PRONUNCIATION.  [Les.  I. 

7.  The  greatest  difficulty  in  learning  to  pro- 
nounce German  is  presented  by  the  new  sounds ; 
that  is,  those  which  are  unfamiliar  in  English. 
These  are  principally  the  Umlaut  vowels  i3  and  ii, 
the  gutteral  g  (c^),  the  rolled  r,  and  initial  5. 

8.  As  these  sounds  are  unfamiliar,  much  prac- 
tice is  necessary  in  order  to  train  the  organs  of 
speech  to  make  them  with  accuracy  and  readiness. 
The  following  descriptions  and  directions  will  aid 
the  beginner,  in  addition  to  the  assistance  by  im- 
itation from  the  teacher. 

0  long  =  i  (father) :  ^abe. 

a  short  =  nearly  o  in  hot^  as  spoken  in  the  Middle  West : 
^at. 

at  =  ei  =  I  in  mile :  33aiern. 

an  =  ou  in  out^  as  spoken  in  the  Middle  West :  au§, 

a^  ==  at  ^=  I ;  ^al)ern. 

a  (called  a-umlaut  or  modified  a)  has  nearly  the  same 
sound  as  e.  In  fact,  ci,  when  short,  is  identical  with  short 
e  ;  when  long  it  has  properly  a  somewhat  more  open  somid 
than  e,  like  the  French  e  inpere,  and  resembles  the  English 
sound  in  wkere :  $8dter,  ^dtte. 

an  =  zvi^oi  in  oil :  §aute. 

details  and  of  exceptions.  For  more  minute  information,  as  well  as  for 
most  lucid  and  impartial  exposition  of  the  whole  subject  of  speech,  pupils 
as  well  as  teachers  are  referred  to  Hempl's  German  Orthography  and 
Phonology^  Ginn  &  Company,  Boston.  For  a  precise  description  of  the 
method  of  forming  EngUsh  and  German  sounds,  see  Grandgent's  Ger^ 
man  and  English  Sounds^  D.  C.  Heath  &  Co.,  Boston. 

One  general  direction  should  be  taken  to  heart  by  all  learners :  Open 
the  mouth  wider  than  is  your  wont,  make  the  long  vowels  a,  0,  u  full 
and  prolonged  and  do  not  fear  to  exaggerate  the  peculiar  German  sounds 
and  tone. 


Les.  I.]  PRONUNCIATION.  ^  5 

h  initial  and  medial  between  vowels  =  5y  final  and  be- 
fore unvoiced  consonants  =p  (unvoiced  but  usually  less 
explosive) :  S3ube,  §(6t,  Sob. 

C  (occurs  independently  only  in  foreign  words),  before  e, 
i,  tj,  a,  o^/i-/  (Cicero,  ©afar;  before  a,  o,  u  and  consonants 
=  ^/  S^acao,  5lccorb. 

djf  initial  before  a,  o,  u  and  consonants  =  ^,  (but  in 
French  loan-words,  like  S^ef  =  sh) ;  initial  before  e,  i,  d,  and 
final  d)  is  the  guttural  spirant  which  has  no  familiar  corre- 
spondent in  English  (g  when  final  has  usually  the  same 
sound,  though  less  explosive) :  S^ina,  (5^^ara!ter. 

The  German  guttural  spirant  is  of  two  varieties. 
It  is  softer  and  made  farther  forward  in  the  mouth 
after  e  and  t,  than  after  a,  o  and  u.  As  a  rule  it 
will  be  found  that  this  distinction  is  made  involun- 
tarily ;  if  not,  the  teacher  must  insist  upon  it. 

For  the  Jirst  variety  of  the  guttural  approximate 
the  middle  of  the  tongue  to,  but  not  touching,  the 
roof  of  the  mouth,  and  then  expel  the  breath,  being 
careful  to  keep  the  tip  of  the  tongue  down,  and 
not  to  make  the  English  s/i  sound.  The  tongue 
position  is  the  same  as  for  English  k  in  key  except 
that  there  must  be  no  complete  closure  of  the  oral 
passage.  A  prolonged  whispered  kej/  ending  with 
a  quick  push  of  the  breath  without  closure  of  the 
oral  passage  will  give  the  sound  closely.  If  then 
the  initial  f  be  gradually  eliminated  the  result  will 
be  a  fair  pronunciation  of  German  id^. 

Examples  :  id^,  rld^tig,  re^t,  !i(^crtt. 


6  PRONUNCIATION  [Les.  I 

For  the  second  variety  of  the  guttural,  approxi- 
mate the  back  of  the  tongue  to  but  not  touching 
the  back  part  of  the  mouth.  Be  careful  not  to 
make  the  English  k  sound,  though  the  position, 
saving  the  closure,  is  the  same.  Whispering  the 
syllable  ko  with  the  same  directions  as  in  the  preced- 
ing paragraph  will  result  in  a  fair  pronunciation  of 
German  SJod^. 

Examples  :  %^^\,tx,  i8ud^» 

^^  (in  one  syllable)  =  ;r,  as  £)d^§. 

i^  =  k:  baden. 

b  initial  and  medial  between  vowels  =  d;  final  =  /  (un- 
voiced but  somewhat  less  explosive) :  ba,  ttjarb, 

c  long  ==  ay  short  =  e  rcibet^  be§  ;  in  unaccented  syllables 
especially  final,  e  has  an  obscure  sound,  like  the  a  in  English 
cojnma,  which  leads  to  its  frequent  elision,  beffen,  ^abe. 
Note  that  this  unaccented  e  is  the  only  German  vowel  that 
is  commonly  slighted  or  represented  by  an  apostrophe. 

ci  =  I  in  bite^  tnein* 

eu  =  oi  in  oil^  T^eute. 

f=/frei. 

g  initial  in  native  words  and  before  consonants  in  the 
same  syllable  =^  in  ^^^,  ge^en ;  initial  in  French  loan- 
words =  2"  in  azure^  ®ente  ;  medial  and  final  g  is  a  guttural 
spirant,  usually  voiced  when  between  vowels  or  voiced  con- 
onants.  For  the  method  of  formation  see  c^  ante.  When 
final,  though  unvoiced,  the  spirant  is  usually  less  violent 
than  d),  Xag,  ^age. 

^  initial  ==-^,  l^eute;  final  or  after  t  in  the  same  syllable  I) 
is  silent ;  Xo^.  Note  the  frequent  combination  t^  =  simple 
/,  English  th  being  one  of  the  sounds  not  found  in  German, 
^I)eorie. 


Les.  I.]  PRONUNCIATION.  7 

{  long  (printed  always  i:^  or  ie)  =  e  in  mete;  short  =2  in 
bit^  i^n,  (ntte. 

ic  =  e  in  mete^  fie ;  but  in  unaccented  syllables  of  Latin 
loan-words  =e-e\  or  je,  as  in  ^ragobte,  ©lorie, 

\=y  in  you  J  but  aspirated,  ja:  in  French  words  =  2-^. 

f  ==y^,  !ein. 

(  =  /  (the  lip-opening  wider  and  narrower  than  in  Eng- 
lish), lieben,  ^etl ;  H  after  t  and  followed  by  a  vowel  in  French 
loan-words  ==  ly-^  as  in  S3inef . 

m  =  m^  mein. 

n==n,  nein. 

ng  =  ng  in  singer^  ©inger ;  but  not  =  ng+g  as  in  finger 
(except  in  some  proper  nouns,  as  Qngo), 

0  long  =  o  in  fiote^  loben;  short,  the  same  sound  but 
uttered  very  quickly  without  any  shade  of  a  following  oo  as 
in  English,  as  in  New  England  pronunciation  of  'stone.' 
Avoid  pronouncing  C^ott  like  either  goat  or  got;  distinguish 
between  ®ot^e  {Goth)  and  (556tte  (dative  of  God). 

ii  Umlaut. — To  pronounce  o,  round  the  lips  as  when  oo 
in  boot  is  uttered,  and  then  pronounce  a,  or  vice  versa.  Des- 
cribed phonetically  this  is  the  rounded  mid-front  vowel.  It 
is  not  a  diphthong,  and  differs  only  by  the  rounding  from 
English  a.  Many  Germans  so  pronounce  it,  and  o  and  e 
are  recognized  as  more  or  less  permissible  rhymes.  Avoid 
giving  it  the  sound  of  u  in  fur,  as  often  erroneously  directed. 
Do  not  pronounce  '  Goethe  *  Gurty, 

Examples:  (long)  O,  ^onig,  @ot!^c,  jd^on,  (short)  bffnen, 
fonncn, 

oi  (in  French  loan-words)  ==  wcij  as  Xotle'tte. 
p  =pj'  pt)  (in  Greek  loan-words)  =/;  as  Zdt^xap^. 
q  (only  in  the  combination  qu)  ==  ^iv  or  kv  with  the  v 
quite  weak,  iQuefle. 


8  PRONUNCIATION.  [Les.  I. 

X  =  r,  but  usually  trilled  either  with  the  tip  of  the  tongue, 
or,  more  commonly,  with  the  uvula  or  even  with  the  vocal 
chords,  rot,  fret»  The  uvular  r  sounds  like  a  more  forcible 
and  prolonged  d)  after  a.  Note  that  r  is  never  silent,  as  in 
parts  of  New  England  when  final,  nor  a  mere  vocalic  glide 
as  in  many  other  parts  of  the  United  States. 

f  (§  final)  =  s  initial,  WaS  ;  f  initial  varies  from  initial  s  to 
z,  depending  on  the  stress  and  force  of  adjacent  syllables 
and  the  part  of  the  country,  (5ie  jagen.  Either  sound  is  in 
accord  with  good  usage,  but  a  medium  between  the  extremes 
is  advisable.  Initial  before  t  and  p,  j  =  s/i,  but  is  also  heard 
as  simple  s,  fte^en,  fpre(i)en. 

^  =  i"  initial,  §a^» 

f(i^  =  s/i,  fc^eu. 

t  ==  /fy  but  remember  that  t^  never  =  /A,  the  f)  being 
silent,  though  a  sign  of  length  for  the  preceding  vowel ; 
t  before  i  -f-  another  vowel,  in  Latin  loan-words  =  /s,  portion. 

tt  long  =  do  in  dooty  u  short  =  the  same  sound  pronounced 
briefly,  but  not  far  from  do  in  good. 

it  Umlaut. — To  pronounce  ii,  round  the  lips  as  when  oo  in 
doof  is  uttered,  and  then  pronounce  e,  or  vice  versa.  It  is 
the  rounded  high-front  vowel.  It  differs  only  by  the  round- 
ing from  English  e  or  German  t,  and  many  Germans  so 
pronounce  it.  Like  o,  it  is  a  simple  vowel,  and  not  a  diph- 
thong.    It  is  the  same  as  the  sound  of  the  French  u  as  in  tu. 

Examples  :  (long)  Ubel,  ®^iilcr;  (short)  %\M,  fiittcn. 

ttt  =  oo'-^-i^  with  slight  preponderance  of  accent  on  the 
first  vowel.     Occurs  only  in  §ui  and  ^fui. 

tto  =  u'-f-o,  the  0  much  slighted,  in  Swiss  names,  as 
^uoni. 

t)  =/,  t)on ;  save  in  some  foreign  loan-words,  such  as 
iStoIlne,  ^enu§,  where  it  ■=  z/. 


Les.  I.]  PRONUNCIATION.  9 

to  =Vf  but  often  made  with  the  two  lips  instead  of  with 
the  lower  lip  and  upper  teeth.  The  voicing  is  less  obvious 
and  the  spirant  less  forcible  than  in  English  v,  tvtlj,  Some. 

^=x,  eixraieren. 

t|  =  e,  many  words  formerly  written  with  t)  have  now 
substituted  i,  as  in  ©ilbe,  ©til ;  there  is  a  pedantic  tendency 
to  pronounce  t)  in  Greek  loan-words  =  il,  ^tjljfif. 

5  =  fs.  Medial  and  final  this  combination  is  common  in 
English ;  initial  also  it  is  common  colloquially  and  should 
cause  no  difficulty  For  instance,  W  ///  (= //  ts  in)  = 
3inn  perfectly,  Ws  on  (=  it  is  on)  =  Qaljn  nearly.     ^  =  ts. 

g.  Quantity. — Vowels,  even  when  not  varying  in 
quality,  are  in  quantity  either  long  or  short.  Each 
vowel  has  thus  two  sounds  and  no  more.  How- 
ever, e  in  an  unaccented  syllable  usually  has  a 
lighter  shade  than  elsewhere,  corresponding  nearly 
to  the  sound  of  a  in  the  English  "  comma." 

IP.  The  following  general  rules  determine  the 
quantity  in  a  great  number  of  cases  :  — 

1.  A  vowel  doubled  or  foUovt^ed  by  another  vowel  or 
^  is  long. 

2.  A  vowel  is  also  long  in  an  open  syllable,  i.  e.  in  a 
syllable  ending  with  a  vowel,  but  this  does  not  apply 
to  final -c.     (See  rules  for  syllabification,  p.  10,  §15.) 

3.  A  vow^el  is  short  before  a  doubled  consonant,  and 
generally  before  a  group  of  two  different  consonants. 

II.  Vowels  are  doubled  for  the  purpose  of  indi- 
cating quantity,  and  are  not  therefore  to  be  pro- 
nounced as  diphthongs.  The  vowel  t  is  never 
doubled,  but  the  sign  of  ie  is  used  instead,  which 


lO  PRONUNCIATION  [Les.  I. 

accordingly  has  the   sound   of  the  EngUsh  e ;    u 
never  occurs  double. 

12.  So  far  as  the  quantity  is  not  determined  by 
these  rules,  it  must  be  ascertained  from  the  dic- 
tionary. It  is  not  desirable,  however,  to  direct  the 
attention  of  the  beginner  too  minutely  to  the  sub- 
ject of  quantity  at  first.  It  is  best  learned  by 
practice  and  observation. 

13.  Accent.  —  The  accent  in  original  German  words  is 
in  general  the  same  as  in  English,  i.  e.  on  the  root  syllable, 
usually  the  first,  unless  the  word  begins  with  one  of  the 
prefixes :  be:=,  etn)3=,  t\i\-,  tx^,  ge=,  tier=,  itx^,  which  are  never 
accented.  But  verbs  in  -ieren  always  have  the  accent  on 
the  ie  of  this  ending. 

14.  Foreign  Words.  —  These  vary  greatly  in  their  accent, 
according  as  they  have  become  more  or  less  fully  naturalized, 
being  sometimes  accented  as  in  the  foreign  tongue,  some- 
times as  in  German,  and  sometimes  partly  in  one  way  and 
partly  in  the  other.  Most  loan-words  from  the  Latin  and 
French  have  the  accent  on  the  last  syllable.  A  standard 
Fremdworterbuch  is  the  best  guide. 

Examples  :  ©otbat',  ©tubent',  patient',  tultur',  ©eticrd',  9^c* 
giment',  but  ^rofef  for,  S)o!'tor. 

15.  Division  into  Syllables.  —  The  syllabification  of  Ger- 
man words  follows  the  English  rather  than  the  American 
usage.  A  consonant  between  two  vowels  generally  goes 
with  the  latter  vowel,  except  in  compounds.  For  this  pur- 
pose d),  frf},  '\^^,  tl),  and  |)f  after  m  and  r,  are  considered  as 
representing  one  sound.  Of  several  medial  consonants, 
the  last  alone  goes  with  the  second  syllable. 


Les.  I.]  EXERCISES.  II 

Examples  :  %mt^xi4a,  tre^eii,  2Jlo=ri^,  !Do=ro4^e=a,  iBre-men, 
Xd'AicAmxt,  barium,  !^ang=fam:=!eit,  aitf^er^te^^^en,  Ia=c^en,  Io=fc^en, 
Or4t)o=gra:=|3^te,  ^cir^er,  2BaHer,  !(o^=fen,  §e=^e,  ^ar|)=fen,  em^:' 
finben,  ginger,  giig-e  (ii  long),  gluj=fe  (ii  short). 

i6.  In  learning  to  pronounce  German  (as  any  new  lan- 
guage), the  attention  of  the  beginner  should  be  called  to  a 
distinct  and  forcible  utterance.  In  this  way  the  various  or- 
gans and  means  of  speech  are  brought  into  more  energetic 
action  than  in  pronouncing  English,  to  which  he  has  become 
accustomed,  and  the  sounds  of  which  he  has  been  trained  to 
make.  Raising  the  voice  and  speaking  loud  will  tend  to 
produce  this  greater  energy  of  action.  Practice  in  reading 
aloud  and  committing  to  memory  are  fruitful  aids  in  accom- 
plishing the  desired  object  of  training  the  organs  of  speech. 

Exercise  i.     (a.) 

VOWELS. 

Longo — I.    93a  jel    Slal     gar.     SBagner.     ja^m. 
§aar.     ©aale.     Ial)m,     3l6enb. 

2.  geber.    §erbe,     geben.    @c^li:)ert    @eele.    (See. 
9?e^.     gef)t    ©pree.     ^affee, 

3.  Siebe.     t)ter,    grtebrid^.     S)te6.    fteben.    3Bten. 
Sier.     SBte^baben,    Dter,    SKelobte'  (te  =  ^). 

4.  3iofe.    fo.    9to^r.    Dber.    aJioor.    So^.    Soot 
.^anno't)er.     9Kenbetefot)n.     Sorelei'. 

5.  Slut.     gut.     U^Ianb.     U^r.     lM)t.     ©eburt. 
©ruber,     nun.     bu. 

6.  Safe.     Saber.     S)auemarf.     fpat. 

7.  SRomer.    preu.    §i)f)Ie.    ®otl^e.    Sontg.    fc^on. 
Dfeu.     totter.     DI. 

8.  libel     iiber.    fiir.     ©riiber.     !uf)I. 


12  EXERCISES.  [Les.  I. 

Short.  —  I.  bann.  alt  Hamburg.  SKagbeburg, 
tail  fiatte.  ^ant  Warn,  all  an.  Sl6t  S3alL 
^anh,    §anb. 

2.  beffer.  ©nbe.  Setten.  effen.  ©Ibe.  SKo'fel. 
SInberfen.     S^e&r.    ©onne. 

3.  in.     Sip))e.     tnilb.     ajfori^.     ^i^mavd, 

4.  tDoIIen.  fomnten.  !often.  {)offen.  ®ott.  offen. 
95onn.    torn.    foil,    moltk, 

5.  bumm.  ajfntter.  unter.  SKunb.  Ulm.  |)U§. 
mnU,    S^ruft.    SBnrft. 

6.  §anbe.     {)atte.    talte.     §anbel. 

7.  ®otter.     ofter.     fonnen.     totn. 

8.  ^iitte.     SWiitter.     fiillen.     ^Jurnberg. 

Exercise  i.     (b.) 

DIPHTHONGS. 

1.  Wal  tdfer.  Wain.  §a^ben.  Satj'ern  (or 
S^aiern). 

2.  9ieim.  mein.  greif)ett.  retten.  9lt)etn.  fetn 
(archaic  fe^n).     gret)tag.     SRe^erbeer.     .^e^fe. 

3.  §au^.  93aum.  an§.  Man§,  S)onau.  Sluer- 
bad).     gau[t.     §anff.     grau.     fanl 

4.  §en.  treu.  greunb.  S)entfd^Ianb.  ^Prenfeen. 
Seufel.    t)eute.     Seute.     neu. 

5.  9Jaume.    §anfer.     graulein. 

Exercise  i.    (c.) 

CONSONANTS. 

I.  (h)  Soa.  6rett.  (Sbbe.  ®Ibe.  ®ra6.  @taO. 
gef)abt.    ^ab^Surg.    Berlin'. 


Les.  I.]  EXERCISES.  1 3 

2.  (c)  S^ato.  Eoncert,  spelled  also  S[!onJert^  ©icero. 

3.  (c^  =  f)  e^rifi  e^aral'ter.  Sf)or,  (=  rf))  6£)emie. 
ef)ilt.     e^tna.    ^^//  e^amtffo  (c^  =  sh), 

4.  (t^^)  gu^^.    Dd)^.    SBad^^,     ®a^^. 

5.  (b)  bit.  Xrobbel  ©onau.  Sob,  ©tabt.  Sarfe:= 
6ab,     tnilb,     bid.     bret. 

6.  (g)  ®ip^.  ®arten.  General',  ©^tnna'fium. 
S)og9e.     9tegtment^     S^agge. 

7.  (guttural  g,  (i^)  ^onig.  giittg.  id^.  SBeg.  Stag, 
fodjen.  Sud)  aKiinc^en.  ^etbelberg.  S^ad^t.  SteHg. 
SDZagb. 

8.  (§)  §eu.   if)n.   rol^.   3:^eorte^   ruf)en.    2Bt(f)eIm. 

9.  (i)  ja.  jung.  Sube.  Sungfrau.  Sournal  (pr. 
zho5r-naF). 

10.  (I)  Stebe.  toa.  Staef  (pr.  bil-yet^.  ^poftiaon' 
(pr.  pos-tel-yong). 

^^'  (wfl)  Si^'9^^»  ftngert.  lange.  bringen.  Stngen. 
©ottingen.    Siffingen. 

12.  {^^)  ^pojopt)ie'.  ©eograp^ie'.  2rbo()3^.  ^^0:^ 
togral^t)'.    ^ro))I)ef. 

13.  (q«)  Ciuarj.     Ouelle.     Duafer. 

14.  (r)  9ftab.  @rbe.  93urg.  §err.  S)re§ben.  Sremen. 
©rtmm.    ^prinj  9tu|)red^t.    frt[d^.     fret.     fro^. 

15.  (f)  @of)n.     ®ta^.     §au^.    ©tegfrieb. 

16.  (f)>^  ft  =  shp,  sht),  fpre^en.  ©tall.  ©tein. 
©trot),    ©traufe.     ©tuttgart.    ©tubenf.     ©trapurg. 

17.  (f^)  ©d)iff.  5Ifc^e.  finbtfc^.  ©djtCer.  ©^tDe^^ 
ben.    englifd^.    ©d^ubert 


14  EXERCISES.  [Les.  I. 

^8.  (ft)  §a^.     ©c£)Iofe.     baf3. 

19.  (t)  portion'.     9^ation^     ©tatton'.     Sor. 

20.  (t^)  Stjea'ter.      ®ot{)a.     2;f)iVrtn9en.     greifc 
gratt).     SDorotfie'a.     8)a^reutt)'.     Sutf)er. 

21.  (ti)  SSater.     t)oII.     fret)eln.     In  the  following 
^=v:  @!Iat)e.  S^ene'big.  SSe'nu^.  Unteerfttaf.  SStrgir. 

22.  (to)  SBetn.     3Beber,     2Befer.     aBtIf)etm. 

24.   (5)  jefin.     ju.    3eii     Sans,     jegt     Sett)sig. 

A  few  connected  phrases  introducing  delicate  shades  of  dis- 
tinction: 2)er  ^nab'  l)at  !nci)3pe  §ofen  (The  boy  has  close-fit- 
ting trousers).  2JJein  ^ate  bat  um  ein  '^h^  (My  god-father  asked 
for  a  bath).  S)ag  S)ad^  Icigt  ben  jlag  herein  (The  roof  lets  in 
the  daylight).  Sin  bixnter  iBiinb  (A  motley  club).  S)cr  2:ob  tft 
tot  (Death  is  dead).  Sag  nta^t  bie  2)^agb  ?  (What  is  the  maid 
doing),  (gr  tt)irft  ben  Setg  in  ben  %t\^  (He  throws  the  dough 
into  the  pond).     @ie  nirft  ni(^t  (She  does  not  nod). 

Reading  i. 

®|)rt^it}0tt  {'' Saw'' =  saying) 

(£nbe  gut  aEe^  gut. 

End    good     all     good. 

"All's  well  that  ends  well." 

fietne  tCftt  {Learn  rightly), 

SBa§  bu  leruft,  ba§  lerne  red)t, 

What  thou  learnest,  that  learn  rightly, 

aSa^  bu  mad)ft,  ba^  mact)'  ui^t  fd^tei^t. 

What  thou  makest,   that   make       not       badly. 


Les.  II.]  THE    DEFINITE    ARTICLE.  1 5 

LESSON   II. 

THE    DEFINITE   ARTICLE. 

Rules  for  Gender  —  Present  Tense  of  fern. 

1.  In  the  use  of  the  article ^  as  in  other  matters 
assume  that  German  is  like  English  until  the  con- 
trary has  been  remarked. 

2.  3^  6in  bcr  So^n  be^  aJZannc^  in  '^txa  ©atten 

I       am    the      son    of  the      man        in     the       garden 

unb  bic  %x^vi  im  ^aufc  tft  bc^^  9Jfannci§  SKuttcr. 

and    the  woman  in  the  house     is    the        man's        mother. 

3.  Learn  this  sentence,  and  derive  from  it  the 
principles  involved  in  the  exercises  of  this  lesson, 
viz.,  the  case  of  the  predicate  noun  and  the  position 
of  the  genitive  or  possessive  relative  to  the  noun  it 
limits. 

4.  Gender.  There  are  three  genders,  masculine, 
feminine,  and  neuter.  In  German  nouns  without 
sex  may  be  masculine  or  feminine  as  well  as  neuter, 
and  aside  from  such  rules  as  those  given  below  this 
arbitrary  gender  must  be  learned  by  memory  alone. 

5.  Rules  for  Gender.  Natural  gender  deter- 
mines grammatical  gender,  with  but  few  exceptions, 
i.  e.  names  of  male  living  beings  are  masculine  (ber), 
names  of  female  living  beings  are  feminine  (bte). 
The  noun  agent,  formed  from  nearly  every  verb- 
stem  with  the  ending  -er,  is  masculine,  but  may 
be  made  feminine  by  adding  -in:  ber  Setjrer,  the 


1 6  THE    DEFINITE   ARTICLE.  [Les.  II. 

{man-)teackery  bie  £e^rertn,  {woman-)teacher.  For 
detailed  rules  see  Appendix. 

6.  Cases.  There  are  four  cases :  nominative^ 
genitive,  dative,  and  accusative.  The  nominative, 
genitive,  and  accusative  correspond  in  general  to 
the  English  nominative,  possessive  (or  "of"  case), 
and  objective,  respectively.  The  dative  is  the  case 
of  the  indirect  object,  the  English  "to"  or  "for*' 
case. 

7-  The  following  facts  of  declension  in  general 
are  to  be  noted  :  — 

1.  ^  is  not  the  ending  of  the  plural,  but  of  the 
genitive  singular  of  most  neuter  and  masculine 
nouns. 

2.  The  dative  plural  always  ends  in  n  ;  the  other 
three  cases  are  alike. 

3.  In  the  feminine  and  neuter  singular,  and  in 
the  plural,  the  nominative  and  accusative  are  the 
same. 

4.  Feminine  nouns  do  not  change  form  in  the 
singular  ;   the  article  alone  shows  the  case. 

8.    Declension  of  the  Definite  Article  bcr,  the. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

M.F.N. 

Nom. 

ber, 

bie, 

tsta^, 

^Xt, 

the. 

Gen. 

be§, 

ber, 

be^, 

bcr, 

of  the. 

Dat. 

bcm, 

ber, 

bcm, 

bctt, 

to  the. 

Ace. 

ben, 

bie, 

"fs^^, 

bie, 

the. 

(When  stressed  the  word  also  means  this  or  that^ 


Les.  II.] 


THE    DEFINITE    ARTICLE. 


17 


Vocabulary 

MASCULINE. 

htX  WldXtUf   the  man,  husband. 

bcr  Garten,  the  garden. 

ber  S5ater,  the  father. 

bcr  So^U,  the  son. 

ber  ^MXCiS^  the  dog. 

be)§  ^lannc^,  of  the  man. 

bC!^  So^nCig,  ^//5/f  son. 

be§  ^atcr;3,  of  the  father. 


FEMININE. 

btC  fJtftU,  ^>^^  woman,  wife. 
bic  SD'Jutter,  //^^  mother. 
bte  ^Or^tcr,  //^^  daughter. 
'^Xt  '^i^^sX^  the  city. 

bte  ^ame,  //^^  lady. 

NEUTER. 

ba)§  $aU)§,  //^^  house. 
'tSXt  ^ittber,  the  children. 


ttJO,  where?  

Unb,  ^?2^.  flein,  small,  short. 

ttier,  w/5^ .?  ittttfi/  young. 

UX^tf  not.  W^^f  handsome,  pretty y  fine. 

aud^,  «/j^,  ^f?^.  Utt'arttg,  ill-behaved.^ 

^\i,  old.  griltt,  ^r<?^«. 

grtl^,  great,  tall,  W^^tf^lf  homely.  ^ 

Remark.  —  In  learning  German  nouns,  care  should  be  taken 
always  to  prefix  the  article,  as  the  best  way  of  fixing  in  mind  the 
proper  gender;  as  ber  2)^ann,  bie  grau,  \i^^  §aii«. 
For  idiomatic  uses  of  the  Article  see  Appendix. 
The  forms  bctn,  "^0^%,  bcr  coalesce  frequently  with  certain  pre- 
positions, as  im,  for  in  bent,  ans  for  an  \iQ<^,  ^ur  for  gn  ber. 
Inflection  of  the  Present  Tense  of  fettt,  to  be, 
X^  bin,  /  am.  ttjit  fittb,  we  are. 

(  btt  bift,  thou  art.  j  t^t  fcib,  ye  are. 

\  @ie  fittb,  you  are.  \  ^te  fittb,  you  are. 

er  (fie,  t^)  \%  he  {she,  it)  is  fie  fittb,  they  are. 

Exercise  II. 

I.  S)er  Warm  tft  nii^t  jung.  2.  ®r  ift  ber  S8ater  ber 
Stnber.  3.  3Bo  finb  bie  tinber  ?  4.  ©inb  fie  im  ^aufe  ? 
5.  ®ag  §au^   ift  grofe  unb  pfetid^,  fie  finb  in  bem 


1 8  THE    DEFINITE    ARTICLE.  [Les.  IL 

®arteiL  6.  S)er  §unb  ift  and)  im  ®arten.  7.  3[t  ber 
©arten  fc£)on  ?  8.  ®r  ift  gro^  unb  fdjon.  9.  9Bo  ift  bte 
aWutter  ber  ^tnber?     10.  Sft  fie  and)  im  ®arten? 

11.  @ie  ift  (e^i)  nid}t,  fie  ift  im  §aufe.  12.  (Sie  ift  jimg 
unb  fd^on.  13.  S)ie  Sinber  fittb  and)  ]d)on.  14.  ©inb 
fie  and)  bie  Stinber  ber  grau?  15.  @ie  finb  (e^5). 
16.  aSer  ift  bag  Sinb?  17.  S^  ift  bie  Sod^ter  beg  JDJanneg. 
18.  ©ie  ift  jung  unb  Hetn.  19.  S)er  ©o^n  ift  aud)  fiein. 
20.  S)er  §unb  ift  ber  §unb  beg  @ol)neg  unb  nid^t  ber 
%od)kx,  21.  S)ag  §aug  ift  bag  |)aug  beg  SJJanneg  unb 
and)  ber  ^^^au.  22.  ©ie  finb  in  ber  ©tabt  23.  9Bo 
ftnb©ie?  24.  SBir  finb  im  ^aufe.  25.  ^art,  bu  bift  un= 
artig.  26.  Sd^  bin  (eg)  md)t  27.  9Ber  ift  bag? 
28.  "i^a^  ift  ber  95ater  ber  SJinber. 

.  *  Words  in  parentheses  are  not  to  be  rendered  in  translation ; 
e8  refers  to  im  ©artcu.  German  cannot  leave  the  predicate  noun 
or  adjective  or  verb  understood,  as  in  English,  but  expresses  it  by 
e§,— not  by  fo. 

Exercise  2. 

I.  The  man  is  old.  2.  He  is  old  and  gray.  3.  Is  he 
the  father  of  the  woman  ?  4.  He  is  not  the  father; 
he  is  the  husband  of  the  woman.  5.  And  the  woman 
is  young  and  handsome.  6.  She  is  the  mother  of 
the  son.  7.  Where  is  the  child  ?  8.  It  is  naughty,  it 
is  in  the  house.  9.  The  daughter  is  in  the  garden. 
10.  Is  she  the  daughter  of  the  man  ?  n.  She  is  [it].' 

12.  She  is  good  and  pretty.  13.  The  father  is  in  the 
city.     14.  The  city  is  gray  and  old.     15.  The  garden 


Les.   II.]  THE    DEFINITE    ARTICLE.  I9 

is  green  and  pretty.  i6.  Who  are  you.?  17.  We  are 
the  children  of  the  man.  18.  I  am  the  son,  she  is  the 
daughter.  19.  And  who  is  the  man  .?  20.  He  is  the 
father  of  the  children.  21.  We  are  in  [the]  father's 
garden. 

^German  cannot  leave  an  adjective  or  substantive  implied  or 
understood,  but  always  represents  it,  when  repetition  is  desired, 
by  ba§  or  c^.  Words  in  brackets  are  not  needed  in  the  original 
language,  but  must  be  rendered  in  translation. 

Vocabulary  for  the  Conversation. 

f^rCti^Ctt  Sic,  do  you  speak,  are  bcr  O'iuffe,  the  Russian. 

you  speaking?  bCt  ^ftttC,  the  Dane. 

tC^I  f^tcr^C,  /  speak,  I  do  speak,  bCt  Sc^ttJCbc,  the  Swede. 

I  am  speaking,  bci*  ^'^^ -WX-tX,  the  Spaniard. 

>^tx\)^X\^i^  who  speaks?  "^^CUtft^l,*    German     {the    Ger- 

tX  f^ttd^t,  he  speaks.  man  language)^ 

ja,  yes.     nciu,  no.  ©Uglifrf),  English. 

vX^i^^  nothing.  fjratt=50'=fif(^,  French. 

bcr  XiCUtfr^e,  the  German.  ^M\t'\\\\6),  Italian. 

bcr    ©nglanbcr,    the   English-  D^Juffift^,  Russian. 

man.  '^m\\^,  Danish. 

bcr  grait^ofc,  the  Frendunan.  <Sj^nJCbif(ift,  Swedish. 

bcr  ^-'i^XV'^'XitX,  the  Italian.  ©pailtft^,  Spanish. 

*  This  and  the  following  words  are  capitalized  only  when  used  substantively 
=  the  German  language,  etc. 

Note  i. —  In  German,  @tc  (with  capital  (S)  is  "you,"  whether 
one  or  more  persons  are  addressed,  and  the  verb  is  always  in  the 
plural.  This  is  the  general  "you."  2)u  is  used  only  to  relatives, 
children  and  servants,  and  i^r  is  its  plural. 

Note  2. —  3c^  fprec^e  expresses  the  three  EngHsh  forms,  "  I 
speak,"  "  I  do  speak,"  "  I  am  speaking."  German  has  no  sep- 
arate emphatic,  interrogative  and  progressive  verb-forms. 


20  THE    DEFINITE    ARTICLE.  [Les.  II. 

Conversation  i.  — Spred?en  Ste  Deutfd?? 

i\  ©l^rec^en  ©ie  ©eutfc^? 

2.  3a,  ic^  f^red)e  'Deutfd^. 
I.  (Spxt^m  ©ie  (Sngtijclj? 

2.  3^/  i^  f^recf)e  ©ngltfd). 

Etc.,  etc. 

I.  aSer  fpri^t  ®eutj^  ? 

2.  2)er  Seutfc^e  f))ric^t  S^eutfc^. 
I.  aBer  fpridjt  ©nglifd;? 

2.  2)er  ©ngldnber  f))rirf)t  Snglifd^. 

Etc.,  etc. 
Reading  2. 

eife  mit  SScite. 

Hasten  with   delay. 

**Make  haste  slowly." 
aBillft  bu  immer  tDciter  f^tpeifen'? 

Willt  thou  always    farther        roam? 

©ief),  ba^  ®ute  liegt  fo  nal)\ 

See,      the      good     lies     so   near, 

Serne  nur  ba^  ®Iucf  ergreifen, 

Learn  only     happiness      to   seize. 

S)enn  ba^  ©liid  ift  immer  ba. 

For       happiness      is     always   here. 

'  Note  the  order  of  the  German  words,  which  is  here  normal 
and  in  many  respects  rigid.  For  rules,  see  Lessons  XXV  and 
XXVL 


Les.  III.]  ^^bcr"   WORDS.  21 

LESSON     III. 

liefer  and  other  words  declined  like  bcr» 

^,bcr"   WORDS. — PRESENT  OF  ^alJCtt* 

1.  Depend  upon  resemblajices  in  sound  m  learn- 
ing the  Germmi  vocabulary^  as  in  93ater,  3}Jiitter, 
©ruber,  but  remark  the  exceptions :  tDcr  is  not  *  where,' 
tPO  is  not  *  who/  U)ie  is  not  *  we.' 

2.  ^cr  ® chiller  itt  jenem  ©arteit  \^^i  getui^  biefc 

The     scholar     in     yonder     garden     has    certainly    this 

SBIumc ;  ftc  tft    f^on     Blau. 

flower;        it     is  beautiful(ly)  blue. 

3.  Learn  this  sentence,  analyze  it  and  derive  from 
it  the  case  after  *  in ',  the  case  of  the  object  of  a 
transitive  verb,  and  the  agreement  of  the  pronoun. 

4.  biefer  is  decHned  hke  ber,  except  that  it  has 
in  the  neuter  singular  nominative  and  accusative  -e^ 
instead  of  -a^,  and  in  the  plural  and  feminine  singu- 
lar nominative  and  accusative  -e  instead  of  -ie. 

5.  Declension  of  biefer,  this. 

Singular. 

M.  F.  N. 

Norn,  bicfcr,  bicfc,  bicfci^, 

Gen.  bicfe^,  bicfcr,  bicfe^, 

Dat.  biefcm,  bicfer,  biefcm, 

Ace.  bicfctt,  biefc,  bicfei^, 

6.  Like  btefer  are  declined  :  jencr,  **that,"  '*  yon- 
der "  :  luelc^cr^  "  which  "  ;  jeber^  ''  every  "  ;  ntanc^cr, 


Plural. 

M.F.N. 

this. 

bicfC,        these. 

of  this. 

biefer,     of  these. 

to  this. 

btCfCtt,      to  these. 

this. 

biefc,        these. 

22  „bcr"   WORDS.  [Les.  III. 

"many,"  "many  a";  folc^cr,  "such/'  ''such  a" 
and  a  few  others.  It  will  be  convenient  to  call 
these  ^,ber'^  words.  They  are  both  pronouns  and 
adjectives. 

7.  ®iefcr  and  jencr  are  used  especially  in  contrast ; 
when  only  one  object  is  pointed  out  biefer  is  often 
used  for  Enghsh  tJiat.  In  sequence  biefer  means 
the  lattery  jener  the  former. 

8.  The  contracted  neuter  singular  pronoun  bie^, 
or  ba^,  is  commonly  used  as  subject  in  first  calling 
attention  to  an  object  without  regard  to  the  gender 
or  number  of  the  predicate  noun  =  this  or  these. 
®ie^  tft  inein  ^ater,  ba^  finb  metne  Stnber,  the  verb 
here  agreeing  with  the  predicate  noun. 

9.  S)er  also  serves,  when  stressed,  as  a  demon- 
strative, this,  that,  or  an  emphatic  he,  the  genitive 
forms  in  this  case  being  lengthened  to  beffen,  bcren, 
beffen,  beren  and  the  dative  plural  to  bencn. 

10.  For  the  oblique  cases  of  the  demonstrative 
or  the  personal  pronoun  governed  by  a  preposition, 
when  the  reference  is  not  to  a  person,  German  uses 
a  compound  of  "ho,  with  the  preposition,  instead 
of  Don  \^zvi\  (biefcm),  bal)on,  etc.  Note  that  while 
this  substitute  is  archaic  in  English  {thereof)  it  is 
colloquial  in  German ;  tnir  fpredjen  bat)on,  zve  are 
speaking  of  it  (or  that). 


Les.  III.]  ,,bcr"  WORDS.  23 

Vocabulary. 

MASCULINE.  NEUTER. 

ber  <S(^tt(er,  the  scholar,  pupil.  "^^^  23urf|,  the  book, 

t^tt  ^vnttXf  the  df^other.  ba§  ^apicv',  the  paper, 

bcr  ??reu«b,  the  friend.  ^.^^^  ^^^^^  ^^_ 

be§  ©diulerl,  ./  //5.  ../,./ar,  ^^^^  ^,^^^,   ^j^^  ^^,, 

//..  seholar's.  ^.       ^^^^_ 

bc8   SBruberS,  of  the  brother,      !^^^^  ^^^_ 

the  brother's.  jj^^J^  ^^^^ 

ItUM,  now ;  well  (colloquial  at 
FEMININE.  beginning  of  sentence). 

biC  8ti)ttieftcr,  the  sister.  baUOtl,  of  it  {thai). 

bic  greUttbttt,  the  {lady)  friend.       gCttJt^,  certainly. 
bie  S3Ul1tte,  the  flower,  fel)r,  2^^?:^,  z^^O'  w^^^/5. 

Remark.  —  For  words  not  given  here,  see  general  vocabulary 
at  the  end  of  the  book.     So  hereafter. 

Inflection  of  the  Present  Tense  of  I)aBeit,  to  have. 

\6)  ^aBc,  I  have.  tOXX  i^aBCH,  we  have. 

btt  ^aft,  thou  hast.  ii|r  (^abct)  ^(i%  ye  have. 

Sie  ^abctt,  you  have.  ©ie  Ijabctt,  you  have. 

tX  (fie,  t^)  ^aif  he  {she,  it)  has.       fie  ^abett,  they  have. 

Note  3.  —  "  Some  "  in  the  English  expressions,  "  some  paper," 
*' some  water,"  etc.,  unstressed,  should  not  be  translated  in  Ger- 
man.    "  Some  "  standing  alone  is  ettt)a^,  also  etnige  (pi.). 

Note  4. —  The  definite  article  in  German  serves  instead  of  a 
possessive  adjective  when  the  possessive  relation  is  evident,  as, 
9lei(^eu  ®ie  mtr  bie  §anb,  Give  me  your  hand. 

Exercise  III. 

I.  aSer  ift  btefer  maim?  2.  (£r  t[t  be^  ©rubers 
greunb.  3.  S)iejer  grcunb  be^3  93riiber^  ift  ber  SSatcr 
jene§  ©djitler^.     4.  Sft  cr  nicljt  audj  ber  greunb  bcr 


24  „bcr"  WORDS.  [Les.  hi. 

©c^iucftcr  ?  5-  3a,  cr  ift  (e^).  6.  aSelc^e^  Sud^  i)ahcn 
©ic  ha  ?  7-  Sci^  ift  be^^  Sruber^  93uc^.  8.  Seber  ©cpler 
Ijat  biefe^  85u(^.  9.  9Sir  Ijabm  e^  ^  nitf)t.  10.  SJiun, 
@ie  finb  nic^t  @d)u(er.  n.  Seber  @if)uler  ^at  autf) 
^papier.  12.  S)tefer  SJfann  i)at  S3ud)  unb  ^a|)ter.  13.  S)te 
©c^iifer  [inb  tm  ©arten  be^  TOmmc^.  14.  S)er  S)?ann 
ift  ber  95ater  btefe^  @c£)u(er^.  15.  S)ie  grau  unb  bie 
@(i)tt)efter  be^  9Kanne§  [inb  and)  im  ®arten.  16.  aSa^ 
Ijaben  bie  3  ba  ?  17.  @ie  ()aben  ba^  S3uc^  be^  93rnber^. 
18.  Unb  tDO  ift  nun 4  biefer  ©arten  ?  19.  S)er  @o[)n  be^ 
SKanne^  fpric^t  bat)on,  20.  Ser  ®arten  ber  a}futter  ift 
griin  unb  fd)ijn.  21.  Sft  jeber  ®arten  fcf)on  ?  22.  9?ein, 
getpi^  nic^t,  mandjer  ©arten  ift  f)d^lic^.  2^.  3(6er,  ift 
nidjt  jebe  Slume  fdjon  ?  24.  S)iefe  93(ume  ift  flein  unb 
bian,     25.  S)a^  ift  SSergi^meinnic^t. 

^  If  referring  to  the  brother  of  the  speaker,  render  my.  *  Note 
the  order.  German  has  no  contraction  corresponding  to  '  haven't/ 
but  may  contract  !^aben  C§  to  'ijahtlV^.  ^  Refer  to  paragraph  9, 
Lesson  3.     *nnn  =  we/ly  may  stand  thus  in  the  predicate. 

Exercise  3. 

I.  Who  is  that  lady?  2.  She  is  the  sister  of  the 
pupil.  3.  The  sister  of  which  pupil  is  she  ?  4.  Of  that 
pupil  there  in  the  house.  5.  This  pupil  is  the  friend 
of  my  J  sister.  6.  Have  you  not  a  flower.?  7.  Yes, 
the  flower  is  pretty  (and)  blue.  8.  Where  do  you 
keep  2-  the  flower  ?  9.  We  have  it  now  in  the  garden. 
10.  [The]  father  and  [the]  mother  are  in  the  garden. 


Les.  III.]  ^^ber"  WORDS.  25 

II.  Which  flower  have  you  in  the  house .?  12.  We  have 
this  flower  in  the  house  also.  13.  Every  pupil  has 
this  flower.  14.  It  is  the  forget-me-not.  15.  Well,  the 
flower  is  certainly  very  pretty.  16.  Have  they  (some)  3 
paper  ?  17.  Yes,  they  have  this  in  the  house  also. 
18.  Which  book  has  the  man  ?  19.  Every  man  has  this 
book  now.  20.  This  man  has'nt  it.  4  21.  He  is  speak- 
ing 5  of  it.     22.  It  is  new  and  very  pretty. 

^  Render  by  definite  article.  ^  do  you  keep,  Ijobett  @ie.  ^  Words 
in  parentheses  are  needed  in  English  but  not  to  be  rendered  in 
German,     ^tr.  Has  it  not.     ^  See  Lesson  2,  note  2,  p.  19. 


Vocabulary  for  the  Conversation. 

hJO  f^rid^t  man,   where  speaks  gat  vX^if  not  at  all. 

one,  where  do  they  speak  ?  nlc,  Utemal^,  never. 

ntan  f^rtC^t,    one  speaks,  they  titi)(i^f  some,  somewhat. 

speak.  'I)eutfc^(aub,  Germany. 

nur,  only.  ©ttgfanb,  England. 

eitt  ttJeutnr  ^  liM^*  Sratifretti),  Fran.e. 

w  litest  rjClaufig,  not  fluently.  ^=ta'=li=eit,  Italy. 

fc^r  gut,  very  well.  JHupattb,  Russia. 

§iemU(i^   gelaufig,  pretty  flu-     ^aucmar!,  Denmark. 

ently.  SrfjitJCbCtt,  Sweden. 

^temUfi^  gitt,  tolerably  well.  S|Ja'  tti=cn,  Spain. 

Note  5. —  The  expression  with  the  indefinite  man  (French  on) 
corresponds  to  the  English  one  with  "one,"  "they,"  "people," 
and  to  the  passive  form :  e.  g.,  man  f!plid)t,  "  one  speaks,  they 
speak,  people  speak " ;  mail  fprid)t  S)eiltfc^  {)ier,  "  German  is 
spoken  here."  The  oblique  cases  for  ntail  are  supplied  from 
einer   (see  L.  IV),  the  possessive  is  join. 


26  ,,bcr"  WORDS.  [Les.  III. 

Conversation  2.  — 5pred?en  Ste  Deutfd?? 

I.  aSo  [priest  man  S)eut1c^  ? 

2.  SKan  f^ric^t  2)eutf^  in  ©eutf^Ianb. 
I.  aSo  fprirf)t  man  Snglifd^  ? 

2.  5Kan  fjjrid^t  ©nglifc^  in  (gnglanb. 

Etc.,  etc. 

I.  3Bie  ypred^en  @te  ©eutfd)  ? 

2.  3<^  f^rec^e  nur  ein  iDenig  ©eutfd^. 
I.  SSie  fpred^en  @te  3)entf(^  ? 

2.  3d^  f|)red^e  nicf)t  geldufig  ©eutfd^. 

Etc.,  etc. 

Reading  3. 
3lft,  tolc  ift's;  mbfittdi  baittt!* 

Sid),  tvk  ift'^  mogltd)  bann, 

Ah   how    is  it     possible     then 

S)a^  t(^  bt(^  taffen  fann? 

That      I     thee     leave      can 

^aV  b\6)  t)on  ^erjen  Iteb, 

Hold  thee     at        heart      dear 

S)a^  glanbe  mtr. 

This     believe     me. 

S)u  ^a[t  ba^  ^crje  mein 

Thou  hast     the    heart  of    me 

@o  ganj  genommen  ein, 

So   wholly         taken         in 

*  The  melody  of  this  and  all  the  following  songs  can  be  had  in  ©cut: 
\ii)ex  Siebevjd^a^,  33anb  I,  costing  about  $1  bound,  or  in  l^cutid^e^  Sieber; 
bud)  by  Tonger,  cost  about  25  cents.  Teachers  are  advised  to  procure 
the  latter  book  for  their  classes.  They  can  be  had  through  any  music 
dealer,  or  of  G.  Schirmer,  New  York  City. 


Les.  III.]  ,,bcr"  WORDS.  2^ 

^^\l  id)  fcin'  aitbre  lieb', 

That    I       no      other     love 

2lte  bt^  allein. 

Than  thee   alone. 

SBIau  ift  etn  95Iumetein, 

is  called 

S)ie^  S3tumtein  leg'  aii'^  ijerj 

flowret       lay   on  thy  heart 

Unb  benf'  an  tuii^. 

think      of      me. 

©tirbt  Slum'  unb  ^offnung  gleirf), 

(If)  Dies  hope  alike 

S3ir  finb  an  Siebe  reidE), 

in      love      rich 

Unb  bie  ftirbt  nie  bei  mtr, 

in     me 

SDa^  glaube  mir.  -ssoitgueb. 

@§  !am  ein  SSogel  feberlo^^ 

There  ^  came  bird     featherless, 

@a^  auf  ben  93aum  blattlo^, 

Seated  (itself)  on  the  tree     leafless, 

S)a  fam  bie  Sungfer  munblo^ 

maiden     mouthless 

Unb  afe  ben  95ogel  feberlo^ 

ate 

SSon  bem  93aume  b(att(o§. 

[Ans.  —  The  snow  and  the  sun.] 
*The  expletive  'there'  is  in  German  e^.     In  this  meaning  the 
following  verb  does  not  agree  in  number  with  eg,  but  wath  the 
logical  subject. 


28  INDEFINITE    ARTICLE  ,,cim"  [Les.  IV. 

LESSON     IV. 

Indefinite  Article  tin ;  Possessive  Adjectives  ; 
Preterit  of  fcitt,  ^abeit,  ttJetbett, 

1 4  When  a  distinctly  German  idiom  has  been  in- 
troduced, do  not  avoid  it,  but  use  it  at  all  possible 
opportunities. 

2.  ®er  9?rubcr  biefe^  Saufmanrii^  \^^i  cinen  ©artcn : 

The     brother  of  this      merchant      has       a  garden; 

c^  ^M  fcinc  93fixtmc  bartn,  Qkr  bie  9iofen  luaren  bicfc^ 

there  are      no        trees       in  it       but    the    roses       were      this 
year   very  pretty. 

3.  Learn  this  sentence,  analyze  it,  and  note  the 
idiom  for  *  there  are,'  the  contraction  for  *in  it,'  and 
the  order  after  the  coordinate  conjunction  aber. 

4.  Declension  of  the  indefinite  article  ein,  "a," 
"an,"  used  only  in  the  singular  number: — 


Nom. 

cut, 

cittc, 

citt, 

a. 

Gen. 

tmt^, 

cittcr, 

CtttCi^, 

of  a. 

Dat. 

cittern, 

cittcr, 

cittcm, 

to  a. 

Ace. 

eittctt, 

cittc, 

citt, 

a. 

5.  Like  ein  are  declined  fein,  no,  mein,  my,  and 
the  remaining  possessive  adjectives,  as  follows: — 

'^t\%  thy,  your.  ^\\Xf  your. 

fcttt,  his,  its.  CttCr,  your. 

i^t,  her.  Hr,  their. 
ttllfcr,  our. 

It  will  be  convenient  to  call  these  ,,ciu^'  words. 
They  form  the  plural  like  that  of  biejcr. 


Les.  IV.]  ,^ettt"  WORDS.  29 

Declension  of  mcin,  "my,"  "mine." 

Singular.  Plural. 

M.  F.  N.  M.F.N. 

Nom.   mciit,       meittc,     wciii,       f^iy-  nieittc,     my. 

Gen.  meine^,  mciner,  mctnc^,  of  my.  metuer,  of  my. 
Dat.  mciucm,  mciuer,  nicincm,  to  my.  meitiett,  to  my. 
Ace.     mchtcit,    mciue,     mein,       my.  metue,     my. 

6.  In  this  form  these  words  are  adjectives  only ; 
with  full  nominative  endings,  like  those  of  btejer, 
they  are  also  pronouns,  S()r  ^atcr  unb  meiner,  your 
father  and  mi7ie. 

Note  that  the  -cr  of  unjcr  and  euer  is  not  an 
ending,  but  part  of  the  stem  ;  thus,  the  genitives 
are  unfere^,  euere^. 

7»    Inflection  of  the  Preterit  Tense  of  fcitt,  to  be, 
AND  !^abcn,   to  have. 
X^  ttiav,  I  was.  ict)  l)attC,  I  had. 

'^Vi  ttiarft,  thou  wast.  bU  ^atteft,  thou  hadst. 

©ie  ttiarcu,  you  were.  ©tc  fatten,  you  had. 

er  ttiar,  he  was.  et  ^attc,  he  had. 

ttlir  tUarCtt,  we  were.  iuit  \^<\iit^f  we  had. 

\%X  ttiart,  ye  were.  i^tr  ^Ottct,  ye  had. 

8ic  ttiavcu,  you  were.  (Bie  ^ttctt,  jj^^^^  /^«^. 

fie  tuarcn,  they  were.  ftc  l)attctt,  ^/^<r  h<^d. 

8,    Inflection  of  the  Present  and  Preterit  Tenses 
OF  tuerben^   to  become. 
irfftticrbe,  I  become.  tt^  UHtrbC,  ttJarb,*  I  became. 

btt  ttlirft,  ///^z^  becomest.  "tSW    lUUtbcft,    ttjatbft,    M^//    ^^• 

®tC  ttJCrbcn,  you  become.  earnest. 

er  Wirb,  he  becomes.  ©tC  tUUrbCtt,  JJ^^«  became. 

er  ttiurbe,  luarb,  /^<?  became. 

*  The  second  form  is  less  used  than  the  first. 


30  INDEFINITE    ARTICLE   ,,etm"  [Les.  IV. 

tpir  ttierbCtt,  we  become.  'mx  tUUrbcn,  we  became. 

Hr  tUCrbet,  ye  become.  t^r  itmrbet,  ye  became. 

Sic  ttlCrbett,  JI^^^^  become.  Sic  ttJUtbCtt,  jK^z^  became. 

ftC  ttlCrbCtt,  i^/^O'  become.  fic  ttiurbcit,  //z<?r  became. 

Note  6.  —  "They  have"  should  be  rendered  mott  l^at,  when- 
ever "  they  "  is  general  or  indefinite,  i.  e.  has  no  definite  antece- 
dent, as  '  they  have  no  good  music  in  this  city,'  tnatl  lf)at  feine 
gute  9}iuft!  in  biefer  (2)tabt 

Note  7.  —  "There  is,"  "there  are,"  are  rendered  e§  x\i,  e§ 
fiub,  when  the  scope  of  the  afiirmation  is  definite  and  limited  in 
time  or  place,  but  when  general  and  sweeping,  especially  stating 
facts  of  nature,  both  are  rendered  eg  gibt  (fit.  it  gives)  with  the 
predicate  noun  in  the  accusative.  Thus  one  may  say,  @g  gibt 
feine  2^iger  in  ^anfa§  (tigers  are  not  found  in  Kansas),  and  at 
the  same  time,  ©§  finb  bicfe  2Bo(i)e  jtrei  S^iger  in  ^anfag  (i.  e.  with 
a  menagerie),  both  statements  being  true.  But  the  line  between 
general  and  particular  statements  is  faint  and  must  be  learned  by 
experience.     In  many  cases  either  expression  may  be  used. 

Vocabulary. 
MASCULINE.  J)te  S5(ttmCU,  the  flowers. 

bet  S5anm,  the  tree.  btC  ^tttbc,  the  color. 

bic  ^ftumc,  the  trees.  bic  XiutC,  the  i7ik. 

bcr  ^aufmann,  the  merchant.  biC  JJcbcr,  the  feather,  pen. 

bc^  ^aMfmann^,  of  the  mer-      bic  (SJabct,  the  fork. 

chant.  bic  ©abcttt,  the  forks. 

\st^  %Xtmi\st§f  of  the  friend.  neuter. 

bic  |rCUttbC    the  friends.  ^^^  ^^^^^^^  ^^^  ^^^^ 

^''  ?;l*;  '^[  '^^^'-  ^^^  3Jlcffer,  the  knife. 

bcr  ^^fcl,  the  apple.  ^^^  ^^^.       ^^^^  ^^  .^,^^^ 

Wm^\  the  apples.  U^<^^{x! the  year. 

FEMININE.  |0^    SO. 

bic  O^iofC,  the  rose.  )t>ot)(^  well,  not  ill. 

bic  §attb,  the  hand.  tattlOl)(,  yes,  indeed. 


Les.  IV.]  ^^Citt"   WORDS.  31 

franf,  illy  sick.  t§  fillb,  C§  ^iht,  there  are. 

in,  in  (with  dative)  in  answer  I)Ubf(^f  pretty. 

to  *  where  ? '     accusative   in  miibc,  tired. 

answer  to  whither  ?  fii^,  sweet. 

nuf,  upon  (with  dat.).  o!^,  oh  I 

UicI,  much.  ad^,  ah  !  oh  ! 

tSXtltf  many.  rctf,  ripe. 

abcr,  but.  CtttirjC,  some  (pi.). 
Exercise  IV. 

I.  S)tc  Stiumc  in  unferem  ®arten  finb  griin.  2.  ®t()t  €<§ 
93aume  in  3t)re^  93ruber^  ©arten?  3-  Stein,  cr  tjat  nnr 
S3(nmen  in  feinem  ®arten.  4.  ©r  t)at  au6)  fcine  Stpfet 
in  feinem  ®arten.  5-  9^ein,  man  Ijat  Stpfet  nnr  anf 
Sanmen.  6.  Of),  tuir  l)atten  SIpfel  anf  einem  2^ifrf)  in 
bem  ®arten  be^  ^anfmann^.  7-  Sa,  aber  fie  tDnrben 
anf  bem  Slifc^e  nid)t  reif.  8.  ®ett)i^  md)t,  fie  n:)nrben 
anf  ben  Sdnmen  reif.  9.  2l6er  St)r  grennb,  ber  ^^anf- 
mann,  Ijat  !eine  Saimie.  10.  3fnn,  man  tjat  aber  83dume 
in  ber  ©tabt  n.  @^  gibt  (or  finb)  feine  5(pfel  anf 
meinen  Sdnmen.  12.  fatten  @ie  nie  SInmen  in  Sfjrem 
®arten  ?  13.  Sid)  ja,  aber  nnr  nidjt  biefe^  Sal)r.  14.  3So 
gibt  e^  biefec^  Sal)r  93Inmen  ?  15.  G^  gibt  feljr  t)iele 
in  bem  ®arten  meine^  grennbe^.  16.  Siefer  ®arten 
tuirb  feljr  fdjon.  17.  ^(ni  er  anc^  %\\6)t  nnb  ©tnljle  in 
feinem  ®arten  ?  18.  Sa,  aber  man  ^at  %\\\it  nnb  geber 
nnr  in  bem  §anfe.  19.  2Bir  tnaren  niemate  in  feinem 
§anfe.  20.  %\\  S^rem  ®arten  ift  ^  e^  feljr  fdjon. 
21.  ©inb  @ie  ni(^t  miibe? 

^  Note  the  order ;  if  part  of  the  predicate  begins  the  sentence 
the  verb  must  precede  the  subject. 


32  INDEFINITE    ARTICLE    ,,eitt,"  [Les.   IV. 

Exercise  4. 
I.  Is  this  your  garden?  2.  Yes  indeed,  it  is  our 
father's  garden.  3.  Is  it  not  very  pretty  ?  4.  Yes, 
it  I  has  so  many  trees.  5.  And  yonder  is  a  rose. 
6.  Have  you  also  many  flowers  ?  7.  Yes,  but  the 
flowers  are  not  in  this  garden.  8.  Our  mother  has 
also  a  garden  and  this  has  the  flowers.  9.  There  are 
no  apples  this  year  in  my  brother's  garden.  10.  But 
we  had  some,  and  they  were  very  sweet,  n.  Well, 
your  friend,  the  merchant  had  them  in  his  garden. 
12.  Were  they  on  his  trees  ?  13.  Oh  no,  they  were 
only  on  a  table.  14.  What  was  the  color  of  those 
apples  ?  15.  They  were  green,  but  they  were  ripe. 
16.  Our  apples  are  becoming  red  and  ripe.  17.  The 
flowers    were  on  a   table    in    my  friend's  garden. 

18.  They  ^  had  no  knives  and  forks  on  the  table. 

19.  But  there  3  were  paper  and  ink'and  a  pen.  20.  My 
sister  had  the  pen  in  her  hand.  21.  She  was  not 
very  well.  22.  They  have  no  ink  in  the  house. 
23.  We  are  becoming  tired.  24.  I  too  became  tired, 
but  I  was  not  sick. 

^  Remember  that  the  pronoun  agrees  in  gender  with  its  ante- 
cedent.     ^  Refer  to  Note  6.     ^  Refer  to  Note  7. 

Vocabulary  for  the  Conversation. 

Wic    ^Ciftt    t>a§,    how    is    that  obct,  or. 

called?  what  is  the  name  of  jeberiUaitU,  every  one. 

that  ?  what  is  that  ?  to'xt  \S\tlt,  how  many. 

brt^  %t\^if  that  if  called^  that  an,  on  (with  dat.). 

is,  5njifr^cn,  between  (with  dat.). 


Les.  IV.]  INDEFINITE    ARTICLE    „cijl.'' 


33 


ttC^CU,  by  the  side  of  (with  dat.).       'tXt  ^(tttbc,  the  hands. 

jcma(§,  JC,  ever.  bcr  5i«0Cl*f  the  finger. 

tWX^  (Ciue§),  07te.  btC  5i«9Cr,  the  fingers. 

5ttlCt,  two.  bcr  ^aumcit,  the  tluwib. 

"hXtXf  three.  blc  ^autlteu,  the  ihumbs. 

\^\tXffiour.  bcr  SJlittclftnOCr,    the    middU- 

f  ilttf ,  five.  finger. 

\t^^f  six.  bcr  9littgftuncr,  the  ring  finger. 

ftcficn,  sevc::.  bcr    !(CtttC    ??iU0Cr,    the   liitle- 

ar^t,  eight.  finger. 

ttCttlt,  nine.  bic  gauft,  //^<?/j/. 

5c^u,  /^/7.  bic  ?Jauftc,  the  fists. 

Note  8.  —  The  neuter  form  ein§  is  employed  when  the 
numeral  eill  is  used  substantively  in  coimting ;  with  another  nu- 
meral, eiii  alone  is  used  (as  in  eiu  \\\\\i  gtuanjig);  preceded  by  the 
definite  article  ber,  it  is  declined  according  to  Class  I  of  the 
Second  Declension  of  Adjectives  (p.  iii). 

Conversation  3.  —  Die  fjanb» 

I.  SBie  ^eifet  ba^? 

2.  2)a§  ^ei^t  eine  §anb. 
I.  9Bie  IieiBt  ba^  ? 

2.  S)ag  ^ei^t  eiu  ginger. 
I.  ^abeit  ©ie  eine  §anb  obcr  jtnei  §dnbe? 

2.  3c^  ^abe  3tt)ei  §dnbc. 
I.  §at  jebermann  jlnet  §dnbe? 

2.  ^a,  jjebermann  l^at  jtt)ei  §dnbe. 

Etc.,  etc. 

I.  SBie  Ijei^t  biefer  ginger? 

2.  S)a§  ^ei^t  ber  S)aumen. 
I.  2Bie  f)ei^t  biefer  ginger? 

2,  J)a§  ^ei^t  ber  3^ig^fi^g^^» 

Etc.,  etc. 


34  INDEFINITE    ARTICLE    ,,ettt»"  [Les.  IV. 

I.  3Bte  inele  ginger  finb  ha^  ? 

2.  ®a§  finb  brei  g^inger. 
I.  2Bie  Diele  ^eigefingcr  Ijat  man  an  jeber  §anb  ? 

2.  SRan  l)at  nur  einen  ^^ig^finger  an  jeber  §anb. 

Etc.,  etc. 
Reading  4. 

ftbung  mac^t  beit  9Jfeiftcr. 

Practice    makes    the     master. 

"Practice  makes  perfect." 
^cr  re^te  fielcuKnuf. 

9»tt   ®ott  fang^  an,  mit  ®ott  l}6r'  auf ! 

With  begin,  end. 

S)a§  ift  bcr  red}te  Seben^Ianf. 

That  right     course  of  life. 

2)et  ©fell  uttb  bet  SBorf,^ 

Sin  ©jet  kgegnete3  einem  ^ungrigen  3Botfe.  „§abe 
9}Meib4  mit  mir,^'  fctgte^  ber  jitternbe^  Sfel;  .,,icl)  bin 
ein  armec^,  tmnfeg  Stier;  fief)  7  mir,  tua^-fiir- einen  ^ 
S)orrt9  id)  mir  in  ben  gnfe  getreten^°  t)a6e."  ,,3[8at)r^ 
Ijaftig,^'  bn  banerft^^  mid),'^  Derfe^ten  ber  9BoIf;  „mtb 
ic^  finbe  mic^  in  meinem  ©etDiffen^  Derbunben,^5  bid) 
Don  biefen  (5d)merjen^^  jn  befreien.'' '7  Kaum^^  tvav 
ba^  SBort  gejagt/9  fo  tnarb^^  ber  @fel  jerriffen.^° 

Seffing. 
*  donkey.      ^trembling.  "really.  ^^ pains, 

^wolf.  ^see.  ^^  cause  pity.       ^^free. 

3  met.  *  what  a.  ^^  replied.  ^^  scarcely, 

•♦pity.  9  thorn.  ^^^  conscience.      ^^  spoken. 

*said.  ^°  trodden.  ^^  bound.  2°  was  torn  to  pieces. 


Les.   v.]  verbs.  NEW    CONJUGATION.  35 

LESSON     V. 

Verbs.  —  New  Conjugation.  —  Prepositions  with 
THE  Accusative. 

Conjugation   of  Verbs. 

1.  The  first  and  third  persons  plural  of  all  verbs 
are  alike^  and  also  the  first  and  third  singular 
preterit. 

2.  2)cr  Setter  Io6t  bcu  ©djiilcr,  aficr  bcr  ©driller 

The    teacher  praises  the      pupil  but    the       pupil 

is  not  playing  very  well. 

3.  Examine  the  construction  of  the  sentence. 
Note  the  case  of  subject  and  object  of  lobt,  also 
that  the  simple  form  fpielt  represents  the  English 
*  is  playing '  between  which  comes  the  '  not '  in 
English. 

4.  All  German  verbs  are  conjugated  according 
to  one  of  two  forms,  called  the  New  and  the  Old 
Conjugations.  The  verbs  of  the  New  or  weak  Con- 
jugation comprise  the  great  majority  of  German 
verbs.  The  verbs  of  the  Old  or  strong  Conjugation, 
though  few  in  number,  are  mostly  in  common  use. 

5.  The  mode  of  forming  the  preterit  and  past 
participle  is  the  distinguishing  feature  between 
these  two  conjugations.  In  the  New  Conjugation 
the  preterit  is  formed  by  an  addition  to  the  stem ; 
in  the  Old  Conjugation  there  is  no  addition,  but  a 
change  in  the  vowel  of  the  stem,  called  Ablaut. 


36  VERBS.  NEW    CONJUGATION.  [Les.   V. 

6.  The  stem  of  a  verb  is  that  part  which  remains 
after  dropping  the  infinitive  ending -ett  or-n. 

7.  The  pri7icipal  parts  of  a  verb  are  three  :  in- 
finitive, preterit,  and  past  participle.  Thus  the 
principal  parts  of  lieben  (a  verb  of  the  New  Conju- 
gation) are  Iteben,  Itebte,  gelie6t,  "  to  love,"  "  (I)  loved," 
"loved." 

The  New  Conjugation  will  be  taken  up  first,  as 
simpler,  since  the  verbs  belonging  to  it  are  more 
nearly  regular  in  their  form -changes. 

New  Conjugation. 

8.  T\\^  past  participle  is  formed  by  prefixing  ge- 
to  the  stem  (so  also  in  the  Old  Conjugation),  and 
by  adding -(e)t.  cje-  is  not  prefixed  to  verbs  end- 
ing in  -teren,  as  marfdjieren,  *^to  march,"  past  parti- 
ciple marfdjiert,  nor  to  verbs  having  an  unaccented 
prefix.     (See  Lesson  XVII.) 

9.  T\\.^  present  participle  is  formed  in  both  con- 
jugations by  adding  -enb  to  the  stem. 

Personal   Endings. 

10.  The  following  endings  are  added  in  both 
conjugations  to  the  stem  to  form  the  present  t^nsQy 
as  follows  with  the  stem  lob-,  praise : 


Singular. 

Plural. 

I.  lo6-e. 

I.  lo6-en. 

2.   "  -(c)ft. 

2.    "-(e)t. 

3-   "-(e)t. 

3.   "-eiu 

Les.  v.]  verbs. NEW    CONJUGATION.  3/ 

11.  The  c  in  parentheses  is  omitted  unless  there 
would  result  thereby  such  a  combination  of  conso- 
nants as  would  be  difficult  to  pronounce 

12.  The  following  forms  show  the  endings  of  the 
preterit  tense. 

Singular.  Plural. 

1.  tob-tc»  I.  lob-tctt* 

2.  «-teft»  2.   "-tct» 

3.  "-tc»  3-   "-tern 

13-  Before  it  of  the  preterit  ending,  c  is  inserted, 
when  the  root  ends  in  a  letter  that  cannot  easily  be 
pronounced  before  te^  as  bet-ete,  prayed, 

14.  While  the  form  @te  Iteben  is  historically  of 
the  third  person  plural,  in  practical  use  it  is  second 
person  both  singular  and  plural,  and  should  be  re- 
cited as  an  alternative  form.  ®u  is  used  to  children 
and  relatives. 

i5»  In  the  Imperative,  the  singular  is  formed  by 
adding  c  to  the  stem,  and  the  plural  is  the  second 
person  plural  of  the  Present  Indicative  inverted. 

16.   Simple  Tenses  (Indicative  Mood)  of  a  Verb  of 
THE  New  Conjugation. 

PRINCIPAI.    PARTS. 

lieBett^    lie^te,    gcHcl^t 

Present.  Preterit. 

X^  Uebc,  /  love.  \^  licbtC,  /  loved. 

bU  (ielDft,  thou  lovest.  btt  Hebtcft,  thou  lovedst. 

(5ic  (icBcti,  you  love.  @ie  (iebteu,  you  loved, 

Cr  Hcfit,  he  loves.  tX  liefitC,  he  loved. 


38 


VERBS.  NEW    CONJUGATION. 


[Les.  V. 


toiv  UcBen,  we  love. 

i^r  Uc6t,  ye  love. 

8tc  UeBen,  you  love. 

fie  liebcn,  they  love. 


ttiir  licBten,  we  loved. 
tl)r  Uebtet,  ji^^r  /^tv/. 
(Sic  (iebtcii,  ^^^^  /^^^. 

fie  Xxt^itW^  they  loved. 


Imperative. 

SINGULAR. 

liebe  (bu),  (iedeu  ©ie,  love  {thou),  love. 

PLURAL. 

Xxt^i  (i^r),  Hefictt  ©ie,  /^Z'-^  (j<?),  /^z^^. 

InfinitiTe. 

XxthtW,  to  love. 

Participles. 

Ucbenb,  iovi7tg.  geliefit,  loved. 


Vocabulary. 


MASCULINE. 


ber  Dn!e(,  the  ujtcle. 

ber  S^ad^iinr^  />5<?  neighbor. 
bev  Secret,  //^^  teacher. 

(ber)  SSil^elm,  ^////^w. 
bie  (5tf)ii(er,  ^/^^  scholars. 

\s\t  g'reUttbe,  the  friends. 


FEMININE. 


bie  5lufgaBe,  the  lesson. 
\yit  Strafje,  the  street. 
"tsxt  SJlufif ',  the  music. 
'^Xt  D'i|Jer,  the  opera. 
'^Xt  ^'ioteit^  the  notes  {score). 

NEUTER. 

\>(i^  ©tiltf,  the  piece, 
i^^^)  5lmerifa,  America. 
i:pi\^)  Berlin',  i^^r//;^ 

(ba§)  SottbOll,  London. 

itiantm,  w//^.? 


bamal^,  {at)  that  time. 
t^tt  (ace),  him. 
tttorgett,  to-morrow. 

eittft,  ^i^^^. 

tei5ettb,  charming. 

beitlt,  ///^«  (argumentative). 

immev,  always. 

felBft,  himself. 

el6ett,  yW/;  jcijt,  Wf^^^'. 

faufen,  3^/^. 
(enieii,  /^^^^-/z. 

ttl0l|tten,  /zVr,  reside. 
(ebeit,  live,  be  alive. 

Idfi^en,  laugh. 

(O0en,  praise. 

pven,  /5^«r. 
facjen,  j-^jk,  /^//. 
f^ie(en,  play. 

glauBeu,    believe,  think. 


Les.   v.]  verbs.  NEW    CONJUGATION.  39 

Note  9.  —  [^  (cbte  expresses  alone  the  three  English  forms, 
**  I  lived,"  "  I  did  live,"  "  I  was  living."  So  in  the  case  of  other 
verbs. 

Note  10. — Prepositions  with  the  Accusative.  The  follow- 
ing prepositions  govern  the  accusative  case :  bnxd),  through^  by 
means  of,  \\\x,  for,  gegeit,  against^  ot)ne,  withouty  Utlt,  around, 
about,  at  (time). 

Exercise  V. 

I.  S)te  ©c^iiler  Iteben  (bie)  9Wu[t!.  2.  ©iefe  9Ku[if 
tft  fiir  bie  greunbe  eine^  ©c^iiler^,  3.  ©agert  ©ie 
mtr :  n:)0  leBt  St)r  greunb  ?  4.  ®r  Ie6t  \t%i  in  Sertin. 
5.  Sc^  ^o^te  i()n  einft  eine  D)3er  fpielen.^  6.  (So, 
I)orten  @ie  tl)n  fpielen  ?  7.  Sa)t)o^t,  er  fpielt  fet)r 
gut.  8.  Sc^  faufte  einft  in  Serlin  ein  ©tiid  SRufi!.* 
9.  ajfein  Slinb  t)orte  ba^  ©tiic!  unb  ladjte.  10.  2Sarum 
fauften  @ie  e§  benn?  n.  2lc^,  ein  greunb  meine^ 
95ruber^  tobte  e^  [0  fe^r.  12.  ©piett  bcr  Setjrer  feI6[t 
bicfc  Dper?  13.  S)a^  jagt  man,  aber  er  lernts  fie 
nur3  eben.  14.  9^icl)t  U)al)r4,  biefir  Seljrer  lebte  einft 
in  Sonbon  ?  15.  Sc§  glaube,  er  tDar  bort  unfer  9lac^- 
bar.     16.  aSir  tt)of)nten  bama^3  in  (bcr)  93on)==@tra^e. 

17.  §oren  @ie,  mein  Dnfel  fpicit  "^(x^  ©tiid  fiir  un§. 

18.  @r  fpiett  ja  5  o^ne  Stolen.  19.  SBir  lernen  bie[e§ 
Stitcf  morgen;  ^oS>  i[t  nnfere  Slufgabe.  20.  2Ba!^ 
jagten  ©ie.ba^,  mein  greunb?  21.  %^  jagte  nnr, 
)t)ir  t)aben  morgen  biefes^  ©titc!  jn  lernen.  22.  §aben 
©ie  benn  ettna^  Qcgen  ba^^  StiidE?  23.  D  nein,  gett)i^ 
nid)t;   es^  ift  reijenb. 

^  Note  the  German  order;   the  infinitive  always  stands  at  the 
end  of  the  clause.     ^  After  words  indicating  measure  the  noun 


40  VERBS.  NEW    CONJUGATION.  [Le?,  V. 

representing  the  thing  measured  is  in  apposition  in  German,  un- 
less preceded  by  an  adjective.  ^  /j.  only  just  learning.  -^Lit.  not 
true;  tr.  didnH  he^  at  end.  ^z^'y^j^,  at  beginning.  ^\i^  is  often 
then^  as  well  as  there. 

Exercise  5. 

I.  Who  is  playing  the  opera }  2.  They  say,  it  is 
our  friends  in  [the]  WilHam-street.  3.  Why,i  this 
piece  is  charming  !  4.  Did  you  not^  hear  it  that-time 
in  Berhn }  4.  Yes,  I  beUeve  (so),  but  I  did  not^ 
Hke  it  then.  3  6.  Our  teacher*  ^always  ^praised  ^it 
3though.4  7.  Yes,  he  himself  plays  it  charmingly. 
8.  Our  teacher's  uncle  plays  2very  jWell  itoo.  9.  Are 
your  friends  now  livmg  in  Berlin  1  10.  O  no,  it  is 
the  William-street  in  this  city.  n.  And  5  does  the 
teacher  live  on  that  street  too .?  12.  I  thought  I 
heard  him  playing  ^,  13.  Yes,  he  is  playing  the  les- 
son for  the  pupils.  14.  He  is  playing,  but  the  pupils 
are  laughing.  15.  They  say  he  plays  very  well. 
16.  Yes,  and  the  pupils  are  learning  (to)  3  play 
J  without  2  notes.  17.  Tell  me,  is  that  good  for  them } 
18.  Well,  all  my  friends  praise  the  teacher.  19.  Do 
you  buy  your  music  through  the  teacher  1  20.  Then7 
buy  for  me  too.  21.  He  bought  this  piece  (of) 
music  in  America.  22.  When  do  you  play  to-mor- 
row.?    23.  I  believe  we  play  at  seven  o'clock.^ 

'  5lber  after  tft.  ^  9?id^t  when  it  limits  the  verb,  as  here,  is 
usually  at  the  end  of  the  clause  in  simple  tenses.  ^  bauialS, 
'*  aber.     ^  benn,  after  verb.     ^  infinitive.     ^  @o.     ®  Ul^r. 

*  Numbers  before  and  below  the  words  indicate  the  German  order  so 
far  as  the  numbered  words  are  concerned. 


Les.  v.]         verbs.  —  NEW   CONJUGATION. 


41 


Vocabulary  for  the  Conversation. 


auf  "i^cutfci^  or  tm  1)eutfrf)ett, 

in  German. 
ttJotten  ®ic,  will  you  ? 
t)On,  from;  ftt^,  to. 
\^a§  ©tttmokiu^,  t/ie  one  time 

one,  the  multiplication  table. 
\^^^  SDIat,  the  time,  as  in  ''  not 

this  tiine^ 
ntai^eu,    make,   do,    constitute, 

amotuit  to. 

njietiiel  tttarfjt  "^^^  ?  how  much 

makes   that?    how   much   is 
that. 


Clf,  eleven. 
JtuiJlf,  twelve. 
brei^e^ll,  thirteen. 
tlicr^e^U,  fourteen. 


fedl^C^tt,  sixteen. 
ficb(cn)5Cl)U^  seventeen. 
ad^tSC^n,  eighteen. 
licmtse^tt,  nineteen. 
anjail^ig,  twenty. 
eiuUltbSttiaJt^ig,  twenty  one. 
bl'Ci^tflf  thirty. 
Ctttttttbbrei^ig,  thirtyofte. 

fitttfatg,//^. 

ficB(Ctt)5tg,  seventy, 

ar^t^tg,  eighty. 

nCttUSig,  ^linety. 
^ttttbcrt,  hundred. 
^ttttbcrtUttbcitt^,   hundred  and 

one. 
tHUfCUb,  a  thousand. 
cittC  9JlitttOtt',  a  million. 


neuttsc^n  ^ttttbert  vcv^  t»icr» 

nineteen  hundred  and  four. 


Conversation  4.  —  3^^^^ii» 

I.  aSte  ^ctfet  "  count  "  auf  S)eutf^  ? 

2.  "Count"  f^ei^t  auf  ©eutfc^>  rrjci^len,'^ 
I.  SBoIteu  ©ie  t)Ou  eiu^  biig  fuuf  ja^Ien. 

2.  (Sin§,  jlDei,  brei,  bier,  fiinf. 
I.  aSolIeu  @ie  t)Ou  stDaujig  bte  funfuubjtuaujig  5at)Ieu  ? 

2.  3^<^^S^9/  eiuunb^tDaujig,  ^njeiunb^tDanjig,  :c. 

Etc.,  etc. 


42  VERBS.  NEW    CONJUGATION.  [Les.  V. 

I.  2Btel)ieI  ift  breimal  fiinf  ? 
2.  S)reimal  fiinf  ift  fiinfje^n. 

Etc.,  etc. 

I.  a[Biet)iel  mad^t  fiinf  unb  a^t  ? 
2.  giinf  unb  ad)t  mad^t  breijeljin. 

Etc.,  etc. 
Reading  5. 

&k\iS)  unb  gleid)  gefcUt      fid^       gern. 

Like      and     like    associate  themselves  gladly. 
"  Birds  of  a  feather  flock  together.'* 

SBa§  fittb  ba§  fib  ^at^ml 

9SogeI,  bie  nid^t  fingen, 

Birds      that     not       sing, 

©toden,  bie  nic^t  flingen, 

Bells       that     not       ring, 

5pferbe,  bie  nid^t  fpringen, 

Horses   that  not        jump, 

^pifto'Ien,  bie  md]t  fra(i)en, 

Pistols       that     not       crack, 

Stinber,  bie  nid^t  lad^en, 

Children  that     not      laugh, 

2Ba^  finb  ba^  fiir  ©ad^en ! 

What    are     that   for     things  ! 
2)er  efet  ^  in  ber  fiomen^aut.^ 

(Sin  entlaufeners  ®fel  fanb  int  9Ba{be4  jufaHigs 
bie  §aut  eine^  SotDen.  gr  ftedEte  fic^  in  biefetbe,  unb 
[e^te  3Kenfdjen  unb  Stiere  in  ©d^recten.^    ©ein  ^err 


Les/  VI.]         VERBS. OLD    CONJUGATION.  43 

fu(i)te  7  it)n  uberalL^  S)er  S[el,  feinen  |)errn  crbttd enb,9 
fin(}^°  an^°  fitri^tGrlidj  311  britUen;"  er  tDoIIte  au(^ 
biefen  taufdjeit.^^  5(6er  fein  ,g)err  padte^s  t()n  an  ben 
Df)ren  imb  jprac^:  „3lnbere  magft  bu  taufc^en,  bet 
mir  Unrb  e^  bir  nidjt  gclingen,^^  icf)  fenne  bicf)  an 
beinen  langeit  D{)ren."  @r  Qab  it)m  mit  biejeu  SBorten 
cine  tiidjtige^s  %xa^t^^  ®d}tage,^7  unb  trieb  ^^  it)n 
tpieber  na(^  |)aufc. 


^  donkey. 

s  by  chance. 

9  perceiving.     ^^  seized. 

^  lion's  skin. 

6  fright. 

^°  began.           ^♦be  successful. 

3  runaway. 

^sought. 

"bray.              ^^  heavy. 

♦forest. 

^  everywhere. 

^^  deceive.         ^^  volley. 

*^  blows. 

^8  drove. 

1/ 

LESSON     VI. 

Verbs.  —  Old  Conjugation.  —  Prepositions  Govern- 
ing THE  Dative  Case. 

I-  If  a  strong  verb-stem  is  found  in  both  Ian- 
guageSy  the  principal  parts  have  the  same  vowel 
changes,  as  a  rule. 

2.  2)er  Srteftriigcr  gafi  nttr  't^tw.  SBricf  unb  gtng 

The    letter-carrier     gave     me      the      letter     and     went 

itJiebcr  nac^  bcr  Stabt* 

again        to      the       city. 

3«  Notice  the  case  of  the  direct  and  of  the  indirect 
object,  also  the  case  after  the  preposition. 

4.  In  the  Old  Conjugation,  the  Preterit  tense 
is  formed  by  changing  the  vowel  of  the  stem  ;  as, 
id)  gab,  "  I  gave,"  from  geben,  *'to  give." 


44  VERBS.  OLD    CONJUGATION.        [Les.  VI 

5.  The  past  participle  is  formed  by  prefixing  gc- 
and  adding  -(e)n,  with  a  change  in  the  vowel  of  the 
stem. 

6.  The  present  participle  is  formed  in  the  same 
manner  as  in  the  New  Conjugation. 

7.  The  endings  of  the  present  tense  are  the  same 
as  in  the  New  Conjugation. 

8.  The  Preterit  of  the  Old  Conjugation  has  no 
ending  in  the  first  and  third  persons  singular  ;  else- 
where it  takes  the  same  endings  as  the  present. 

9.  The  changes  of  vowel  in  the  preterit  and  past 
participle  are  given  in  the  list  of  all  the  verbs  of 
the  Old  Conjugation  (see  Appendix).  These  verbs 
are  to  be  thoroughly  mastered  on  account  of  their 
constant  use  and  prominence  in  the  language. 

10.  Simple  Tenses  (Indicative  Mood)  of  a  Verb  of 

THE  Old  Conjugation. 

PRINCIPAI.    PA»TS. 

Present. 

tr^  gc6c,  /^'w,  ttiir  gefictt,  we  give. 

btt  gibft^  thou  givesi.  t^r  rjcbt,  ye  give. 

@ic  ne^eit,  you  give.  ©ie  gcBcn,  you  give. 

Ct  (ji^t,  he  gives.  ftc  gcBcit,  they  give. 

Preterit. 
\^  gab,  I  gave.  'mx  ntlBeit,  we  gave. 

bu  (jabft,  thougavest.  \\^x  {jabt,  ye  gave. 

Sie  onBcai,  you  gave.  (»ie  nnbcn,  you  gave. 

er  nab,  he  gave.  |tC  gabeit,  they  gave. 


Les.  VI.]         VERBS.  ■ —  OLD    CONJUGATION. 


45 


Tmijerative. 


SINGULAR. 


geBctt  Sie,  giB  (bu), 

give^  give  thou. 


Infinitive.  • 


gcBCtt,  to  give. 


Oebctt  @tc,  gcBt  (i^t), 

give,  give  ye. 


Participles. 


PRESENT. 

gcBcnb,  giving. 


gcgcbett,  ^/W;^ 


Vocabulary. 


MASCULINE. 


letter- 


bcr    SBrieftrdgcr,    //^-? 

carrier. 

bcr  S3rtef,  //^^  /^/'^'<?r. 
bcr  ^ugcl,  />^^  <^/?'^. 

bcm  ^ifti)(c),  the  table  (dative). 

btC  SJlamiCr,  the  men. 

bem  greUttbC,  the  friend  {daX). 


FEMININE. 


btC  Xitr^  //5<f  door. 

bte  3ci^ttttg,  //^^  newspaper. 


bcm  Sicbc,  //^^  j^;z^  (dative). 

ttirf)t  me^V,  no  longer. 

friiljer,  formerly. 

ttJteber,  again. 

ttloUett,    w/7/,    ^^   willing  (see 

p.  159). 
lauter,  louder. 
banfCtt,  //^^«i  (new). 
CbCtt,  just. 


Icfctt, 
gcbcit, 
Hcgctt, 
flc^ett, 

ftC^Ctt, 

tun, 

fittgcn, 

finbeit, 

ftfirctbctt, 

fe^en, 

Note  ii. 
are  some  of 


speak  ^ 
read^ 
give, 
lie, 

go. 

stand, 
do, 
sing, 
find, 
write. 


gab, 
tag, 

ftanb, 
tat, 

faitb, 
ft^ticb, 


PAST,   PART. 

gcf^ro(i^ctt, 

gelefeit, 

gcgcbctt, 

gelegcit, 

gcgangeu, 

geftanben, 

gctatt, 

gcfungcii, 

gefttubcit, 

gefrt)ticbctt, 

gefcftett. 


Prepositions  with  the  Dative.  —  Th 

the  common  prepositions  that  govern 


f^rtriftt. 

lieft, 

gibt. 

Hegt, 

ge^t* 

ftc^t. 

int 

fittgt- 

fiubct* 

fd^rcibt. 

fie^t. 

e   following 
the  Dative 


46  VERBS.  OLD    CONJUGATION.         [Les.  VI. 

Case  only :  aii^,  out  of,  frojn  ;  bei,  at  the  house  of;  tnit,  2vith  ; 
Don,  by  (agency), /r^?;;/,  about,  of;  ^u,  to ;  nac^,  after  (time  and 
rank),  to,  tozvard. 

Exercise  VI. 

I.  S)er  Sricftrdgcr  gab  mir  biefen  Srief  fur  @te. 
2.  Sc^  banfc  fd)i3n^ ;  iuo  i[t  benn  ber  3)?ann?  3.  Sd) 
glau6e,  er  ging  nac^  ber  @tabt.  4.  S)a  tiegt  ber  93rief 
ntit  ber  3^itit^9  ^^^f  ^^^"^  Sifc^e.  5.  3Bof(en  ©ie  nicf)t 
bte  3^iti^^9  ■f^f^tt  ?  ^-  ^^^^  ^^1^  SSater  Ite[t  fie  eben. 
7.  9^un,  fo  fpred^en  @te  t)on  bem  Siebe,  tr)et(f)e^  tt)ir 
morgen  fingen.  8.  S)ie  TOdnner  bort  fprecf)en  fa  ^  ba- 
t)on.  9.  ©agten  ©ie  nic^t,  ber  95rteftrager  ging  mit 
feinem  S3ruber  nad)  ber  ©tabt?  10.  9^etn,  tneins  §err, 
\)a^  fagte  id)  nid)t  n.  3d}  fa^  hm  Sruber  nid^t. 
12.  3Sann  gefjt  ber  93rieftrager  JDieber  DorBei  ?  13.  Sc^ 
fdjreiOe  je^t  einen  Srief  au^  Stjrem  ®arten.  14.  2Ber 
fd)rieb  ben  Srief,  tt)eld)en  @ie  ^aben  ?  15.  S)a^  tt)ar 
Don  meinem  Seljrer ;  er  fd)rieb  aii^  Serlin.  16.  9Bo 
finbet  man  eine  S^i^^^S  i^^  ^'^[^^  ©tabt  ?  17.  Sc^  fanb 
fie  immer  bet  meinem  greunbe,  33raun.  18.  3lber 
fanfen  @ie  bie  3^ttung  t)on  S^irem  greunbe?  19.  3Barum 
nic^t?  (£r  gibt  fie  mir  nic^t  20.  SBasi  \aim  bie 
9}?dnner  im  ®arten?  21.  ©ie  fangen  nnb  fpradjen 
bort.  22.  SBir  ge()en  t)on  ^ier  nad^  ber  ©tabt.  23.  D, 
fo  geben  @ie  meinen  Srief  bem  Srieftrager.  24.  ©e- 
Vo\^,  ba^3  tun 4  voxx  gerne. 

^  thank  prettily,  the  common  phrase  for  English  "  thank  you." 
Why,  at  beginning.  ^  Thus  always  for  Sir.  *  Note  the  German 
order :  if  an  element  of  the  predicate  precedes,  the  verb  precedes 
the  subject. 


Les.  VI.]         VERBS. OLD    CONJUGATION.  47 

Exercise  6. 

I.  What  is-lying  ^  there  on  the  table .?  2.  I  see  only 
a  newspaper.  3.  I  was-  not  -speaking  of  the  news- 
paper.   4.  Was-  (there)  not  2a  3  letter  -lying  ^  there 

1  also  ?  5.  O  yes,  I  believe  (so) ;  I  find  ^3,  3  letter 
,  now.  6.  The  letter-carrier  gave  the  letter  (to)  my 
friend.  ^  7.  Who  is  ^  your  3  friend,  ^  then  ?  8.  Is-  he 
just  -speaking  ?  9.  He  was-speaking  of  a  song  which 
we  sing.  10.  Does-  3  the  bird  in  the  garden  -sing 
also  ?  II.  Yes,  this  bird  sings  and  speaks.  12.  The 
men  are-learning  the  song  which  the  teacher  sang. 

13.  And    I    am-writing   the   song   for    my  father. 

14.  Does-  he  -sing  too  ?  15.  No,  he  sings  no  longer  ; 
he   sang  formerly  very  finely.     16.    ^Then    ^  why 

2  are-  3 you  -writing  the  song.?  17.  My  sister  sings 
it  for  my  father.  18.  Do-  you  -hear  the  bird  sing  ? 
19.   We  will  speak    ^  of -that    ^  again    ^  after    ^  the 

3  song.  20.  Do-  you  -find  the  newspaper  where  it  was 
lying.?  21.  No,  my  brother  was-reading  the  news- 
paper. 22.  I  found  nothing  on  the  table.  23.  Go 
with  me  to  the  city;  we  will  ^buy  ^a  3 newspaper 
,  there.  24.  There  stands  the  letter-carrier  by  the 
door!  25.  He  is-standing  where  he  2  stood  4  ^  yes- 
terday. 

^  Remember  that  German  has  no  progressive  form ;  use  the 
corresponding  simple  tense;  hyphens  indicate  words  which  in 
German  are  expressed  by  one.  ^  Dative.  ^  Remember  that 
German  has  no  interrogative  or  emphatic  form ;  use  the  simple 
form,  "Sings  he."  '♦In  the  subordinate  clause  the  personal 
verb  stands  last. 


48  VERBS OLD    CONJUGATION.  [Les.   VI. 

Vocabulary  for  the  Conversation. 
MASCULINE.  hud^^iahicvtvif  spell. 

bcr  23urf|fta6e,  the  letter.  fonttClt,  ca7u     See  p.  1 52. 

bic  S3ttr^ftabcil,  the  letters.  |(^  j^,j,j^  j^an. 

FEMININE.  fp^  so^  thus. 

bie  (BilbC,  the  syllable.  ^y^^^  also. 

bic  (StlBen,  the  syllables.  l^cr'fagCll,  say,  recite. 

NEUTER.  (llt^  on^  onwards. 

ba§3«^I|alienK^,^^^^^,,, 
ba^5lk,  i 

Conversation  5.  —  ^ud?ftabteren. 

I.  Sonnen  ©ie  bud^ftabieren  ? 

2.  ^a,  i($  !ann  bud^ftabieren* 
I.  2BciIlen@ie  ba^  3Bort  ,,|)anb^'  budjftabiereit  ? 
2.  SDZan  buc^ftabiert  ba^  SBort  „§anb"  fo,  F)a=ai 
en^be. 
I.  SBoCen  @ie  auc^   ba^   SSort  ,,S)ogge^^   bud)[ta- 
bieren  ? 
2.  ajian  bud^ftabiert  ba§  SBort  „®oggc"  fo,  be^o^ges 

Etc.,  etc. 
Reading  6. 

9Ber  51  fagt,  mufe^  o.\x^  S  [agcit 

Who    A     says,  must  B      say. 

'from  tniiffen. 

"  If  you  begin,  you  must  go  on." 
•^'It  is  the  first  step  that  costs." 


Les.  yil.]       VERBS.  OLD    CONJUGATION.  49 

3Ber  ^  ben  ^Pfennig  ^  ntd)t  ef)rt,3 
3ft  beg  2:a(erg4  ntc£)t  it)ert.5 

'whoever.       ^  penny.       ^  honors.       "*  thaler.       ^worthy. 

"  Take  care  of  the  pence,  and  the 
pounds  will  take  care  of  themselves." 

Sic  tDtlH  %(inht  ^  mx^  hit  SJicnc^ 

@ine  iDtlbe  Staube,  tx)eIdE)e  auf  einer  Sries  am  93acE)e 
jafe,4  erbltcfte  5  cine  S5iene,  bie  in  bag  9Saffer  gefaKen 
tvav  nnb  mit  ben  2BeIIen  ^  beg  Sadjeg  fam|)fte,7  tDe(d)e 
brol^ten^  fie  fort5nreifeen.9  ,,2Barte,^°  armeg  SSogelein,'' 
rief"  bie  Sanbe,  „id)  ii:)tll  bir  ein  ©c^tffdjen  fcE)iden,'^ 
anf  Jnetdiem  bn  bid^  retten^3  !annft.''  @ie  picftei4 
ein  Sanmblatt^s  ab,Hunb  njarf^^  eg  il)r  Ijinnnter.^^ 
S)ie  93iene  rettete  fid)  nnb  banfte  iljrer  SBo^Itaterin.  '7 


'  dove.           ^  perceived. 

9  carry  a\^ 

ray. 

"  rescue. 

2  bee.             ^  waves. 

'°wait. 

''^  picked  off. 

3  alder.           ^  struggled. 

"  cried. 

''  leaf. 

-♦was  sitting. « threatened. 

^^send. 
^^benefactress. 

\ 

^^  threw  down. 

LESSON   VII. 

Verbs.  —  Old   Conjugation. — Classes   and    Irregu- 
larities. —  Prepositions  with   Dative 
AND  Accusative. 

I.   T/ie  principal  parts  of  the  commonest  strong 
verbs  should  be  memorized  and  reviewed  constantly. 


50  VERBS.  OLD    CONJUGATION.       [Les.  VII. 

2.  ^cr  Sd^uler  nimmt  ben  ^nt  ntt^t  qnt  in  bic 

The       pupil         takes       his       hat       not     wellinto  his 

^ani  unb  IS^t  if)n  fatten. 

hand     and    lets      it        fall. 

3.  Memorize  this  sentence  after  examining  it 
carefully.  Note  the  forms  nimmt  and  lafet ;  also  the 
use  of  the  definite  article  instead  of  a  possessive 
adjective. 

4»  The  Strong  Verbs  are  the  backbone  of  the 
vocabulary  in  the  German.  It  is  important  that  they 
be  mastered  as  soon  as  possible.  Those  given  in 
Lessons  VI,  VII  and  VIII,  being  among  the  most 
common,  should  be  thoroughly  memorized  at  once. 

$•  There  are  but  188  Strong  Verbs  in  modern 
German,  including  many  which  may  also  be  used 
Weak,  or  which  have  but  one  part  Strong. 

6.  Marks  of  Weak  Verbs.  A  verb  ending  in 
-etn,  -ern,  -terert,  or  having  more  than  one  syllable 
in  its  stem,  is  weak.  Also,  with  few  exceptions,  a 
verb  whose  stem-vowel  is  0,  u,  eu,  or  any  Um- 
laut. In  a  word,  most  Strong  Verbs  are  known  by 
the  vowels  a,  e,  i,  ci,  and  ie ;  but  of  course  not  all 
verbs  with  these  vowels  are  Strong. 

7-  Classes  of  Strong  Verbs.  In  historical  gram- 
mars Strong  Verbs  are  grouped  in  accordance  with 
their  primitive  community  of  SIHaut.  Some  of 
these  groups  have  remained  intact,  or  fairly  so,  and 
the  learner  may  save  much  time  by  taking  advantage 
of  this  fact. 


Les.,VII.]      verbs.  —  OLD    CONJUGATION.  51 

a.  Class  I,  stem-vowel  ei,  comprises  43  verbs, 
all  changing  ei  to  t  or  ie  in  both  preterit  and  past 
participle.  Whether  the  change  is  i  or  ie,  de- 
pends on  whether  the  vowel  is  short  or  long  by  po- 
sition, thus  fc^retben,  fc^rieb,  ge[c^rte6en,  but  reiten,  ritt, 
geritten.  However,  the  sound-change  is  essentially 
the  same,  and  the  learner  should  acquire  the  cadence 
of  ei,  ie,  ie.  There  is  but  one  exception  to  this 
rule,  Ijei^ett,  f)ie§,  getjei^en. 

b.  Class  II,  stem-vowel  ie,  comprises  25  verbs, 
all  changing  ie  to  0  in  both  preterit  and  past 
participle  ;  thus  fttegen,  f(og,  geflogen.  Siegen,  lag,  ge- 
legen,  is  the  one  exception  to  this  rule.  Three  verbs 
in  ii  also  belong  here. 

c.  Class  III,  group  i,  stem  vowel  in  i  -f  n  +  any 
other  consonant,  comprises  18  verbs,  all  changing 
i  to  a,  preterit,  and  it,  past  participle,  as  [ingen, 
fang,  gefungen.  6  verbs  in  i  +  double  nasal,  change 
i  to  a  and  0,  as  beginnen,  begann,  begonnen,  and  2 
change  i  to  0  and  0.  Aside  from  these  the  only 
Strong  Verbs  in  i  are  fit^en,  [a^,  gefeffen,  and  bitten, 
\)oX,  gebeten. 

d.  Class  III,  group  2,  stem  vowel  in  e  +  I  or 
r  +  any  other  consonant,  comprises  10  verbs  chang- 
ing e  to  a  and  0,  as  fterben,  ftarb,  geftorben.  Sim- 
ilarly change  most  Strong  Verbs  in  e  +  d),  cf,  or 
%  as  brei^en,  brad),  gebro^en.     The  learner  should 


52  VERBS. OLD    CONJUGATION.      [Les.  VII. 

hunt  out  the  verbs  of  these  classes  and  recite  them 
one  after  another.  It  will  be  seen  that  they  com- 
prise in  all  about  lOO  of  the  total  of  i88. 

8.  Small  Irregularities.  Most  Strong  Verbs  in 
e,  except  ge'^ert  and  [tef)en,  change  this  vowel  to  ie 
or  (if  short)  t,  in  the  2d  and  3d  persons  of  the 
singular  indicative  and  imperative.  Strong  Verbs 
in  a,  except  fc^affeu  and  fc^aUen,  umlaut  the  a  in 
the  same  forms. 

In  the  above  cases,  if  the  verb  stem  ends  in  -t,  the  3d  person 
singular  does  not  add  the  regular  ending.  If  the  stem  ends  in 
an  8  sound  the  2d  person  singular  may  add  either  -eft,  or  simply 
-t,  as  licfcft  or  Ucft,  from  (efen. 

Vocabulary. 

Masculine.  Neuter. 

bet  '^nltf  the  desk.  ba§  f^Cttftcr,  the  window. 

bcr  8ttt^I,  the  chair,  %^^  gcbettttcffer,  the  penknife. 

bet  SBlciftift   the  lead-pencil.  \st!i^  ^JJoti^ 'Bttrf),  the  notebook. 

Cbctt,  just  now. 

Feminine.  ftatf,  strong. 

bie  gcbcr,  the  feather.  S^^^f  ^^^^(idy. 

bic  (8djrcib-)fcbcr,  the  pen.  ^0(^,  indeed,  nevertheless,  still, 
bic  etoljlfcbcr,  the  steel  pen.  '^h  •'  (the  last  always  in  ex- 

bte  ScftiOtt,  the  lesson  (division  postulation  or  objection  or 

of  a  text-book).  ^eutC,  to-day.  [surprise). 

bie  %a\^t,  the  pocket.  borgeftern,  day  before  yesterday. 

(egett,  lay,  put  (weak). 

Strong  Verbs. 

^\t^t%fly.^n,  flcflogett* 
sicken,  draw,  pull,  509,  gesogeit. 
fi^en,  sit,  take  a  seat,  fa§,  gcfcffett. 
laffen,  let,  make  {to  do),  Uefe,  gelaffen,  (agt 


Les.  VII.]      VERBS.  —  OLD    CONJUGATION.  53 

f aHctt,  fall,  ftel,  gcf aHcit,  f aWt, 
Brcti^ctt,  break,  firac^,  gcBrori^eit,  Brt^t. 
ncftmctt,  ^^^^,  ttd^m,  gettontmctt,  nimmt 
fci^ttcibctt,  cut,  f^ttitt,  gcfr^nittciu 

Irregular  Weak  Verbs. 

ttiiffctt,  >^/^^w  {a  fact),  ttjugte,  getnu^t,  ttieij^ 

Note  12.  —  Prepositions  with  Dative  or  Accusative :  —  The 

following  common  prepositions  govern  the  dative  case  when  indi- 
cating position,  the  accusative  when  indicating  motion  toward : 
in,  /«,  into ;  an,  by,  at,  to,  on  (with  dates),  up  to ;  auf,  07t,  upon, 
for  (anticipated  date) ;  t)Or,  before  ;  iiber,  above,  over,  about;  Ulttcr, 
below,  under. 

Exercise  VII. 

I.  S)er  9?ogeI  flog  burd^  ba^  3^^^^^  ^^b  fa§'  auf 
meinen  ©tul^l  2.  Sd)  fa^  ben  SSoget  aud),  aber  e^ 
trar  be^  Sef)rer^  ©tutjl,  auf  iretd^en  er  fa^.  3.  S)er 
SSogel  Ite^  eine  ^eber  fallen.  4.  S)er  Se^^rer  fd^nitt 
au^  bie[er  geber  eine  ©c^retbfeber.  5.  (Sr  fc^netbet  mtt 
etnem  gebermeffer.  6.  ©d^rteb  bie  geber  gut  ?  7.  9?etn, 
bie  geber  tuar  nid)t  ftar!  genug;  fie  brad^.  8.  S)er 
Seljter  aber^  jog  eine  @tat)Ifeber  au^  ber3  Safd^e. 
9.  S^reiben  @ie  ba^  in  %\)x  9?otijbu^  ?  10.  9Ba^  ftei)t 
nid)t  al[e^4  in  meinem  S^otijbud^  ?  n.  SBei^  ber  Seljrer, 
tr)a§  @ie  fc^reiben  ?  12.  9?id^t  immer;  id^  fd^rieb  bod^  5 
t)orgeftern  iiber  ben  Sel)rer  felbft.  13.  93ringen  @ie 
Sf)r  Syfotijbud^  an  ben  5pult.  14.  Slun  @ie  ba^  pa- 
pier in  bie  %<x\i)t.  15.  Sd^  tpu^te  nid^t,  toa^  @ie 
fagten.     16.  2)er  ©d^uler  liefe  ba^  S3u^  auf  bem  Sifc^e 


54  VERBS.  —  OLD    CONJUGATION.      [Les.  Vll. 

be^  Sef)rer^.     17.  3c^  legte  ha§  papier  auf  ben  ©tu^I. 

18.  aSa^  ift  bie  Seftion  auf^  £)eute?  19.  2)ag  tt)ei§ 
id)  nid^t ;  @ie  tDtffen  boc^ !  20.  SBir  ftanben  an  bent 
Stifd^e,  auf  n)elct)em  bie  Siti^er  lagen. 

'  ®i^en  with  auf  -4-  accusative  =  \id)  fe^en,  which  would  be  more 
common  ;  tr. '  perched.'  ^ 5lber  may  take  any  place  where  *  however' 
may  stand.  ^  See  par.  3,  this  Lesson.  *Tr.  with  2Ba8.  ^  Tr. 
'  why,'  at  beginning.     ^  auf  =  *for'  with  future  time  fixing  duties. 

Exercise  7. 
I.  Who  is  sitting  there  in  the  chair  by  the  door.? 

2.  Why, I  I  do  not  know;  I  ^did  ^not  ,see  2the  jChain 

3.  The  brother  of  the  pupil  was  sitting  by  the  table. 

4.  This  man  cut  a  pen  for  the  teacher.  5.  He  drew 
a  penknife  out-of  his  pocket.  6.  But  ^  the  teacher 
writes  with  a  steel-pen.  7.  His  pen  is  lying  ^on 
3  the  ^table  ^ already.  8.  His  lead-pencil  broke 
day  before  yesterday.  9.  The  pencil  fell  upon  the 
chair  before  the  table.  10.  Those  chairs  stood  be- 
fore the  window,  n.  Bring  your  chair  to  3  the  win- 
dow. 12.  We  laid  our  notebooks  upon  the  table. 
13.  J  We  2  are  ^  already  ^  learning  the  lesson  for  to- 
morrow. 14.  Does  the  teacher  let  you  sing  ?  15.  Yes, 
indeed,  he  lets  us  do  what  we  please.  4  16.  That  is 
indeed  5  a  teacher  !  17.  Well,  I  don't  know  ;  do  you 
learn  much .?  18.  He   did   not    know  that   I   sing. 

19.  The  bird  sings  too,  but  it  is  not-a  ^  pupil.  20.  The 
bird  2 just  ,  flew  through  the  room.  21.  Your  pen 
is  lying  under  my  note-book.     22.  Thank  you  ;   we 


Les.  VII.]       VERBS.  OLD    CONJUGATION.  55 

leave  you  here  in  the  room  with  the  teacher.  23.  He 
will  find  (finds)  7  his  hat  on  the  chair  before  the 
door.  24.  He  takes  his  hat  and  goes.  25.  We  are 
going  after  the  teacher. 

*  bod)  after  verb.  *  Place  somewhere  else  than  at  beginning. 
3 an  with  ace.  or  gu  with  dat. ;  use  contraction  with  article. 
*Tr.  tDoUeit  'will.'  ^  aber  bod^.  ^  Trans,  'no,'  feiii.  "^  The  present 
is  often  used  for  the  future. 

Vocabulary  for  the  Conversation. 

Masculine.  Neuter. 

bcr  (5a^,  the  sentence.  btt)^  @ttbe,  the  end. 

bC^  Sa^eig  (genitive).  btti^  gtaQC^etri^Cn,  the  interro- 

ber  5lnfang,  the  beginning.  gatio7i -point. 

ber  'imi   the  sound.  0tt§f».rC(DeH,  pronounce. 

Feminine.  CigCtttUti^,  really. 

W  SJctomtltg,  the  accent.  geWP^ltUri^,  usually. 

t>Xt  SSlxiit,  the  middle. 

bie  SJorfilbe,  the  prefix. 

Conversation  6.  —  It)ort  unb  £aut 

I.  aSa^  i[t  ba^  SBort  am  Slnfang  be^  ©a|e^? 

2.  S)a§  SBort  am  3lnfang  biefeg  ©a^e§  tft  „h:)a§\ 
I.  aSie  bud^ftabieren  @ie  ba^  SBort  ,,@a^^'  ? 

2.  ^d^  bu^ftabiere  e§  fo :   e^,  a^,  te,  i\z\, 
I.  Sttc^tig;   aber  tt)a^  tft  ber  Saut  am  Slnfattg? 

2.  %ij   glaube  ber  Saut  am  2lnfang  tft  mef)r  tDte 
ba§  z  auf  (gnglifd^. 
I.  SBo  fadt  bie  93etonung  auf  bem  aSort  ^^Infaug"? 

2.  SDie  SSetonung  fdKt  auf  bie  SSorfilbe, 


56  VERBS. OLD    CONJUGATION.       [Les.  VII. 

I.  SBte  t)eifet  ber  Su^ftabe  in  ber  SKitte  be^  28orte^? 

2.  S)a§  ift  eigentU(^  jti:)ei  33uc^[ta6en. 
I.  ^onnen  @te  biefe  95u(f)ftaben  au^fpretf)en  ? 

2.  3<^  ^^^^  f^^  nennen ;   fie  ^ei^en  te4fet. 
I.  3Bag  fur  ein  5pun!t  ftef)t  gelx)of)nItd^  am  @nbe  be^ 
©a|e^  ? 

2.  2)a§  nennt  man  nur  einen  ^un!t. 

Etc.,  etc. 
Reading  7. 

SDer  SDtenfc^  benft'S,  ®ott  tenft'g. 

thinks  it  guides  it 

"  Man  proposes,  God  disposes." 

S^  t)atf  einen  Sameraben, 
©inen  beffern  finbft  bu  nit ' ; 
S)ie  Xrommel  feeing  jum  ©treite, 

drum         beat       for      battle 

(£r  ging  an  meiner  ©eite, 

side 

Sn  gteid^em  @d)ritt  unb  Stritt  (Repeat). 

equal  pace  step 

©ine  ^uget  fam  geftogen; 

bullet  flying 

@ilt  '^  mir  ober  gilt  e§  bir? 

Is     it  for  me 

*  dialect  form  of  nl^t. 


Les.  VIII.]     VERBS. COMPOUND   TENSES.  5/ 

Sl)n  f)at  e^  tDeggeriffen, 

snatched  away 

©r  liegt  mtr  t)or  ben  '^ix'^tn, 

at      my 

211^  wax'  '§  ein  Stiid  t)on  mtr.  (Repeat.) 

As     were    it 

SBtH  ntir  bie  §anb  nod^  reid^en, 

(He)     wants  give 

S)tett)eit  id)  eben  lab'. 

While   I  am  just  loading 

„Sann  btr  bie  §anb  nid^t  geben; 
SBIetb'  bu  tm  ett)'gen  Seben, 

eternal        life 

9Ketn  guter  ^amerab.'^  (Repeat). 

comrade.  Subtoig  U^lonb. 

LESSON    VIII. 

Verbs. —  Compound  Tenses. —  ^ahtn  and  fcin. 

1.  Memorize  the  commonest  verbs  that  take  fetn 
as  auxiliary^  and  learn  the  principle  that  determines 
this  ;  the  great  majority  take  ^aben. 

2.  2)ct  SBatcr  ift  gefomttieti  uub  ^tA  iittiS  cin  Suc^ 

Father      has        come        and    has      us       a      book 

gctrari^t 

brought. 

3.  Learn  this  sentence ;  notice  the  auxiliary 
which  represents  *  has '  in  each  case,  and  the  kind 
of  verb  with  which  each  is  used,  also  the  position 
of  the  past  participle. 

4.  The  compound  tenses  are  formed  by  uniting 


S8  VERBS.  COMPOUND    TENSES.      [Les.  VTII. 

one  of  the  auxiliaries  of  tense  (f)aben,  feitt,  iDerben) 
with  participle  or  infinitive  of  the  verb  in  question. 

5.  The  auxiliary  hahm  (or  fein)  with  the  past 
participle  of  the  verb  forms  the  perfect  and  pluper- 
fect tenses  and  perfect  infinitive :  as  ic^  i)abc  ge= 
liebt,  *  I  have  loved  ' ;  ic^  l^atk  geltebt, '  I  had  loved ' ; 
gettebt  i)abm,  *  to  have  loved.* 

6.  The  auxiliary  Itierben  with  the  infinitives  of  the 
principal  verb  forms  the  future  tenses  :  as  16)  tDerbe 
tieben,  'I  shall  love';  x^  tt)erbe  geltebt  ijobtn,  *I 
shall  have  loved.' 

7.  Thus  li:)erben  as  an  auxiliary  must  be  distin- 
guished from  tt)erben  as  an  independent  verb.  As 
an  auxiliary  the  word  means  *  shall '  in  the  first  per- 
son, but  '  wilt/  *  will,'  in  the  second  and  third.  In 
the  future  of  the  independent  verb  tuerben  the  two 
occur  together,  id)  iDcrbe  tDcrben,  '  I  shall  become.' 

8.  fein  is  used  instead  of  f)dbtn  as  tense  auxiliary 
in  the  case  of  a  small  number  of  verbs,  mostly  of 
frequent  occurrence.  The  following  general  rule 
will  aid  the  memory  : 

Transitive  verbs  always  take  J^aficn ;  but  some 
intransitives  (those  denoting  change  of  place  or 
conditio}!)  take  fcitt,  or  either  fcttt  or  ^a6cn^  the  latter 
when  the  mode  or  the  duration  of  motion  is  em- 
phasized, for  example  :  (£r  ift  nad)  ber  ©tabt  geritten, 
he  has  ridden  to  the  city ;  but  @r  l^at  JtDet  (^tlUlben 
geritten,  he  rode  two  miles  (or  hours). 


Les/VIII.]     verbs. COMPOUND    TENSES.  59 

9.  The  following   are  the  most  common  of  those 
that  usually  take  fcin  : 

feitt  only :  feitt  or  f^dbtn : 

fcin,  <5<f.  fasten,  go, fare.  fliegeit,  fly. 

tticrben,  become,  reiten,  ride.  ^\t\t\\^  flow. 

ge^eit,  go.  laufeit,  run.  ftcigcn,  rise. 

fommeii,  come.  fotgen,  >//^w.  5tcl)ett,  move. 

ftcrBctt,  die.  fatten,  fall.  ibegegncn,  meet. 

gefc^e^cn,  happen.  f^nngen,  y«w/. 

B(ei(en,  remain. 

10.  Inflection  of  the  Compound  Tenses,  Indicative 

Mood. 

Perfect. 

i^  ^aBe  gcItcBt,  I  have  loved  {I  have  been  loving). 
'^Xi  ^aft  ncUefit,  thou  hast  loved  {thou  hast  been  loving). 
@ic  l^dBen  geticBt,  you  have  loved  (you  have  been  loving). 
tX  l^at  gelieBt,  he  has  loved  {he  has  bee7i  loving^. 

'mx  ^aBcn  gcliebt,  we  have  loved. 
t^r  \\tx\si  gelicBt,  ye  have  loved. 
Sic  ^aBcn  gclicBt,  you  have  loved. 
fie  l^aBcn  gcHcBt,  they  have  loved. 

Pluperfect. 

\^  ftattC  gelicBt,  /  had  loved. 

'^Vi  ^attcft  gclick,  thou  hadst  loved. 

Sic  fatten  gelicBt,  you  had  loved. 
cr  I)attc  gcIicBt,  /^<?  /^^^  loved. 

'mx  l^tiiitW  gcUcBt,  ^^  had  loved. 
t^r  ^attet  OCliefit,  ye  had  loved. 

Sic  l^attcn  oeltcbt,  you  had  loved. 
fie  fatten  gclicBt,  they  had  loved^ 


60  VERBS. COMPOUND    TENSES.    [Les,  VIII. 

Future. 
x^  tticrbc  litUn,  I  shall  love, 
*^Xi  ttJirft  licbett,  thou  wilt  love. 

(Sic  merben  licbcn,  you  will  love. 
er  ttihb  Hcbctt,  /^<f  w/7/  love. 

ttJir  ttierbctt  licbcit,  w^  shall  love. 
i^r  ttierbet  licbcit,  ye  will  love. 
@ie  mcrbcit  (icbcn,  you  willlove. 
fte  tticrben  Uebeit,  they  will  love. 

Future  Perfect. 
i(^  tticrbc  gcttcbt  ^abCIt,  /shall  have  loved. 

bu  toitft  geliebt  ^abcn,  ^/5^«  «////  /^^z/^  loved. 

(Sic  ttlCrbCtt  gcUcbt  JabCU,  you  will  have  loved. 
tX  ttJirb  gcHcbt  ^abcn,  he  will  have  loved. 

ttJir  tticrben  gcUcfit  ^abett,  we  shall  have  loved. 
S^X  ttlCrbct  gcticbt  ^Obcu,  ye  will  have  loved. 
®ic  mcrbCtt  gelicbt  ^abcn^  you  will  have  loz>ed. 
fie  tticrben  gelicbt  ^^ahtXif  they  will  have  loved. 

Infinitive. 
gcHebt  ^aben,  to  have  loved. 

Vocabulary. 

MASCULINE.  NEUTER. 

ber  JBa^n^of,  the  station.  ba!^  ©(a^,  the  glass. 

bcr  3w9r  ^^^  train.  '^^^  5lbCttbbrot  (evening  bread), 

bcr  %ttf  the  tea.  the  supper^  tea. 

ber  ^nobe,  the  boy.  ba§  XtjCa'tcr,  the  theatre. 

ber  9^adftmittag,  the  afternoon.  'tit  SBiUete,  the  tickets. 

bie^naben, //5^%^.  ^ente  nat^mittag,    this   after- 

FEMININE.  n007l. 

bic  2^0ffe,  the  cup.  \)t\\it  a^t\\\>f  this  evening. 

bic  2^ante,  the  aunt.  ba(b^  soon.  [ously. 

bie  SWeile  (-n),  ^>^<f  w//^,  miles.       flciHitJ,    industrious,    industri- 


Les/VIII.]     verbs. COMPOUND   TENSES.  6 1 

mel)r,  more,  '^^x\^tx^  previously,  first, 

no^  ntcfit,  not  yet.  ttiann,  when  ? 

StieitbBrot  cjfcn  (or  nt^mtxi),     focictt,  Just  now. 

take  tea,  \^^t\^^  i?nmediately. 

Strong  Verbs  with  fcin: 
fowmett,  come,  !aw,  gcfommen* 
reiten,  ride  (horseback),  rttt,  gcnttctt* 
blciBctt,  remain,  BUcB,  gebtic^ett* 
ftcigctt,  mount  {ox  descend),  ftieg,  gefttegett* 
(aufctt,  r««  (the  gait),  (icf,  gclaufctt,  (auft* 
faljten,  r/V/^  (in  vehicle),  ftt|ir,  gefa^rcn,  fri^rt 
fterien,  ^^>,  ftarb,  gcftorbcn,  fttrbt. 
gcfd^e^ctt,  /5^/a«,  geftifta^,  gcfdic^ctt,  geft^ie^t 

With  l^aBcn: 
trinfen,  drink,  ttanf,  getrmifett* 
Httett,  «jv^  {request),  M\f  gcBcteti   {for,  um). 

Declension  of  i(j^,  /. 
Singular.  Plural. 

Norn,     ic^,  /.  ttjir,  «^<f. 

Gen.      nteittcr  (mcitt),  of  me,         unfcr,  of  us, 
Dat.      mir,  /^  w<f.  tttti^,  to  us. 

Ace.        mirift,  me.  tttt)^,  wj. 

Note  13.  —  The  English  order  in  "  I  have  bought  a  house," 
"  I  will  buy  a  house,"  becomes  in  German,  "  I  have  a  house 
bought,"  "  I  will  a  house  buy  " ;  that  is,  in  compound  forms  of 
the  verb,  th.e  part,  or  inf.  comes  at  the  end  of  the  clause.  For  par- 
ticular statement  of  the  order  of  the  German  sentence,  see 
Lessons  XXV  and  XXVI. 

Exercise  VIII. 

1.  SBa^  ^aben  bie  ^aben  t)eute  nad^mtttag  getan 
(or  gemac^t)  ?  2.  @ie  t)tiben  fteifetg  gefptett  iinb  getai^t ; 
fie  tperben  aber  ^eute  abenb  meljr  tadjen.    3.  28a^ 


62  VERBS.  COMPOUND    TENSES.      [Les.  VIII. 

tt)erben  tvxx  benn  I)eute  abenb  madden  ?  4.  3Bir  tDerben 
aUe  in^  Sweater  ge^en.  5.  9tber  irerben  tuir  ntd)t 
t)orf)er  2Ibenb6rot  ne{)men  ?  6.  S(^  ^abe  f(f)on  etnc 
Xaffe  ^  2;ee  getrunfen.  7.  S(^  bitte  @ie :  6tet6en  @te 
jum  3l6enbbrot.  8.  S(f)  bebaure,^  \6)  gef)e  fogleic^ 
jum  S3aI)nf)of.  9.  SIber  ber  3ug  ift  nod)  nid^t  gcfom- 
men.  10.  ©ie  ^naben  iDoCen  aud^  jum  33a{)n{)of  gei)en, 
II.  3f)re  Slante  tt)trb  mtt  biefem  3uge  fommen.  12.  @te 
[inb  f(i)on  t)on  bem  3i^9^  ge!ommen.  13.  3(^  glaube, 
e^  ift  etoa^  gefc^eljen.  14.  Sa,  fie  f)aben  e^  mir  ge* 
fagt.  15.  §aben  @ie  e^  f^on  get)6rt?  16.  St)re  SCante 
n)irb  nidEjt  fommen ;  fie  ift  Dorgeftern  geftorben,  17.  SBir 
fjatten  biefe  STante  fet)r  geliebt.  18.  28ir  h^erben  alfo 
fjeute  abenb  md)t  in§  Sl{)eater  get)en.  19.  Unb  tvxx 
bleiben  bodE)  bei  Sf)nen  3,  20.  "^d^  bitte  ©ie  um  ein 
®Ia§  SBaffer.  21.  @ie  I)aben  ein  ®tM  9J?ufi!  gelernt 
unb  tDerben  e^  fiir  un^  fingen.  22.  Sc^  gtaube,  tDir 
f)aben  e^  fd^on  get)6rt.  23.  Slber  iDir  tDoIIen  e^  tt)ieber 
f)6ren. 

*  See  German  Exercise  V,  note  2.     ®Th\is,  without  object  ex- 
pressed, implied  '  that  I  cannot.*  ^  jyou  (dat.  of  @ie). 

Exercise  8. 
I.  My  aunt  has  ^always  3  loved  ,me.  2.  But  have 
you  not  heard  ?  She  has  just  died.  3.  No,  I  had 
not  yet  heard  it.  4.  Is  (stands)  it  in  the  newspaper  ? 
5.  Ido  not  know  ;  the  newspaper  has  not  come  this 
afternoon,  6.  Yes,  here  ^it  ,  stands:  *<  She  had  just 


Les/VIII.]     verbs.  —  COMPOUND   TENSES.  63 

drunk  a  cup  (of)  tea."  7.  Will  you  not  stay  3  to  ^tea 
I  with  I  2  us  .?  8.  Have  you  not  already  eaten  supper.? 
9.  ,We  jhave  ^ driven  ^twenty  ^ miles  3  this  ^ after- 
noon. 10.  We  have  ^  drunk  3  nothing  ,this  ^after- 
noon.  ii.jThen^jWe  ^will  stay  with  you.  12.  Have 
you  brought  the  friends  from  the  station  .?  13.  Our 
friends  have  just  come  from  the  train.  14.  They 
had  just  descended  from  the  train.  15.  Have  they 
already  supped  (taken  supper) }  16.  They  have  only 
drunk  a  cup  (of)  tea.  17.  That  is  nothing,  they  will 
surely  take  supper  with  us.  18.  What  has  happened  ? 
What  have  you  done  ?  19.  The  cup  has  fallen ;  I 
have  broken  it.  20.  We  shall  soon  find  my  brother^s 
cup.  21.  I  have  already  found  it.  3  22.  Our  friends 
wish  to  go  to  the  theater.  23.  They  have  asked  me 
for  three  tickets.     24.  Will  you  give  us  your  tickets  ? 

'bet.     *3l(fo.     ^  See  Exercise  4,  note  i. 

Vocabulary  for  the  Conversation. 

MASCULINE.  dn^  bCUtfc^,  <«  German. 

bet  ©d^r  ^^^  sentence.  ttlOtlOtt,  of  ox  about  what? 

bet  DflebctetJ,  the  part  of  speech.  I)0ttbeltt  {handle),  treat. 
bic    O^icbctetle,     the    parts    of      tt>a§  fiir  {what for),  what  kind 
speech.  of? 

FEMININE.  Cttt^al'tCtt,  contain. 

bic  (^ramma'tif,  the  grammar,  Ctttplt,  contains. 

NEUTER. 

\stk^  Scttwott  (SSerbum),  the  verb. 

'^^^  ^aulJttnort  (®ubftantit)'),  the  noun. 

btt)^  f^iirttiort  (^rono'men),  the  pronoun. 


64  VERBS. COMPOUND    TENSES.       [Les.  VIII. 

t>a§  (Jifleufrfiafti^ttlOrt  (^tbjeftiJj')/  the  adjective. 
\s^^  %t\^it^im^xi  (ber  2lrti'!el),  the  article. 
\st{^  S'lft^ttlDrt  (D^umera'Ie),  the  numeral. 
^ta^  ^JicbcUttlOrt  (5lbt)er'bium),  the  adverb. 

ba)§  ^orttJort  (bie  ^re))ofttionO,  the  preposition. 

\sii^  23ittbcttiort,  (bie  ^onjiinftionO, 

\s^%  5tit!§nifmigi§ttiort  (bie  Snterjeftion'),  ^//^  i?iterjection. 

Conversation  7. —  Die  Hebcteile. 
I.  Wit  I)etfet  "verb"  auf  beutfi^? 

2.  "Verb"  ^ei^t  auf  beutfd;  ,,ba^  ^eittDort." 

Etc.,  etc. 

I.  SBie  t)iele  3^it^t)rter  ^at  biefer  @a^? 
2.  3)iefer  ©a$  ^at  nur  ein  S^ittDort. 

Etc.,  etc. 

I.  3Bot)on  l^anbelt  bie  ©rantmati!? 

2.  ®te  ©rammatil  ^anbelt  t)on  ben  Slebeteilen. 
I.  aSa^  fiir  ein  ^Rebeteit  ift  ,,§au^''  ? 

2.  „§aug"  ift  ein  §am)ttt)ort. 

Etc.,  etc. 

I.  SBie  l^ei^t  ba^  @pric^tt)ort  in  biefer  Slufgabe? 
2.  ®a§  ©^)rid^h)ort  in  biefer  Slufgabe  ^ei^t,  „®IudE 
unb  ©(a§/'  :c. 

Etc.,  etc. 

1.  3Bie  t)iele  §aupttt)6rter  entplt  e^  ? 
2.  (S§  ent^cilt  jtt)ei  §au))ttt)orter. 

Etc.,  etc. 
Reading  8. 
^tttii!^  too  tt* 

OIM  unb  ®Ia§,  tnie  balb  bri^t'  ba^. 

Happiness  how  soon  breaks       that, 

^from  bred^en, 
"Fortune  hath  wings." 


Les.  IX.]        VERBS. COMPOUND    TENSES.  6$ 

2Ba§  hn  nt^t  tDtllft,  baB  man  bir  tu\^ 

What  wilt,      that  to-thee  do, 

S)a^  fiig'^  auc^  leinem  anbern  ju. 

That      do        also       no         other        to. 
^fortUC.  ^forfugc, 

9Som  ^ttntnel  !ommt  e^, 
3um  ^tmmet  ftetgt^  e^, 
Unb  tDieber^  ntebers 
3ur  (Srbe  mu^  e^, 
(Str)t9  4  tt)ec£)fetnb.5 

©oet^c. 
'rises.  *  again.  'down.  *  eternally.  *  changing. 

LESSON     IX. 

Compound  Tenses.  —  Correspondence  of  Tenses. 

I  •  Do  not  translate  tenses  literally,  but  seek  and 
use  the  corresponding  tense  in  the  other  language, 

2.  2)cr  65to|ftiatcr  ift  gcftetn  in  bcr  S^ule  geitiefctt 

Grandfather  was  yesterday  in  (the)  school        [been] 

ttiib  f  ommt  ntorgcn  toicber* 

and  (will)  come  to-morrow  again. 

3.  Learn  this  sentence.  Notice  the  use  of  the 
article  before  ®rofet3ater ;  notice  especially  the  per- 
fect tense  (ift  getDefen)  for  the  English  past,  and 
the  present  for  the  future. 

4.  German  like  English  uses  the  present  tense 
for  the  future,  but  still  more  freely,  as  SdE)  gefje  mor^ 


66  VERBS. —  COMPOUND    TENSES.         [Les.  IX. 

gen  nad)  ber  ©tabt,  I  go  {am  going,  shall  go)  to  the 
city  to-morrow  ;  %^  fage  e^  ntd^t,  /  shall  not  say  it 
(as  well  as,  /  do  not  say  it). 

5.  German  uses  the  present  tense  for  the  English 
perfect,  where  the  latter  represents  a  past  condi- 
tion continuing  in  the  present,  as  9Bir  tDof)nen  fdjort 
jtDet  Sci^re  ^ter,  We  have  been  living  here  two  years, 

6.  The  German  preterit  corresponds  to  the 
English  past  progressive  and  to  the  simple  past  in 
consecutive  narrative  (the  historical  tense),  as,  (£r 
fc^rieb  in  bem  ©arten,  He  was  writing  in  the  garden; 
Scf)  fam,  tc^  fat),  id)  ftegte,  /  came,  I  saw,  I  conquered, 

7.  But  the  German  uses  the  perfect  for  the  Eng- 
lish past  in  colloquial  and  disconnected  sentences, 
as  Sd)  t)abe  i^ren  Sruber  geftern  gefet)en,  I  saw  your 
brother  yesterday ;  (Jolumbu^  t)at  Slmerifa  entbedt, 
Columbus  discovered  America, 

8.  The  idioms  in  5,  6,  7,  above  are  among  the 
most  characteristic  in  German  and  should  be  care- 
fully observed  and  practiced.  In  the  exercises 
hitherto  they  have  been  avoided,  but  this  and  the 
following  lessons  will  use  them  freely. 

9.  The  verbs  I)aben,  fein,  ii:)erben,  being  so  common, 
should  be  thoroughly  memorized,  hence  a  synopsis 
of  them  is  given  herewith.  The  form  with  the  pro- 
noun @ie,  being  the  only  one  used  in  polite  con- 
versation, should  be  given  regularly  in  reciting 
paradigms. 


Les.  ix.]        VERBS.  COMt'OUND    TENSES.  6j 

10.  Compound  Tenses  of  l^aBett,  in  the  Indicative  Mood. 

Perfect, 
t^  l^afic  gc^afit,  /  have  had. 

btt  ^aft  gc^aBt,  ///^^^  >^^x/  /^^^. 
@ic  l^aBeit  ge^a^t,  jk^^^  /^^z'^r  had. 

tX  ^ttt  gel^afit,  /^^  has  had. 
Etc.,  etc. 

Pluperfect. 

\^  ^atte  ge^a^t,  i  had  had. 

@ic  l^attctt  gc^afit,  jj^^^/  //^^^  had. 
cr  Hatte  gc^aBt,  /^<f  had  had. 

Etc.,  etc. 
Future. 
\^  ttierbc  ^abcn,  I  shall  have. 
Etc.,  etc. 

Future  Perfect. 

ir^  merbc  gc^afit  ^abeti,  /  ^/^^//  /^az/^  had. 

Etc.,  etc. 
Compound  Infinitive. 
gC^Obt  ^^tlX^  to  have  had. 

11.  Compound  Tenses  of  fcitt,  in  the  Indicative  Mood. 

PKINCIPAI.  PARTS. 

feitt,  taat,  gemefen. 

Perfect, 
td^  1m,  gctUCf en,  /  have  been. 
bu  bift  geitiefCtt,  thou  hast  been. 
Sic  flttb  gcttJCfCtt,  you  have  been. 
cr  ift  gCtOCfcn,  he  has  been. 
Etc.,  etc. 


68  VERBS.  —  COMPOUND   TENSES.         [Les.  IX. 

Pluperfect. 

X^  mat  gCttiefCtt,  I  had  been. 

"^Vi  tuarft  gcmcfen,  thou  hadst  been, 

@ie  tuareu  gcwefcn,  you  had  been. 
tx  mar  gemefcn,  /^^  /4^</  ^^^«. 
Etc.,  etc. 

Future. 

xi&i  ttierbc  fern,  I  shall  be, 
btt  mirft  f ettt,  thou  wilt  be. 
(3ic  tticrbctt  fcin,  ^^«  w/7/  ^/. 
er  'mx'ts  fctu,  /^<?  w/7/  ^<f. 

Etc.,  etc. 
Future  Perfect. 
\^  ttlCrbe  gctticfett  f Citt,  /  shall  have  been. 
'^yX  Xm\i  gCttlCfCtt  fcitt,  thou  wilt  have  been. 
@ic  ttlCrbCtt  gcmefCU  \mXf  you  will  have  been 

er  mirb  gcniefctt  fcin,  /^<r  w///  have  been. 

Etc.,  etc. 
Compound  Infinitive. 

gemefctt  fein,  ^^  /^^z^^  been. 
12.  Compound  Tenses  of  ttJerbcit,  in  the  Indicative  Mood. 

PRINCIPAI.  PARTS. 

xotx'btn,  taurbe  or  f^at'b,  gemotbett. 

Perfect. 

ir^  Bin  gemorbCtt,  I  have  become. 

Etc.,  etc. 

Pluperfect. 

iii^  mar  gemorben,  I  had  become. 
Etc.,  etc. 

Future. 

i^  merbc  mcrbctt,  I  shall  become. 

Etc.,  etc. 


Les.  iX.]        VERBS.  • —  COMPOUND    TENSES. 


69 


Futnre  Perfect. 
idi  tnerbC  gCtUOrbcn  \t\\i,  I  shall  have  become. 
Etc.,  etc. 


Compound  Infinitive. 

getnorbctt  fcin, 

to  have  become. 

Vocabulary. 

MASCULINE, 

tttfen,  call^  summon. 

ber    ©ropatcr,    the   grand- 

frfjirfen,  send. 

father. 

f^a^ieren  ge^en,  go  walking. 

bcr  gorft,  the  forest. 

tjetlieren,  lose. 

bcr  [Hegeii,  /^^  r^/?/. 

tietberben,  spoil. 

bcr  $immc(,  M^  heaven,  sky. 

batum,  on  that  account. 

(ber)  (Sbuavb,  Edward. 

gefterit,  yesterday. 

(bcr)^citttritift,  i%«Or. 

§tt,   /^^  (excessively),  to   (with 

bie  ^^fe(,  ^/5<f  ^///^j. 

inf.) 

FEMININE. 

6ei,  at  the  house  of 

bie  aWiilje,  M<f  ^«/. 

bi§  ie^t,  ////  w^w. 

bic   993i(^ermftrage,    William 

Street. 

bic  St^lttlc,  ^/^<f  school. 

(atige,  /^«^. 

ft^lerfft,  ^^^. 

NEUTER. 

fait  ^^/^. 

ba§  JRcit^f  Crb,  //^^  saddle-horse. 

i^r^  (dat.),  her. 

bai^  ^anbtticrf,  //5<?  /^^^^. 

feit,  (dat.),>^  (time). 

'^^^  SBcttcr,  ^z^^-  weather. 

einige,  some. 

meg,  rt-w^^/. 

attri^l,  /r///5/?r  (after  negative). 

^offen,  >^^A. 

f ri^ott  recftt,  «//  ri;f/^/. 

Declension 

OF  "^Vif  thou. 

Singrular. 

Plural. 

Nom.     '^Vi,  thou. 

ifiv,  ye,  you.           (Bit, 

Gen.     beiner  (bein),  of  thee,      euer,  e/^j^t?^.        3[^ter, 

Dat.       \Ax^  to  thee. 

cttti^,  /i?;j/^w.         Sftnem 

Ace.       bic^l,  thee. 

eurift,  you.            (Bic. 

70  VERBS. COMPOUND    TENSES.        [Les.  IX. 

Note.  14.  —  Do  not  use  bu  unless  relationship  or  intimacy  is 
indicated,  for  instance,  to  one  who  is  addressed  by  his  Christian 
name. 

Note.  15. — When  the  sentence  begins  with  a  part  of  the  pred- 
icate the  verb  must  precede  the  subject.  The  verb  precedes  the 
subject  in  questions  as  in  a  command  or  a  wish.  If  the  verb  begins 
a  sentence  which  is  not  a  question,  a  command  or  a  wish,  it  prob- 
ably expresses  a  condition^  tt)cnn  being  understood.  But  see  Les- 
sons XXV  and  XXVI. 

Exercise  IX. 

I.  3)a^   SBetter  t[t  gefterrt  je^r  fd^Ied^t   getuefen. » 

2.  (Sbuarb    tft    barum    nid)t    jur    Sd^ute    gegangen. 

3.  ^emricf)  i[t  a6er  gegangen.  4.  S)er  9iegen  ^^i  jeine 
5D?u^e  t)erborben.  5-  Slber  ba^  2Better  tft  ^eute  6t^ 
je^t  fc^on.  6.  SBotlen^  tt)ir  boc^3  fpajieren  ge^en! 
7.  3a,  ttJoIIen  rt)ir  ju  nnfern  grennben  in  ber  2Bitf)e(m^ 
ftra^e  ge^en!  8.  Sc^  f)abe  meine  3Ku^e  t)erIoren. 
9.  3c^  !aufe  mir  barum  etnen  §ut.  10.  ®et)en  bie  S'na- 
ben  l^eute  nicfjt  5ur4  ©c^ute?  n.  §etnric^  rt)irb  ntd^t 
get)en,  aber  ©buarb  ge{)t.  12.  SBie  lange  gel)en  btc 
^naben  jc^on  in  bie  ©d^ule  ?  13.  D,  fie  ge^en  fdjon 
t)ier  Sat)re.  14.  ©buarb  rt)irb  balb  ein  ^anbtDerf  lernen, 
15-  ^einrii^  ift  nicEjt  ftar!,  er  ift  fef)r  Iran!  getcefen. 
16.  @inb  @ie  auc^  fran!  getDefen?  17.  SJiein,  unb  id) 
^offe,  icf)  ttjerbe  nii^t  fran!  ttjerben.  18.  $D?an  fagt,  ber 
Se£)rer  ift  aud^  !ranf  getDorben.  19.  Sd^  tt)ei^,  er  ift 
geftern  nid)t  in  ber  ©(^ute  geit)efen.  20.  3Ber  \)Qi\. 
\iz\m  gete{)rt?  21.  (Sinb  bie  ©driller  in  ber  ©d^ute 
geblieben  ?    22.  Satpot)!,  man  {)at  ben  Sruber  unfer^ 


Les/IX.]        verbs.  COMPOUND    TENSES.  /I 

Sel)rer§  gerufen.  23.  gbuarb,  i)at  er  bir  gefagt,  ido 
bte  Seftton  ift  ?  24.  Sa,  unb  t(^  {)abe  meine  Slufgabe 
f(^on  geternt 

^  See  the  remark  at  the  head  of  this  lesson.  *Z<f/  «j,  a  mild 
sort  of  imperative  used  in  the  first  person  plural.  ^Xr.  comg  or 
O  at  beginning.  *  B^V  @(i)ule  gcl^en,  ^o  ^o  to  school  {on  any  occa- 
sion) ;   in  tie  @(!)ule  ge^en,  to  go  to  school  (to  attend  school). 


Exercise  9. 

I.  Henry,  your  grandfather  has  been  here. 
2.  So  .?  what  did  he  say  .?  3.  Why  has  he  stayed  away 
so  long .?  4.  Has  he  then  been  sick  ?  5.  He  has  ^only 
5  had  2  very  ^much  ^to  ^do.  6.  I  have  just  come 
from  [the]  school.  7.  Did  you  learn  your  lesson 
well  1  8.  I  had  learned  it  well,  but  I  forgot.     9.  Ah, 

1  have  heard  that  so  often !  10.  I    ^  have   ^  grown 

2  very  ^  tired  (of)'  ^it.  n.  I  shall  not  forget  it 
again.  12.  When  did  Edward  lose  his  cap  ?  13.  He 
has  had  this  cap  (for)  2-  a  year.  14.  Who  told  you 
so  "^  15.  I  heard  it  at  school  16.  What  has  become 
of  Henry }  17.  Henry,  I  have  been  calling  you 
(for)  five  minutes.  18.  Shall  we  see  you  to-morrow 
at  our  house  >  19.  I  hope  the  weather  will  not  be 
bad.  20.  We  shall  ride  to  the  forest.  21.  How  long 
have  you  had  this  horse  .?  22.  Not  very  long ;  but 
we  had  one  horse  ten  years.  23.  We  do  not  ride, 
we  shall  go  walking.  24.  We  shall  not  ride  either ; 
it  will  be  too  cold.     25.  We  shall  send  some  apples 


72  VERBS. COMPOUND    TENSES.         [Les.  IX. 

to  our  aunt.  26.  Edward  saw  her  yesterday;  he 
says  she  has  been  sick.  27.  ,Then  ^we  ^  shall 
7  go  5^0  6  her  ^ourselves.  28.  Call  the  boys;  they 
will  go  with  you.  29.  Edward  will  be  here  immedi- 
ately, but  Henry  had  already  gone.  30.  That  will 
be  all  right. 

^  miibe  may  govern  a  direct  accusative.     *  Add  lattg  after  3cit)VV 
though  not  required.     ^  ^((Jq  or  baiin. 

Vocabulary  for  the  Conversation. 

ber  SBerftag,  the  workday.  bcr  JJcicrtag,  the  holiday. 

bcr  SUtttttag,  Sunday.  bCt  crftC  %^%  the  first  day. 

bet  SJlOtttag,  Monday.  bCt  bOrlC^tC  ^ag,  the  last  day 
bet  ^ieui^tag,   Tuesday.  hit  one. 

bet  aUittttlOti^,  Wednesday.  \s\t  2Bo(i^e,  //^<f  w/f^>&. 

bet  ^onneti^tag,  Thursday.  bet  SBorfje,  of  the  week. 

bet  gteitag,  Friday.  bie  2; age,  ^>^<?  ^^yj. 

bet  Suttttabenb  (Sami^tag),  nennett,  «^w^. 

Saturday. 

Conversation  8. —  Die  XX)od?e, 

I.  2Btet)ieIe  Sage  f)at  bie  SBoc^e? 

2.  2)ie  9Sod^e  l^at  fieben  Stage. 
I.  3Bte  ^et^t  ber  erfte  Sag  ber  SBo^e? 

2.    S)er  erfte  Sag  ber  2Boc^e  ^eifet  ©onntag. 
I.  aSte  f)eifet  ber  t)orIe^te  Sag  ber  SBo^e? 

2.  S)er  t)orIe^te  Sag  ber  9Bod^e  ^et^t  3=reitag. 

Etc.,  etc. 

I.  aSoHen  @te  bie  Sage  ber  2Boci)e  nennen? 

2.  ©onntag,  SUlontag,  K. 
I.  aSie  f)etfet  ber  Sag  jtDtfdien  9Wxtttood)  unb  ^ret:* 
tag? 


Les.   IX.]         VERBS. COMPOUND    TENSES.  73 

2.    ®er  Stag  jtt)if^en  WxttWod)  unb  g^reitag  l^ei^t 
Sonnergtag, 
I.  SBie  {)ei^t  ber  Stag  nad^  ©onntag? 
2.  3)er  Stag  nad^  ©onntag  ^ei^t  SWontag. 

Etc.,  etc. 
Reading  9. 

SKii^tggang  tft  aller  Safter  Slnfang. 
"Idleness  is  the  mother  of  all  vices." 

Xit  fHQam  am  9)^ein. 

©^  Brauft  etn  9iuf  tt)ie  ©onnerliall, 

There  roars  cry     like     thunder-call 

28ie  @d)tDertge!ltrr  unb  SSogenprall, 

sword-clash  wave-dash 

3um  Si^etn,  jum  9i^ein,  jum  beutfd^en  3it)etn, 
9Ber  totE  be^  ©trome^  filter  fein? 

the     stream's      guard 

C/ior.     I :  Sieb  $BaterIanb,  magft  ru^tg  fein, : ) 

(thou)  mayst     calm 

I :  geft  ftet)t  unb  treu  | :  bie  aSa^t :  \  am  9{t)ein ! :  | 

Fast  true 

©urd)  §unberttaufenb  judt  e^  fdEjneH 

hundred  thousand  darts        swiftly 

Unb  aHer  2lugen  bli^en  1)611: 

(of)  all  flash  brightly 

S)er  S)eutfdE)e,  bteber,  fromm  unb  ftarf, 

upright    pious  strong 

SBefd^iilt  bie  i)eirge  Sanbe^marf.     C-^^n 

(Will)  guard       holy       land-borders. 


74  NOUNS. FIRST    DECLENSION.         [Les.   X. 

S)er  ©cljtuur  erfc^allt,  bie  SBoge  rtnnt, 

vow        resounds  wave     runs 

S)ie  gat)neu  flatterit  ^06)  im  3Sinb : 

flags  flutter 

Sim  9i^etn,  am  SRt)etn,  am  beutfc^en  "di^dn 
SSir  alle  tvoUm  filter  fein !     C^^^r. 


LESSON    X. 

Nouns.  —  First  Declension.     Class  I. 

1.  It  pays  to  learn  thoroughly  the  classes  of  de- 
clension;  these  are  based  on  gender,  endings  and 
number  of  syllables.  Note  carefully  the  things  com- 
mon to  all. 

2.  2)er  SBatcr  bc^  ©ci^iiler)^  ^^i  ja^  jltJei  Stilbcr  in 

pupil     [has] 

bcm  2)iJrf^cn  gc^alit* 

village         had. 

"^Why^  at  beginning. 

3»  Learn  this  sentence.  Note  the  common 
characteristics  of  the  first  three  nouns,  and  their 
forms. 

4.  German  nouns  are  commonly  divided  into  two 
declensions : 

5.  To  the  First  or  strong  Declension  belong  all 
of  the  neuter  and  most  of  the  masculine  nouns, 
with  quite  a  number  of  feminines. 


Les/X.]  nouns. FIRST    DECLENSION.  75 

6.  To  the  Second  or  weak  Declension  belong 
most  feminine  nouns  with  some  masculines,  but  no 
neuters. 

7.  In  the  First  Declension  the  genitive  singular 
adds  (e)^ ;  in  the  Second  Declension  (e)n  to  mascu- 
line nouns. 

8.  In  the  First  Declension  the  plural  nominative 
is  formed  in  three  different  ways  ;  in  the  Second 
Declension  the  plural  ends  throughout  in  -n  (-cn). 

9.  Feminine  nouns,  whether  belonging  to  the 
First  or  Second  Declension,  do  not  vary  in  the 
singular. 

10.  In  order  to  decline  a  noun,  it  is  necessary  to 
know  the  genitive  singular  and  the  nominative 
plural,  which,  together  with  the  gender  and  the 
nominative  singular,  are  to  be  found  in  the  diction- 
ary. 

11.  Compound  nouns  receive  gender  and  classi- 
fication from  the  last  element  of  the  compound. 
The  classification  in  this  and  the  following  lessons 
is  based  on  simple  nouns. 

First  Declension. 

12.  The  First  Declension  may  be  divided  into 
three  classes,  according  to  the  form  of  the  nomi- 
native plural :  In  Class  I,  to  form  the  nominative 
plural,  nothing  is  added  to  the  nominative  singular; 
in  Class  II,  -e  is  added ;  in  Class  III,  -er. 


y6  NOUNS. FIRST    DECLENSION.  [Les.  X. 

13.  Tables  of  Case-Endings  of  the  First  Declension. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Class  I.  Class  II.  Class  III.  Class  I.  Class  II.  Class  III. 

Norn. — l^e         "    tV 

Gen.  § (e)^ (e)§        -^t    — ii-cr 

Dat.  (e)  (e)  tt  — i^ett  — ii-ertt 

Ace.  — ^11— c    — ^^er 

14.  The  e  in  parenthesis  is  purely  euphonic.  It 
is  a  good  general  rule  to  retain  it  with  monosylla- 
bles, and  in  the  dative  of  polysyllables  which  have 
e^  in  the  genitive. 

i5«  Note,  a.  Most  monosyllables  modify  the 
stem-vowel  in  the  plural. 

d.  The  dative  plural  always  ends  in  -n. 

c.  The  change  to  the  Umlaut  in  the  plural 
takes  place  in  Class  I  sometimes,  in  Class  II  gener- 
ally, in  Class  III  always. 

There  are  many  exceptions  to  any  scheme  of 
declension,  and  these  must  be  learned  from  the 
dictionary  little  by  little.  But  for  some  common 
cases  see  the  Appendix. 

A  tabular  view  of  the  declensions  is  given  on  p.  98. 

Class  I. 

16,  This  class  comprises  masculine  and  neuter 
polysyllables  ending  in  -el,  -er,  -en,  and  the  dimin- 
utives in  -c^en  and  -lein. 

The  feminines  SOlutter  and  Xoci^tcr  follow  the  model  of  this 
class  in  the  plural.  Latin  derivatives  in  -or  follow  this  class  in 
the  singular,  but  are  weak  in  the  plural. 


Les.  X.]  NOUNS. FIRST    DECLENSION. 


n 


17,     Declension  of  bet  St^itler,  the  scholar. 

Singular. 


Nom. 

ber  @(f|U(cr,   the  scholar. 

Gen. 

bC^  Sf^iilcr^,   of  the  scholar. 

Dat. 

bem  Sd^Ulcr,   to  the  scholar. 

Ace. 

bCtt  ©critter,   the  scholar. 

Plural. 

Nora. 

btC  (Stiller,   the  scholars. 

Gen. 

ber  @dS|ii(cr,  ^  //^^  scholars. 

Dat. 

ben  Sr^itlcnt,  /<?  ^/^^  scholars. 

Ace. 

bic  6ti^ttlcr,  //^^  scholars. 

Vocabulary. 

MASCULINE. 

(ba)§)  SittCi^ett,    diminutive    of 

X,   the  teacher.                      ^aroUtte. 

ber  Sri^liiffel,  the  key. 

ber  Ofen,  the  stove, 

ber  Xetter,  the  plate. 

ber  ©tiefel,  M<f  <^^^^. 

ber  Partner,   the  gardener. 

ber  Ottfel,  the  uncle. 

ber  JJuPobeit,  the  floor. 

ber  @(i^eme(,  the  footstool. 


FEMININE. 


bie  Iji^itXf   the  daughters. 
bte  aJliitter,   the  mothers. 


'^^^  genftcr,  the  window. 
'^^^  Saumri^ett,  the  little  tree. 
'^^^  fjrauleitt,  the  young  lady, 
Miss. 

bo^    Xiic^tcrti^ett,     M^    ///^/^ 

daughter. 


ttebejt,  beside,  by  (with  dative). 
tjietteiti^t,  perhaps,  possibly. 
Uor  etlter   ©tunbe   (before  an 
hour),  ^«  y^<72/r  ago. 

raur^eit^  /^  jw^/^^. 

boti^l,  though,  nevertheless ;  O 
yes,  surely. 

naturlit^,  of  course. 

5tt  ^aufe,  at  home. 

m^i  ttia^r,  />  it  not  true  ?  is 
it  not  so? 

tt)0!^l^  to  be  sure;  probably; 
certainly. 

ja,  indeed,  you  know,  why. 

ffi^Olt,  already,  surely,  doubt- 
less, even,  betim.es. 

betttt^  then,  in  that  case,  now, 
indeed. 

UO(f|^  besides,  as  yet,  still  (tem- 
poral). 

eilWtal',  once,  only. 


yS  NOUNS. FIRST    DECLENSION.  [Les.  X- 

Remark.  —  The  adverb  boc^  means  commonly  "  though  " ; 
but  a  variety  of  expressions  are  necessary  to  give  its  precise  force 
or  particular  shade  of  meaning  in  different  connections.  Usually 
the  sentence  with  bod^  expresses  surprise,  remonstrance,  or  ob- 
jection, and  the  equivalent  of  bocf)  is  Why !  or  O  1  or  Come !  at 
the  beginning  of  the  English  sentence,  as,  @ib  tnir  boc^  belt  §ut, 
Come,  give  me  my  hat ;  (Sr  l)at  bod^  liid^t^  getOU  I  Why,  he  has 
done  nothing !  Only  long  practice  and  observation  will  enable  one 
to  appreciate  its  exact  signification.  Much  the  same  may  be 
said  of  ja,  tt)o^(,  andj  and  fd)on. 

Declension  of  cr,  /^<f,  fie,  s/ie,  c^,  if. 

M.  F.  N.  M.F.N. 

Nom.   cr  fie        C^  ^^,  s/ie,  it.  fic        they. 

Gen.     fcitt(er)  y^XtX   fcitt(cr)   of  him,  her,  it.  \^xtX   of  them 

Dat.     \\(IX  x\c       t^m  to  him,  her,  it.  if^nttt  to  them. 

Ace.     i^tt  fic        t^  him,  her,  it.  fic         them. 

e6  is  also  the  expletive  "  there." 

Note  i6. —  In  sentences  introduced  by  ba§,  "  that,"  batnlt, 
"in  order  that,"  etc.,  and  by  relatives,  the  verb  is  transposed  to 
the  end.  For  a  detailed  statement  of  the  order  of  the  German 
sentence,  see  Lesson  XXV. 

Note  17.  —  The  endings  -d^cn  and  -(ein  are  extensively  used 
to  form  diminutives,  or  words  expressing  endearment,  which  are 
then  always  neuter,  and  have  the  Umlaut  on  the  stem-vowel. 

Exercise   X. 

I.  SDer  £ef)rer  unferer  ^^od^ter  tft  ^ter  gettJefen.  2.  §at 
er  ti\QQi^  liber  fie  gefagt  ?  3.  (£r  fagt,  fie  I)at  geftern  2(benb 
fel)r  f(J)on  gefungen.  4.  S)a^  ti:)erben  tr)ir  boi^  i(jrem  Cnfel 
fagen.  5.  Satt)o!)t,  i^r  Dn!el  trtrb  e^  gern  l)oren.  6.  @ie 
fingt  aud)  t)eute  tt)ieber  bet  bem  2el)rer.  7.  SSoHen  tt)ir 
benn  mtt  it)r  gum  Set)rer  fasten?    8.  3Sir  (aben  bem 


Les.  X.]  NOUNS. FIRST    DECLENSION,  79 

£e{)rer  etn  95uc^  gegeben.  9.  (£^  tvax  tDof)t  etn  9}?uft!6udj  ? 
10.  aSerben  bie  ^tiitter  ber  9Jidbc^en  aud)  bei  bem  Secret 
fein?  II.  Sc^  glaube  tt)oI)l;  meine  SJMter  nimnit  tijr 
%bd)kxd)m  nut.  12.  S)ie  TOabi^en  finb  fc^on  gegangcn. 
13.  S)er  85ater  biefe^  SDfabd^en^  rettet  gern.  14.  ©r  tinrb 
tDo^l  retten.  15.  graulein  S8raun  ift  nod^  titdjt  Ijicr. 
16.  Sft  t)telletd)t  ettDa^  gef(^et)en  ?  17.  ^Idn,  fie  ift  bei  iljrev 
abutter  geblieben.  18.  S()re  SlZutter  ift  !ran!  get^orben. 
19.  S)er  SSater  ^at  ben  9Kabd)en  ben  @d)Iuff el  be^  3^^^^^'^ 
gelaffen.     20.  S)ie  3)?abc^en  ftaben  im  3'^^^^  9^fW^I^- 

21.  §at  ha§>  3^^^^^  ^^^^^  gn^boben  jnm  Slanjen? 

22.  J)ie  Dfen  in   bem  3^^^^^  ^aben   aUt   gerauc^t 

23.  Sindjen  I)at  barnm  nid)t  gefungen. 

Exercise  io. 

I.  Our  uncle  has  lived  in  this  house  ten  years. 

2.  The  uncle's  gardener  lives  in  the  house  with  him. 

3.  We  have  often  been  in  uncle's  room.  4.  How 
many  windows  has  the  room  ?  5.  ^That  ^I  do  ^not 
^know,  but  the  windows  of  the  room  are  all  large. 
6.  I  believe  the  room  has  no  stove.  7.  O  yes,  it 
has  a  stove.  8.  They  are  just  coming  out  of  the 
room.  9.  Did  you  see  my  uncle  ?  10.  I  think  I 
saw  him.  n.  He  was  sitting  by  the  stove.  12.  His 
boots  were  lying  on  the  footstool  beside  him. 
13.  He  was  eating  from  a  plate.  14.  I  think  ,  I 
jjust  2  heard  ^a  ^  plate  ^fall.  15.  ^Why,  ^the  ^plate 
jfell  upon  the  stove.       16.  ^  Of -course  ^it  ^  broke. 


80  NOUNS.  —  FIRST   DECLENSION.  [Les.  X. 

17.  What  broke,  the  plate  or  the  stove  }  18.  I  hope 
it  did  not  fall  upon  the  floor.  19.  Uncle*s  floors  are 
always  very  clean.  20.  Uncle  has  given  each  of  us 
a  plate.  21.  I  think  we  will  give  him  one.  22.  We 
shall  send  the  plate  by  ^  the  gardener.  23.  The  gar- 
dener's little  daughter  is  just  going  to  uncle's.  ^ 
24.  Will  she  not  stay  in  the  house  ?  25.  Her  father 
jj  stays  3  there  ^  you-know.  26.  The  gardener  has 
lost  the  key  of  the  room.  27.  Why,  3  the  key  was 
lying  on  the  floor  beside  the  stove.  28.  I  thank  you 
very  (much) ;  we  have  found  it.  29.  From  this  win- 
dow 2  we  I  see  the  windows  of  the  theater.  30.  Yes, 
the  gardener  ^  often  ^  goes  with  uncle  to  the  theater, 

'  bnxd),      ^  Dative  case.      ^  ^q^  after  verb. 

Vocabulary  for  the  Conversation. 
MASCULINE.  CtttigC,  som^. 

bet  'Mo'nai,  the  month,  gUttJCiJctt,  sometimes. 

ber  Satmar',  ttiic  ttcnnt  tnait,  {how  names 

ber  5'C^^*ttar',  one ?)   how  do  they  call? 

bet  SDlar^,  bcr  erftc  Syionat  (Nom.), 

bcr  5lprir,  ben  erftett  SJlonat  (Ace), 

ber  '^^Xf  the  first  month. 

ber  Su'tti,  ttiie  miirbctt  <Sie,  how  would 

ber  3>tt'iif  you  ? 

ber  5lu9uft',  batie'reti,  date. 

ber  Se^temBcr,  x^  ttiiirbc,  /would. 

ber  OftuBer,  neutt^el^tt  ^unbert  uier,  w;V/<r- 

ber  Wot»ember,  teen  hundred  and  four. 

ber  ^e^em^er, 

ber  2Btttter,  winter.  neuter. 

ber  ©omtner,  summer,  bai^  Saturn,  M^  ^^^^r- 


Les.  X.]         NOUNS. FIRST    DECLENSION.  8 1 

Conversation  9.  —  Dcr  HTo'nat. 

I.  2Bte  t)iele  SCage  i^at  ber  Ttomi  SlprK? 
2.  2)er  3Dtonat  2l^)ri[  ^at  brei^ig  3:age, 

Etc.,  etc. 

I.  ^ai  jeber  Wtonai  bret^tg  Slage? 

2.  ©inige  3Konate  ^aben  einunbbrei^ig  2^age. 
I.  SBie  t)te(e  Xage  ^at  ber  gebruar  jutpeilen? 

2-  2)er  g^ebruar  i)at  ^nmikn  neununbjtDanjig  STage. 
I.  SBoUen  @ie  bie  SJfonate  auf  3)eutjclj  (jcr')agen? 

2.  Sie  lauten  fo  :   ^anuar,  g^ebruar,  2c. 
I.  9!Bie  nertnt  man  ben  erften  Womt  be^^  3a()re^? 

2.  ®en  erften  9Jionat  be^  ^af^re^  nennt  man  Qanuar. 

Etc.,  etc. 

I.  SBoHen  @ie  ha§  2Bort  TOarj  bud^ftabteren  ? 

2.  5!Jlar^  bud^ftabiert  man  fo  :  ,,em-d  (giving  the  sound 
of  the  Umlaut)  -er-tfet.'' 
Etc.,  etc. 

I.  aKa^  filr  etn  Stag  ift  ijtnk? 

2.  §eute  ift  ber  gtoangigfte. 
I.  2Kie  tDurben  @ie  einen  Srtef  ^ente  batie'ren? 

2.  3d^  tDiirbe  einen  Srief  ^eute  fo  batieren:   „93erKn/ 
ben  (am)  20^««  SKcirj,  1904.'' 
I.  SBoHen  @ie  bie  aSintermonate  nennen  ? 

Etc.,  etc. 
Reading  io. 

Sin  ben  gebern  erfennt  man  ben  SSogel. 

By  feathers  recognizes  bird. 

"By  their  dress  we  know  them." 


82  NOUNS.  —  FIRST    DECLENSION.       [Les.     X. 

3)er  Xanntnhanm, 

SSolBUeb. 

D  2^annen6aum,  o  Slannenbaum, 

fir-tree 

3Sie  treu  finb  beine  SIdtter! 

leaves 

S)u  griinft  ntdjt  nur  sur  ©ommerjeit, 

greenst 

9?ein,  and)  tm  3[Stnter,  tDenn  e^  fdineit 

snows 

D  Stannenbaum,  o  Sannenbaum, 
9Bie  treu  finb  beine  93latter! 

D  areagbelein,  o  3)?agbelein, 

maiden 

SBie  falfd)  i[t  bein  (Semitte! 

spirit 

S)n  f(^n)urft  mir  Sreu'  in  meinem  ®lucf, 

vowedst  success 

9?un  arm  id)  bin,  gef)ft  bu  jnriid! 

poor  goest  back 

D  3)fagbelein,  o  SWagbelein, 
2Bie  fdfd^  ift  bein  ©emiite! 

SDer  ^a6)  m  Zd,  ber  Sad^  im  Stat, 

brook  vale 

Sft  beiner  galfdj^eit  ©piegel! 

of  thy      falseness         mirror 

@r  ftriimt  alfein  tDenn  9tegen  flie^t, 

streams  rain      flows 

93ei  Surf  er  balb  ben  QueU  Derfd^tie^t; 

drouth  spring        closes 

S)er  93a(^  im  %al,  ber  93a^  im  Slal, 
Sft  beiner  galfc^f)eit  Spiegel! 


Les.  XL]       NOUNS. — FIRST    DECLENSION.  83 

LESSON    XI. 

Nouns.  —  First  Declension.     Class  IL 
I.  Declension  in  the  singular  is  simple ^  feminine s 
having  no  change  at  all  and  most  masculines  and 
neuters  adding  only  (e)^  in  the  genitive, 

for 

5C^tt  ^fcnnige  ticrfauft  unb  ^aficn  bamit  Sl^fel  gcfauft. 

therewith 

3.  Learn  the  sentence.  Observe  the  declensional 
forms,  the  place  of  the  past  participle,  and  the 
peculiar  bamit  instead  of  mtt  i^m  (bent  ®elbe). 

4.  Nouns  in  other  classes  are  easily  designated 
by  gender,  ending  and  number  of  syllables;  to 
Class  II  belong  most  of  those  not  thus  clearly  as- 
signed to  one  of  the  other  classes. 

Class  II. 

5.  To  Class  II  belong  :  of  masculines,  most  mono- 
syllables, all  polysyllables  in  -tg,  Ai)  and  -ing, 
foreign  derivations  in  -al,  -an,  -aft,  -ar  and  -ter ;  of 
f  eminines,  one-third  of  all  monosyllables  ;  of  neuters 
a  few  monosyllables  in  -r  and  a  few  polysyllables 
in  -nt^  and  -fal 

Declension  of  ber  Sol^tt* 

Singular.  Plural. 

Norn,  bcr  So^tt  bic  ©o^itc 

Gen.    bC)^  So^ncig  bcr  Sii^nc 

Dat.    bcm  So^ttc  bctt  ©ij^ttctt 

Ace.    \stxi  ©ol^tt  bic  8o^ttc 


84 


NOUNS. FIRST    DECLENSION.       [Les.   XI. 


Singpalar, 
Nom.    btC  ^anh,    the  hand. 
Gen.     bcr  ^attb,   of  the  hand. 
Dat.     bet  ^anb,   to  the  hand. 
Ace.     btC  ^anb,    the  hand. 


Plural, 
bic  ^iittbc        the  hands. 
'^tX  ^anbC       of  the  hands. 
bett  ^ftttben    to  the  hands. 
bic  ^fittbc        the  hands. 


Vocabulary. 

(Nouns  starred  have  not  Umlaut  in  the  Plural.) 
WX\%  cheap. 


MASCULINE. 

*  bet  8ti^tt^,  the  shoe. 

*  bcr  %xm^  the  arm. 
bcr  ^U^f,  the  head. 
bcr  gu§^  the  foot. 

bcr  OfJorf,  //^^r  ^^^/. 

(bcr)  X^c'obor,  Theodore. 

(bcr)  ¥aul,  Z'^^/. 

NEUTER. 

ba§  Scttt,  //^/f  /^^. 

*  ts^^  ^aar,  the  pair. 
'h^^  %\tX^  the  animal. 

"^^^  there,     burt,  yonder. 
6ci  Dlot^^  ^^  the  store  or  house 
of  Roth ^  at  Roth''s. 

Note  i8.  —  Instead  of  a  preposition  with  an  interrogative  or 
demonstrative  pronoun,  a  pronominal  adverb  is  often  employed 
in  German:  as,  tt)01Ttit,  "with  what,"  "wherewith";  tDoriu,  "in 
what,"  "  wherein  " ;  bartu,  "  in  that,"  "  therein  "  ;  barauf,  "  upon 
that,"  "  thereupon." 

Exercise  XI. 

I.  SSo  tft  ber  2;{)eobor  getoefen?  2.(£r  tft  mit  bem 
@oI)ne  be§  ©enerafe  in  ber  Stabt  getDefen.  3-  SBir  I)orten 
fie  t)on  ©tiefeln  unb  ®d^uf)en  fpred)en.    4.  S(i^  tt)erbe  ben 


ticrfaufcit,  sell. 
fragcn,  ask. 

biirfcn,  be  permitted  (See  Les- 
son XXI). 

^offCtttltr^,   /  hope,   it  is  to  be 

hoped. 
t^  gaB,  there  was,  there  were. 
rcr^t  ^abctt^  to  be  right. 
ttltrcri^t  ^afiCtt,  to  be  wrong. 
Bet  aJlittter,  at  Mailer's. 
man   fagt,   one  says,  they  say, 

people  say. 
ttiaig  fitr    Citt,    what  sort  of  a 

("  what  for  a  ")  ? 


Les.   XL]        NOUNS. FIRST    DECLENSION.  85 

St^eobor  fragen.  s-  @te  i)abm  bet  $Rot()  ein  ^aar  ©c^ii^c 
gelauft.  6.  2Btr  faufeit  an6)  uttfere  ©tiefd  iinb  ©c£)uf)e 
bei  9totf).     7.  9)fan  ^ao^t,  ber  9{ot^  t)ertauft  fie  fef)r  billig. 

8.  ©iefe  @(^uf)e  |:)affen  nic^t  gut  an  metne  ^iifee.  9.  Ser 
(General  (}at  fiir  [einen  @o^n  ©ttefel  gefauft.  10.  ®er 
9io(i  be^  ©eneral^  pa^t  (or  fi|t)  fet)r  gut.  u.  Seine  Slrme 
finb  nic^t  ju  lang.  12.  S)er  ^aul  Ijat  ben  9?orf  auf  bem 
SIrme  ge^abt.  13.  3[Bar  ber  9Jod  fiir  tf)n  ober  fitr  f einen 
SSater  ?  14.  Slt)eobor  fagt,  er  f)at  it)n  bem  Skater  gegeben. 
15.  ^^aul  f)at  bamit  jtnei  SKeilen  gelaufen.  16.  ®r  ift  tnoljl ' 
jiemtid^  miibe.  17.  Satnot)!,  er  fi^t  bort  auf  bem  ©tu^Ie ; 
ber  Sopf  liegt  it)m  auf  ben  2lrmen,  unb  bte  Slrme  auf  bem 
Sifi^e.  18.  Sf)m  ^  finb  ^opf  unb  S3eine  miibe.  19.  @r  tjat 
boc^  nur  e  t  n  ^jSaar  Seine.  20.  3Jf an^e  %kvc  i)aben 
i£)rer3  jtnei 

^ '  probably.*  *  Note  and  learn  to  use  this  Dative  of  possession. 
3 '  two  of  them,'  thus  when  the  relation  is  not  partitive  in  that  case 
gtrei  t)On  i^ncn  is  permissible. 

Exercise   ii. 

I.  [The]  chairs  and  [the]  animals  have  four  legs. 
2.  But  some  animals  have  only  two  legs.  3.  And 
some  chairs  have  only  [of  them]  three.  4.  The  child 
goes  on  (its)  hands  and  feet.  5.  That  child  has  no 
shoes  on  its  ^  feet.  6.  Who  is  that  boy  yonder  without 
(a)  coat  ?  7.  I  believe  it  is  Theodore,  the  general's 
son.     8.  Cannot  the  general  buy  a  coat  for  his  son  ? 

9.  Why  certainly,  but  the  boy  has  three  coats  already. 


86  NOUNS.  —  FIRST   DECLENSION.       [Les.  XI. 

lo.  Did  you  see  him  yesterday.?  u.  What  did  he 
have  on  his  ^  head  ?  12.  I  beheve  he  had  a  cap. 
Why,  you  are  right !  13.  His  uncle  will  buy  him  a 
pair  of  shoes.  14.  ,  I-hope  3  the  ^  shoes  ^  will  ^  fit 
^  him.  15.  Do  you  think  we  can  sell  them  to  [the] 
Paul  ?  16.  Did  you  find  the  shoes  at  Miiller's.  17.  No, 
we  buy  our  shoes  and  boots  at  Roth's.  18.  Why,^ 
his  hands  are  very  small.  19.  They  say  he  has  his 
hands  from  his  mother.  20.  Are  then  his  mother's 
hands  so  small  ?  21.  Of-that  I  cannot  say  any  thing  ; 
I  have  never  seen  her.  22.  The  legs  of  that  animal 
were  very  short.  23.  But  the  animal  ran  very  fast. 
24.  What  sort  of  an  animal  was  it  ?  25.  Do  not  ask 
me ;  I  do  not  know  [the]  animals. 

^Definite  article,      ^ja,  after  verb.      ^See  Note  18. 
Vocabulary  for  the  Conversation. 

MASCULINE.  NEUTER. 

ber  grueling,  spring-.  ha§  ^a^xf^nnhtVi,  the  century, 

bcr  SommCt,  sum??ter.  

ber  |er6fc  autumn.  .^^^^  ^^^^^  every  year. 

ber  mmtX,  winter.  ^^^  ^^^^^^^^  ^^^^^  ^^^  ^^^^^^^^ 

FEMININE.  present  year. 

'hXZ   %^Xt^^t\if    the  season  of      '^ty^  fotttlttettbe  ^alftr,  the  com- 
the  year.  ingyear,  next  year. 

bic  Sal^rei^seitctt,  the  seasons  of    \s^^  tiergattgcitc  Sa^r,  the  past 

the  year.  year. 

Note  19. — Expressions  of  time  answering  to  the  questions, 
"when?"  "how  long?"  are  put  in  the  Accusative ;  ev  fommt 
jcben  SJ^orgen,  "  he  comes  every  morning" ;  er  arbeitete  ben  gaugen 
Xag,  "  he  worked  the  whole  day."    See  Appendix,  Uses  of  Cases. 


Les.  XI.]        NOUNS. FIRST    DECLENSION.  Sy 

Conversation  io.  —  Pas  3^^^^* 

I.  2Bte  t)iele  9Ko'nate  Ijat  ha§  Sa^r? 

2.  3)a§  3a^r  i)at  ^tDolf  ^Dtonate. 
I.  2Bie  t)tele  Sa^rei^jeitert  {)at  ba^  3at)r? 

2.  ®a§  ^a^r  f)at  i;)ter  "^a^xt^^xUn, 
I.  §at  }ebe^  Sa^r  einen  grii^Itng  ? 

2.'!  3ci,  jebe^  3^^^  ^<^^  ^w^^  3^rul;Ung. 
I.  SBoHen  @ie  bte  bret  3Konate  be^  ©ommer^  nennen? 

2.  ®te  btei  SKonate  be§  ©orntner^  finb  Su'ni,  3^'^^/ 
Stuguft'. 

Etc.,  etc. 

I.  SBeld^e^  Sa{)r  I)aben  tvix  nun? 

2.  5Run  ^aben  tt)ir  ba§   ga^r  neunjeljn  {)unbert  \)kx 
(fiinf,  2c). 
I.  3Bte  f)ei^t  biefe^  3af)rl)unbert  ? 

2.  5Diefeg  Sa^r^unbert  l^et^t  ba§  jtDanjigfte. 
I.  SBoHen  ®ie  ba^  2Bort  ,,Sa^r''  beflmieren  ? 

2.  ®ag  SBort  „'^di)x"  befliniert  man  fo :    Norn.,  ba§ 

Etc.,  etc. 

Reading  ii. 
<Bpx\tiitooxU 

@me  ®d)tDat6e  tnad)t  no(^  fetnen  Sommer. 

One       swallow       makes  as  yet       no         summer. 

"One  swallow  does  not  make  a  summer." 

3[Ba§  man  nic^t  tn  bem  Sopf  i)at,  mnf^  man  in  ben 
93einen  l)aben. 

What  one  hasn't  in  his  head  he  must  have  in 
his  legs. 


88  NOUNS.  —  FIRST    DECLENSION.        [Les.  XI. 

grii^Itng,  ©ommer,  |)erbft  unb  3[3inter, 
©inb  be^  lieben  @otte^  Sinber, 
®e6en  lut^  bes^  ©iiten  Diel, 

Give     to  us  of  the  good     much, 

33(umen,  gTiid)te,  frof)e^  ©piel 

Flowers,       fruits,       happy       play. 

aSott  ^of.fmann  i)on  f5«IIcrglebcn. 

1.  S)eut)(^(anb,  S)eutf(^Ianb  liber  alle^, 
Uber  alle^  in  ber  3BeIt, 

SBenn  eso  ftet^  ju  ©d}u^  unb  %x\x^t  ^ 
SBriiberlitf)  jufamtnentialt,^ 
SSon  ber  Woia^  3  bi^  an  bte  9)? emel,4 
SSon  ber  et)(^5  big  an  ben  Sielt!^ 
S)eutlcf)Ianb,  S)eutjd)Ianb  itber  alle^, 
liber  alle^  in  ber  3Bett! 

2.  ©eutjc^e  grauen,  bentjcf)e  Sireue, 
S)eut)rf)er  3Bein  unb  beutfc^er  ©ang 
©oUen  in  ber  9KeIt  befallen  7 
S^ren  alten,  fc^onen  ^tang,^ 

Un^  ju  eb'ler  %ai  begeiftern9 
Unfer  ganje^  Seben  lang ! 
$)eutfrf)e  grauen,  beutfc^e  2^reue, 
S)eutfd}er  3Bein  unb  beutjc^er  Sang ! 

*' For  defence  and  offence'.  ^' holds  together.'  ^  4 German 
rivers.  ^  Adige,  an  Italian  river  on  which  is  Venice.  ^  the  Baltic. 
' '  retain.'     ® '  sound,*  reputation.     ^ '  inspire.' 


Les.  XII.]        NOUNS. FIRST    DECLENSION.  89 

LESSON    XI L 

Nouns.  —  First  Declension.     Class  III.  —  Inter- 
rogative AND  Relative  Pronouns. 

1.  Learn  the  definite  article  with  every  noun  as 
it  is  introduced^  and  always  learn  forms  and  read 
vocabidaries  aloud. 

2.  aSer  ^<ii  bic  SBIftttcr  be;^  SBu^c^  jerriffcn,  aox^ 

torn       from 

tticlc^em  (or  ttiorau^)  ttiir  ftngcn? 

3-  Learn  this  sentence ;  observe  the  forms  of 
the  nouns  and  give  of  each  the  nominative  and 
genitive  singular  and  the  nominative  plural. 

Class  III. 
4.  Most  neuter  monosyllables,  neuter  derivatives 
in  -turn,  and  a  few  very  common  masculine  mono- 
syllables are  in  this  class  (See  Appendix  for  list.) 

5.  Declension  of  bai^  Stt^,  the  book. 
Sing^ular.  Plural. 

Nom.  btt)^  Suri^,  the  book.  bte  SJiid^Cr,  the  books. 

Gen.    be^  S3tt(^e^,  of  the  book.        ber  ^ii^Cr,  of  the  books. 
Dat.    bem  SBudfte,  to  the  book.         ben  SBiit^cnt,  to  the  books. 
Ace.    '^^^  S3ttCi^,  the  book.  btC  JBiit^et,  the  books. 

Interrogative  Pronouns. 

Singular  only,  as  in  English. 

aScr,  who.  S93a§,  what. 

ttlCffcn,  whose.  (ttlCig), 

ttiem,  to  whom,  (ma!^), 

tt^eit,  whom*  tpa^^  what. 


90  NOUNS. FIRST    DECLENSION.        [Les.  XII. 

6.  These  words  serve  also  as  compound  relative 
pronouns,  tvcx  =  whoever^  tca^  =  whaty  whatever. 
The  genitive  and  dative  of  tt)a^  rarely  occur,  the 
former  only  in  compounds,  tDC^l^alb,  etc.,  the  latter 
colloquially,  ju  lt)a^?/<?r  what?  etc. 

Relative  Pronouns. 

7.  German  has  two  relative  pronouns,  tt)eld^er, 
who  or  which  (declension  Lesson  III),  and  ber, 
who  or  which,  the  same  forms  as  the  definite  article 
except  in  the  genitive  cases  and  the  dative  plural. 


Singrular. 

Plural. 

bcr       Me 

U^ 

bte 

who,  which. 

beffen    berett 

beffett 

beteit 

of  whom,  0/ which. 

bent      bcr 

betn 

benen 

to  whom,  to  which. 

^tn       W 

U^ 

\sxt 

whom,  which. 

8.  No  principle  but  euphony  or  brevity  controls 
the  choice  between  ber  and  tt)eld)er,  though  the  latter 
only  is  used  as  a  relative  adjective,  as  grau  ©raun, 
tt)elc^er  ©ante,  U.  f.  tt).,  Mrs,  Brown,  to  which  lady,  etc. 

9.  For  the  genitive  case  of  the  relative  pronoun, 
whether  tDeli^er  or  ber,  the  forms  beffen,  etc.,  alone 
are  used. 

10.  Note  that  there  is  no  distinction  in  the  rela- 
tives between  persons  and  things. 

11.  Note  that,  unlike  English,  German  never 
omits  the  relative  ;  the  man  I  love^  ber  SRann,  ben  id) 


Les.  XII.]       NOUNS. FIRST    DECLENSION.  9 1 

12.  Note  that  the  verb  after  a  relative  is  at  the 
end  of  its  clause  (see  Lesson  XXV). 

Vocabulary. 
MASCULINE.  ^a§  ^OXff  the  village. 

ber   fiattbi^ntatttt,  the  fellow-     ha§(^t^an^hn^fthe hymn-doo^ 

countryman.  bdi^  (St,  the  egg, 

ber  fiattbmanit,  the  farmer.  ©rtCtliCttlanb,  Greece, 

NEUTER.  aU^etOrbeitt(t(^,     extraordina- 

b(l§  25((ltt,  the  leaf.  rily,  extremely. 

'^ti^  %ti\\^^  the  land.  jcbctt  5tBcnb,  every  evening. 

bai3  ^(cib,  the  dress,  (  pi.)  gar-  ttlttttbcrf(^OU,  wonderfully  beau- 

ments.  tiful. 

^a^  S3ilb,  the  picture.  tttC^tcre,  several, 

^a^    ^'MtX^M6)f    the    diction-  ticrtaffcit,  leave. 

ary,  ttJa^rfrffCittUtf),  probably. 

't^^  SJatcrlmtb,  the  fatherland,  auf  betU  SailbC,  ^V/  the  country. 

native  country.  geftCttt  tttOrfiCtt,  geftettt  fril^, 

'^ti^   25atcr(attb!^(ieb,   patriotic  yesterday  m-orning. 

song.  ttlttttft^Clt,  wish. 

Note  20.  —  In  compound  nouns  the  declension  of  the  last 
member  suffices  for  the  whole,  the  first  member  not  being  declined. 
The  gender  is  also  that  of  the  last  member. 

Note  21. —  When  a  dative  and  accusative  depend  upon  the 
same  verb,  the  dative  generally  follows  the  accusative ;  but  per- 
sonal pronouns  precede  nouns  irrespective  of  case.  For  details 
see  Lesson  XXV. 

Exercise  XII. 

I.  SSer  1:j(xi  mtr  bod)  ba^  Slid)  gebrad^t?  2.  ©pred^en 
@ie  benn  t)on  biefem  93tlberbud)e  ?  3.  Sanjof)!,  Voa^  fiir 
anbere  33ud)er  finben  @ie  in  biefem  Qii^tner  ?    4.  Sdj 


92  NOUNS. FIRST    DECLENSION.        [Les.  XII. 

t)abe  gebacfjt,  @ie  fprec^en  t)om  SBorterbud^e.  5.  3ld), 
ge^en  ©te ! '  @ie  lad^en  iiber  tnic^ !  6.  2lber  tDem 
^abe  t(f)  fiir  ba^  93u(i)  ju  banfen?  7.  S)a^  fann  16) 
nid^t  fagen;  ba^  S8u(^  lag  fd^on  ba  auf  bem  Stfd^e. 
8.  2)ie  93ttber  barin  ftnb  boc^*  tt)unberf(f)on !  9.®^ 
ftnb  ia3  Sttber  t)on  ©riec^enlanb.  10.  9?ein  boc^, 
ha§  Sud)  :^at  83tlber  Don  alien  Sanbern.  n.  3lnf 
einem  Slatte  ftel)t  etn  Silb  Don  unferem  ©orfe.  12.  !5ie 
Sorfer   nnfere^  SSaterlanbe^   ftnb    aber4  aud^  f(^6n. 

13.  S)a^  finbe5  id^  aud^;  td^  l)abe   fie   immer  geliebt. 

14.  S)a^  ift  etn  93ndE),  ha§>  id^  immer  getr)iinfd^t  l)a6e.6 

15.  aSer  ^ai  e^  gefi^rieben?  16.  3ld),  idE)  fel^e  Sitber 
Don  SSogeln  unb  ©iern.  17.  @§  [inb  bie  3S()get  biefe^ 
Sanbe^  unb  bie  ©ier,  loeld^e  fie  legen.  18.  ©in  £anb= 
mann  ^at  geftern  frii^  ba^  93ud^  gebrad^t.  19.  6^ 
tt)irb7  toolil  Don  meiner  S^ante  auf  bem  Sanbe  fommen. 

^  *  Go  off.*  * '  Why '  or  *  Really '  at  beginning ;  do  not  trans- 
late *  yet '  or  '  though.*  ^  <  why '  at  beginning.  *  *  Ah  but/  or 
*  Well,  but  *  at  beginning.  ^ '  think.*  ^  Note  position  of  personal 
verb;  thus  always  in  subordinate  clause.  ^The  future  here  is 
called  future  of  conjecture,  and  may  be  rendered  '  I  suppose.' 

Exercise  12. 
I.  The  children  are  singing  patriotic-songs.  2.  The 
songs  which  they  sing  are  (stand)  in  this  hymn-book. 
3.  Those  songs  are  indeed  extraordinarily  good  for 
the  children.  4.  The  children  wish  very-(much) 
a  book  with  pictures  of  birds.  5.  Well,'  there  are 
several  pictures  of  birds  and  eggs  in  this  book. 
6.  Who  gave  you  ^the  ^book  ^  anyway  ^  ?     7.  Oh,3 


Les.  XIL]       NOUNS.  FIRST    DECLENSION.  93 

one  buys  such  books  in  Germany.  8.  A  countryman 
of  ours  brought  this  book  from  Greece.  9.  Was 
that  the  man  [whom]  we  saw  yesterday  morning  ? 
10.  Whom  do  you  mean  anyway.?  n.  For 4  there 
were  two  men  with  me  yesterday.  12.  He  was  with 
you  in  the  country.  13.  Well,  that  was  a  farmer 
who  sells  eggs.  14.  Let-us5  come  back  to  the 
book.  15.  Two  leaves  of  this  book  are  already  lost. 
16.  The  book  of -which  we  were  speaking  is  a  dic- 
tionary. 17.  One  cannot  ^  buy  dictionaries  in  this 
village.  18.  You  are  right,  but  I  wish  no  dictionary 
in  the  country.  19.  We  shall  probably  leave  the 
village  to-morrow.  20.  Then  7  you  do  not  live  in  the 
village. 

^9^un,  or  ja  after  verb,  or  both.  ^benn.  ^^a,  after  verb. 
*3a,  after  verb.  s^goUen  tt)ir.  ^Tr.  'can  buy  no.'  ^^(fo,  at 
beginning  with  inversion  of  verb,  or  just  after  verb. 

Vocabulary  for  the  Conversation. 

MASCULINE. 

bcr  3^wmcrmatttt,  f/ie  carpen-     vi.  f.  hi,  (uttb  fo  tocitet),  etc. 

ter,  beflittiereit,  decline. 

bcr  %t^'^\^f  the  carpet.  (clbct,     unfortunately^    I    am 

sorry  to  say. 

FEMININE.  .  «■     <.         «       //x;--  X 

s.'    «w     w    ./:         7/  ^^  ^^Wfc  (S^ttCtt,)  means,  no, 

btc  293attb,  the  wall.  'r     ,        %  ;/    ,         r 

^ .    ^    ^    '  thank  you,  I  thank  you  for 

%\t  %tdt,  the  ceilins:.  ^.        ^       ,   , 

r.    Z.,.     .  ,.  your  offer,  etc.,  but  must  de- 

bte  glugcltur,  the  folding-door.  ^^.^^ 

^\tnUist,tke.oalls.  »ieV    (Bielett)      ®anf,      ^nany 

^XtlyXXtX^,  the  doors.  ^^^^^^^_ 

NEUTBR.  Il9<)fen,    knock. 

JloS  <Sl^Io^,  the  lock.  herein,  come  in  ! 


94  NOUNS. FIRST    DECLENSION.       [Les.  XII. 

Note  22.  —  Some  verbs  which  take  the  direct  object  in  Eng- 
lish take  a  dative  in  German.  The  most  common  are:  begegncn, 
*'  meet " ;  baiifen,  "  thank  " ;  folgen,  "  follow  " ;  gef alien,  "  please  " ; 
ge^or(^en,  "obey";  l)elfen,  "help";  fd)aben,  "harm";  for  fuller 
list  see  Appendix. 


Conversation  ii.  — Das  ^tmmer. 

I.  aSte  ijd^t  "room"  auf  beutjc^? 

2.  "Room"  ^ei^t  auf  beutfd^  „ba§  3i^i^^i^*" 

Etc.,  etc. 

I.  2Bie  t)tele  SBanbe  i)at  biefe^  3^^^^^^  ? 

2.  ®iefe^  3^^^^^  ^^^  ^i^^  SBcinbe. 
I.  §at  ein  3i^Jner  tmmer  t)ier  SBanbe? 

2.  3^/  ^i^  3i^^^^  ^<^^  getD5{)nlic^  )okx  2Bdnbe. 

Etc.,  etc. 

I.  ^ai  ba^  3^^^^^  ^^^^  !einen  2^eppt(^  ? 

2.  5JJein,  leiber  l^at  ba§  3^^^^^/  ^'  f»  ^- 
I.  SBoHen  ©ie  ba^  2Bort  ,,3^^^^^''  beMinteren? 

2.  ®a§  SBort  „3i^^^^"  befliniert  man  fo:  „Noni.,  ba^ 
3itnmer/'  k. 

Etc.,  etc. 


^  Reading  12. 

9Ser  glaferne  93eine  i)at,  mit^  ntc^t  auf^  @i§  geljcn. 

Whoever  glass         legs      has,   must      not  on  to  the  ice      go. 

"  People  in  glass  houses  must  not  throw  stones,'* 


Les.  XII.]      NOUNS.  —  FIRST   DECLENSION.  95 

3ttfttebettficlt. 

Contentment, 
g^o^ann  aJiartin  aJllHcr. 

SBag  frag'  ic^  uiet  nad^  ®elb  unb  ®ut, 

why    care  property 

^enn  ic^  jufrieben  bin! 

®t6t  ®ott  mir  nur  gefunbe^  Slut, 

sound      blood  (good  health) 

@o  ^aV  id)  frozen  ©inn, 

merry      mind 

Unb  ftug'  mit  banfbarem  ®emut' 

grateful  spirit 

9Jtein  SOZorgem  unb  mein  Slbenblieb. 
@o  mancf)er  j(i)tt)immt  im  U6erf(u^, 

abundance 

§at  §au^  unb  §of  unb  ®elb, 

farm 

Unb  ift  bo(^  immer  DoEt  S^erbru^, 

(of)  vexation 

Unb  freut  fid)  ntd^t  ber  2Se(t: 

enjoys 

Se  me^r  er  i)at,  je  mef)r  er  tDiH, 

The  the 

9iie  fc^tDcigen  feine  Slagen  ftill. 

stop  complaints 

S)o(^  |)reif'  id^  laut  unb  toBe  &ottf 

praise 

Unb  f^tDeb'  in  ^oI)em  Tint, 

swim  high       spirit 

Unb  benf:  t§>  ift  ein  lieber  ®ott, 
Unb  meint'^  mit  9Kenfd)en  gut! 

means  it  well 

S)rum  tDill  iif)  immer  banfbar  fein, 
Unb  mii^  ber  ®ute  @otte^  freun! 

goodness 


96  NOUNS.  SECOND    DECLENSION.        [Les.  XIII. 

LESSON  XIII. 

Nouns —  Second  Declension —  Demonstrative  and 
Possessive  Pronouns. 

1.  Cultivate  the  use  of  \a,  botf)  and  Voo{)\,  introdu- 
cing them  at  every  opportunity, 

2.  2)iefe  ^erren  finb  Stubcntcn ;  berjcntgc  (or  bet), 

the  one 

tt>cld)cr   f^Jtiri^t^    ftubicrt   bte    S^rac^cn   mit   mcincm 

who  is  studying  [the]     languages 

$»cffcti. 

3.  Learn  this  sentence ;  note  the  forms  of  the 
nouns  and  learn  the  principal  forms  of  each;  put 
in  ja,  bocE)  and  tDO^t,  being  sure  to  understand  the 
effect. 

4.  The  Second  Declension  comprises  most  fem- 
inine polysyllables,  about  half  of  all  feminine  mono- 
syllables, masculines  ending  in  -e,  denoting  living 
beings,  masculine  nouns  from  foreign  languages 
accented  on  the  last  syllable,  but  not  ending  in  -al, 
-an,  -aft  and  -r,  and  a  few  very  common  masculine 
monosyllables  (see  Appendix  for  list). 

5.  Table  of  Case-Endings  of  the  Second  Declension. 

Sing^ular.  Plural. 

M.  F. 

Nom.  (C)it 

Gen.  (e)tt  (C)tt 

Dat.  (e)tt  (C)tt 

Ace.  (c)tt  (C)tt 


Les.  XIII.]       NOUNS. SECOND    DECLENSION.  97 

6.   Declension  of  a  Masculine  Noun  of  the  Second 
Declension. 


Singular, 

Plural. 

Nom. 

bet:  StttbCttt',  the  student 

bic  Stttbcn'tCtt^  the  students. 

Gen. 

bCi3@tubCtt'tCtt,  ^/"  " 

bcr  ©tubctt'tcit,  of  "  " 

Dat. 

bcm  Stuben'tett, /^  "  " 

ben  <^iVi\^tX(!it%  to  "  " 

Ace. 

ben  Stttbctt'ten,     "  " 

bie  Stnben'ten,       "  " 

7.  Declension  of  a  Feminine  Noun  of  the  Second 

Declension. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Nom.     bie  8<JraiJ^e,  the  language.    '^\t  S^rad^en,  the  languages. 

Gen.     ber  S^rac^e,  of "     "  ber  S^trarfjen,  e/^  "      " 

Dat.      ber  S^rati^e,  /^  "     "         tstn  S^Jta^en,  /<;  " 
Ace.      bie  S^ra^c,      "     "         bie  S^jrati^en,       "       " 

Demonstrative  Pronouns. 

8.  S)tefer  is  either  ////i-  or  that,  unless  two  objects 
are  contrasted;  then  biefer  is  this,  jener  that ;  btefer 
is  also ///^ /<2/^^r,  jener  the  former,  S)er  (same  de- 
clension as  the  relative  ber  except  gen.  pi.  berer  or 
berert)  is  also  this  or  that,  or  an  emphatic  he.  In 
the  correlative,  he  or  the  one  is  berienige,  or  ber. 

Possessive  Pronouns. 

9.  It  is  necessary  to  discriminate  between  the 
possessive  adjectives  and  the  possessive  pronouns 
(Lesson  IV,  3).  For  the  latter  German  has  three 
forms :  meiner,  ber  tneine,  ber  meintge,  in  the  latter 
two  the  second  word  declined  as  a  weak  adjective 
(Lesson  XV).  Thus  one  may  say :  %^x  §ut  unb 
meiner,  or  ber  tneine,  or  ber  metnige,  for  your  hat  and 
mine. 


98 


TABLE   OF    DECLENSIONS.         [Les.  XIIL 


< 


r   «^  «^  «^  «^ 

;tand ; 
e  e  in 
com- 
ral. 

wj-    4,   3 

vj 

^^■5  a 

M 

^         'UH     <U 

?; 

-      ^^^ 

n 

y ' 

(U  to   1>   P 

•J        -^ 

-dTS^  > 

>; 

fi    fl    W    OJ 

» 

(/3 

o 

3   <Uj5^ 

I 

fl^ 

a  ^--^ 

rtlS  s  ° 

0)       o  S 

^-g^s 

!^-l^ 

5 

'i.>J'S^ 

S 
s    - 

M 

» 

>    ^ 

i  "i 

3   rt   oj  S 

f=^ 
J 

x-SEs 

J 
^ 

k4 

1 

t 

± 

^ 

t 

W 

2  w  o  6 

w 

>    . 

-^    OJ    fi'S 

H 

<» 

J   IT) 

« 

.>    < 

i  < 

>  <i 

> 

rtr^     ^     M 

Z 

0  w 

fl,'2'55 

13 

'^   o 

^^ 

|:5§::. 

^ 

Hi  <: 

-  ^  ©--J 

u 

M  h) 

S  S5  c^S 

£d 

::§e° 

:^ 

o^ 

glcSl 

Q 
< 

^ 

'aoj  -iS* 

f 

11   « 

Z     "'-^     J 

.S  !2  c-^ 

H 
H 

t 

£: 

£ 

rt   R   D   »3 

:3 

--5    Ri    **    rt 

r  yj               ju    j_>    j->    %^ 

-^-S  fa  s^ 

h3 

>>         Q> 

^|ao 

<: 

^  *5       1 

i^ 

- 

rt:l 

I 

sir. 

u5 

(/5 

i  °  is " 

6   a  ^   3 

mi 

•< 

O      0)      Oj      O 

< 

O    <u    rt    u 

o 

iz 

0 

Q 

< 

o 

5^ 

^  L 

5  Q 

:^  < 

^ 

£.t$. 

Les.  XIII.]       NOUNS. SECOND    DECLENSION.  QQ 

10.  While  the  stem  of  the  possessive  differs  in 
the  third  person  with  the  gender  of  the  word  from 
which  it  is  derived,  in  declension  it  must  agree 
with  the  word  for  which  it  stands ;  thus  fcin  is  Jiis, 
possessive  from  Jie,  but  it  is  feminine  in  meine 
3Jf utter  unb  feine,  my  mother  and  his. 

Note  23. — SJJenfd)  is  "human  being"  in  distinction  from 
animals;  also  "  man,"  "  fellow,"  in  a  disparaging  sense.  9)?ann 
is  "  man,"  the  iisual  word  in  distinction  from  "  woman." 

Note  24. —  Most  nouns  primitively  masculine  add  -in  and 
modify  the  stem-vowel  to  form  the  corresponding  feminine :  as, 
!OeI}rer,  teacher,  lOe^^rertn,  woman  teacher ;  ®raf,  count,  ©rcifin 
countess;  ^q6),  cook,  ^ocf)in,  woman  cook;  @angcr,  singer, 
©angerin,  woman  singer;  bte  grau  3)o!toriti,  the  doctor's  wife. 
Such  feminines  double  the  final  it  before  the  -ett  of  the  plural. 

Note  25.  —  After  words  of  measure  ("a  cup  of,"  "glass  of," 
"  pair  of,"  "pound  of"),  the  noun  is  not\pitt  in  the  genitive,  but 
treated  as  indeclinable;  as,  eiu  ®(a§  SBeilT,  If,  however,  the 
tioun  expressing  the  substance  measured  be  limited  by  an  ad- 
jective, it  is  generally  in  the  genitive ;  as,  eitt-®ta§  guten  SBelue^. 

Vocabulary. 
(Words  not  starred  are  in  the  Second  Declension.) 
MASCULINE.  ^le  U^Xf  the  watch,  clock. 

*bcr  ^Cttner,  the  waiter.  ^|g  ^g|^^  i}ig  time. 

bcr  ®taf,  the  count. 
tcr  ^Ctt,  the  gentleman,  sir  (in  neuter. 

address,  always  in  the  form       '^'^^^   ^ticfti^cn   (little    letter), 
tncin  §err),  the  note. 

\^tX  "^t^tf  the  nephew. 

ber  @olbat'  the  soldier.  ^'"^^^'^f  "^'^^^y- 

bet  SJlcnfc^,  {the)  man,  human  ^^^^^^'  unfortunately. 

leing.  ftttbicren,  study. 

FEMININE.  jc^t,  now. 

bic  ®rfe,  the  corner.  iDcfti^dftigt,  occupied,  busy, 

bic  StmtbC,  the  hour,  the  red-  fiefUf^Ctt,  visit. 

tation.  fc^Idfctt^  sleep,  be  asleep. 


lOO         NOUNS. SECOND    DECLENSION.       [Les.  XIII. 

Exercise  XIII. 

I.  S)te  ©olbaten  unb  bte  ©tubenten  ftnb  nic^t  immet 
greunbe.     2.  S)a^  tft  letber  tdai)x,  aba  fie  follten  e^  fein. 

3.  @te  [tnb  bo(^  atle  2Jf enfd)cn  unb  Sinber  be^  SSaterlanb^. 

4.  S)tefer  ©tubent  i)at  nid^t  3^it  9^iti^9  3^  ftubieren. 

5.  2Ste   !ommt  benn   ba^?    Sft   er   fei)r    befd^aftigt? 

6.  5td^  nein,  er  ift  nur  etn  Snabe;  er  fptelt  mtt  ben  anbern 
Snaben.  7.  S[t  er  nic^t  ber  $Jieffe  be^  |)errn,  ber  bort 
ftef)t?  8.  aSer  tft  benn  be:;  9Kenf^?  9.  ©r  fi|t  f^on 
nteljr  aU  etne  ©tunbe  bort.  10.  Sd)  tt)ei^  tt)irlltd^  ni^t ; 
aber  ift  e^  nid^t  ber  93ruber  jene^  ©olbaten,  tr)el(f)er  fo 
gern  fingt?  n.  S(^  fe^e  it)n  oft  mit  jenem  ©olbaten. 
12.  gragen  ©ie  einmal  SI)ren  9?effen.  13.  SKein  9?effe 
f ennt  it)n  nun  ^  gar  nic^t ;  f ennt  it)n  ber  St)rige  ? 
14.  Sfinnen  ©ie  S^re  U^r  fe^en  ?  Sft  e^  nid^t  fd)on 
3eit  ju  get)en  ?  15.  3Ba^  madden  bie  ©tubenten  ju  biefer 
©tunbe  ?  16.  ©ie  befud^en  getDo^nlid^  it)re  greunbinnen 
in  ber  Qtaht 

*  intensive ;   tr.  simply  after  nephew. 

Exercise  13. 

I.  What  is  the  name  of  that  boy  whom  we  see 
yonder  ?  2.  The  one  studying  '  is  Henry  ;  he  is  my 
nephew.  3.  ,1  ^am  ^not  ^ speaking  ^of  (,yowx 
7  nephew  ^  now.  4.  Well,  lyou  asurely  aare  eiiot  aspeak- 
ing^of  s yours?  5. 1  was  speaking  of  that  student  in 
the  corner  of  the  room.  6.  O,  that  person !  He  is 
only  a  boy  ,  who  ^  writes   ^  notes   ^  for  3  the  ^wait- 


Les.  XIII.]       NOUNS. SECOND    DECLENSION.  lOI 

ers.  7.  Then  2-  he  is  not-a  3  student  after-all  4  ?  8.  Yess, 
he  is  the  son  of  a  soldier  and  studies  the  languages. 

9.  Is    that  his  book  from   which  he   is   reading? 

10.  2  Why  5  ,no,  I  believe  it  is  mine.  n.  Where 
did  you  find  that  book,  sir  ?  12.  I  have  it  from  that 
gentleman  who  is  writing  the  note.  13.  ,  Are  3  all 
2  those  6  students  ?  14.  These  here  are  students, 
but  that  man  is  a  soldier,  the  son  of  a  count.  15. 1 
believe  the  soldier  is-sleeping. 

^  Tr.  who  is  studying.     *  Also  after  verb.     ^  fcin.      *  bO(^  after 
Vocabulary  for  the  Conversation. 

MASCULINE. 


'? 


ber  %xWtX  (table-maker),  the       f"""^'  '>«tf^'"'t'r 

cabinet-maker.  '«f*«^«"  "««'   ""'"*  "f  ("'* 

dative). 

FEMININE.  bclCUti^tCtt,  lig^it  up,  ilhitninate. 

"tXZ  £e^ne,  the  back  (of  a  chair).       ettt^altCtt,  contain. 

Conversation  12.  —  Pas  §tmmer. 

I.  9Bte  t)iele  genfter  l^at  ein  3i^wier? 

2.  ®in  3^^^^^  ^^^  jutDeiten  ein  genfter  .unb  ji^ir^eilen 
itie^r.  ,"  *>•''.  r.,  :  i'  \,  •*'/  ' 

I.  2Ba^  !ontmt  burc^  ba^  genfter? 

2.  2)a§  Sid^t  lommt  burd^  ba§  g^enfter. 
I.  (Sntpit  ein  3ii^n^^i^  tmmer  ©tiitjle? 

2.  3^/  ^i^  3^^^^^  ent^dlt  geti:)ol)nlici^  ©tii^le. 
I.  aSorau^  be[tel)t  ein  @tut)l  ? 

-.  ©in  ©tu^l  befte^t  au§  ber  Se^ne,  bem  6i^e,  iinb  ben 
93einen. 


102         NOUNS. — SECOND    DECLENSION.       [Les.  XlII. 

I.  3Bie  6eleud)tet  man  ein  3inimer  in  ber  9?adjt  ? 
2.  Man  beleuc^tet  ein  3iww^^^  i^  ^^^  3lad)t  mit  ©as^: 
licbt. 
I.  3Bie  t)ei^t  ber  Wlann,  indd^er  bie  @tiit)te  unb  Sijc^e 
mad)t  ? 
2.  2)er  3Dlann,  ti;)eld£)er  bie  ©tii^le  unb  2^ifd^e  ntad^t, 
l^ei^t  ein  Stif(i)ler.     Etc.,  etc. 

Reading  13. 
betters  9«ot8ettUeb. 

Dragoon's  morning-song. 
aSon  sffiill^eltn  ^auff. 

ajJorgenrot,  SRorgenrot ! 

morning-red 

Seud^teft  mir  gum  frii^en  Xoh? 

Shinest     for  me  early 

Salb  tDirb  bie  Slrontpete  blafen, 

trumpet      blow 

„  SJalb  inerb'  ic^  mein  Seben  laffen, 
>     Sd£j  imb  nxandjer  Samerab.     (Repeat). 

v'" " '   •' "^ciitn:  gebadjt,  faunt  gebad)!, 

Hardly 

2Sarb  ber  Suft  ein  (^nV  gentad^t. 

to  the  joy 

®eftern  nod^  auf  ftoljen  Sioffen, 

proud      steeds 

^eute  burd^  bie  Sruft  gefc^offen 

breast  shot 

SOJorgen  in  ba§  fii^te  ®rab.     (Repeat). 


Les.  XIV.]     ADJECTIVES.. FIRST    DECLENSION.    1 03 

S)arum  ftill,  barum  ftill 

gilg'  id)  mid)  tvk  ®ott  e^  tviU; 

yield  as 

Unb  fo  tt)il(  id)  Wadtx  ftreiten, 

valiantly 

Unb  foUt'  id)  ben  %oh  erleiben, 

suffer 

©tirbt  ein  brat)er  3teiter^mann.     (Repeat)» 

LESSON    XIV. 

Adjectives. — First  Declension. 

1.  grifd^ci^  Srot  unb  gcHc  SButtcr  mit  jutem  ^affcc 
ma^cn  cin  ^^^^ii^ftutf  fiir  ^ungrigc  9icifcnbc. 

2.  Learn  this  sentence ;  compare  the  endings  of 
the  adjectives  with  those  of  biefer  in  the  same  places. 

3.  Attributive  Adjective.  —  When  a  descriptive 
adjective  is  placed  before  a  noun,  agreeing  with  it 
in  gender  and  case,  it  is  said  to  be  used  attribu- 
tively ;  as,  ein  gnter  Tlann,  "  a  good  man." 

4.  Predicate  Adjective. — When  an  adjective  is 
used  in  connection  with  a  verb  to  assert  something 
of  an  object,  and  stands  without  any  case-ending 
after  the  verb,  it  is  said  to  be  used  predicatively ; 
as,  fein  §au^  Wax  fd)on,  "his  house  was  handsome." 

5.  Adjective  as  Noun.  —  An  adjective  is  some- 
times used  independently,  the  noun  with  which  it 
agrees  being  understood.  In  this  case  it  has  the 
value  of  a  noun,  and   is  written  with  a  capital.     It 


I04     ADJECTIVES. FIRST    DECLENSION.     [Les.   XIV. 

is  declined  witli  or  without  an  article,  as  if  the  noun 
with  which  it  agrees  were  expressed :  ber  ®ute 
rdumt  ben  ^(al^  bem  93i3len,  ''  the  good  (man)  gives 
place  to  the  wicked  (one)." 

6.  Adjective  as  Adverb.  —  Any  adjective  in  the 
stem  form  (/.  e.,  without  any  ending  of  declension) 
may  be  used  as  an  adverb  :  as,  er  ))ai  flei^ig  ftubiert, 
"  he  has  studied  diligently."  This  is  true  only  of 
the  positive  and  comparative :  for  the  superlative 
a  phrase  formed  with  an,  auf  or  jii  is  substituted ; 
as,  Voa^  am  meiften  in  bte  Slngen  fiel,  "what  most 
struck  the  eye " ;  man  mn^  fie  auf^  befte  erjiefien, 
"they  must  be  brought  up  in  the  best  manner  "  ; 
\>a  traf  er  jnm  erften  S^rt}m,  "  then  he  smote  Thrym 
first."     (See  Lesson  XVI.) 

Declension  of  Adjectives. 
?•  An  attributive  adjective  is  regularly  declined, 
one  used  predicatively  in  the  positive  and  compar- 
ative degrees   is  not   declined.      Participles  when 
used  as  adjectives  are  declined  like  other  adjectives. 

8.  There  are  two  declensions  of  adjectives,  which 
may  be  called  the  First  and  Second  Declensions. 
The  latter  has  two  varieties,  which  we  will  call 
Class  I  and  Class  II. 

First  Declension. 

9.  The  First  or  strong  Declension  is  the  form 
used  for  the  attributive  adjective  when  it  is  pre- 


Les.  XIV.]      ADJECTIVES. FIRST    DECLENSION.      10$ 

ceded  by  no  limiting  word  (as  an  article,  possessive, 
etc.)  having  itself  the  endings  of  the  strong  de- 
clension; as,  guter  Wtann,  "good  man."  The  ad- 
jective is  in  this  case  declined  like  btefer. 

10.   Adjectives    declined    according    to   the    First 
Declension. 

Declension  of  gutcr  SBcilt,  S'ood  wine. 
Singular.  Plural. 

Norn,  gutcr  2Bcitt  ^yxit  SScinc 

Gen.  gutc^  3Seine^  gutcr  SSeittc 

Dal.  gutcm  SBeinc  gutcn  SBcttten 

Ace.  gutcn  "^tm  gutc  9®ciuc 

11.  Declension  of  gutc  Su^jJC,  good  soup. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Norn,  gutc  8u^^c  gutc  @u^))Ctt 

Gen.  gutcr     „  gutcr     „ 

Dat.  guter     „  gutctt     „ 

Ace.  gutc       „  gtttc      „ 

12.  Declension  of  gutc^  %'WS^,  good  cloth. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Norn,  gutc^  Xu(^  gutc  Xu(f)cr 

Gen.  gutc§  %yx^t^  gutcr  Xiitficr 

Dat.  gutcm  %Vi^t  gutcn  2:tt^cttt 

Ace.  gutc§  Xurfi  gutc  ^urfjcr 

Remark.  —  Except  in  the  nominative  of  address,  as  gutcr 
9J2ann !  the  singular  of  this  form  of  declension  is  practically  limited 
to  use  with  abstract  and  mass  nouns  and  names  of  materials. 

The  strong  forms  are  used  when  the  adjective  and  its  noun  are 
preceded  by  a  limiting  genitive  or  a  cardinal   number,  as   beS 


I06      ADJECTIVES. FIRST    DECLENSION.     [Les.  XIV. 


3^aterg  neuer  ^wi,  father's  new  hat ;  brei  neue  ^iic^er ;  also  after 
etnja§  and  ni^tg,  as  tiVoa^  ®Uteg,  something  good;  nic^ts  i8ofe8, 
nothing  bad. 

Vocabulary. 


MASCULINE. 


bcr  ^affCC^  the  coffee. 

ber  S3ud)pttb(cr,  ^//^  bookseller. 

bet  ^anbfr^tt^,  ^/^^  ^/^z/^. 

ber    S^erftanb,     understanding, 
sense. 


FEMININE. 


^At  @Otte,  the  sort,  kind. 

bie  S^jeifefarte,  the  bill  of  fare. 
bic  greube,  7>i^. 

bie  ^tt^e,  repose,  rest. 
bie  9Wil^f  the  milk, 

NEUTER. 

baig  Sriitri^eit,  the  roll. 

\s^^  lift^tUti^,  ^//^  table-cloth. 

"tsti^  ^attbtu(5^,  //^-?  /^^^/. 


^ier  5tt  Saitbe  (here  to  land), 
/■;/  this  country. 

angene^m,  pleasant. 

gutett  SJlorgeit,  ^<?^^  morning! 

ttiie  ge^t  c;^  S^neu  (how  goes 

it  to  you),  how  are  you  ?  how 
do  you  do? 
"i^a^yXf  in  addition. 

tua^rettb,  while. 

J^Wftigr  g(^y^  merry. 

befteHen,  order. 

Mt^tttf  spread. 
htVtXt,  ready. 

fleitt  {lUxnt§)  (V$e(b  (small 

money),  change. 

mix  ift  lieber,  I  prefer. 


Exercise  XIV. 

I.  %i)  tDiinjc^e  3f)nen  gutett  SKorgeit;  tt)te  ge^t 
e^  Sf)nen?  2.  Sd)  bante  f^on;  e^  ge{)t  tttir  gut. 
3.'  2(n  tDddjem  %\\^t  fi^en  ©ie  betm  grut)ftu(i?  4.  |)a^ 
ben  @te  bie  ©peifelarte  ge:^a6t?  5-  SatDO^I,  ba  Itegt 
fie  unter  Sf)rem  Seller.  6.  Set)  fiube  eine  S^affe  guten 
Saffeeg  genug  jutn  grui)ftu(J.  7.  %^  tDunfd^e  au(^ 
uic£)t  Diel,  aber  tnir  ift  eine  Slaffe  frifdjer  WM^  lieber. 
8.  aSa^  fpred)en  @ie  ba   t)on  gutettt  ^affee  ?  9.  3Kan 


Les.  XIV.]     ADJECTIVES. FIRST    DECLENSION.      lO/ 

faun  guten  ^affee  nt(^t  immer  ^ahm,  lo.  ajfeine 
§erren,  ba^  tft  mir  ju  toentg ;  i^  ttiiinfc^e  frtfd^e^ 
Srot  imb  gelbe  Sutter,  unb  baju  eine  gtaf^e  guten 
SSeiu^.  II.  S)ie  ©tubeuten  an  jenem  2^ifd)e  fiugen 
hofS)  fe^r  f(^ou.  12.  Sa,  bag  fiub  lufttge  2ieber,  tDeli^e 
[ie  fiugen.  13.  @te  fiugen  'oon  fu^er  9tul)e  unb  t)oEer 
greube.  14.  2)ag  ift  aber  ein  9J?auu  t)ou  gutem  95er== 
ftanbe.  15.  aBaruut  fagen  @te  ha§>  mit  fo  tauter 
©timme  ?  16.  (£r  tuiinfc^t  fc^one  Xifd^tiic^er  unb  auc^ 
reine    |)anbtud}er.     17.   SBer    bejap    ben    SeUuer? 

18.  Seiber   Ijabe    i^    !ein   !tein  ®elb   (or   ^leingelb). 

19.  ^ahm  ©ie  uid)tg  ®uteg  t)on  ben  ©tubenten  ju 
fagen  ?   20.  3(^  metue,  tl)r  ©ingen  ift  boi)  ettua^  ®uteg. 

Exercise  14. 
I.  Gay  students  are  singing  beautiful  songs. 
2.  A  band  of  gay  students  ^  always  ^  sings  of  **  sweet 
repose."  3.  ,But  2  they  3  do  ^not  ^ always  3  bring 
g  sweet  g  repose  (to)  ^  weary  ^men.  4.  Yes,  but 
the  boys  must  all  be  gay.  5.  I  think  the  bookseller 
has  good  sense.  6.  He  says  he  drinks  strong  coffee 
when  the  students  sing.  7.  What  has  that  ^to  ^  do 
J  with  2  good  3  sense  .f*  8.  Let-us-eat '  while  they 
are  singing.  9.  I  spread  my  rolls  with  yellow  butter. 
10.  The  Germans  have  very  good  bread,  but  [they] 
eat  little  butter,  n.  I  found  ^  good  butter  in  Ger- 
many. 12.  But  the  breakfast  consists  3  usually  of 
fresh  rolls  and  good  coffee.     13.  Can  one  not  also 


I08     ADJECTIVES. FIRST    DECLENSION.     [Les.  XIV. 


MASCULINE. 


have  good  milk  ?  14.  O  yes,  the  milk  is  usually  very 
good.  15.  I  ate  my  rolls  with  sour  wine.  16.  It  is 
easy  to  order  sour  wine.  17.  Here  is  the  breakfast 
which  you  ordered.  18.  Ah,  here  we  have  something 
good.  19.  You  have  spoken  of  nothing  else  but  4  of 
[the]  eating.  20.  And  you  have  drunk  the  bottle 
of  sour  wine. 

^  (Sffcn  ttJir,  or  iCagt  un8  cffcn.    *  perfect  tense.     ^  1  consists  of,' 
befte^t  au«.    *al«. 

Vocabulary  for  the  Conversation. 

t>a^  Sefttti^'jimmer,  (A^  recep- 
tion-room, 

\s^^    SiiUot^cf'aimmcr,     the 

library. 

'h^^  S3abC5tmmcr,  the  bath-room. 

'^ti^  ^ittbcrjimmcr,  the  nursery. 

'^^^    S^tclaimmcr,    the  play- 
room. 

tierffi^ieben,  different^  various, 

^wcyxmJf  why? 

tUCtl,  because. 
Cm|jfattgCtt,  receive, 
%t\yt%  heat. 

inittetft^  by  means  ^(with  geni- 
tive). 
Baben,  bathe. 


ber  8ao(,  the  parlor. 
bctr  ^aft,  the  guest. 


FEMININE, 


bic  99Sof)nung^  the  apartment. 
'tXt  ^ivi^Zf  the  sitting-room. 
'tXt  ^ol^fol^len  (wood  coals), 

the  charcoal. 
bic  ©tcinfolftlett  (stone  coals), 

the  hard  coal. 
bic  9Jlc!jrjal^I,  the  plural. 
bic  ©ittjal^l,  />5^  singular. 

NEUTER. 

ba^  G^cBaubc,  />4<f  building, 
'tS^^  SSo^tt^aU)^,   />5<f  dwelling- 
house. 


Conversation  13.  — Die  rDot?nung. 

aSte  nennt  man  ba^  ©ebaube,  rt)ortn  man  tt)oI)nt  ? 
2.   3Kan  nennt  bag  ®e6aube,in  tt)elci^em  man  tpo^nt, 
etn  SBo^nf^aug. 


Les.  XIV.]     ADJECTIVES. FIRST    DECLENSION.      IO9 

I.  2Ba^  finb  bte  9?amen  ber  tierjd^tebenen  3intmer  etner 
aSof)nung? 
2.  ©ie  ^ei^en  ber  Baal,  bie  ©tube,  bag  ©d^lafjimmer, 
ba§  ©^gimmer,  bie  ^ud£)e,  u,  f.  tt). 
I.  aBarum  nennt  man   etn   3^^^^^  ^<^^   Smpfang^^ 
jtmmer  ? 
2.  SBeil  e§  bag  3^^^^^^  ift/  ^^  ^<i^  bie  ©dfte  etrH^fcingt. 

Etc.,  etc. 

I.  2Sie  {)et3t  man  bie  ©tube? 

2.  Man  ^eijt  bie  6tu6e  mittelft  beg  Dfeng. 
I.  28ag  brennt  man  in  bem  Dfen? 

2.  'Man  brennt  in  bem  Dfen  ^olj,  audE)  ^ol^fo^ten  obex 
©teinfol^Ien. 
I.  SBa^  tut  man  in  bem  ©d^Iafjimmer  ? 

2.  5Ran  fc^Idft  in  htm  ©d^Iafjimmer. 

Etc.,  etc. 

I.  aSte  ^eiJBt  bie  2)Zel)rsa^l  t)on  2[8oI)n^aug? 

2.  ®ie  9Jle{)rjaf)I  i)on  3Bo{)n{)aug  ^ei^t  2Bo^ttf)dufer. 

Etc.,  etc. 
Reading  14. 

§unger  ift  ber  befte  Sod^. 

cook 

"  Hunger  is  the  best  sauce.'* 
^tnn  bie  St^matBen  ^eimtttiittS  aiei^n. 

swallows        homeward         go. 
Son  Staxl  ^erlo^fol^n. 

aSenn  bie  @d^tt)al6en  f)eimn)drt§  5iet)n, 
aSenn  bie  9to]en  nicljt  metjr  bliilju, 

bloom 


I  lO     ADJECTIVES.  FIRST    DECLENSION.     [Les.  XIV. 

2Senn  ber  DIadjtigall  ©efang 

nightingale's      song 

9Jtit  ber  91a(^tigall  tierflang, 

has  past 

1 :  gragt  ha^  ^erj  in  bangem  ©darners,:  \ 

anxious        grief 

l:Db  t(f)  Ui)  and)  mieber  fe^'?:| 

whether 

©d^eiben,  ad)  ©i^etben,  ©dE)etben  tut  tvd). 

parting  makes  woe 

SBenn  bte  ©c£)tr)ane  fiiblti^  jtet)n, 

swans     southward 

2)ort^m,  tvo  3toonen  blul)n, 

Thither  lemons 

3[Benn  ba^  Slbenbrot  t)er[in!t, 

dies 

S)urd)  bte  griitten  3[BaIber  blinft, 

gleams 

gragt  ba§  ^erj,  u.  ^.  tD. 

5lrmeg  ^erj,  tt)a§  Hageft  bu! 
D  aud)  bu  ge^ft  etnft  jur  9tuf)M 
2Sa^  auf  @rben  tnu^  t)erge^n, 

pass  away 

®ibt  e§  tDo^^t  em  SBteberfet^n  ? 

indeed  meeting  again 

I :  gragt  ba^  ^erj  in  bangem  (Sd^merj, :  | 

®Iaub'  ba^  id)  bid)  tt)ieber  fel}', 
I : Slut  aud^  l^euf  @d)eiben,  @d)eiben  fo  tr)ef)!:| 


Les.   XV.]     ADJECTIVES. — SECOND    DECLENSION.    Ill 

LESSONXV. 

Adjectives. — Second  Declension. 

1.  2)cr  3Wtc  i)at  bem  juugcn  Wannt  ha§  SRiitigc 

old  man  the  necessary 

gefagt  unb  xt)m  cine  gliitfli^e  9Jcifc  geltiilnft^t 

wished. 

2.  Learn  this  sentence ;  note  the  case  of  the 
various  adjectives  and  compare  the  forms  with 
those  of  the  strong  declension.  Observe  the  ini- 
tial letters  of  the  adjectives  used  as  nouns. 

3«  The  Second  or  weak  Declension  is  used 
when  the  adjective  is  preceded  by  certain  words, 
which  have  themselves  the  full  endings,  so  that 
those  of  the  adjective  are  reduced  to  a  simpler 
form  :  — 

4«  Class  I  is  the  form  of  the  Second  Declen- 
sion after  ,,bcr'^  words ;    Class  II  that  used  after 

^,cin^'  words. 

Class  I. 

5.  The  ffitx^*  words  include,  in  addition  to  those 
given  in  Lesson  III,  p.  21  (ber,  btef-  jen-  Wddj-, 
|eb-,  mandj-  fold)-),  the  following  indefinite  numeral 
adjectives  used  only  in  the  plural :  alk,  anbere, 
eintge,  etlidje,  jegltc^e,  mefirere,  \)idt,  tDenige. 

6.  After  these  words  the  ending  of  the  adjec- 
tive is  ett,  excepting  in  the  nominative  singular 
throughout,  and  in  the  feminine  and  neuter  accusa- 


112    ADJECTIVES. SECOND    DECLENSION.    [Les.  XV. 

tive  singular,  where  it  is  t*  It  will  be  observed 
that  these  are  the  forms  learned  for  masculine 
nouns  as  the  Weak  Declension.  The  present 
paradigms  merely  extend  these  forms  to  feminines 
and  neuters  also. 

7.  The  adjective  may  be  used  substantively 
merely  by  capitalizing  it,  so  that  ber  ®ute  means 
tke  good  many  bie  ®ute,  the  good  womafty  and  h(x^ 
®ute,  the  good  (whatever  is  good). 

8.  Declension  of  bcr  0UtC  SJlamt,  the  good  man. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Nom.  bcr  gutc  SJiautt  bic  gutcn  SJlanner 

Gen.  bci^  rjuteit  Wdwxt^  bet  gutcn  Wmrxtx 

Dat.  bcm  guten  SJlannc  ben  gutcn  Wmwtxxx 

Ace.  '^trt  gutctt  SJlatttt  bic  gutcn  Whxntx 

9.  Declension  of  bic  gutC  ^xaUf  the  good  woman. 

Sing^ular.  Plural. 

Nom.  bic  gntc  %xavL  bic  gutcn  ^xantn 

Gen.    bcr  gutcn  fjrau  bcr  gutcn  fjraucn 

Dat.    ber  gutcn  IJrau  ben  gutcn  fjrauen 

Ace.    bie  gutc  fjrau  bic  guten  f^rauen 


10.   Declension  of  btt!^  gutc  ^M^f  the  good  book. 
Singular.  Plural. 

Nom.  t^^^  gutc  S3u^  bie  guten  JBiic^cr 

Gen.    bcig  guten  Suti^ci^  bcr  gutcn  SSit^cr 

Dat.    bent  gutcn  S3udftc  ben  gutcn  ^iX^ttn 

Ace.    ^a^  gute  S3u^  bie  gutcn  SJilri^er 


Les.  XV.]    ADJECTIVES. SECOND    DECLENSION.    II 3 

Class  II. 

11.  The  ,,ettt^'  words  in  the  three  places  under- 
scored in  the  scheme  below  {i.  e,  nominative  mas- 
culine and  nominative  and  accusative  neuter  in  the 
singular)  do  not  have  the  endings,  so  that  the  ad- 
jective in  these  cases  returns  again  to  the  form  of 
the  First  Declension. 


12 

.   An  Adjective  declined  according  to  Class  II. 

Singular. 

Norn. 

mcttt  gutcr 

mcinc  gutc 

tttein  gute| 

Gen. 

titctttC!^  ^itn 

mciner  giitcn 

mtxnt^  guten 

Dat. 

meinem  ^vdtn 

mcincr  guten 

nteinem  guten 

Ace. 

meinen  guten 

mcittc  gutc 

Plural. 

ntein  gutc£ 

Norn. 

mcittc  gutcn 

Gen. 

mciuer  gutcn 

Dat. 

meinen  guten 

Ace. 

metnc  guten 

13  •  Thus  "  the  good  man  "  and  "  my  good  man  '* 
differ  in  declension  only  in  the  nominative  singular, 
ber  gutc  3Kann,  but  metn  guter  SKanrt.  One  may  say : 
the  strong  ending  must  appear  at  least  once ;  where 
the  limiting  word  lacks  such  ending  the  descriptive 
adjective  takes  it  up. 

14.  The  student  should  decline  the  complete 
paradigms  in  paragraphs  8,  9  and  10,  substituting 
mein  or  fein  for  ber  throughout. 


114   ADJECTIVES.  — SECOND    DECLENSION.   [Les.  XV. 

Vocabulary. 
MASCULINE.  gent  i^abtn^  like. 

bcr  SBiitJier,  the  citizen.  gefatten,  please  (with  dative). 

ber  StrU^^Ut,  the  straw  hat.  augCttC^m,  pleasant,  agreeable. 

bcr  ^(r^t,  the  physician.  gcffittigft      (adverb),      //    you 

ber  ©Cfd^matf,  taste.  please. 

ttdgcn^  wear,  carry. 
^^^'^'^^'  ^oUtn,  shall. 

btC  QJcft^marf^fari^C,  the  matter       attber,  ^//^^r,  different, 
of  taste.  ^on^tV^av,  peculiar. 

BcfOttber,  especial. 

NEUTER.  ^i    ^^      t      ■     7  ^        7 

^  nCU,  bright,  clear. 

l.o§  SBanb,  /^.  rMon.  weuiflftens,  «^  /..rf. 

tUOlIen^  woolen. 


Exercise  XV. 

I.  2)tefer  junge  Strjt  tragt  einen  neuen  §ut.  2.  SBa^ 
ift  ba^  aber  fiir  ein  |)ut?  3.  |)a6en  @ie  benn  fetnen 
neuen  .f)ut  noc^  ntc^t  gefefien  ?  4.  Ser  neue  |)ut  be^ 
jungen  Strjte^  i[t  ein  ©trof)t)ut  5.  ©ein  neuer  ^ut  gefdllt 
mir  nic^t  fe()r,     6.  (£r  \)^i  boc^  ein  I)ell  blaue^  Sianb. 

7.  §aben  @ie  benn  bie  blauen  ©anber  nic[)t  gem  ? 

8.  2Ic^  nein,  ic^  ^abe  nid^t^  Sefonbere^  gegen  bie  blauen 
93anber.  9.  Slber  ein  blaue^  S3anb  (xx\.  bem  neuen 
§ute  eine^  Slrjte^  gefallt  mir  ja'  nid)t.i  10.  Stber  ber 
^rjt  trdgt  ben  neuen  §ut  ji^on  eine  ganje  SBoc^e. 
II.  @r  gefdllt  bod^  tpenigften^  ben  guten  greunben  be^ 
5lrjte^.  12.  Slber  fagen  @ie  einmal:  rt)arum  foil  ein 
junger  Slrjt  fein  blaue^  93anb  tragen  ?  13.  S(^  tjabe 
ja  nur  t)on  bem  blauen  93anb  an  einem  (Strot)l)ut  ge^ 


Les.  XV.]    ADJECTIVES. SECOND    DECLENSION.    II5 

[proc^cn.  14.  Sltfo  i[t  ba^  bei  einem  tDoIIenen  §ute 
anber^?  15.  2ld)  ja,  bie  iDoIIenen  |)itte  fittb  etlDQg  ganj 
Slnbere^.  16.  Sclj  l)abe  nte  baran  gebai^t.  17.  9?un, 
e^  i[t  }a  nur  eine  ®efd)mac!<3facf)e.  18.  (gie  l^aben  ge=^ 
iDi^  etnen  [onberbaren  ®ejd)mad.  19.  S)ie  blauen 
Scinber  gefallen  S^nen  dfo  tDO^I? 

^not  at  all. 

Exercise  15. 

I.  The  old  citizens  here  wear  straw  hats.    2.  Yes, 

1  know  I  one  old  citizen  who  wears  a  straw  hat  in 
the  cold  winter.  3,  Well,  the  cold  winter  is  some- 
thing different.  4.  I  have  never  seen  such  a  citi- 
zen.    5,  In  the  warm  summer,  at  least,   ^that    ^  is 

2  nothing  ^new.  6.  I  have  given  my  young  son  a 
new  hat.  7.  Was  it  a  woolen  hat  or  a  straw  hat  ? 
8.  O,  it  was  of-course  a  straw  hat.  9.  We  wear  what 
the  other  citizens  wear.  10.  But  is  not  your  son  a 
small  child.?  n.  To-be-surCj^-  but  even  3  small  chil- 
dren are  good  citizens.  12.  So-then,4  your  small 
child  is  a  good  citizen  ?  13.  I  hope  he  will  become 
a  good  citizen.  14.  Which  do  you  call  the  good 
citizen,  the  new  hat  or  the  small  child  ?  15.  My 
dear  friend,  that  is  a  matter  of  taste.  16.  3lf-you- 
please,  Jet  ^us  ^speak  ^of  ^something  5di£ferent. 
17.  We  have  heard  enough  of  new  hats  and  good 
citizens.  18.  Yes,  but  ,we  jUever  ^have  too  many 
good  citizens. 


Il6    ADJECTIVES. SECOND    DECLENSION.    [Les.  XV. 


Vocabulary  for  the  Conversation. 


MASCULINK. 


bcr  teller,  the  cellar. 
bet  §of,  the  courts  yard. 

bcr  dottier'  (pr.  ^ort=ie^Or 

the  porter. 


FEMININH. 


W,  ^atfe,  the  harp. 
bic  ^cigC,  the  violin. 


ciltC    ^rc^^C    ^^^)    (one  stair- 
way high),  the  second  story. 

5ttiel  2^re^^ctt  ()0(i^  (two  flights 

up),  the  third  story. 
ber  SBoben,  the  garret. 
DBerft,  uppermost^  highest. 
gcfeOttCt,  blessed. 


"^^^  StOjfttlCr!,  the  story. 
"^^^  ©rbgcft^O^,  the  first  story. 

Conversation  14.  —  Das  ^aus. 

I.  9Bie  {)ei§t  ba^  ©todtDcrf  (or  ®Gfc^of3)   iiber   bem 
Seller? 
2.  S)a§  ©lodftDerf  iiber  bem  Metier  ^eij^t  ba§  ©rbgefd^o^, 
ba  e§  gleicf)  iiber  ber  (Srbe  ift. 
I.  SBte  ^ei^t  ber  jmette  ©tod? 

2.  S)er  5it)eite  ©tocE  f)ei^t  „etne  2^re^)(3e  i^oc^." 

Etc.,  etc. 

I.  3Bot)on  finb  bte  ^liufer  gebaut? 

2.  ©te  finb  t)on  93atffteinen  ober  t>on  §ot§  gebaut. 
I.  9So  tDot)nt  ber  ©d^u^mad^er  ? 

2.  2)er  ©d[)u{)mad^er  n;)o^nt  im  oberften  ©todfiDerfe,  ober 
im  §ofe. 
I.  28o  tDo^nt  ber  5|3ortter'  ? 

2.  ®er  $ortier'  tDol^nt  neben  ber  §au§tur. 
I.  §aben  @ie  eincn  ^au^^jcljliifjcl? 

2.  9^ein,  aber  ber  pettier  tDtrb  nir  aufmad^en. 


Les.  XV.]     ADJECTIVES. SECOND    DECLENSION.     I  I  / 

I.  ©efciat  Sfjuen  Stjre  SBo^nung? 

2.  3a,  fie  f)at  ad)t  3ttnmer,  unb  ift  nur  eine  3:^re^J)e 

I.  aSer  fptelt  tm  §ofe? 

2.  @§  finb  gtt)et  "^taWntx  mit  §arfe  unb  ©etge. 
I.  2Bte  ^ei^t  "good-bye"  auf  ©eutfi^? 

2.  "Good-bye''  ^ei^t  auf  2)eutfc^,  „Seben  ©ie  h)o^I/' 
„3=af)r'  tt)o^I/^  „2lbieu." 
I.  3Ba§  fagt  man  naci)  Xifd^e  ? 

2.  3la(i)  SSifd^e  fagt  man,  ^©efegnete  SJJa^I^eit,"  ober 
„3d^  tpxinfd^e  ^fjnen  eine  gefegnele  SWa^I^eit/' 

Etc.,  etc. 
Reading  15. 

©igene  Seine  finb  bie  beften. 

(One's)  own    legs       are     the       best. 

"  Help  yourself." 
3tnifd)en  Soffel  nnb  S)htnb  geljt  t)iel  ©nppe  ju  ®rnnb. 

Between    spoon    and    mouth    goes  much  soup      to    ground. 

"There's  many  a  slip  'twixt  cup  and  lip." 
aSte  cine  mumt, 

S)n  bift  tDie  eine  Stume 

©0  l^olb  nnb  fdjun  nnb  rein; 

pure 

Sd)  fdjan'  bid)  an,  nnb  2Sef)mnt 

gaze  sadness 


Il8    ADJECTIVES. SECOND    DECLENSION.    [Les.  XV. 

©djletdjt  mir  in^  ^erj  ^inetn. 

steals 

W\v  \]i,  ate  oh  id)  bie  §anbe 
2luf§  §aupt  bir  legen  \oUt\ 
Setenb,  ba^  ®ott  bic^  erl^dte 

preserve 

@o  rein  unb  fc^on  unb  ^olb.        ^etne. 
^omtn\  §err  Sefu,  fei  unfer  ®aft, 

guest 

©egne  aEe^,  n)a^  bu  un^  bejd^eret  ^aft.     Slmen! 

Bless  granted 

|)err  ®ott,  I)tmmUfc^er  SSater,  fegne  un^   unb   bieje 

heavenly 

betne  ®a6en,   tvd6)t   tDtr   t)on  beiner  milben  ®ute  gu 

gifts  gracious  kindness 

un<3  ne{)men.     3lmen. 

A     prayer  after    table. 

3Bir  loben   bi(^  unb  jagen'  SDanf,^ 

praise 

S)u  gabfl  ^  un^  iDieber  ©petj'  3  unb  3;rant 

to  us    again        food         and     drink. 

21^,  lieber  ®ott,  bu  tDon[t4  and)  geben 

01 

?Ja^  biefer  SBelt  ba^  elDige  Seben!    9Imen. 

After  the    eternal    lif e  1 

*  give  thanks.  ^hast  given. 

'  for  ®))eifc.  **  mayst  thou  be  willing,  pleased 


Les.  XVI.]  COMPARISON.  II 9 

LESSON    XVI. 

Comparison  of  Adjectives  and  Adverbs. 

1.  2)cr  tueifeftc  9Mcnfc^  ift  ni^t  tmmcr  bcr  Bcfte, 

the       wisest 

abtx  tx  ift  am  ficftcn  itienn  er  am  itieifcftett 

[at  the]  best  [at  the]  wisest  (most  wisely) 

^anbelt 

acts. 

2.  Learn  this  sentence ;  note  the  precise  render- 
ing of  the  various  superlatives,  also  which  are  adjec- 
tives and  which  adverbs. 

3»  Adjectives  and  adverbs,  regardless  of  the 
number  of  syllables,  form  their  comparative  by  add- 
ing -er  to  the  stem  ;  monosyllables  in  a,  0,  U,  usually 
*  umlaut '  the  vowel  in  addition ;  furj,  fiirjer ;  Ijdl, 
feller.  The  comparative  when  used  attributively 
adds  to  the  new  stem  the  endings  of  declension  like 
any  other  adjective,  though  in  some  places  the  -e- 
of  the  comparative  ending  is  elided,  as  I^ellrer,  geni- 
tive plural  strong,  for  fjellerer. 

4.  The  superlative  is  formed  by  adding  to  the 
positive  stem  — (c)[t.  But  as  the  superlative  stem 
never  occurs  undeclined,  it  is  usually  given  pre- 
ceded by  the  article:  furj,  fiirjer,  bcr  (bie  ha^) 
fiirjefte ;  ber  (bie,  haS)  fjellfte.  Of  course,  if  strong, 
the  forms  are  I)eIIfter,  Ijellfte,  Ijellfte^. 

5.  In  the  predicate,  where  the  positive  and  com- 
parative  forms   occur    undeclined,  the    superlative 


I20  COMPARISON.  [Les.  XVI. 

appears  either  as  ber  (bte,  ha§>)  fiirjefte,  or  as  am 
fiirjeften,  the  latter  a  dative  neuter  phrase  meaning 
literally  *at  the  shortest.' 

a.)  The  latter  form  is  used  when  an  object  is 
compared  with  itself,  and,  usually,  when  compared" 
with  things  of  different  kind  and  gender  :  3m  SBiri' 
ter  fiitb  bie  Sage  am  fiirjeften,  ''In  winter  the  days 
are  shortest "  ;  S)a§  Setn  ift  furj,  ber  9lrm  i[t  fiirjer, 
ader  bie  §anb  ift  am  fiirjeften,  "  The  leg  is  short,  the 
arm  is  shorter,  but  the  hand  is  shortest." 

d.)  The  form  with  ber  (bie,  ha0)  is  used  usually 
when  an  object  is  compared  with  others  of  its  own 
kind  and  gender,  and  always  when  the  noun  is 
clearly  understood :  2SeIcf)er  Don  biefert  gingern  ift 
ber  liirjefte?  "Which  of  these  fingers  is  the 
shortest .? " 

6.  The  superlative  of  the  adverb  uses  only  the 
am  — ften  form,  and  this  for  true  comparison : 
tDeldjer  S^ogel  fliegt  am  fdjttellften,  ''  which  bird  flies 
fastest .? "  For  the  absolute  superlative  another 
phrase  is  used,  auf^  — e,  as  @r  fingt  auf^  fdjonfte, 
"He  sings  most  (very)  beautifully."  Certain  ad- 
verbs appear  also  in  the  form  — [ten^,  as  meiften^, 
^mostly,'  iDenigften^^  *at  least,'  etc. 

7.  After  comparisons  of  equality  the  conjunction 
*as '  is  usually  Wk ;  Sr  ift  jo  gro^  tt)te  id),  "  He  is  as 
tall  as  I."  A  comparison  of  inequality  in  the  posi- 
tive degree  may  be  followed  by  either  iDte  or  ah^ : 
er  ift  nid)t  fo  grofj  tDte  (or  alS)  id). 


Les.  XVI.]  COMPARISON.  121 

After  the  comparative,  *than'  is  ate:  (£r  i[t  9ri3^er 
ate  t^,  ''  He  is  taller  than  I." 

8.  Diminishing  comparison  is  expressed  by  tneniger 
or  minber,  'less,'  and  am  tDenigften,  *  least' :  (£r  t[t  am 
luenigften  fd^ulbig,  "  He  is  least  guilty." 

Vocabulary. 

bet  ©C^irnt,  the  shade  {shield)  \sa^  0\,  the  oil. 

ber  SDloub,  the  moon.  !^ctt,  bright,  clear. 

bet  %^%  the  day,  daylight.  tttilb,  mild,  soft. 

bet  5tbettb,  the  evening.  bttttfel,   dark,  obscure. 

bie  SWetttttltg,  the  opinion.  ftttfter,  dark  (without  light). 

'^Xt  Sam|Je,  the  lamp.  \^\\^f  long. 

"tXt  ^^WXt^  the  sun.  uic^t  ttia^t  ?   Isn't  it  ?    Does'^it 
'^Xt   "^tXtXX^iWX^    the  lighting,  it?    etc. 

illumination.  beUttOdj,  still,  nevertheless. 

bo^   Stt^t,    the   light   (@a§=,      taenigftett)^,  ^^  /^^j-/. 

5D^onben=,  @onneii4ic^t).  griin,  ^r^<f«. 

bai^  5(ttge  (pi.  -n),  M<f  ^f/^.  meinett,  Z/^/'/^/^,  /z^^'^r  ^«  opinion^ 

'bti^    Srennga!^,     illuminating 
gas. 
Note  26.  —  The  following  adjectives  are  compared  irregularly 
gut,  bef[er,  ber  befte ;    t)ic(,  nieljr,  \i^^  meifte ;    l}od),  f)i3l)er,  bcr 
l^od)fte ;  na^e,  nciljer,  ber  iiac^fte;  grog,  sup.  ber  grogte  (i.  e.  only-tf 
added  to  stem);  lt>enig,  minber,  ber  iniubefte  (also  regular  forms). 

Exercise  XVI. 

I.  S)a^  Sidjt  bcr  Sonne  ift  t)tel  IjeKer  afe  ba^  bc^ 
9Konbe^.  2.  (£^  ift  aber  gar  511  I)cH  fiir  bie  Slugen. 
3.  S)a§  bcfte  Sic^t  fiir  bie  Slngen  ift  aber  bod^  \^o.% 
cincr  gnten  Sampe.  4.  S)a^  finbe  id)  and) ;  \><x^  Dl 
gibt  ein  mitbcre^  £id)t  ate  ba^  Srennga^.  5.  S)te 
meiften  ©tnbenten  tragen  a6er  einen  Sdjirm.     6.  ®a^ 


122  COMPARISON.  [Les.  XVI. 

Si(^t  ift  am  milbeften,  tDcnn  bie  Sampe  einen  bunfeln 
@{J)trm  i)at  7.  @^  ii^itb  f)ier  immer  finfterer ;  lefen 
@ie  ja  mcf)!  me()r.  8.  S(^  metne,  e^  ift  am  beften  beim 
Stage  ju  ftubieren.  9.  3)ie  93eleuc^tung  biefeio  ^intmer^ 
ift  fd)Ied^ter  ate  id)  meinte.  10.  S)a^  ift  bie  f^Iedjlefte 
Sampe,  bie  ic^  jemate  gefel)en  l)ab^,  n.  9?ein,  x6) 
glaube,  ic^  i^abc  eine  iioc^  fdjled^tere.  12.  S)a^  t)ellfte 
Sidjt  ift  nii^t  immer  ba^  kfte.  13.  (£«§  ift  am  beften, 
tt)ir  faufen  eine  neue  Sampe.  14.  2)er  Tlonh  gibt  ba^ 
milbefte,  freunbtic^fte  Sid)t  15.  Slber  man  tann  nid)t 
bei  feinem  Sid)te  lefen.  16.  3Im  Sage,  tuenn  bie  Son- 
ne nid)t  fc^eint,  ift  ba^  Sidjt  am  beften. 

Exercise  i6. 

I.  The  days  are-growing  ^  shorter,  are  they  not  ? 

2.  I  beHeve   (so),  but  they  are  not  yet  shortest. 

3.  The  shortest  days  are  to  me  the  pleasant  est.  4.  We 
read  more   in  the  longer  evenings  of  the  winter. 

5.  What  sort-of  ^  lighting  do  you  have  in  your  house  ? 

6.  I  find  the  lamp  a  better  light  than  gas.  7.  [The] 
gaslight  is  too  bright  for  the  eyes.  8.  [The]  oil 
makes  the  softest  light.  9.  The  moon  is  indeed  3 
softer,  but  one  cannot  read  by  moonlight.  10.  One 
reads  best  by  a  lamp  with  (a)  dark  shade,  n.  I 
have  found  that  the  green  shades  are  the  best. 
12.  We-had-better  4  buy  a  green  shade  then. 5  13.  I 
will  surely  do  that  the  next  day  [that]  ^  I  go  to 
town.  14.  I  have  brought  you  the  best  shade 
[that]  they  had.     15.  [The]  oil  is  not  always  as  good 


Les.  XVI.]  COMPARISON.  I23 

as  [the]  gas.     i6.  But  still   it  is  always  pleasantest 
to  read  by  lamplight.      17.  That  is  at  least  my  opinion. 

18.  But  is  the  pleasantest  light  always  the  best  ? 

19.  The  light  is  mildest  when  the  sun  is  not  shining. 

20.  The  light  of  the  moon  is  not  so  bright  as  that  of 
the  sun. 

^  it)erben»    *  fiin    ^  ja,  jtuar,  freilirf).     ^  Tr.  *  It  is  best  we  buy.* 
^  otfo  after  '  buy.'     ^  ace.  case. 

Vocabulary  for  the  Conversation. 
1)tC  ^ad)if  night.  tetttUr^,  neat. 

bic  ©leftrtSitrit',  electricity.  tcuer,  dear,  costly. 

ftittig,  cheap.  foKcn,  is  {are)  said. 

Conversation  15.  — Die  Belcuc^tung. 

9Bann  [inb  bie  S^age  am  langften  ? 
2.  ^te  2^age  jinb  im  ©ommer  am  Idngften. 
Unb  tDann  ftnb  bie  9Zddjte  am  langften  ? 
2.  3^  SSinter  ftnb  bie  5^dd[;te  am  langften. 
33SeId)er  3)?onat  ift  ber  fiirjefte  ? 
2.  S)er  3^ebruar  ift  ber  liir^efte  3[Ronat. 

Etc.,  etc. 

SBa^  fitr  S3elend)tnng  ift  fiir  bie  9Ingen  am  beften  ? 

2.  3c^  finbe,  bag  Dl  ift  beffer  al^  bag  ®ag. 

Sft  ba^  Dl  ni^t  biffiger  ate  bag  ®ag  ? 

2.  3^  glaube  tt)of)( ;  aber  bag  ©ag  ift  rein(trf;er. 

2Beld}eg  ift  tenrer,  bag  ®ag  ober  bie  ©leltrtsttdt  ? 

2.  2)ie  ©kftri^ttdt  ift  geiDt^  teurer. 

Unb  n)te  ift  bie  Sleftrijitdt  fiir  bie  5Ingen  ? 

2.  ©ie  foil  au(^  ntc^t  fo  gnt  fiir  bie  Slngen  fein. 

Etc.,  etc. 


124  COMPARISON.  [Les.  XVI, 

Reading  i6. 
e§  ift  beftimmt  in  @ottc§  mat 

decreed  counsel 

85on  @.  toon  ^eud&tergUben. 

e^  ift  kfttmmt  in  ®otte^  $Rat, 
2)a^  man  t)om  Siebften  toa^  man  I)at, 
SRu^  fc^eiben. 

part 

SBietDoI  bod)  nid^t^  im  Sanf  ber  2BeIt 

Although  course 

S)em  ^tx^m,  a(tj,  fo  fauer  fdllt, 

hard  falls  (comes) 

Site  ©d^eiben,  ja  ©c^eiben. 

parting 

Unb  I)at  bir  ®ott  ein  Sieb    be[d^ert, 
Unb  I)altft  bn  fie  rec^t  innig  tt)ert, 

warmly   dear 

®ie  Seine, 
6^  tpirb  iDoIjI  tDenig  Qdt  nur  fein 
©0  Idf^t  fie  bid)  fo  gar  alfein; 

3)ann  tvdncl    |a  tDeine! 

9?un  mnJ3t  bn  mic^  and)  rei^t  t)erfte^n, 

Sa  red)t  t)erfte£)n: 
28enn  9Kenfd)en  an^einanberge^n, 

part 

©0  fagen  fie:   ?lnf  9Sieberfel)n ! 

to       meet  again 

2tuf  aSieberfe^n !  Stuf  aSicbcrfcI)n ! 


Les.  XVII.]  VERBS. INSEPARABLE.  1 2  5 

LESSON     XVII. 

Verbs. — Inseparable. 

1 .  The  inseparable  prefixes  are  few  ;  learn  them  ; 
all  others  are  separable. 

2.  2)ie  fri^lcc^tctt  SHanner  ticrfuri^tett  intent  Srubcr 
ba)§  ©cine  ju  ent^alten,  abcr  cr  ^at  c^  cr^alten  uitb 
luirb  c^  luo^l  fie^altcn. 

3«  Learn  this  sentence  ;  observe  the  effect  of  the 
prefixes  with  {)alten,  also  the  i^e  and  place  of  the 
signs  of  infinitive  and  past  participle. 

4.  Verbs  are  sometimes  compounded  with  pre- 
fixes, which  are  (i)  always  inseparable,  or  (2)  al- 
ways separable,  or  (3)  sometimes  separable  and 
sometimes  inseparable. 

$•  These  cause  no  change  in  the  inflection  of  the 
verb,  itself,  and  the  only  difficulty  presented  is  in 
the  treatment  of  the  prefix. 

6.  The  Inseparable  Prefix  forms  one  word  with 
the  main  verb  and  is  never  separated  from  it.  The 
Separable  Prefix  is  separated  from  the  verb  in  the 
present  and  preterit  tenses,  but  only  in  principal 
clauses,  and  is  placed  at  the  end  of  the  clause. 
(See  page  135  :  5.) 

7»  This  difference  with  regard  to  the  separation 
of  the  prefixes  from  the  verb  corresponds  to  a  differ- 
ence in  their  signification.     The  separable  prefixes 


1 26  VERBS. INSEPARABLE.  [Les.  XVII. 

retain  their  sense  and  use  as  individual  words,  and 
manifest  this  individuaUty  in  their  independent  posi- 
tion with  reference  to  the  verb.  The  inseparable 
prefixes,  on  the  other  hand,  have  lost  their  separate 
use  as  individual  words,  only  exerting  a  certain 
force  upon  the  verb  with  which  they  are  com- 
pounded, and  failing  to  assert  any  independence  in 
their  position. 

8.  This  assertion  of  independence  in  significa- 
tion, by  the  separable  prefixes,  is  shown  not  only 
by  their  position,  but  by  the  accent,  which  they 
receive  in  those  forms  also  where  they  retain  their 
place  in  composition  with  the  verb.  On  the  other 
hand,  the  inseparable  prefixes  receive  no  accent,  but 
it  falls  on  the  verb-stem.  This  is  indicated  by  the 
written  accent  in  the  following  paradigms. 

Inseparable  Verbs, 

9.  The  following  are  the  inseparable  prefixes  : — 

be,  ent(emp),  er,  ge,  Der,  jcr,  mi^. 

10.  ^]i^  force  which  the  inseparable  prefix  gives 
to  the  signification  of  the  verb  varies  considerably 
in  different  cases.  This  will  best  be  learned  by 
practice,  but  a  few  hints  are  here  given.  See  also 
the  German-English  vocabulary. 

(a)  SBe-  makes  intransitive  verbs  transitive,  and 
forms  verbs  from  adjectives ;  look  up  frei  and  be- 
freien,  fut)ten  and  kfiiljleu. 


Les.  XVII.]  VERBS. INSEPARABLE.  127 

(b)  ®ttt-  (emp-)  adds  the  sense,  " out  of,"  ''  away," 
"off,"  "in,"  and  with  adjectives  "  un-"  or  "dis-"; 
look  up  empfinben,  entflieljcn,  entel)ren  (dishonor). 

{c)  @r-  indicates  origin  of  action  or  condition, 
or  acquisition  by  the  action  of  the  simple  verb ; 
look  up  erblinben,  erl)alten,  ertDerben. 

{d )  @c-  occurs  with  but  few  verbs  and  the  force 
is  too  vague  and  varied  for  definition. 

{e)  2Jcr-  adds  to  the  simple  verb  the  idea  of  com- 
pletion (Eng.  '  en-'  with  adjectives),  of  reversal,  of 
rejection  or  wrong  purpose ;  look  up  l)ertDerfen,  t)er= 
faufen,  t)erebeln  (ennoble),  t)erbeffern. 

(/)  3^^~  ^^^^  ^^^  i^^^  ^^  destruction,  expressed 
by  *  dis-'  or  "  to  pieces  "  ;  look  up  jerbrec^en,  jerftoren. 

{g)  JBlilf-  equals  English  mis-.  When  mi^  has 
not  the  accent  it  is  inseparable ;  thus  in  the  com- 
monest compounds.  But  even  when  it  is  accented 
the  prefix  never  leaves  the  stem,  but  merely  admits 
ge-  in  the  past  participle,  sometimes  before  the  mi§, 
sometimes  between  it  and  the  stem. 

II.  When  the  common  meanings  of  these  pre- 
fixes are  learned,  the  pupil  will  often  find  himself 
able  to  construct  compounds,  without  referring  con- 
stantly to  the  dictionary.  But  some  of  the  com- 
monest inseparable  verbs  cannot  be  brought  under 
these  definitions,  as  Derfte^en,  bef)alten. 


128  VERBS INSEPARABLE  [Les.  XVII. 

12.  The  inseparable  prefixes  do  not  take  the  sign 
ge  in  the  past  participle.  However,  nti^  is  some- 
times an  exception  to  this  rule. 

13.  Inflection  of  an  Inseparable  Verb. 

PRINCIPAI.  PARTS. 

tietgeffctt,    tietgaft;    tictgeffett* 

Present. 

id)  tJcrgcffe,  I  forget. 

Etc.,  etc. 
Preterit. 

\^  ticrga^,  I  forgot. 

Etc.,  etc. 

Perfect. 

\^  ^al^C  tiergeffett,  I  have  forgotten. 

Etc.,  etc. 

Pluperfect. 

t(^  :jattc  ticrgeffen,  /  had  forgotten. 

Etc.,  etc. 

Future. 

\^  mcrbC  Ucrgcffctt,  I  shall  forget. 

Etc.,  etc. 

Future  Perfect. 

tt^  tticrbe  tICrgcffcn  \^{y\it%  I  shall  have  forgotten. 

Etc.,  etc. 

Imperative. 

ticrgt^  (bu),  forget  {thou). 

Etc.,  etc. 


Les.  XVIL]  verbs. INSEPARABLE. 


129 


Infinitives. 

(5u)  ijcrgeffeit,  to  forget. 

tJCrgcffen  (^U)  ftabCU,  to  have  forgotten. 
Participles. 

UergeffCttb,  forgetting, 
iJCrgeffen,  forgotten. 


Vocabulary. 


MASCULINE. 


bcr  @Ottnettf(i^irm  (sun-screen), 

the  sunshade^  sun-umbrella. 
bcr  ©tiftirm,  the  shade. 
bcr  Coffer,  the  trunk. 


FEMININE. 


bie  Sragc,  ^/^^  question. 

NEUTER. 

baig  fJriUftiirt,  ^/^^  breakfast. 
bfl!^  ©Clb,  /^<?  motley. 
beanttDOrten,  d!;/ja:/^r(a  letter). 
bel^alten,  retain^  keep  (posses- 
sion of). 


ein^fattgen,  receive^  welcome, 
Crl)rt licit,   receive^  come  in  pos- 
session of  keep  =  maintain. 
tViaxthtltf  permit  (w.) 

bariiber,  over  this. 

t»crftcl|ett,  understand. 
5Crbret^Cn,  break  to  pieces. 
Sttft  5 ab en,  have  pleasure y  de- 
sire^ be  inclined. 
bcbCtfCtt,  cover  (w.). 
bettJUttbern,  admire  (w.). 

um   ttjicbicl  U^r?    at   what 

o'clock. 


cr^dtett,  crjiclt,  tx^alitn. 

em^fangctt,  em^ftng,  em^faitgctt, 

(The  other  verbs  have  already  appeared,  but  should  be  looked 
up  and  recited.) 

Note  27.  —  Compounds  of  SJlaiin  substitute  -leute  for -matt-' 
tier  in  the  plural  when  speaking  of  the  class :  as,  ^aitfmatttt, 
"  merchant,"  ^aufleute,  "  merchants  ;  §ailptmaitn,  "  captain," 
§ait|)tlettte,  "captains;"  but  not  with  reference  to  a  number  of 
individuals ;   as,  gtnei  §aii))tntdntter,  *'  two  captains." 


1 30  VERBS. INSEPARABLE.  [Les.  XVII. 

Exercise  XVII. 

I.  Stjre  greunbin  betDunbert  tneinen  neuen  ©onnen- 
fd^irm  fe^r.  2.  Sa,  [ie  W'wb  fe(6ft  einen  fold^en ' 
@d)trm  !aufen.  3-  S)er  @(J)trm  Ijat  ii)x  alfo  fe^r  gut 
gefallen.  4.  SBoHen  ©ie  t^r  benjetben  ni^t  t)erfaufen  ? 
5.  9tein,  ha§  geljt  nic^t ;  tc^  tx)erbe  tljn  bet)a(ten.  6.  Sd) 
t)er[tef)e  nt(i)t  ttjarum :  ^abm  @te  ben  ©c^irm  aU  ©e- 
fc^enf  erfjdten  ?  7.  S)a^  tft  e^  eben  ^ ;  unb  t(^  furd)te, 
©ie  (jabert  i^n  ba  gerbroc^en.  8.  9Jein,  nein ;  er  ift 
gar  nic^t  jerbrodjen.  9.  9^un,  t)erlieren  ©ie  ben  teuren 
©d)irnt  ja  3  nic^t  10.  §aben  tt)ir  bariiber  ba^  S^ut)* 
ftiid  Dergeffen?  n.  2l(^  nein,  ba^  ift  tttva^,  tva^  id) 
niemate  t)ergeffe.  12.  |)aben  ©ie  je|t  Su[t  jum  griif)^ 
[tiid  ju  ge^en  ?  13.  Um  ti:)iet)iel  Utjr  effen  tt)ir  benn 
J)ier  sum  grutjftiid  ?  14.  Um  [teben  U^r,  tDenn  ic^  nid}t 
tiergeffen  ^abt,  15.  S)a^  gefallt  mir  fef)r.  16.  Sd^ 
^abe  foeben  einen  langen  Srief  empfangen.  17.  Unb 
id)  tnerbe  if)n  nac^  bem  grit^ftud  beanttoorten.  18.  ?[ber 
tca^  i[t  benn  mit  bem  fdjonen  ©onnenld)irm  ge)d)et)en  ? 

^  einen  fo((^en  or  fold)  einen,  the  former  preferred,  ^exactly. 
3  Please,  at  beginning. 

Exercise  17. 

I.  How  does  my  new  sunshade  please  you  ?  (Or  : 
How  do  you  like  my  new  sunshade  ?)  2.  O,  I  admire 
it  very  (much) :  it  is  exceedingly  pretty.  3.  I  be- 
lieve I  admired  '  the  same  shade  at  Miiller's.  4.  Just- 
so,^  Miiller  sold  '  it  (to)  me.     5.  Permit  me  a  ques- 


Les.   XVII.]  VERBS. —  INSEPARABLE.  I3I 

tion  :  Where  do  you  keep  your  sunshade  ?  6.  I  do 
not  understand  how  you  keep  it  so  well.     7.  Well, 

1  manage  3  thus  :  I  keep  the  sunshade  always  in 
my  trunk,  ^  covered  ^  with  ^  paper.  8.  ^  That  3 1  2  do 
5  not  2  understand  ^either.4  9.  The  heavy  books 
in  my  trunk  broke  my  sunshade.     10.  But  that  ,  is 

just  2- 2  it:  I  keep  no  books  in  my  trunk,  n.  I 
have  just  5  received  (some)  money  from  my  father. 
12.  The  good  father  does  not  forget  you.     13.  He 

2  probably  ^  understands  that  you  wish  to  buy  a  new 
shade.  14.  He  has  heard  that  I  have  broken  my 
old  one.  15.  Did  ^  you  break  ^  it  or  lose  it  ?  16.  Why,^ 
you  know  I  broke  ^  it.  17.  Well,  do  not  lose  the 
money  you  have  received. 

^Perfect  tense.     ^Sben.     ^madje  eg,     ^andj,  before  nidjt 
5  foebeu.    *  ja,  after  tt)iffen. 

Vocabulary  for  the  Conversation. 
MASCULINE.  \^(i§  QJepgcl,  the  poultry. 

bcr  9)lar!t,  the  market.  btti^  DfJatfjaUi^    (council-house), 

bcr    SDlarft^Ia^,    the    market-  the  city  hall. 

plate^  square. 
ber  ^t^i,  the  pike  (fish).  

bcr     SJiirgcrmciftcr     (citizen 

master),  the  mayor.  v^^t  ^^^^y- 

bcr  5lb(cr,  the  eagle.  attcrlct,  all  sorts  of. 

gar  fcitt,  none  at  all. 

FEMININE.  ;f    .,  ' 

.       «i      r  /  r  foftCtt,    cost. 

/,  fnce  mg.  iiffetttltji^,  public. 

NEUTER.  Uortrcff' Ut^,  excellent, 

'tS^^  ©CmufC,  the  vegetables. 


132  VERBS. INSEPARABLE.  [Les.  XVII. 

Conversation  16.  —  I)ic  Stabt. 

I.  2Baren  ©te  ^mk  morgen  auf  bent  Waxtk? 

2.  3^/  i<^  ^^^  W^  f^^^  bort. 
I.  3Ba^  berfauft  man  auf  bent  Tlaxtk? 

2.  '^an  Hxtau\t  bort  atterlei  ©emiife,  and)  ©eflugel, 
@ier  unb  Dbft. 

I.  ®tbt  e^  Stiiinte  auf  bent  maxtipla^  ? 

2.  3Zein,  gar  feme.     2lber  bie  Sauer^teule  ^6en  tm 
©ommer  gro^e  ©onnenfc^irme. 

I.  SSie  t)tel  foften  btefe  §edjte  ? 
2.  ©ie  foften  bag  ©tM  eine  3!Jlarf. 

I.  SSetc^e  i3ffentltc^e  ©ebaube  fe^en  ©te  auf  bent  5D?arft* 
plafe? 
2.  ^c^  feE)e  bie  ^irrfje,  ba§  S^^eater,  ein  ©aft^au^  unb 
ba§  SfJat^aug. 

I.  SBa§  tft  tnt  9tatf)au^turnte  ? 
2.  S)ie  ©tabtul^r  tft  bartn* 

I.  2Bag  gtbt  e^  tnt  ^Ratfiau^feHer  ? 
2.  @§  tft  eine  Sleftauration  barin, 

I.  3Bo  l^at  ber  S3urgerntetfter  fetn  33ureau'?  (pr.  bix^ 

2.  6r  f^at  e^  im  Jlatf^aufe. 
I.  SBo  ^alt  ber  ©tabtrat  feiite  a?erfamnt'lungen? 

2.  ®r  ^dlt  fie  im  Siatf^aufe, 
I.  2Bie  ^etfet  ba§  ®aftt)aug  ? 

2.  @§  ^ei^t  „ber  abler." 


Les.   XVII.]  VERBS. INSEPARABLE.  1 33 

Reading  17. 

aSon  ^einric^  ^eine. 

Sc^  rt)ei§^  nidji,  \va^^  foils  e^^  kbeuten,4 

S)a^  id)  fo  traurtg  bin ; 
©in  SfJfardjen  aii^  alten  3^iten, 

S)a^  5  fommt  mir  nic^t  an§>  beni  ©inn.^ 

®ie  Suft  i[t  fu^l  unb  e^  bunfelt,7 

Uttb  ruljig  ^  flie^t  ber  9if)ein ; 
S)er  ®ipfet  be^  Sergei  funlelt 

Sm  Slbenbfonnenfc^ein. 

S)ie  fd)onfte  Sungfrau  fi|et 

Sort  oben,9  tpunberbar, 
S^r  golb'ne^^o  ®e]c^meibe  bli|et," 

@ie  !dmmt  i^r  golb'ne^  §aar. 

©te  Mmint  e§  mit  gotb'nem  Samme, 

Unb  [ingt  ein  Sieb  babei,^^ 
S)a^  l^at  eine  ti:)nnberyame,'3 

(SetDattige  SKelobei. 

®en  ©c£)iffer  ^  int  Heinen  @d)iffe'5 
(£rgreift'6  e^  mit  tDilbem  2Bel);»7 

6r  fdjant^s  nic^t  bie  gelfenriffe, 
®r  fdjant^^  nnr  I)inanf  in  bie  §fit)'.^9 

Sdj  gtanbe,  bie  SBelten  t)er)d)lingen 
?[m  ®nbe^°  ©djiffer  nnb  ^a^n; 

Unb  ha§>  Ijat  mit  i()rem  ©ingen 
Sie  Soretei  getam 


1 34  VERBS. SEPARABLE.  [Les.  XVIII. 

^  A  nixie  on  the  Rhine,  who  by  her  singing  so  charmed  the 
boatmen  that  they  let  themselves  be  carried  into  the  whirlpool, 
near  which  she  dwelt.  ^triffen.  ^is,  is  intended.  *  signify. 
^  that.  ^  mir  au§  bent  @iim,  to  me  out  of  the  thought,  out  of  my 
thoughts.  ^e§  bunfelt,  it  is  growing  dark,  ^quietly.  ^ yonder 
above,  up  there.  ^°golbcue^.  "glitters.  ^^  at  the  same  time. 
^3  marvellous.  ^* boatman.  ^^  boat.  ^^  seizes,  lays  hold  of .  ^^pang. 
^^  see,  look.  ^^  [^i  bie  §i3^C,  into  the  height,  on  high.  ^°  am  Snbc, 
at  the  end,  at  last. 


LESSON     XVIII. 

Verbs.  —  Separable. 

1 .  Tke  separate  forms  of  the  separable  verbs  are 
among  the  most  characteristic  German  idioms^  and 
should  be  practiced  thoroughly, 

2.  2)cr    Stubent    labct    attc   fcine    iJ^cunbe  citt^ 

invites  (     ) 

foklb     fie  antommtUf  eincn  2lkttb  6ci  i^m  iu^n^ 

as  soon  (as)  arrive  to 

firtngcn^ 

pass. 

3-  Learn  the  sentence ;  note  the  tense  and  form 
of  each  verb  and  the  kind  of  clause  in  which  it 
occurs,  also  the  place  of  the  infinitive  sign. 

4.  The  number  of  the  separable  prefixes  is  so 
large,  that  it  is  not  practicable  to  learn  the  list  as 
we  have  done  in  the  case  of  the  inseparable  ones. 
It  will  suffice  to  bear  in  mind  that  all  prefixes  ex- 
cept those  mentioned  in  Lesson  XVII  are  separ- 


Les.  XVIIL]  VERBS. SEPARABLE.  I35 

able.  The  list  would  include  most  prepositions  and 
adverbs  combined  with  prepositions,  as  all  combina- 
tions with  I}in-  and  f)er-.     See  Appendix. 

5.  In  the  present  and  preterit  tenses,  in  principal 
clauses,  the  separable  prefix  comes  at  the  end  of  the 
clause.  In  dependent  clauses  the  prefix  precedes 
the  stem  as  part  of  one  word.  In  the  infinitive  and 
past  participle  it  is  separated  from  the  stem  by  the 
particle  ge-  or  ju-. 

A  separable  prefix  before  an  inseparable,  as  au^^ 
Derfaufen,  remains  separable. 

6.      Paradigm  of  a  Separable  Verb. 

PRINCIPAI.  PARTS. 

an'fan^cttf    fittg   an',    an'^cfan^cn. 

Present. 
X^  faugC  ait',  /commence. 

Preterit. 
i(^  fittg  an'f   I  commenced. 

Perfect, 
tt^  ^abc  an^gcfaugCtt,   /  have  commenced. 

Pluperfect. 
\^  ^attC  an'gcfattgcn,   /  had  comincfued. 

Future. 
\^  tticrbc  Ott'fangcn,   /  shall  co?fimence. 

Future  Perfect. 
\^  tt»e?t>C   an'gefangcn  ^afien,   /  shall  have  commenced. 


136  VERBS. SEPARABLE.  [Les.  XVIII. 

Imperative, 
fangc  (bu)   an,   commence  {thou). 
fanget  is\C)    an,    commence   (ye). 

Infinitive. 

an'fangen,    an'^ufangett,    to  commence. 

att'gcfangCtt  l^abCll,   to  have  cofnmenced. 

Participles, 
att'faugcnb,   co?nmencing. 
an' gcfattgcit,  comme^tced. 

7«  In  reciting  the  paradigm  of  the  separable  verb 
it  is  well  to  require  the  presence  of  an  object,  as 
,jSc()  fange  ben  95rief  an,''  in  order  to  impress  the 
peculiarity  of  the  order. 

Note  28.  —  Certain  prefixes  normally  separable  are  also  in- 
separable in  some  combinations :  iiber,  uiiter,  burc^,  um,  ^iuter, 
tDiber,  tnlebor.  When  separable  these  words  have  their  simple 
literal  meaning,  and,  of  course,  carry  the  accent.  When  insepar- 
able the  meaning  of  the  prefix  is  usually  figurative,  or  is  fused 
with  the  stem  so  as  to  be  rendered  by  one  word,  usually  a  Latin 
derivative,  and  the  prefix,  like  other  inseparables,  is  unaccented. 
Thus  u'berfeljeii,  pret.  fe^tc . . .  \i^tx  =^  set  across  ;  iiberfe'^en,  pret. 
iiberte^'te  =  translate ;  um'fi^retben,  pret.  fc^rieb  ♦ . .  um  =  turite 
over  (again) ;  umfc^rei^ben,  pret.  umf(^rieb'  =  circumscribe.  Obvi- 
ously these  features  are  cross-tests.  If  we  know  the  accent  we 
know  whether  separable  or  inseparable  and  something  of  the 
meaning  ;  and  vice  versa. 

Note  29. — In  expressions  for  the  time  of  day,  the  Germans 
often  reckon  forward  to  the  next  hour :  as  eill  %\tx\.t\  auf  fteben, 
(or,  ein  3>ierte(  iiac^  fed)§),  "a  quarter  past  six";  ^alb  fieben, 
"half-past  six";  bvei  iBiertel  auf  fteben  (or,  eiii  5>iertett)or  fieben) 
"  quarter  before  seven  " ;  also,  jUiaiV^^ig  SJlilUlteu  nad^  fteben,  or 
fieben  U^r  jnian^tc^ ;  and,  ;^n)angig  SO^innten  Dor  ac^t,  or,  fieben 
mr  t)icr3ig,  like  our  railroad  computation. 


Lbs.  XVIII.]  VERBS. SEPARABLE. 


137 


MASCULINE. 

bcr  S^crfaffer,  tJu  author. 

btC  (5(tCtn,  the  parents. 


FEMININE. 


bic  S5ttrg,  the  fortress. 
btC  (Stnlabung,  the  invitation. 
bic    5luc!bo'te,    //^^  anecdote, 
story. 

NEUTER. 

ba§   Sd^auf^iel,    the   spectacle, 

play. 
"bd^  ^irrfjCttUcb,  the  hymn. 
'^ti^  QJcbitiftt,  thepoefn. 

ab'fc^rctbcit,  copy. 
an'fommen,  arrive. 

UOr'ftcttctt,  introducey  present. 


Vocabulary. 

5u'mndjcn,  j/^?^/,  dose. 

aitf  ntrtcfjCll,  open. 

awi^nicubig   lenteii,    leam  by 

heart. 
auf'fteI)Ctt,  ^^/  up,  rise. 
Itm'fdjtcidCtt,     remodel,    write 

over. 
UOr'IcfCtt,  read  aloud. 
au'uc^^mCtt,  accept. 
cin'lrtbCll,  i7ivite. 
Jtt'BvingeU,  spend  (time). 
auf'()Oreu,  cease,  stop. 
DCrf^JrCti^'ett,  promise. 

f^Ott,  indeed,  surely ;  already. 

bciua^e,  almost. 


Exercise  XVIII. 

I.  Ser  93erfaffer  be^  Siebe^  fi^reibt  e^  foebert  ab. 
2.  ®r  fangt  itjenigftei^o  an,  e§  abjufd^reiben.  3.  @t 
^atte  fd)on  angcfangeu,  ate  id)  anfam.  4.  2Sami  [tnb 
Sie  benu  angefommcn  ?  5-  Sd)  fam  Dor  einer  Ijalbeit 
©tunbc  an.  6.  Setjt  ^brt  bcr  93?ann  [djon  aiif,  311 
fc^reibcn.  7.  @r  ^at  lx)o()l  \)o.^  ganje  2icb  abgc)djric= 
ben.  8.  gr  ift  and)  S?erfaffer  Don  mefjreren  Slnefboten 
nnb  cinem  ©djaujpicl.  9.  ®v  mad}t  aber  jel^t  ba^ 
Suc^  jn.  10.  93itte,  ftcllcn  ®ie  mid)  bem  S^erfaffer 
Dor.  II.  Sc^  labe  ©ie  cin,  Ijcutc  3[benb  urn  ^alb  fie- 
ben  bet  nn^  3^ee  jn  neljmen.  12.  ®er  95crfa[fer  bringt 
\^t\\  ganjen  2^ag  bci  un^o  ju.  13.  Gr  loirb  Ijcutc  abenb 
\)(x^  ©diaufpicl  Dorlcfcn.     14.  Sd)  iuifl  if)n  bitten,  bay 


138  VERBS. SEPARABLE.  [Les.  XVIII. 

Steb  fiir  mk'i)  abjufd^retben.  15.  28ir  getien  je^t  nacl) 
§auie.  16.  2Bir  ^aben  einen  fe^r  angene()meit  2lbenb 
gUQcbrad^t  17.  S(^  I)ore,  er  l)at  ba§  Sieb  an§>  bem 
(guglifc^en  iiberfegt  18.  3d)  iiberfel^e  ja  auc^  engtifdje 
©ebid^te. 

Exercise  i8. 
I.  They  have  invited  us  gto  ^take  ^tea  ^with 
6  them  ,at  (a)  ^  quarter  3  after  ^six.J  2.  And^ 
shall  you  accept  the  invitation  ?  3.  Why,3  we  ac- 
cepted it  immediately.  4.  They  say,  the  author  of 
the  new  play  will  be  there.  5.  So-then, 4  he  has 
really  arrived  ?  6.  Yes  indeed,  and  he  has  promised 
to  read  his  play  aloud.  7.  His  daughter  is  copying 
it  this  afternoon.  8.  She  began  5  right  away  after 
dinner.  9.  We  shall  probably  pass  a  pleasant  even- 
ing. 10.  J  That  3 1  2  can  ^  indeed  ^  promise  ^  you. 
II.  Let  us  arise ;  they  will  introduce  us  to  the 
author's  parents.  12.  The  people  are  ceasing  to 
talk.  13.  Somebody  just  closed  a  door.  14.  He 
arises  and  opens  his  book.  15.  ,  So  ^  his  young 
daughter  ^  has  copied  the  whole  play  ?  16.  ,  Now 
3  he  2  has  ceased  to  read.  17.  Will  they  introduce 
us  to  the  author,  do-you-think  ?  7  18.  I  have  almost 
learned  the  play  by  heart.  19.  The  play  has  pleased 
us  very  much.  20.  I  have  certainly  ^  spent  a  very 
pleasant  evening.  21.  My  friend  will  translate  the 
play  into  German.  22,  But  the  author  will  first  write 
it  entirely  over, 


Les.   XVIII.]  VERBS.  SEPARABLE.  1 39 

^  See  Note  29.  ^  beun,  after  @ie.#  ^  3a,  after  fie.  *  alfo. 
5  Perfect  tense.  ^  alfo.  ^  Wotjl,  after  img,  or  verb  melneil  or 
glauben.    ®  bocf). 

Vocabulary  for  the  Conversation. 

Urn     iuicdicf    lXi}V,      at     zvhat       fcUcn,  seldom. 

o'clock^  when  ?  iDcfonttUCU^  get^  receive. 

Crft,  first,  not  until.  laffcit,  let. 

Conversation  17.  —  Die  ^eit. 

I.  SSann  tjcljt  bie  Sonne  tnt  5Dconat  Sunt  anf  ? 

2.  3^  5Wonat  %\xx(\  ge^t  bie  ©onne  urn  f)aI6  fiinf  Uf)r 
auf. 

I.  3Bann  geljt  bie  Sonne  im  SKonat  Snni  nnter? 

2.  3m  5Jtoant  ^uni  ge^t  bie  ©onne  urn  !)alb  ad;l  Uf)r. 
unter. 

I.  2Bie  lang  [inb  bie  S^age  nnb  bie  9tad)te  im  9[)?onat 
©ejember  ? 
2.  3^  ^onat  ^e^emBer  finb  bie  2^age  neun  ©tunben 
lang  unb  bie  ^^Zdc^te  fiinfje^n  ©tunben. 

Etc.,  etc. 

I.  SBann  get^en  ©ie  in  bie  ©djule  ? 

2.  %i)  geE)e  um  ac^t  U^r  in  bie  ©c^ule. 
I.  SBann  fommen  ©ie  nad)  ,g)anfe  ? 

2.  SSir  fommen  ju  SRittag  nad^  §aufe. 
I.  (Steven  @ie  nm  fiinf  U()r  anf  ? 

2.  9^ein,  je^t  fte^e  i(^  erft  um  fieben  U^r  auf. 
I.  Um  tnteDtel  U^r  geljen  ®ie  \t%i  jn  "S^tiit^ 

2.  S^^t  gel^e  id^  fe{ten  i;)or  §ef)n  U^r  ju  Sette, 
Etc.,  etc. 


140  VERBS. SEPARABLE.  [Les.  XVIII. 

Reading  18. 

9}forgenftunbe  ijat  ®oIb  im  9}hinbe. 

Morning-hour  in  the    mouth. 

"The  early  bird  catches  the  worm." 

S)er  ©tord^  Uefj'  an\  bcm  "S^adj  ftc^'  nicber,' 
Unb  fprad):  „!J)a,  Stnber,  bin  i^  tpiebcr! 
9?un  faget  mir,  iDa^  ift^-  gefdje^en,^ 
(Seit3  id)  bag  S)orf(^en4  nic^ts  ge)et)en?^'^ 

^  fid)  nieberlaffen,  to  let  one's  self  down,  to  alight.  *  has 
happened.  ^  since.  "^  little  village.  ^  not  to  be  translated.  ^  ge» 
|e{)en  (^abe),  have  seen,  saw. 

^et  SltaBet^  in  ber  SBitfte.^ 

©in  Slraber  ^atte  fid)  3  in  ber  SBiifte  t)erirrt3  nnb  tvav 
in  ®efa!)r,4  Dor  |)nnger  unb  S)urft  gu  fterben.  91ac^ 
(angem  Um^erirren  5  fanb  er  eine  t)on  ben  Q^fternen  ober 
aSaffergrnben,^  aui3  tt)eld)cn  bie  piger7  i()re  Samde 
trdnfen,^  unb  einen  !leincn,  lebernen  ®ad,  ber  auf  bent 
©anbe  lag.  „&ott  jei  getobt!''  f|)rac-^  er,  ate  er  i^n 
auff)ob9  unb  befiipe;^°  ,,bag  finb  gelui^  ©atteln" 
ober  S^iiffe;  tpie  iDill  id)  mid)  an  i^nen  erquiden^^  unb 
Iaben!^^'3  Sn  biefer  jiifeen  |)offnung  fiffnete  er  fd^neH 
hm  ®ad,  ]at)  tva^  er  entf)ielt,H  unb  rief'5  bann  gang 
traurig^^  au^'S:  ,,3ld),  eg  finb  nur  ^erlen!'''7 

^  Arab.  ^  wandering  about.    ^   lifted  up.  ^^  ]ave,  restore. 

'^ desert.  ^water-tanks.  ^° felt  of.  ^* contained. 

3  lost  his  way,     7  pilgrims.  "  dates.  *s  exclaimed, 

-♦danger.  .®  water.  ^^  refresh.  ^^  sadly, 

^^  pearls. 


Les.  XIX.]  VERBS.  SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD.  I4I 

LESSON    XIX. 

Subjunctive  Mood.  —  Conjugation. 

1.  The  Subjunctive  Mood  is  the  subjective  mood, 
implying  doiibt^  tmcertaiiity ^  negation.  It  occurs 
chiefly  in  subordinate  clauses.  For  the  rules  of 
the  Subjunctive,  see  Lesson  XXIX. 

2.  The  forms  of  the  Subjunctive  Mood  do  not 
differ  greatly  from  those  of  the  Indicative,  yet  in 
most  cases  enough  to  be  distinguished. 

3.  In  the  Present  Tense,  the  personal  endings  of 
the  Subjunctive  retain  the  parenthetical  e  and  have 
no  t  in  the  third  person  singular.  The  endings 
are  the  same  in  both  conjugations.  In  the  Old 
Conjugation  the  verbs  in  c  and  a  do  not  change  the 
vowel  in  the  second  and  third  persons  singular,  as 
in  the  Indicative. 

4.  In  the  Preterit,  the  Subjunctive  and  Indica- 
tive are  alike  for  the  New  Conjugation.  The  Old 
Conjugation  adds  -c,  -eft,  -c,  to  the  Preterit  stem 
in  the  Sing.,  and  umlauts  the  stem-vowel  in  both 
Singular  and  Plural.  The  Plural  endings  are  the 
same  as  in  the  Indicative. 

$•  The  compound  tenses  of  the  Subjunctive  are 
formed  in  the  same  manner  in  both  Old  and  New 
Conjugations,  by  the  use  of  the  Subjunctive  of  the 
auxiliaries  Ijaden  (or  fetn)  and  tDcrben. 

6.  The  Conditional,  which  is  properly  a  Subjunc- 


142  VERBS. SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD.       [Les.   XIX. 

tive  used  in  the  conclusion  after  conditions,  is 
formed  with  tpiirben,  the  Preterit  Subjunctive  of 
tDerbcn,  followed  by  the  Infinitive,  or  the  Perfect 
Infinitive.  For  the  Present  Conditional  the  Preterit 
Subjunctive  is  sometimes  substituted  :  S(^  gSbe  ti)m 
ha^  ^nd),  or  tc^  iDiirbe  il}m  ba^  Sud)  geben,  "  I  would 
give  him  the  book."  Similarly  the  Pluperfect  Sub- 
junctive is  used  for  the  Perfect  Conditional,  and 
is  even  preferred  Sd)  ^^ti^  tt)n  geliebt,  "  I  would 
have  loved  him,"  being  shorter,  is  preferred  to  Sd) 
iDiirbe  i^n  geltebt  l^aben. 

7.  The  Conditional,  representing  the  tentative 
conclusion  from  a  condition  (an  if-clause),  always 
occurs  in  the  principal  clause. 

8.  Subjunctive  of  fciit  and  ^abeit.     Simple  Tenses. 

Present. 
i(^  fci,  /  {may)  be.  t(^  ^aBc,  /  {may)  have. 

btt  feieft,  thou  {mayest)  be.  btt  ^aBeft,  thoti  {mayest)  have. 

tX  fci,  he  {may)  be,  tX  !^al6c,  he  {may)  have, 

)mx  fcien,  we  {may)  be.  tOXX  ^abCJt,  we  {may)  have. 

i^r  \t\tif  ye  {/nay)  be.  xi}X  f^ahct,  ye  {may)  have. 

Sie  fCtCtt,  you  {may)  be.  StC  ^abctt,  you  {may)  have. 

flc  feicn,  they  {may)  be.  ftC  ^abcit,  they  {may)  have. 

Preterit. 
i(^  Ware,  I  might  be  {were).  \^  ^ftttC,  I  ffiight  have  {ox  had). 

bU  ttJiircft,  thou  mightest  be.  "^Vi  ^tittcft,  thou  mightest  have. 

tX  ttiarc,  he  might  be.  tX  ^^Ciiit^  he  might  have. 

'mx  tuarcu,  we  might  be.  ttJtt  pttCll,  we  might  have. 

\^X  tuarct,  ye  /night  be.  \\c  IjClttCt,  ye  might  have. 

Sic  itJarCU,  you  might  be.  (Sic  ^iittCtt,  you  might  have. 

\\%  tPttVCtt,  they  might  be,  fie  fatten,  they  might  have. 


Les.   XIX.]        VERBS.  SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD.  I43 

9.   Subjunctive  of  a  Verb  of  the  New  Conjugation. 

Present. 
Ic^  IxthCf  I  (may)  love.  ttJtr  tieBctt,  we  {may)  love. 

btt  licBcft^  thou  (mayest)  love.  i^r  (teBct,  ye  {may)  love. 

ZX  lieBe,  he  {may)  love.  flc  UebCtt,  they  {may)  love. 

Preterit. 
i(^  Xxthitf  I  might  love  {loved). 
btt  licbteft,  thoic  mightest  love  {lovedst). 
tX  Itcbte,  he  might  love  {loved). 

ttJit  (iebtCtt,  we  might  love  {loved). 
t^r  Itefitct,  ye  might  love  " 

fic  UebtCtt,  they  might  love       " 
Perfect, 
ir^  ^aBe  gClicBt,  /  {may)  have  loved. 

btt  l^aBeft  (jdicbt,  thou  {mayest)  have  loved  {havest  loved). 
Etc.,  etc. 

Pluperfect. 

X^  ^attC  geliebt^  I  might  have  loved  {had  loved). 

Etc.,  etc. 

Future. 
X^  mcrbC  (iebCtt,  /  shall  love. 

btt  itierbeft  UeBctt,  //^^^^  ^/?^//  /^^^<f. 

Etc.,  etc. 

Future  Perfect. 

i(^  ttlCrbe  geUcftt  ^afiett,  I  shall  have  loved. 

Etc.,  etc. 

Conditional. 

t(i^  tuiirbe  lieBctt  or  Ucfite,  I  would  love. 
Etc.,  etc. 

Conditional  Perfect. 

irift  tuitrbe  geliebt  ^bett  or  ^attc  rjcncBt,  I  would  have  loved. 
Etc.,  etc. 


144  VERBS.  SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD.       [Les.  XIX. 

Subjunctive  Mood. 
10.   Inflection  of  a  Verb  of  the  Old  Conjugation. 

Present. 
t(^  ^thCf  I  {may)  give.  UJtr  geBctt,  we  {rnay)  give, 

bU  gcBeft,  thou  {mayest)  give.  t^|t  gcBet,  ye  {may)  give. 

Cr  gcbC,  /le  {may)  give.  fic  gcBctt,  they  {may)  give. 

Preterit, 
id)  gabC,  /  might  give  {gave),  imx  gftBctt,  we  7nightgive  {gave). 

btt  gaficft,    thou    mightest  give       i^V  QfxMf  ye  might  give      " 
{gavest).  fie  gcfiett,  //^<r  might  give  " 

Ct  gclBc,  /^<f  might  give  {gave). 

Perfect. 

icift  l^afic  gcgebctt,      )»xx  l^aBctt  gcgcBcn. 

cr    /'        "  fie      "        " 

Pluperfect. 

x6)  ^Uiz  gegefieit,       toir  1)aiit\x  gcgefien. 

Etc.,  etc. 
Future. 

x6)  ttierbe  geBen,      tuir  itJcrbett  geBett, 
erwerbe     "  fie       "         " 

Future  Perfect. 

x6)  mcrbe  gegcBen  ^afiett,      ttiir  tuerbcn  gegebett  ^abeii. 
g|.     /'  //  /^  «g       />  /<  /^ 

Conditional. 

i^  ttjitrbe  gcbcn  or  x^  gabc. 

Conditional  Perfect. 

x^  tuitrbe  gegeben  \)ahtxx  or  id^  ptte  gegebett. 

Note  30.  The  conjunction  *  if/  njcntt,  is  usually  followed 
by  the  subjunctive.  As  in  English,  the  conjunction  is  implied 
by  putting  the  verb  at  the  beginning  of  the  clause :  SSetllt  tx 
fran!  rodrc  (or  SScire  er  !ran!),  fo  iDitrbe  er  fd^reibcn,  "  If  he  were 
sick  (or  "  Were  he  sick  "),  he  would  write." 


Les.  XIX.]     VERBS. SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD.  I45 

Vocabulary. 

MASCULINE.  Itittgft,  long  since. 

bcr  S^ettcr,  the  cousin.  uBerneJ'mett,  undertake. 

FEMININE.  ttOtttJCttbirj,  necessary. 

\At'^t\iXmi\^iX%  the  acquaint-  XmlXx^,  real ;  really. 

ance.  tjjl  %\ctX  StcKc,  in  your  place. 

bie  ^flegc,  the  care,  attejtdance.  |ttJ)er,  certainly. 

NEUTER.  rateu,  ^^wj^  (with  dative). 

'^^'^  S^CrgttitgCn^  the  pleasure.  \txix%  ready,  through  {with). 

ba!§    23t§riftCtt    (little    bit),    the  bcUtt'rU^iOCtt^  make  uneasy. 

trifle.  berfel^e,  the  same.  (Declined 
'^^^  ^Cif^icl,  the  example.  like  bcr  gutc,  Les.  XV.) 

l^cim,     home    (sep.     prefix    of  iifiergc'^en,  deliver. 

direction).  5UrurfgcbCtt^  give  back. 

mitreifCIl,   travel  (with)  ^/^«^,  ^UriirffC^irfCU,  send  back. 

go  along.  tlOraU^'fC^Ctt,  foresee. 

Exercise  XIX. 

I.  3)er  ©tubent  n^itrbe  boc^  fjeimgetjen,  tDenn  er 
franf  mare  3'.  2.  Sa,  unb  er  !t)urbe  aud)  art  feine 
abutter  f(^rei6en.  3.  3l&er  ba;^  tDiirbe  feine  abutter 
beunru^igen.  4.  @r  njiirbe  ei3  tt)o^l  faum  tun,  tDenn 
e^  nic^t  notmenbig  iDare.  5.  |)Stte  fein  SSater  e^  nur 
gemu^t,  \xivt  ber  f)ier  tear !  6.  SalDot)!,  ber  junge  2J?ann 
iDare  bann  t)etmgegangen.  7-  SBiirben  @ie  ba§  getan 
^aben,  tpenn  ©ie  o.\x  jeiner  ©telle  gett)e[en  tDaren? 
8.  ®ans  gett)!^;  id)  gcibe  meinen  !(einen  finger,  iDenn 
er  mttgereift  \mit.  9.  3Surbe  ber  Slrjt  je^t  raten,  tt)n 
{jeim^ufi^iden  ?  10.  Sefet  tnol)!  nid)t,  aber  er  ^aiit  eg 
t)or  einer  9Socf)e  geraten.  n.  3Benn  er  ntd)t  ju  fran! 
ift,  fo   !ann   er   feine   2(ufgabe   abfdireiben.     12.  3Iber 


146  VERBS. SUBJUNCTIVE.    MOOD.        [Les.  XIX. 

tDenn  er  Ijeimgegangeu  tuare,  jo  JDiirbe  er  bod)  gar 
nic^t^  jii  tun  i}abm.  13.  @^  tniirbe  ti:)of)t  kffer  fiir 
i()n  fein,  d\va§>  ju  tun.  14.  SBie,  tDenn  er  bicfcn  tteinen 
53rief  in^  S)eut)c^e  uOcrfel^te  ?  15.  Sc^  glaube,  ba§  tDiirbe 
itjm  iDtrftic^e^  SSergniigen  nmdjen.  16.  2Benn  nur 
feine  SDhitter  f)ier  U)dre !  17.  ©ie  tuiirbe  bie  ^pflege  beso 
Siranfen  gleidj  ilberne^nien. 

Note  31.     After  the  subordinative  conjunction  the  persenal 
part  of  the  verb  must  be  at  the  end  of  the  clause. 

Exercise  19. 
I.  I  would  read  the  letter  through  if  I  were  in 
your  place.     2.  Would  you  advise  me  to  copy  it  ? 

3.  Yes,  indeed,  if  the  letter  were  to  ^  my  brother. 

4.  (What)   if  the  man   were   sick,  for  ^   example  ? 

5.  Yes,  1 1  2  would  7  certainly  g  do  3  it  ^  in  ^  that 
6  case.  6.  Had  I  only  known  that  my  brother  would 
not  be  here  !  7.  Your  brother  would  certainly  wish 
that  you  read  it.  8.  The  man  would  himself  have 
nothing  against-it.3     9.  I  would  deliver  the  letter 

^to)  my  brother's  wife  if  she  were  in  [the]  town. 

10.  But   she  would  know  nothing  of  the  matter. 

11.  I  would  have  given  the  letter  back,  had  I  fore- 
seen this.  12.  But  who  would  have  thought  that  the 
carrier  would  deliver  the  letter  (to)  you  ?  13.  If  it 
makes  you  so  uneasy,  I  advise  you  to  send  the  letter 
back.  14.  But  what  4  if  my  brother  came  this  even- 
ing }  15.  Why,  you  would  have  copied  the  letter. 
16.  You  would  simply  5  deliver  the  copied  letter  to 


Les.  XIX.]        VERBS. SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD.  I47 

your  brother.  17.  Yes,  I  really  believe  that  would 
be  the  best  way.  18.  I  would  give  something  if  I 
only  knew  who  the  man  is. 

^an   with    accusative,      ^gum    ^eifpieL      3  See    Lesson    XI, 
Note  18.    ^rt)lc.    ^nur. 

Vocabulary  for  the  Conversation. 
bcr  S^ajiergattg,    the   walk,     mit^rinrjctt,  bring  along. 

promenade.  tatfam,  advisable. 

ber  UBcr^ic^Cr,  overcoat.  fort,  away,  gone. 

ab^olCtt,  call  for. 

Conversation  18.  — Der  Spa3tergang. 

I.  SSiirbert  ©ie  I)eute  gent  einen  ©pajiergang  madjcn? 
2.  ^atDo^l,  ic^  tDiirbe  je&r  gerne  einen  fleinen  ©^a^ier^ 
gang  ma^en. 

I.  Urn  tt)tet)tel  U{)r  tDiirben  ©ie  lieber  gef)en? 

2.  3^  tt)iirbe  lieber  um  ^(b  met  ge^en. 
I.  ®ut,  id)  ^ole  ©ie  bann  ok  ;  foC  id)  ? 

2.  ^a,  feien  ©ie  fo  gut,  mic^  ab^u^olen, 

I.  SBoIIen  tt)ir  auf  ben  93erg  t)inaufgef)en,  ober  iiber 
bengiuB? 
2.  3c^  ginge  lieber  iiber  ben  g^Iu^. 

I.  SBenn  ©ie  ni(^t^  bagegen  I)aben,  fo  bringe  id)  einen 
greunb  mit. 

2.  %\xxi  ©ie  ba^  ja,  ic^  Ijabe  gar  nid^t^  bagegen. 
I.  3Ba§  nef)men  U)ir  mit  ? 

2.  2(d^,  nel^men  n)ir  nur  nid)t  Diet  mit. 


148  VERBS. SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD.       [Les.  XIX. 

I.  SBdrc  e^  bod)  ni^t  ratfam,  einen  Diegenfcljirm  mitju^ 
iteljmen  ? 
2.  S)a§  ift  moglic^  ;  ja,  S^egenfd^trm  unb  iXberjieljev 
ne^men  tt)ir  mit. 

I.  2Bie  lange  rt)erben  luir  fort  fein  ? 

2.  $Ric^t  fel)r  knge,  t)ieEeicf)t  anbert^alb  ©tunben. 

I.  2Bann  muffen  @ie  trieber  5U  §au[e  fein? 
2.  3^  ^^^  f^^*^^  w^  ^i^^  1-^^^  tDieber  ba  fein. 

Etc.,  etc. 

Reading  19. 
3lttbrca§  QoUv* 

aSon  Suliug  3Kofen. 

3n  Tlanina  in  Sanben  ber  trene  §ofer  tDar, 

bonds 

Sn  SJfantna  jnm  STobe  fii^if  i(jn  ber  geinbe  @(^ar; 
6^  bintete  ber  ©ruber  §erj,  troop 

©anj  S)eutf(^Ianb,  ad),  in  ®ram  unb  @cl}mer3 ! 
3Kit  it)m  ba^  Sanb  3:t)roI,  mit  if)m  ba^  Sanb  Sterol 
(Repeat). 

J)ie  §anbe  auf  bent  ?HMcn  Slnbrea^  §ofer  ging, 
SRit  ruf)ig  feften  ©(^ritten,  it)m  fcf)ien  ber  Xob  gering ; 
3)er  Xob,  ben  er  fo  ntand^e^  Tlal  slight 

3Som  SfelBerg  gefd)idt  in^  %al, 
Snx  I)eirgen  Sanb  Ztjxoi,  im  ^eiPgen  Sanb   Sterol 
(Repeat). 

S)od^  al^  au^  ^erlergittern  im  feften  SKantua 

dungeon-bars  walled 

S)ie  treuen  ^Baffenbruber  bie  §dnb'  er  ftreden  fat), 

brothers  in  arms  stretch 


Les.  XX.]  MODAL  AUXILIARIES.  149 

3)a  rief  er  au^ :   @ott  fet  mtt  mdj, 
Tlit  bent  liervat'nen  beutfcljeit  $Reid), 

betrayed 

Unb  mit  bem  £anb  Sterol,  unb  mit  bem  Sanb  Sterol ! 
(Repeat). 


LESSON   XX. 

The  Modal  Auxiliaries,    ^onnen  and  biitfctt. 

1.  The  **  modal  auxiliaries  "  biirfen,  fonnen,  mogen, 
muffen,  follen  and  tnollen,  which  are  of  very  frequent 
occurrence,  call  for  special  attention  in  view  of 
peculiarities  in  form  and  usage. 

2.  Confusion  in  the  use  of  the  auxiliaries  is  due 
chiefly  to  the  defective  forms  of  these  words  in 
English.  Thus,  note  that  m7^st  has  only  present 
forms,  while  in  German  the  forms  of  miiffen  are 
complete,  as  though  we  could  say :  "  I  musted," 
"  I  shall  must,"  "  I  have  musted."  Instead  we 
must  say  in  English,  "I  had  to,''  "I  shall  be  com- 
pelled,'' "  I  have  been  obliged." 

3.  Like  Ijelfen,  feljen,  and  a  few  other  verbs  (see 
Lesson  XXVII),  the  **  modal  auxiliaries "  do  not 
take  ju  before  a  following  infinitive.  S(^  !cinrt  ba^ 
tun,  '*  I  can  do  that."  In  this  respect  they  do  not 
differ  from  the  same  words  in  English. 

4.  Often  the  verb  depending  upon  them  is  under- 
stood. SBoKen  @ie  Ijinein  ?  "  Will  you  (go)  in }  " 
aSa^  tDtll  er  ?  "  What  does  he  want  (to  do)  t  " 


150  MODAL  AUXILIARIES.  [Les.  XX. 

5*  In  the  compound  tenses  the  infinitive  (origin- 
ally a  participle  form  of  the  old  conjugation)  is  used 
instead  of  a  participle,  when  the  infinitive  of  an- 
other verb  depends  upon  it.  3)a^^  f)ahc  id)  nidjt 
inn  tonnm,  "That  I  have  not  been  able  to  do." 
But,  S(^  ^ak  e^  gcfonnt,  aba  nxdji  getDollt,  ''  I  was 
able,  but  did  not  want  to  do  it."  This  is  also  true 
of  a  few  other  verbs,  as  laffen,  fjci^en,  f)e(fen,  (joren, 
feljen,  and  sometimes  tef)ren  and  lernen. 

6.  Often  one  and  the  same  English  word  is  to  be 
translated  by  a  different  auxiliary  in  German  accord- 
ing to  the  meaning.  "  I  can  not  go  "  is,  Set)  tann 
nid)t  Qtljm,  if  the  meaning  is,  ''  I  am  unable  to  go  "  ; 
but  ScCj  barf  ntd)t  gef^en,  if  the  meaning  is,  "  I  am  not 
permitted  to  go  "  ;  while,  Set)  mag  nidjt  ge^en  means 
"  I  do  not  care  to  go." 

7«  In  German  the  negative  modifies  the  personal 
verb.  Hence,  Set)  iniij]  e^  nidjt  tnn  means  "I  do 
not  have  to  do  it."  "  I  must  (dare)  not  do  it,'  'is 
Sdj  barf  t§  ntdjt  tnn.  But  note  the  peculiar,  Sdj 
tvxU  nidjt  (joffen,  "I  hope  not." 

8.  The  English  may  often  be  expressed  other- 
wise in  German  than  by  the  "modal  auxiliaries." 
"  He  was  going  to  speak  "  is,  @r  tnoHte  fpredjen,  or, 
Sr  tvax  tm  Segriffe  jn  fpredjen.  "  I  do  not  like  him  " 
is,  S(^  niag  tijn  ntd^t,  or,  Sc§  fjade  i^n  nidjt  gern.  "  Let 
him  go  "  is  @r  mag  geljen,  or  Sr  geljc.  "  I  can  do  it  " 
is  Sdj  !ann  e^  tnn,  or  Sclj  bin  im.  ©tanbe  e^  jn  tnn. 


Les.  XX.]  MODAL  AUXILIARIES.  1 5  I 

9.  The  "causative  auxiliary"  laffen,  *' cause,  let, 
leave,"  resembles  in  its  use  the  "modal  auxiliaries," 
and  will  be  treated  in  connection  with  them. 

10.  In  the  paradigm  of  the  modal  auxiliaries  that 
follows,  it  will  be  noticed  that  the  endings  of  the 
Present  Indicative  are  those  of  the  Preterit  Indica- 
tive of  the  Old  conjugation.  Otherwise  the  verbs 
go  according  to  the  New  conjugation. 

11.  ^iitfett,  fottttett* 

^iirfert  and  fortnen  may  be  considered  together 
as  related  by  their  English  equivalents.  They  both 
mean  can,  may,  but  in  the  one  case  this  expresses 
permission  granted,  in  the  other  one's  own  power. 
3)urfen  means  be  permitted  or  be  at  liberty  (to  do  a 
thing),  fomien,  be  able.  The  English  "  I  can  do  it  " 
is,  id)  barf  e§  tim,  if  the  meaning  is,  "I  am  at  liberty 
to  do  it,"  but,  id)  fann  e^  tun,  if  the  meaning  is,  "  I 
am  able  to  do  it." 

12.  ^iirfcn* 

Siirfen  expresses:  i,to  be  permitted;  2./^j'5"/- 
^^7^Vjj/ (especially  in  the  subjunctive  preterit);  3.  need 
(with  negatives  or  privatives). 

1.  3)arf  id)  je^t  nad)  S2)^yx\t  gefien,  "  May  I  go  home 
now  1 " 

2.  G^  biirfte  f)eute  nod)  regnen,  "It  may  yet  rain 
to-day." 


152  MODAL  AUXILIARIES.  [Les.  XX. 

3.  Sd)  barf  uur  rnfen  unb  er  fommt  gleid),  '*I  need 
only  call  and  he  comes  at  once." 

1.  2)urfen  is  translated  by  "may,"  "can,"  "be  at  liberty  to," 
"  be  allowed  or  permitted  to,"  "  is  or  are  to,"  "  must,"  "  need  "  (the 
latter  two  only  with  negatives). 

2.  3)urfen  instead  of  ntiiffeu  is  the  English  "  must,"  when  it  is 
connected  with  a  negative,  as  "  you  must  not  speak  loud  here." 

3.  S)urfen  instead  of  tnogen  is  the  English  "  may,"  when  it  is 
used  to  express  consent  or  permission,  as  "  may  I  borrow  your 
pen } " 

4.  2)urfen  in  the  sense  of  "  need  "is  to  be  distinguished  from 
braud^cn,  "  use,  have  need  of." 

5.  !5)urfen  is  never  exactly  the  English  "  dare,"  "risk,"  which 
is  iDagcn. 

13.  ^littttett, 

Sonnen  expresses:  i.  ability ;  2, possibility^  phy- 
sical or  logical. 

I.  Sc^  fann  e^  tun,  "I  am  able  to  do  it.'* 
2.®^  fonnte  anber^  fomtnen,  "it  might  happen 
otherwise."     @§  fann  leti^t  baljin  fommen,  '*It  may 
easily  come  to  that."     S)a^  !ann  ntd)t  \ooS)x  fein,  "  that 
cannot  be  true." 

3.  Instead  of  foutten,  tmfta'nbc  fein  often  represents  the  English 
"  can."  3d)  bin  ntc^t  imftanbc,  \iOi^  l^eute  ju  tun,  "  I  can  not  do 
that  to-day." 

14.  In  general  the  preterit  (subjunctive)  of  the 
auxiliary  in  Enghsh  followed  by  the  compound 
infinitive  of  the  principal  verb  is  rendered  into 
German  by  the  pluperfect  subjunctive  (conditional 
perfect)  of  the  auxiliary  plus  the  simple  infinitive  of 


Les.  XX.] 


MODAL    AUXILIARIES. 


153 


the  principal  verb.  Thus  "  I  could  have  done  it  " 
is  Sc^  f)atte  e^  tun  fonneu  (lit.,  I  would  have  been 
able  to  do  it).  It  is  well  to  remember  as  a  formula  : 
"might  have  done,"  "could  have  done,"  "should 
have  done,"  all  begin  in  German  with  (jcitte,  while 
the  characteristic  auxiliary  comes  at  the  end  as  in- 
finitive. 


15.   Paradigm    of    the   Modal  Auxiliaries,   biirfctt  and 
fijttttett. 

Participles. 
Infinitives.  Present.  Preterit. 

biirfen,  foiincit*      (bitrfcnb)  (foimcub).      geburft,  gcfoiuit. 

(biirfett),  (Uxtntn), 

Perfect  Infinitives. 

geburft  ^aben,  gefomtt  f^ahcxt 

Present  Indicative.  Present  Subjunctive. 


s.  I.  barf 

2.  barfft 

3.  barf 

fann 

fannft 

fann 

biirfe 

biirfeft 

biirfe 

fiinne 

fiinneft 

fiinne 

P.  I.  biirfen 

2.  biirft 

3.  biirfen 

fiinnen 

fiinnt 

f^nnen 

biirfen 
biirfet 
biirfen 

fiJnnen 
fonnet 
fiinnen 

Indicative. 

Preterit. 

Subjunctive. 

bnrfte       fonnte 

biirfte 

fijnnte 

Perfect  Indicative. 

id)  ^abe  gebttrft  (biirfen),  gefonnt  (fiinnen)* 

Perfect  Subjunctive. 

id)  fjaht  gebnrft  (biirfen),  id)  fjaht  gcfonnt  (fiinnen)* 
bn^abcft     "  "        hnf)ahc^t     "  " 

Etc,  Etc, 


154  MODAL    AUXILIARIES.  [Les.  XX. 

Pluperfect  Indicative. 

i^  f^aitt  (jeburft  (biirfeit),  gefonut  (fiinnctt). 

Pluperfect  Subjunctive. 

i(^  fiattt  gebiirft  (biirfett),  gefonnt  (fonnctt)* 

Future  Indicative. 

i^  tuerbc  bilrfeu,  fiimieu. 

Future  Subjunctive. 

iti)  tuerbe  biirfeu,  Unntn* 
btt  ttjcrbeft  biirfcn,  fijimen* 

Future  Perfect  Indicative. 

tc^  tticrbc  geburft  (bitrfen)  f^aUxtf  gefomit  (fijuttcit)  f^ahtn. 

Future  Perfect  Subjunctive. 

trf)  mcrbc  gcburft  (bilrfeu),  (^tUnnt  (Ummt)  i)aUn. 
btttticrbcft     "  "  "  "        " 

Conditional. 

i^  tuilrbc  bilrfcii,  Bnntn. 
(biirfte,  fottntc.) 

Conditional  Perfect. 

irf|  milrbe  geburft,  gcfount  ^abtn, 
mtU  ♦  ♦  ♦  biivfeu,  .  .  .  Ummx). 

Vocabulary. 
MASCULINE.  ^itteiltge^CU,  £0  m,  atter. 

bcr  SibltOt^ef  at*',  the  librarian.       raU(i^ett,  smoke. 
b:r  gni^rer,  the  guide.  ^^xWitw,  forbid. 

ertauBcU,  permit, 

FEMININE.  ^     w(.  r      7^ 

plfen,  ^<?^. 
bic  »i6U0tI)ef',  the  library.  j,„iirffommen,  ../«.  *«./•,   «. 

NEUTER.  turn. 

bo§  ©ebiiube,  ^/^^  building.  ttjartcii  auf  (ace),  wait  for. 

irf|  faun  nirf)t§  baf ilr,  /  cannot  help  it. 

id)  faun  tttd|t  um^in  (511),  /  cannot  help  (with  pr.  part.) 

argcrlid^,  angry. 


Les.  XX.]  MODAL    AUXILIARIES.  155 

Exercise  XX. 

I.  Stonnen  @ie  mtr  einige  Don  bic[eu  83Mjern  kitjm  ? 
2.  ©^  tut  mir  leib,  abcr  id)  barf  ha^^^  nidjt  tun.  3.  ®!^ 
ift  t)er6oteu,  bie  93udjer  au^  bem  ©cBiiube  5U  fdjideu. 
4.  ?lf)er  @ie  biirfeu  [te  ja  ()ier  Ie[eu.  5-  9^uu  ja,  id)  !aun 
bod^  ntd^t  alle '  Sage  fommeu.  6.  a)?eiu  95ater  I)dttc 
bic  93ud)er  fc^ou  2-  laufeu  !ouneu.  7-  3)?ciue  greunbe 
ineiuen,  fie  ^abejt  fd)ou3  {)ier  bie  93ud)er  geuug  lefeu 
fonnen.  8.  ©iirfte  i^  uur  bie  93ud)er  dtva§  ual)er  an- 
fe^en  ?  9.  Slc^  ja,  ba^  t^erbeu  @ie  fd)on  bitrfen. 
10.  TO  an  tt)irb  in  einer  ©tunbe  fo  4  ein  f  leine^  99ud)  lefen 
fonnen.  n.  Sd)  tuiirbe  beffer  fef)en  fonnen,  iDenn  icf) 
f)ineingef)en  biirfte.  12.  S)a§  bitrfen  @ie  ja ;  @ie 
fatten  e^  gleic^  am  9lnfang  tun  biirfen.  13.  Sc§  fonnte 
ju  §aufe  aber  Diet  ruf)iger  lefen.  14.  3<i^  faun  ein  fiir 
atlemal  nid^tg  bafitr.  15.  Sd)  barf  fein  einjige^  93u(^ 
au§  ber  Sibliot^ef  fd^iden.  16.  Sd)  fonnte  hm  Siblio^ 
t^efar  nii^t  betDegen.  17.  S(^  glaube  aber,  ii)  f)dtte  e§ 
tun  fonnen.     18.  £)a^  fann  n:)oI)t  fein. 

^atle  S^Cige,  or  jeben  ^ag.  ^  of  course,  anyway.  ^  right,  even. 
*  fo  ein  !(eine§  33uc^,  «  //V//d?  ^^c?/^  like  this.  \o\6)  ein  !(cine8,  such 
a  little. 

Exercise  20. 

I.  Can  you  tell  me  where  the  librarian  is.? 
2.  jThat  3I  ^can  :  you  need  only  go  through  the 
door  yonder.  3.  But  you  must  not  smoke  in  the 
library.     4.  Can  it  be  that  smoking  is  forbidden  ? 


156  MODAL    AUXILIARIES.  [Les.  XX. 

5.  ^It  ^certainly  ^can  ^[that]  ;  you  might  have  known 
that.     6.  Could  we  go   in   where   the  books  are? 

7.  You  will  be  permitted  to  do  that  with  a  guide. 

8.  You  can  wait  for  him  here.  9.  I  might  have 
gone  into  the  library  if  I  had  not  been-smoking. 
10.  Some  friends  of  ours  were  permitted  (to)  yester 
day.  II.  But  yesterday  was  a  free  day.  12.  Every- 
body was  permitted  to  go  in  yesterday.  13.  Can 
you  not  permit  me  to  take  a  book.?  14.  I  might 
have  read  a  whole  book  in  this  half  hour.  15.  You 
will  be  able  to  do  that  when  you  come  back. 
16.  Were  you  able  to  find  the  librarian  ?  17.  No, 
the  guide  has  not  been  able  to  find  him.  18.  Then 
we  shall  not  be  permitted  to  see  the  books.  19.  I 
cannot  help  being  angry. 

(Introduce  the  particle  ja  into  the  above  sentences  wherever 
possible  and  note  the  effect.  See  what  changes  can  be  made  in 
the  English  sentences  to  express  this  alteration.  This  can  be 
done  only  with  the  aid  of  the  teacher  in  the  class.) 

Vocabulary  for  the  Conversation. 
bte  Wxtfjtf  trouble,  pains.  f ^t^eit,  sharpen. 

ticrlci^cn,  lend.  Bcfd^mu^cn,  soil. 

Conversation  19.  —  ITTeffer  unb  Bleiftift, 

I.  SSer  !ann  mtr  ein  gebermeffer  Ieil)en  ? 

2.  ^c^  !ann  ^l^nen  etn^  letfjen. 

I.  §a6en  ®te  mit  biefem  9)?effercf)en  fd)neiben  fi)nnen? 

3.  ^ah)o{;I,  icf)  {^abe  red^t  gut  bamit  fc^neibm  fonnen. 


Les.  XX.]  MODAL    AUXILIARIES.  157 

I.  S)arf  x6)  biefej^  SDfcffer  mit  nad)  §au)e  nei)men? 
2.  ®§  tut  mir  leib,  a&er  id;  barf  mein  3}{efferd^en  nid^t 
toerlei^en. 
I.  Sonnten  @ie  felber  ben  ®(eiftift  fiir  mid)  fpitjen? 

2.  Sag  fonnen  (5ie  mir  gan§  ru^ig  iiberlaffen. 
I.  Siirfte  tc^  ©ie  tpieber  6emuf)en,  nod^  einen  Sleiftift 
Sufpilert? 
2.  @^  ift  gar  leine  3!Jlu^e ;  barf  id^  bamit  an  bie  2^ure 
ge^en  ? 

I.  S)a^  burfett  @ie  QtW\%    @ie  ptten  3f)ren  Xx\i^ 
bamit  befi^mu^en  fonnen,  nic^t  tvaljx  ? 
2.  ^a,  unb  id)  ^dtte  mir  au(^  bie  g^inger  bef(f)mu^en 
fonnen. 
I.  3Bie  fpdt  it)irb  e^  tnot)!  fein? 

2.  ©^  fann  fc^on  fed^^  U^r  fein.     Etc.,  etc. 

Reading  20. 

©ed^^  SBortlein  ne{)men '  mid^  in '  Slnf^^ru^  ^  jeben  SCag  : 
^d)  foil,  id^  mu^,  ic^  iann,  id)  tt)itt,  ic^  barf,  id^  ma^. 
'^d)  foil  ift  bag  ®efe|,  i:)on  ©ott  in§  ^erj  gefd^rieben, 
S)a§  3i^l/^  ^^^  tDetc^em  id^  bin  t)on  mir  felbft  getrieben. 
3d^  mn^,  bag  ift  bie  ©d^ran!',^  in  tt)eld^er  mic^  bie  SBelt 
9Son  einer,  bie  S^atur  t)on  anb'rer  ©eite  ^alt. 
3d^  fann,  bag  ift  bag  5!Ka^^  ber  mir  t)erliel)'nen  ^raft, 
®er  3:at,  ber  3^ertigfeit,5  ber  ^nnft^  unb  2Biffenfc^aft.7 
'^d)  tDilt,  bie  I)oc^fte  ^ron'  ift  biefeg,  bie  mic^  fc^miidft/ 
2)ag  ift  ber  ^xti^dt  ©iegel,^  bem  ©eifte '°  aufgebriid^t," 


158  MODAL    AUXILIARIES.  [Les.  XXI. 

3d;  barf,  bag  t[t  ^ugleiif)  '^  bie  3nfc{)rift  '3  bei  bem  ©iegel, 
Sei'm  aufgetanen  S'or  ber  g^rei^eit  aud^  ein  Stiegel.'^ 
Qrf)  mag,  bag  enblic^  ift,  tt)ag  ^txjifc^en  alien  fd^iDimmt, 
©in  llnbeftimmteg,'^  bag  ber  Stugenblicf  beftimmt. 
3(^  foH,  td^  ntu^,  id^  fann,  id)  tt)i(I,  ic^  barf,  x6)  maQ, 
3)ie  Serf)fe  nef)men  mid^  in  2lnf^ru(^  jeben  3:^ag. 
5Rur  Wmn  2)u  '^  felbft  mic^  Iel)rft,  mei^  id^,  lt)ag  jeben  3:ag 
Qd^  fott,  ic^  mu^,  id^  fann,  ic^  tt)iff,  id^  barf,  id^  mag. 

9fi  u  ct  e  r  t. 
^  claim.      ^goal.       ^  barrier.      *  measure.      ■^  dexterity.      ''art. 
^science,      ^adorns,      ^geal.      ^°mind.      "impressed,      "at  the 
same    time.        ^^inscription.       ^*bolt.       ^^ something    indefinite. 
»6Thou(0  God). 

LESSON   XXI. 

Modal  Auxiliaries:    ^ogen^  modem 

I.  5D?ogen  and  tDoIIen  may  be  considered  together 
as  being  related  in  their  fundamental  significations. 
The  former  means  liking,  desire,  concession  by  the 
speaker  ;  the  latter,  will  or  inclination.  Sometimes 
it  is  indifferent  whether  mogen  or  tuolleu  be  used,  as 
er  tt)oIIte  (or  modjtcj  nidjt  Idnger  6let6en,  He  did  not 
wish  (or  care)  to  remain  longer. 

2.  WH^^x. 

3}Ji39en  expresses :  i .  liking,  taste,  desire ;  2 . 
possibility ;  '^.  pe7'mission,  concession  or  i?tdiffeimce 
on  the  part  of  the  speaker ;  4.  substitute  for  simple 
subjunctive. 


Les.  XXI.]  MODAL    AUXILIARIES.  1 59 

1.  Sc^  mag  t^n  nid^t  [tetben],  ''  I  do  not  like  him." 
@r  moc^te  tmmer  gro^artig  erfd)einen,  "  He  is  always 
wanting  to  appear  big."  Wo6)itn  ©ie  "^a^^  ?  "  Would 
you  like  (to  have)  that  1 " 

2.  S)a^  mag  tt)a^r  jein,  "That  may  be  true." 

3.  Sr  mag  gel)en,  "  He  may  go,  let  him  go."  S)co(^te 
btc  gange  SBett  un^  ^i3ren,  '*  Would  that  the  whole 
world  might  hear  us."  S)u  magft  ha^  93ud)  k^atten, 
"  You  may  keep  the  book." 

4.  Sd)  befiirdjtete,  ba^  er  ge^en  mod)te  (or  ginge),  / 
feared  that  he  might  go, 

3BolIen  expresses  :  i .  willingness^  wish,  choice , 
determifiation  ;  2.  impending  action  ;   3.  claim. 

1.  Sc^  rt)t(l  e^  ja  gerne  tun,  *'I  will  gladly  do  it." 
Sc^  tt)ill  e^  fo  f)aben,  "  I  am  determined  to  have  it  so." 
3d^  tDilI»!ein  S3rot,  "  I  do  not  wish  any  bread." 

2.  @^  tt)tll  regnen,  "  It  is  on  the  point  of  raining." 
@r  tt)ill  ge^en,  and  especially  with  ekn,  '  just,'  @r  tt)if[ 
ekn  gef)en,  "He  starts  to  go,"  "is  about  to  go," 
"is  just  going." 

3.  Sr  tDiH  bid)  gefel^en  ^aben,  "He  claims  to  have 
seen  you." 

As  equivalent  of  meaning  2,  the  phrase  im  35egrtff 
fein  is  often  used,  (£r  ift  imSegrtff  311  geljcit,  "  He  is 
on  the  point  of  going." 


i6o 


MODAL    AUXILIARIES. 


[Les.  XXL 


Paradigm  of  tyoHen  and  mogeil* 
Participles. 


Infinitives. 

Present.    • 

Past. 

mijgctt,  tooUtxu 

(miigcttb, 

ttJoKcttb).         gcmori^t,   gcttioilt, 

(1 

tniigctt),  (mottctt). 

Perfect  Infinitives. 

gentof^t  f^ahtn,  gemollt  ^aBen. 

Present  Indicative. 

Present 

Subjunctive. 

S.  I.  mag 

ttiitt 

ittijgc 

ttioKc 

2.  magft 

ttJittft 

mijgcft 

ttiofleft 

3-  mag 

tniK 

mijge 

ttioKe 

P.  I.  tttiigcit 

tuotteit 

ntogeu 

mottcn 

2.  mijgt 

nioHt 

moget 

mottet 

3.  tttogcn 

tnottctt 

ntijgen 

mottcit 

Imperative, 
ttiottc,  {be  pleased  to). 

Preterit  Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

ntoti^tc,  ttioKte.  miirfitc,  itiottte» 

Perfect  Indicative. 

i(^  ^Be  gcmoriftt  (—  miigctt),         getuofit  (—  mottett), 
btt^aft        "  ''  "  " 

Etc. 
Perfect  Subjunctive. 

t^  ^abc  gcmo(i^t  (—  mogen),        gemottt  (—  ttujUcn), 
bttliabcft     "  "  "  " 

Pluperfect  Indicative. 

\6)  pttc  gcmorf|t  (—  miJgett),        gctuofit  (—  motten). 

Future  Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

i(^  iDcrbc  mijgctt,  mottcn,  tucrbe  ittiJgcit,  tuottcn, 

btt  mirft       "  "  ttjctbcft  "  " 

Future  Perfect  Indicative. 

t^  ttjcrbe  gemoc^t,  getuottt  ^abem 
bumirft       "  "        " 

Etc. 


Les.  XXL] 


MODAL    AUXILIARIES. 


l6l 


Future  Perfect  Subjunctive. 

idj  ttjcrbe  gcmoc^t,  gcttioUt  ^aBcn, 
btttticrbeft     "  "         " 

Etc. 
Conditional. 

i^  ttiittrbe  mogcn,  moHem 
(miidjtc),      (ttioHtc)* 
Etc. 
Perfect  Conditional. 

ifii  ttiiirbe  gemor^t,  gcttJoUt  i^ahtn. 
rtiittc  — mogett,  tuoUcnO 

Etc. 


MASCULINE. 


bcr  ^xatcn,  roast. 

bcr  ^MtXf  baker. 

bcr  Jy^iKMlWCrfcr,  gourmand. 

bcr  tenner,  7«^^<?,  ^x/^r/. 

bcr  ^amcrab,  comrade. 
bcr  ^Jlati^ttfd),  dessert. 
bcr  ^um^critttfcl,   (a  kind  of 
black  bread.) 


FEMININE. 


bic  Su))^C,  soup^  broth. 


\s^^  ©c^tnarjbrot,  <^/^^>^'  <^r^«^ 

usually  rye-bread. 
b(l)§  (^cbdtf,  baker's  wares. 

bai^  ^a(ftt)crf,  <5r^^^,  r^z/j,  <:«/^^, 

pies. 


Vocabulary. 

auftragctt,  j^^r^<?. 

l^CrcitCU,  prepare. 

gcttcn  f iir, /^J-j/c^r,  ^<r  regarded 

as. 
Cr^cbCtt,  raise. 
I^CIfCtt,  /5^//. 
(flffcit,  have^  cause. 
rauBctt,   deprive  (person    in 

dative,  thing  in  accusative). 
rCtd^Ctt,  pass,  hand. 

ftimmctt,  vote. 

trattti^icrctt  (pr.    tranfd)ieren), 

carve. 

ticrfuri^ctt,  try. 

tJCrfaumCtt,     neglect,    lose    (by 

neglect). 
i(^  miirf)tc  gcrtt,  /  should  like. 
\^    mijti^tc   HcBcr,    /  should 

prefer. 
mag  .  ♦  .  Ott(i^,  -whatever. 
ItOt^l  citt,  another,  one  more. 


l62                            MODAL  AUXILIARIES.               [Les.  XXI. 

nod)  t)OU,  more  of.  CtlbUt^,  at  last 

l^Ci^,  hot.  ^ituftlic^,  prompt. 

td)tf  genuine.  gtcmltrf),   tolerably,  moderately., 

gar,  well  done.  pretty. 

bringCttb,  urgent.  ttar!)I)et,  hereafter. 


Exercise  XXI. 

I.  9BoI(cn  @te  fo  '  gut '  fein,  tnir  ba^  33rot  ju  retd}en  ? 

2.  5D?odjten  @ie   lieder   SBeiprot   obcr  SdjtDarjbrot  ? 

3.  Sd)   tptll   ba^  ©djiDarjbrot  nodj  einmal  Uerjuc^en. 

4.  Sd}  mag  bie  f)et§en  83rdtdjen  nii^t.  5.  Sd)  tDoIlte, 
JDtr  {onnten  t)on  bem  ed)ten  beutfc^en  ^umpermdel  ^tc 
fommen.  6.  3)a^  f)abe  ic^  and)  oft  getDoIIt.  7.  fatten 
©ie  aber  barum  nad)  ber  ©tabt  gdjcn  iDoden  ?  8.  9}?ein 
Samerab  iDill  eben  nad^  ber  ^i^xi^i  reijen.  9-  ©t:  fi3nnte 
im^  alfo  beutfc^e^  %^'i^^  ftrtngen,  iDcnn  er  bie  ®ute 
fjaben  tDotlte.  10.  Sa,  unb  er  iDill  in  SadtDer!  ein  Senner 
fein.  II.  (£r  modjte  fiir  einen  gemfdjmeder  gelten,  nidjt 
li:)af)r  ?  12.  SBoIIen  ©ie  noi^  Don  bem  Sraten  ?  13.  Sdj 
modjte  nod^  ein  bi^djen  Don  bem  gar  gefoc^ten,  inenn 
i4  bitten  barf.  14.  SBoIIen  tnir  je^t  ben  9?adjttfd)  anf^ 
ttagen  laffen  ?  15.  ©eien  ©ie  fo  gnt,  benn  ic^  iniU 
gleid)  nad^  SEifc^  anf  bie  Unioerfittit.^  16.  9Sa^  mag 
e^  bort  fo  S)ringenbe§  geben?  17.  3)a^  mMjtes  idj 
felbft  gem  iniffen.  18.  9^nn,  id)  tnid  bod)  meinen  9^ad)^ 
tifd)  nid)t  Derfdnmen,  tna^  eso  and)  fein  mag. 

^  As  before  the  following  infinitive  is  not  used  in  German. 
^  supply  geljeu,  not  needed  in  German.  ^  Here  tX)oUte  would  have 
about  the  same  shade  of  meaning. 


Les.  XXL]  MODAL    AUXILIARIES.  163 

Exercise  21. 
I.  There  you  are  at  last ;  we  were  just  about  to 
sit  down  to  (the)  table.  2.  I  will  be  more  prompt 
hereafter.  3.  But  I  wanted  to  finish  my  work. 
4.  Who  cares-for  ^  more  ^  of  the  soup  }  5.  I  would 
like  ^a  ^little  ^morej^-  if  you  please.  6.  I  have  often 
wanted  to  ask  how  they  (man)  prepare  this  soup. 

7.  Well,  I  do  3  not  care-for  3   [the]  soups,  anyway. 

8.  Let  us  have  the  roast  served !  4  9.  Who  will  be 
willing  to  carve  the  roast  ?  10.  I  would  have  liked 
to  do  it,  but  I  would  not  wish  to  deprive  you  of  the 
pleasure,  n.  How  would  you  like  your  roast,  pretty 
well-done  1  12.  I  would  prefer  it  moderately  well- 
done,  if  you  please.  13.  Will  (would)  you  be  so  kind 
as  to  pass  me  the  bread }  14.  Will  you  have  the 
white  bread  or  the  black  bread?  15.  I  would  have 
liked  to  try  the  black  bread,  but  it  is  all  5  (gone). 
16.  This  gentleman  claims  to  have  seen  pumper- 
nickel at  the  baker's.  17.  Who  may  he  ^  be  then? 
18.  Whoever  he  may  be,  we  should  like  to  have  the 
pumpernickel,  shouldn't  we  ?  7  19.  ^Whoever  ^wishes 
(to)  3 vote  2for-it,8  let-him-raise  9  his  hand. 

^mbd^te.    ^no(^.     ^mag.     ^infinitive,     ^atte.     ^ber,    ^  nirfjt 
tna^r.    ®  bafiir,    ^  subjunctive. 

Vocabulary. 

bic  SOlittUte,  minute.  BtttCtt  (um),  ask  {for). 

In  )  ♦  ♦  ♦  ^ttt  ?    where,    whither  frcKtti^,  indeed,  to  be  sure, 

{go  implied)  WWitX^Xt^UX^  interrupt. 
ittier^au^t,  anyway,  in  general. 


164  MODAL    AUXILtARiES.  [Les.  XXI. 

Conversation  20. 

I.  Tlo6)tm  @te  gern  ein  @ta^  3Baffer  ? 
2.  3a,  ic^  mod^te  e§  fe^r  gern. 

I.  aSoIIen  @te  nii^t  Iteber  eine  Saffe  ^affee  ? 

2.  3^  ^^^^^ ;  irf)  ^^K  K^'^^^  SBaffer. 
I.  9JJ6gen  @ie  benn  biefen  ^affee  nxdjt  ? 

2.  3^  ^^^9  ben  ^affee  uberl^au^^t  nic^t. 
I.  SBa^  ^aben  ©ie  t)or  einer  SKinute  fagen  tvolkn, 

2.  ^d^  ^abe  nid^t^  33efonbere§  fagen  li:)oHen. 
I.  SSoHten  @ie  nt(^t  urn  me^r  93rot  bitten  ? 

2.  g^reilic^  \a,  aber  id^  moc^te  nic^t  unterbred^en. 
I.  SSoIIen  tt)ir  ntd^t  glet^  ben  9^ac^tifc^  anftragen  laffen  ? 

2.  ^a,  tt)Dl(en  \m  ba§  tun  ! 
I.  SBer  mag  benn  ba^  fetn,  bort  am  @nbe  be^  Sttfd^e^  ? 

2.  @§  mag  tt)of)I  ein  S3e!annter  t>on  mir  fein. 
I.  SBill  er  mid)  fennen? 

2.  3a,  mein  §err,  er  ix)itt  ©ie  in  ©nglanb   gelannt 

I.  3So  tDoIIen  @ie  tbm  I)tn? 
2.  3^  tt)oIIte  ^eimge^en. 

Etc.,  etc. 
Reading  21. 

Departure 
9laci^  ^crbinanb  JRaim'unb. 

So  leb'  benn  Woljl,  bn  [titled  §au^! 
3^  jie^'  betrixbt  t)on  bir  Ijinan^: 

go       in  grief 


Les.  XXII].  MODAL   AUXILIARIES.  t6$ 

©0  kV  benn  iDoIjI,  benn  ic^  mu§  fort, 
9io(^  ntd)t  6e[ttmmt  an  iDcId^en  Drt, 

determined 

©0  lebt  benn  tt)of)I,  i^r  grennbe,  if)r! 
Scf)  3ie[)e  tranrig  fort  Hon  I)ier; 

sadly 

llnb  finb'  id^  einft  ein  grof^'re^  ®(nc!, 

sometime 

@o  bent'  xdj  gern  an  end)  jnrnA 

®o  kV  benn  tooljl,  bn  3}MbcI)en  mein! 
©oil  td^  t)on  bir  gefdjieben  fetn, 

parted 

©0  reic^e  mir  bie  liebe  ^anb, 

give 

S)ann  fdjlie^en  toir  ba^  grennbfd)aft^banb. 

form  friendship's-tie 

LESSON     XXII. 
Modal  Auxiliaries:    SOiiiffett,  foHett. 

I.  SKiiffen  expresses  compulsion,  necessity  from 
circumstances;  foUen,  moral  obligation,  constraint 
from  the  will  of  others. 

SJciiffen  expresses  :  i .  outward  obligation  ;  2.  phy- 
sical necessity  ;   3 .  logical  necessity. 

I.  3d)  mn^  baran  benfen,  ''I  have  to  think  of  it," 
**  cannot  help  thinking  of  it." 


1 66  MODAL    AUXILIARIES.  [Les.  XXll. 

2.  §eute  miij]  bte  ®loc!c  tDerben,  "To-day  the  bell 
must  come  into  being";  3tlle  5D2enjd)en  muff  en  fter^ 
6en,  "All  men  must  die."  S)iefer  9)tann  mu^,  fterben, 
"This  man  must  die"  (it  cannot  be  prevented); 
while,  Stefer  Ttann  foil  fterben  means  "  This  man  is 
to  die  "  (is  condemned  to  die). 

3.  Sr  mu§  inel]r  frifcfje  Suft  fdjopfen,  tvmn  er  gefunb 
bteiben  Wxii,  "He  must  breathe  more  fresh  air  if  he 
wants  to  remain  well."  Sa^  mufs  fein,  "That  must 
be." 

Remark.  —  As  the  past  tenses  of  '*  must  "  are  no  longer  used 
in  English,  the  past  tenses  of  niiiffeil  are  to  be  translated  by  "  had 
to,"  "was  obliged  or  compelled  to,"  "could  not  but  "  or  ''help." 

3.    Sofiett, 

©oHen  expresses :  i.  mtention  (by  some  one 
else  than  the  subject)  ;  2.  futurity^  impending 
action ;  3.  moral  obligation  (in  preterit  and  plu- 
perfect Subjunctive  forms  only);    4.  report ^  claim. 

1.  S)u  foUft  ®ott  Itebeu,  "  Thou  shalt  love  God  "  ; 
5Ba^  foil  ic^  Ijier  tt)ol)t  l)6ren  ?  "  What  am  I  (intended) 
to  hear  here } 

2.  ©ollte  er  nod)  fommen,  fag^  it)m  biefe^,  "  If  he 
should  still  come,  tell  him  this."  @^  foil  batb  ge^ 
fctjel)en,  "  It  is  to  happen  soon." 

3.  Sdj  follte  e^  tun,  "I  ought  to  do  it;''  ®§ 
f)atte  vS&)i  fo  fetn  follen,  "  It  ought  not  to  have  been 
so." 


Les.  XXII.]  MODAL   AUXILIARIES.  \6j 

4.  Ser  ^aifer  foil  ^ier  getDcfen  fetn,  "  The  emperor 
is  said  to  have  been  here." 


4.    Paradigm  of  miiffctt  and  fulleit* 

Infinitives.  Participles, 

miiffctt,  fottCtt.  Present.  Perfect. 

(tttttffcttb,  fottettb)*  gcttttt^t,  gcfuttt, 
(tttuffett),(fottctt)* 

Perfect  Infinitives. 

getttu^t  iftaBctt,  gcfoKt  ^afictt. 


Present  Indicative. 

Present  Subjunctive. 

S.  I.  tttttg 

full 

tttiiffe        folic 

2.   ttttt^t 

f^W 

ttttlffcft      foHcft 

3.  ttttti 

fun 

tttttffc        f  oHc 

P.  I.  tttttjfctt 

follett 

tititffctt      follctt 

2.  tttit^t 

font 

tttitffct       foUct 

3.  tititffctt 

ffjllCtt 

tititffctt      foUcn 

Preterit  Indicative. 

Subjunctive. 

ttttt^te, 

,  folltc 

tttttgtc,  foUte 

Perfect  Indicative. 

t^  ^abc  gcmugt  (—  miiffctt),  gcfullt  (     foHctt) 
btt^aft        "  "  "  " 

Perfect  Subjunctive. 

ir^  ^aBc  gcmugt  (—  miiffctt),  gcfollt  (—  foUctt) 
bu^abc^    "  "  **  " 

Pluperfect  Indicative. 

ir^  ^attc  gcmugt  (—  miiffctt),  gcfollt  (—  follctt) 

Pluperfect  Subjunctive. 

ie^  ^atte  gcmuftt  (-  mitffcu)^  gcfuHt  (—  foactt) 


l68  MODAL   AUXILIARIES.  [Les.  XXIIo 

Future  Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

i^  ivcvt>t  miiffett,  foKen  tDcrbc  tniiffcn,  foUcu 

buttJirft      "  "  ttietrbeft     "        " 

Etc.,  etc. 
Future  Perfect  Indicative. 

t^  tticrbc  gcmu^t,  gcfottt  ^aBeit 
buttJtrft        "  "       "       etc. 

Future  Perfect  Subjunctive. 

i(i}  ttjcrbc  gemu^t,  gefottt  (jaBcii 
bu  tticrbeft    "  "        "     etc. 

Conditional. 

xtij  tuiirbe  miiffcti,  fottcit,  etc 
(mu^tc)       (foUtc) 

Perfect  Conditional. 

t^  ttiitrbc  geitttt^t,  gcfottt  ^aBcn 
(^atte— miiffcn,  —  foUen)       etc. 

Vocabulary. 

bcr  dtoman'f  novel,  ^iltcu,  >^^<;>,  >^<?^/  to. 

bcr  3ttJeifel,  ^^«(5/.  tuartett  (auf),  w^^v  (/^r). 

bic  3uJunft,  future.  tjerbtenCttp  <?^r//,  deserve. 

blc  5(rBctt,  w^r/^.  B elicit, /^/«/«^. 

ba)§  Strafgclb,  fine.  OCfuC^t,  sought  for. 

aufprctt,  <:^^j^.  f^dtcftett)^,  ^/  //^<?  /cz/^j^/. 

be^a^lctt,  pay.  luetttgftctt!^,  ^/  /<?^zj/. 

Begreifctt,  comprehend.  \^m  bcja^lctt,  /^JI^  ^^J/^. 

?iUrUCftragett,  return.  gcrabe,  precisely. 

gefte^en,  confess.  noc^  bagu,  b^^^djis. 


Les.  XXII.]  MODAL    AUXILIARIES.  169 

Exercise     XXIL 

I.  aSag  foHen  mx  ijcnk  S^ac^mtttag  tun  ?  2.  2BoIIen 
toir  mcf)t  ben  neuen  3toman  lefen  ?  3-  SIcI)  ja,  benn  tvxx 
miiffen  benfetben  morgen  •  juriidtragen.  4-  2Bir  fatten 
ba^  fc^on  geftern  tun  [ollen.  5.  Sd)  mufe  gejteljen,  tc^ 
!ann  ha^  nid^t  begreifen.  6.  S)a^  Sucf)  foil  ]ef)r  bdiebt 
unb  gefud^t  fein.  7.  Sc^  t)abe  jiDci  9Bod)en  barauf  hearten 
miiffen.  8.  Wn^  man  nic^t  ein  ©trafgelb  kjatjlen,  tt)enn 
man  ein  S5uc^  ju  tange  bdjixlt  ?  9.  Of)ne  S^^if^r  ^^^ 
iDtr  irerben  auc^  9Bort  Ijalten  miiffen.  10.  9^un,  \v\x 
follten  e^  fpateften^  morgen  friit)  juriidtragen.  n.  2Ber 
foil  f)eute  t)orIefen?  12.  2)ie  5D?arie  ()at  e^  tun  foUen, 
aber  fie  mu^  ha^  3^^^^^'  yaitn.  13.  ©ie  foE  boi^  red^t 
franf  fein.  14.  @o  mu^  ber  nac^fte  befte '  lefen.  15.  S)er 
neue  ©c^iiler  fjatte  e^  tun  miiffen,  iDenn  er  f)ier  mcire. 
16.  (£r  mufe  ba^  getoufet  I)aben.  17.  @r  miifete  in  bie 
3ufunft  fet)en  fonnen.  18.  (£r  foK  toenigften^  morgen 
lefen  miiffen.     19.  SBir  tt)erben  je^t  fc^on  auf^oren  miiffen. 

^ '  the  most  available  person,'  '  some  one  else.' 

Exercise  22. 

I.  You  will  be  obliged  to  copy  your  exercise  this 
afternoon.  2.  ^Not^I;  I  would  indeed  have  had 
to  do  it,  ,if  J  ghad  jnot  ^already  gcopied  ^mine 
^this  ^tnorning.  3.  My  comrade  must  work  at-it 
the  whole  afternoon.  4.  At  least,  he  must  if  he  is 
to  finish  his  lesson.  5.  I  know,  he  is  said  to  be  a 
very  diligent  pupil.     6.  You  ought  to  have  heard 


I/O  MODAL    AUXILIARIES.  [Les.  XXII 

him  to-day  in  the  class.  7.  He  must  have  been 
very  diligent  [in  order]  to  earn  such  praise.  8.  Shall 
I  help  you  with  your  copying  ?  9.  No,  thank  you, 
we  are  to  do  all  the  work  ourselves.  10.  Many  a 
student  has  had  to  work  at -it  three  whole  hours. 
II.  You  ought  to  be  thankful  that  you  do  not  have 
to  do  it.  12.  We  are  to  begin  a  new  book  next 
week.  13.  Do  you  all  have  to  buy  the  book  ?  14.  I 
have  mine  already;  J  ^had-to  ^pay  ^cash  (for)  ^iVy 
^however.  15.  It  was  to  cost  precisely  $2,  but  we 
are  obliged  to  pay  ^2.25.  16.  It  must  have  cost 
more  than  the  merchant  expected.  17.  He  ,is-said 
(to)  ^have  ^lost  jmoney  ^on-them  ^besides. 

^  accusative  without  preposition. 

Vocabulary  for  the  Conversation. 
bic  ^cbttlb,  patie7ice.  baucrit,  last. 

Crfr^cittCtl,  appear.  aUctbtltg^,  indeed,  to  he  sure. 

cittftcigCtt,  get  aboard.  blp^,  merely. 

tiorbetgc^cn, /^jj.  P  S^fec,  on  foot. 

^alteti,  stop,  ber  XramttJagctt,  street-car. 

Conversation  21.— Dcr  (Erammagcn. 

I.  2Bie  lange  foUte  mart  I)ter  tDarten  muff  en  ? 

2.  "^(xw.  fottte  tt)o{)l  gar  nid^t  tt)arten  miiffen. 
I.  ^oS^txi  @te  geftern  lange  tDarten  miiffen  ? 

2.  ^a,  tc^  mu^te  geftern  etne  l^albe  (Stunbe  tparten* 
I,  3)can  mu^  alfo  bto^^  ©ebulb  f)a6en? 

g,  ^a§  mu^  man  atterbing^, 


Les.  XXII.]  MODAL    AUXILIARIES.  I /I 

I.  3i5ie  oft  foil  bcr  SBagen  "^ter  l3ort)eigeI)en? 

2.  3tl(e  15  S^inuten  foil  ein  2Sagen  t)orbetge^en. 
I.  ©0  1:)atk  ber  SBagen  feine  Ijdbe  ©tunbe  fpiit  fein 
follen? 
2.  @en)i|3  nid)t ;   ber  2Bagen  !^dtte  fc£)on  toor  10  ^Qiinuten 
l)ter  fein  follen. 

I.  G*^  loirb  Uiof)I  ettuai^  gefc^el^en  fein,  nieinen  @ie  nidjt? 

2.  2ltterbing§,  e§  mnfs  etit)a§  gefrf)ef)en  fein. 
I.  3Bai§  follen  tntr  benn  nmcljen  ? 

2.  28er  e^  !ann,  foH  nur  gu  g^u^e  geJien. 

I.  SBie  tDeit  ntiifste  man  jn  gn^e  gefjen? 

2.  Man  mii^te  tt)of)l  anbertfjalb  SKeiten  laufen. 
I .  Unb  tvkf  wmn  ein  9Bagen  gteic^  fommen  f oKte  ? 

2.  2)a  mii^ten  tt)ir  nur  ben  3Bagen  ^alUn  (affen  unb 
etnfteigen. 

I.  9ii(^t  tnaljr,  t^  foUte  nidjt  me{)r  lange  banern? 
2.  Jlein  ;   eg  fottte  ein  2Bagen  fogleic^  erfi^einen. 

Etc.,  etc. 

Reading  22. 
^ic  Huge  Wlan§. 

6ine  SKau^  lam '  au^  i^rem  Sod^e  unb  fa^  ^  eine  ^atte. 
„2lf?a/'  fagte  fie,  „ba  fte^t  eine  goalie !  ®ie  flugen  9)Jenfc^en! 
ba  fteHen3  fie  mit  brei  §o[3(f)en  einen  fc^tDeren  3i^9^^tein 
aufrec^t,3  unb  an  eine^^  ber  ^otjc^en  ftecf en  fie  ein  ©tu(f(f)en 
Bpti.  ®a§  nennen  fie  bann  eine  5iJ{dufefaHe !  ^a,  \io^nn 
mir  TOdu^c^en  nid^t  fliiger  tt)dren  !  SBir  miffen  iDO^I,  \vznn 
m^n  i?^n  @^erf  freffen  wiii,^  tlapif^ !  fftdt^  ber  3iegelftein 


172  VERBS. PASSIVE    VOICE.       [Les.  XXIII. 

i)erunter^  unb  fc^Idgt^  ben  3?dfd^er  tot,  7  3^ein,  nein !  id^ 
fenne  eure  Sift !" 

,Mbcx/'  ful^r  ba§  5!Jldu§ci^en  fort,^  „ried^en  barf^  man 
fd^on '°  baran»  3Som  blofeen  9liec£)en  f ann  bie  g^aHe  nid^t 
juf alien,  unb  ic^  riec^e  ben  Qp^d  bod^"  fiir  mein  Seben 
gern,'^    ©in  bi^d^en  ried^en  mu^  id)  bar  an.'' 

6§  lief  '3  unter  bie  g^aKe  unb  rodf)  '^  an  bem  ©^)edfe.  2)ie 
g^alfe  aber  tDar  ganj  lofe  geftettt,  unb  faum  beruf)rte  ee 
mit  bem  Jld^d^en  '5  ben  ©))edf,  tlapp§>  I  fo  fiel  '^  fie  jufam^ 
men/^  unb  ba§  liifterne  SDldu^d^en  n)ar  gerquetfc^t. 

®  r  i  m  m. 
^fottimen»  ^fe^en.  ^  aufred^t^tetlen,  set-up.  -^on  eineg,  on 
one.  Ms  about  to.  ^  ^eruuter=fal(en.  ^  tot'f(^(agen,  kill,  ^ful^r 
fort,  continued ;  from  fort'fal^ren.  ^  biirfen*  ^°  at  least.  "  I  tell 
you,  you  must  know,  surely.  ^^  fiir  meiu  !t?e6en  gem,  as  dearly  as 
I  love  my  life,  ^^jjiuf^^^  ^'♦riec^en.  ^Mittlenose.  ^<' jufam'men^ 
fatten. 

LESSON   XXIII. 

Verbs. — Passive  Voice. 

1.  In  German  the  passive  voice  of  a  transitive 
verb  is  formed  by  the  union  of  the  auxiUary  tDcrben 
with  its  past  participle. 

2.  This  is,  properly  speaking,  no  new  conjuga- 
tion, and  the  following  paradigm  will  explain  itself. 
It  will  be  noticed  that  the  participle  getDOrben  loses 
its  prefix  ge-  in  the  compound  tenses. 

3«    Conjugation  of  IteBett  in  the  Passive  Voice. 
Present. 

tri^  ttjcrbc  gcIicBt,  I  am  loved. 

Preterit. 

\i^  totttbe  (tt»arb)  gelicbt,  /  was  loved. 


Les.  XXIII].       VERBS. PASSIVE   VOICE.  1/3 

Perfect. 
itil  tin  geUedt  ttJOrben,   /  /lave  been  loved. 

Pluperfect, 
left  tuar  gelicBt  ttJOrbett,   /  had  been  loved. 

Future, 
icift  tt»etbC  gcUcit  ttJCrbeit,   /  shall  be  loved. 

Future    Perfect, 
iljft  tUCrbC  gcHcfit  ttJOrbCtt  fcilt,   /  shall  have  been  loved. 

Imperative. 
ttlCrbC  i^tsVi)  CJcUeBt,  be  {thou)  loved. 

ttjcrbct  (iftr)  gclicbt,  ^^  (jj/^)  /^^^. 

Infinitives. 

gdteBt  wcrbctt,  ^^  ^«?  /^z/^^/. 

geliebt  morbcn  feiu,  ^^  /^«^<f  been  loved. 

Participle. 
gCliebt  ttlCrbCttb,  being  loved. 

4.  In  German,  the  passive  of  man  baut  't)a^  §au^ 
is,  ba^ >^au^  tt)irb  gebaut,  "the  house  is  (in  the  pro- 
cess of)  being  built."  !5)a^  §au^  ijtgebaut,  "the 
house  is  built,"  i.  q.  finished,  is  not  the  true  passive, 
but  indicates  the  condition  resulting  from  the  pro- 
cess, the  tft  being  a  copula,  and  gebaut  a  participial 
adjective  in  the  predicate.  The  form  with  toerbett 
always  expresses  or  implies  a  state  of  being  acted 
upon  by  an  agent  in  the  tense  indicated,  but  the 
form  with  fettt  never  does. 

5«  The  absence  of  a  distinctive  auxiliary  for  the 
passive  voice  in  English  causes  ambiguity  which 


174  VERBS. PASSIVE    VOICE.       [Les.  XXIII. 

cannot  arise  in  German.  "  The  city  was  destroyed  " 
may  mean  "They  destroyed  the  city"  (5)te  @tabt 
tDitrbe  jerftort)  or  **The  city  was  already  destroyed," 
i.  e.  "had  been  destroyed  some  time  before"  (5)ie 
Stabt  tvax  jerftort).  "  Where  is  the  book  printed  ?  " 
is  true  passive  (3Bo  tDtrb  ba^  Suc^  gebrudt  ?)  "  The 
book  is  already  printed"  expresses  merely  a  state 
(3)a§  95ud)  ift  fd^on  gebrudt). 

6.  In  German,  therefore,  the  true  passive  is 
always  recognizable,  and  the  only  caution  needed  is, 
to  render  it  into  unambiguous  English.  But  in 
rendering  English  into  German,  the  student  must 
learn  first  to  test  and  recognize  the  true  passive. 
The  following  are  the  tests  :  i.  If  the  EngUsh  is  in 
the  progressive  form,  "The  house  is  being  built" 
(or  "is  building");  2.  If  the  agent  is  expressed, 
"The  city  was  destroyed  by  the  Romans";  3.  If 
the  sentence  under  scrutiny  when  turned  into  an 
equivalent  sentence  in  the  active  voice  retains  the 
same  tense,  "  The  city  was  destroyed  "  =  "  They 
destroyed  the  city,"  is  true  passive,  S)ie  ©tabt  tDiirbe 
jerftort;  but  "The  city  was  destroyed"  =  "They 
had  destroyed  the  city  "  is  quasi-passive,  S)te  ©tabt 
tDar  jerftort. 

7-  The  passive  voice  of  intransitive  verbs  is  often 
used  impersonally  in  German  where  the  English 
uses  an  indefinite  expression  with  the  verbal  noun, 
llnb  f)eute  9iac^t  tnirb  Ijod)  gefc^ttjelgt  ju  ^iifenactit, 


Les.  XXIIl].      VERBS. PASSIVE   VOICE.  I75 

''There  will  be  high   revelling   to-night   at  Kiiss- 
nacht  "  ;  §ier  tvxxb  ntdjt  geraudjt,  "  No  smoking  here." 

8.  The  passive  voice  is  less  frequently  used  in 
German  than  in  English.  It  is  replaced,  as  in  the 
French,  by  other  expressions,  especially  the  two 
following :  — 

1.  Form  with  man:  9Wan  i)at  ben  ©djliiffel  gefnnben, 
"They  have  found  the  key." 

2.  The  reflexive  form :  ©er  ©dCjIiiffet  I)at  fid)  ge^ 
fnnben,  "The  key  has  been  found." 

9.  For  the  English  passive  infinitive  German 
uses  after  fein,  fid)  laffen,  6lei(ien,  [teljen  and  fdjeinen, 
the  form  of  the  active  infinitive,  as  2Sa^  ift  ju  tun  ? 
"  W/iat  is  to  be  done  ?  "  ^a^^  Iti^t  fid)  ben!en,  "  That 
can  be  imagined"  (lit.  "lets  itself  be  thought"). 


Vocabulary. 

bcr  San,  th^  ball.  JtCfern,  deliver. 

bet  ^^aftor,  the  pastor.  crmartcti,  expect. 

bcr  ©ciftUti^C  (adj.  subst.),  the  aclcibiot,  offended, 

clergy 7nan.  tloU^ic^lCtt,  perform. 

ber  Xcttor',  />^-f  tenor.  tierictrtttct,  /«^rr/V^. 

bcr|)Ctr,  the  gentleman.  tttt^roffCtt,  omit. 

bic  ^ori^aett,  ^>^^  wedding  (fes-  au^brurfcit,  ^jr/r^jj-. 

tivity).  erft,  «^/  . . .  ////. 

bic     XraUttttg,     the    7narriage  f(j„^^  scarcely. 

(ceremony).  fufiletr^,  r^;^///  ^7£/^^. 

bic  a3rattt,  the  bride  (engaged  attbct^,  differently, 

^^^i)'  luftig,  merry. 

anne^men,  assume. 


176  VERBS. PASSIVE   VOICE.       [Les.  XXIIL 

Exercise  XXIII. 

1. 9Btr  ftnb  ju  ber  §otf)5eit  eingdaben  tDorben.  2.  SSon 
iDcm  ttjurben  ©ie  bemt  eingdaben?  3.  3)ie  (Sinlabung 
tvmbt  un§  t)on  ber  Srant  gefd)idt.  4.  SBirb  jebermann 
eingetaben?  5- S)ci^  ftel)t'  §n  jtDeifeIn,  benn  mein 
greunb  ber  nene  S^enor  t[t  nicE)t  dngelaben.  6.  3iun  ja, 
meine  ©tnlabnng  tDnrbe  erft  f)ente  morgen  geliefert. 
7.  SSieKeidjt  tvxxh  bte  fetntge  fjente  nadjmittag  geliefert 
tt)erben.  8.  S(^  glaube  aber  nidjt,  ba^  er  eingetaben 
tuirb.     9.  Sft  benn   etoa^   bariiber   gefagt   tDorben? 

10.  Wan  l^at  mir  nnr  gejagt,  ba^  fei  ^  nic^t  jn  erttjarten. 

11.  SBirb  er  nid)t  beleibigt  fein?  12.  S)a^  la^t  fid)  ben^ 
!en,  aber  e^  ift  nic^t^  jn  tnn.  13.  9Son  tDem  iDirb  bie 
3;rannng  t)oIIjogen  (tDerbens)?  14.  3)ie  @d)tt)efter  ber 
Srant  tnnrbe  iDon  5pa[tor  93raun  getraut.  15.  Sft  fie 
benn  and)  berljeiratet  ?  16.  9Kan  fagt,  bie  jiingere 
@d)tt)efter  mod^te  gem  t)on  bemfetben  ®eiftH(^en  getrant 
tperben.  17.  3Kir  tDnrbe  ba^  anc^  g^fcigt.  18.  S^  tt)irb 
alfo  !anm  baran  jn  jlneifeln  fein. 

^  or  ift.  ^  Subjunctive  of  indirect  discourse.  '  As  the  present 
is  often  used  for  the  future,  this  sentence  has  the  same  meaning 
with  or  without  the  '  trerben/ 

Exercise  23. 
I.  Who  will  be  invited  to  the  ball }     2.  That  can- 
not be'  told  yet.     3.  The  invitations  are  not  yet  all 
written.     4.  They   must    be    written    right    away. 

5.  I   think  they   must   really   be  written   already. 

6.  No,  they  ,are-being  ^written  ^right-now.^-  7.  And 
when  will  they  be  delivered  ?     8.  Some  of  them  are 


les.  xxiil]     verbs. — PAssive  voice.  lf*J 

already  delivered.  9.  But  [the]  most  (-of -them) 
,  will  2not  gbe  ^delivered  ^until  3to-morrow.  10.  Am 
I  to  be  invited?  n.  I  (mir)  was  not  told  that,  but 
it  is  scarcely  to  be  doubted.  12.  Your  old  friend 
Charles  must  be  invited. 3  13.  How  is  that  to  be 
understood.?  14.  I  mean  (intend)4  to  say:  the 
gentleman  cannot  be  omitted.  15,  Might  that  not 
be  expressed  differently .?  5  16.  He  should  have 
been  invited.  17.  Doubtless  he  is  invited.  18.  Will 
(there)  be  singing  at  the  ball .?  ^  19.  I  cannot  say ; 
by  whom  is  the  ball  given }  20.  It  is  given  by 
some  merry  friends  of  mine.7  21.  Then  (there)  will 
surely  be  singing. 

^  active  voice  with  inait.     ^  focben.    ^  transl.  v^rith  two  meanings. 
*  tDottcn.   ^active  with  man.   ^  See  ^[7,  this  lesson.    ^  transl.  ofine. 

Vocabulary  for  the  Conversation. 
bic  Sr^tiftftettcrin,  the  au-         ticrfaffctt,  compose. 

thoress.  ^Cttt^UtaOC,  nozvadays. 

'^a^  ^ubltfum,  the  public.  \^^^h  ^^ough  (with  reservation 

CtflarClt,  explain.  or  qualification). 

Conversation  22. — Homane. 

r.  SSon  tt)em  tDurbe  biefer  9ioman  t)erfa^t? 

2.  @r  h)urbe  t)on  einer  g^rau  berfa^t. 
I.  (Sio  tDerben  Ijcutjutage  Dtele  9bmane  t)on  grauen  ge- 
f(i)rtet)en,  ntc^t  tt)af)r? 
2.  ^a,  e§  tDerben  mirflic^  fe!)r  biele  t)on  g^rauen  ge= 
fc^rieben. 
I.  SSerben  bie  9?omane   btefer  ©djriftfteHertn   t)ie{  ge^ 
tefen  ? 
2.  ©ie  tt)erben  nid^t  fo  t)iel  gelefen  tt)ie  t)or  10  3at>ren. 


178  VERBS.— PASSIVE   VOICE.       [Les.  XXIIl. 

I.  SBie  tft  ha^^  ju  ertldren? 

2.  Wan  faun  e§  md)t  gan^  erfldren, 
I.  SSon  ruem  tpurbe  ^^Sol^n  |)a(tfai'^'  gefd)rte6en ? 

2.  2lu(f)  biefe^  93u(^  tDurbe  t)on  einer  g^rau  gefd^rieben. 
I.  SSerben  auf  beut[(^  t)tele   SRomane  Don  ^rauen  ge^ 
fdjrteben  ? 
2.  9Zetn,  unb  tf)re  2BerIe  tt)erben  nid^t  fo  i)iel  gelefen. 
I.  Sinb   nidjt  3BtIl)eImtne  t).  |)inent  unb  SBil^ehnine 
|)eimbur9  in  ©entfdjtanb  beUebt? 
2.  3lc^  ja,  fie  finb  f(^on  beliebt. 
I.  5l6er  fie  t^erben  nic^t  fo  l^od)  gefdja^t  tnie  gretjtag, 
S)a^n  unb  ©piel^agen  ? 
2.  3lein,  bie   gro^ten  ©d^riftfteller  lt)erben  l^of^er  ge^ 
fc^ci^t, 
I.  9Ber  tt)irb  aU  ber  gro^te  beutfc^e  9?omanfd}rei6er  ge- 
fd)a|t? 
2.  Sett  ©oetf)e,  iDtrb  tt)of)(  3^re^tag  t)on  bem  ^ublifum 
am  ^oc^ften  gef(^d^t. 

Etc.,  etc. 

Reading  23. 
2)ie  gfatt  un^  bic  ©enne, 

Sine  grau  i)atk  einc  §enne.  ©iefe  §enne  legte  jeben 
Xag  ein  (Si.  2(ber  bie  gran  toar  nidjt  bamit  ^  jufrieben. 
®ie  njoKte^'  jeben  Stag  jtDei  (£ier  l^aben,  benn  bie  (£ier 
tuaren  fe^r  teuer.  ®ie  mciftetes  ba^er4  bie  |)enne,  in 
ber  §offnung  met)r  Sner  jn  be!ommen.5  SIber  bie  §enne 
trurbe^  §u7  fett,  unb  kgte  feine^  ©ier^  mel^r.^ 

*  with  that.  ^wanted.  ^  fattened.  '♦accordingly, 

^get.  ^became.  ^too.  ® no  more  eggs. 


Lks.  XXIV.]  REFLEXIVE   VERBS.  1/9 

@abt,  ber  tDcife  ^erjer,  ja^  eine^  2l6enb§  bertieft^  6et 
bem  ^oran.  Slt^^  er  auf(i(t(ite,3  waxtn  l:)on  jeinen  bret 
Soljiten  jtDci  eingeld^Iafen4;  ber  britte  aba  fagte  fef)r 
felbftpfrieben  5 :  „@iel),  SSater,  me  btea  fd)Iafen;  id) 
a6er  —  id)  bete!"  —  ,,9[)?ein  ®o^n,"  entge9nete7  fanft 
ber  a>ater,  ^beffer  i[f^  bod)  ti:)o^t  ju  fd^Iafen,  aU  ftotj^ 
ju  fein  auf  ba^,  tt)a§  man  tut,'' 

*  counsel.  ^ looked  up.  *  self-satisfied.  'rejoined, 

'absorbed.         *  asleep.  ^they.  •  proud. 

LESSON    XXIV. 

Verbs.  —  Reflexive  and  Impersonal  Forms. 
Reflexive  Verbs. 

1.  Verbs  are  said  to  be  used  reflexively  when 
they  represent  the  action  as  exerted  upon  the  sub- 
ject, the  object  being  a  pronoun  which  refers  back 
to  the  subject ;  as,  3c^  freue  mid)  (Ut.  I  rejoice  my- 
self), "  I  rejoice." 

2.  Any  transitive  verb  may  be  used  reflexively. 
Proper  reflexives  are  those  which  are  used  reflexively 
only,  or  which,  though  not  always  so  used,  have  a 
different  meaning  in  this  use  :  as,  fid)  fc^dmen,  "  to 
be  ashamed  ;"  [ic^  pten,  "to  beware,'*  from  f)uten, 
"to  guard." 

3.  The  use  of  reflexives  is  much  more  common 
in  German  than  in  English,  and  they  often  occur 
where  the  corresponding  reflexive  construction  is 


l80  REFLEXIVE    VERBS.  [Les.  XXIV. 

not  admissible  in  English :  as,  S)er  ©d^liiffel  Ijat  fic^ 
gcfuuben,  "The  key  has  been  found";  ©^  tanjt  ft(^ 
gut  Ijier,  "  It  is  good  dancing  here/' 

4.  The  reflexive  pronoun  of  the  first  or  second 
persons  is  the  same  as  the  personal.  For  the  third 
person  it  is  ftd^  (dative  or  accusative),  and  the  same 
for  both  numbers  and  all  genders. 

5.  Although  the  verb  proper  presents  no  new 
forms  in  the  reflexive  use,  the  combined  phrase  is  so 
un-English  that  the  student  should  memorize  and 
recite  the  paradigm,  of  which  a  synopsis  follows. 

6.  Conjugation  of  ftt^  freucit,  *'  to  rejoice,"  in  the 
Indicative  Mood. 

PRINCIPAIi  PARTS. 

ficJj  fteuen,  freute  fi^,  fic^  geftcut* 

Present. 
idj  f teuc  mxd)f  I  rejoice,  Xm  freuCtt  Utt)3,  -we  rejoice. 

is)X  frCUft  bi^,  thou  rejoicest,  x\c  ftCUt  t\\^,  ye  rejoice. 

8iC  frCUetl  fic^,  you  rejoice.  (5ic  frCttCtt  flc^,  you  rejoice. 

cr  frCttt  fid),  he  rejoices.  ftC  ftCUCtt  fi(i^,  they  rejoice. 

Preterit. 

\^  f rente  mii^,  /  rejoiced. 

Perfect, 
trff  ^aBe  mi^  gefreut,  I  have  rejoiced. 

Pluperfect, 
ic^  %^iit  VXi^  gefrCttt,  I  had  rejoiced. 


Les.  XXIV.]  IMPERSONAL   VERBS.  l8l 

Future. 

x^  ttierbc  mi^  frcucn,  /  s/iaii  rejoice. 

Future  Perfect. 
i(^  ttjerbC  mit^  gcf rCUt  ^a^ett,  /  shall  have  rejoiced. 

Imperative. 

frcttc  (btt)  birij,  rejoice  {thou)  frcut  (i^r)  euti^,  r^/'^/V^  (ji/^). 

Infinitives. 

PRESENT. 

fir^  frCUCn,  ^^  rejoice. 

PERFECT. 

fi^  gCfreut  ^abeit,  to  have  rejoiced. 
Participles. 

PRESENT. 

fi(^  freUCttb,  rejoicing. 

PAST. 

fi^  gefrCttt  (only  in  compound  tenses). 

Impersonal  Verbs. 

7.  An  Impersonal  Verb  is  one  which  represents 
an  action  as  taking  place  without  reference  to  any 
definite  subject :  as,  e§  regnet,  it  rains. 

8.  Proper  Impersonals  are  chiefly  those  which  re- 
present the  operations  of  nature :  as,  e^  regnet,  "  it 
rains";  e^  {)agelt,  *'it  hails";  e^  bli|t,  "it  lightens." 

9-  Those  verbs  are  also  called  impersorials,  which 
are  used  in  a  manner  resembling  the  oroper  im- 
personals:  as,  trie  ge^t  e^,  "how  goes  it.?  '  e^  biirftet 
mid),  *'I  am  thirsty";  c^3  gclingt  mir,  btcfe^  ju  tun, 


l82 


REFLEXIVE    VERBS. 


[Les.    XXIV. 


''I  am  successful  in  doing  this";  c^  fragt  fid),    "it 
is  a  question." 

10.  The  impersonal,  like  the  reflexive  verb,  is 
much  more  common  in  German  than  in  English. 

11.  It  is  to  be  noted  that,  as  with  the  reflexive  so 
with  the  impersonal  verbs,  there  is  no  new  mode 
of  inflection  of  the  verb  proper. 


Vocabulary. 


FEMININE. 

btC  D'icifc,  the  journey. 

bte  Sttfi^Wf^  ^^^  draught  of  air. 

bic  ^(einigfelt,  the  trijie. 

S\^   fitrri^tett,     be    afraid   {of) 

ttltC    gc^t    t^f    (how    goes   it), 

how  are  you  ? 
pfammCtt,  together, 
tlOtig,  previous. 
beutUcft,  clear. 

mitfirittgen,  bring  with,  along. 
t§  ticrftel)t  \id)  (it  understands 

itself),  of  course. 

wa^r^aftig,  in  fact. 

ftar!,  sever e{ly). 
gcgcuiibcr,    opposite   (after   its 
object). 

Note  32.  —  Many  reflexives  are  followed  by  a  genitive  in 
German,  where  the  corresponding  English  construction  has  the 
objective  case.  (Sr  erinnert  fid)  jebeS  2Borte§,  "He  remembers 
(is  mindful  of)  every  word."  ^6)  ei'bamie  Hiic^  feine^  (Steuben, 
"  I  pity  his  misery." 


fiefottbcr)^,  especially. 

ttttt  mctUCtnjiWeu,  (on  account 

of  me)/^r  7?iy  sake. 
um   mCtttCtttJCgeU,  on    my    ac- 
count. 

fici^  txVaiitXXf  take  cold. 
ftC^  crtunern,  remember. 
S\^  ^cfinbeil  (find  one's 

self),  do,  be. 
ftC^     ficmu'^CU,     (exert 
one's  self),  take  pains, 
put  one^s  self  out. 
ftr^  fc^Ctl,  take  a  seat. 
fid)    Ittttev^^al'tCtt,     con- 
verse. 
fid)  er^cBeu,  recover. 
fid)  fii^leii,  feel. 
fif^  ^iitcn,  take  care. 


(^ 


Les.  XXIV.]  IMPERSONAL    VERBS.  1 83 

Impersonal  Verbs. 
C^  baucrt,  it  lasts.  t§  fr^nctt,  it  snows. 

t§  Blrift,  it  blows.  t§  frcut  mid),  I  am  glad. 

c§  boniiert,  it  thufiders.  t^  Uegt  mx  ntrfjt^  barau,  / 

C)^  6U^t,  it  lightens.  do  not  care  for  it. 

t§  ttlttttbcrt  mir^l,  /  wonder.  (tcfi  fcilt,  pUase  (impersonal). 

t^  rcgnet,  it  rains. 

e§  fri^abet   ntr^t  or  \\\^i^  (it      ^crrllti^,  splendid. 

harms  not),  it  is  no  matter,  UeB  l^abeu^  like. 

e^  gcf  attt,  it  pleases. 

Exercise  XXIV. 

I.  6^  regnet  nid)t  immer,  \mmx  e^  bli^t  unb  bonnert 
2.  (£«^  blt|t  faft  ntemafe,  tt)erin  e<?^  fc^neit.  3.  Sc^  !ann 
mid^  nic^t  erinnern,  (Sd}nee  unb  93U^  jufammen  gefe{)en 
5U  t)akn.  4.  Srtnnern  @ie  fid)  art  ben  gro^en  ©djnee 
t)om  t)origen  3Binter?  5.  Sd}  erinnere  mid)  ganj  beut^ 
lid^  baran.  6.  9Jcein  83ruber  unb  id)  befanben  un§  auf 
ber  ^  9fJei[e.  7.  ^JJ^ein  Sruber  bejonbetig  befanb  [id)  nid)t 
fe^r  tt)o{)l  8.  ®a  erfiiltet  man  fid)  t)iel  Ieid)ter.  9.  @r 
^at  ft(^  tt)a£)r^aftig  ftarf  erialtet.  10.  ©^  bauerte  jlDci 
SJfonate,  bi^  er  [ic^  erl)oIt  I)atte.  n.  @^  fd^abet  nid)t^, 
tt)enn  man  [id)  n)oI)(  fiil)lt.  12.  (£§  ttjunbert  mid)  nid)t, 
ba^  @ie  [id)  an  bie  9iei[c  erinnern.  13.  3Bie  be[inben 
(Sie  [ic^  I)cutc  ?  14.  SBoden  @ie  [ic^  nid)t  lieber  ^ier  oxx^ 
ber  S^^fllwf^  [el3en?  15.  Semii^en  ®ie  [id)  nid)t  um 
meinetmegen.  16.  @^  gefdllt  mir  be[[er  tt)o  id)  bin,  unb 
ic^  be[inbe  mid)  jiemlid)  \odi)t  17.  @^  [rent  mt(^,  ha^ 
ju  t)oren. 

^  Tr.  '  a.' 


184  IMPERSONAL   VERBS.  [Les.  XXIV. 

Exercise  24. 

1.  It  is  no  longer  raining ;  it  is  beginning  to  snow. 
2.  I  am  not  surprised  at  all.  3.  The  wind  has  ^ 
been  I  blowing^  all^  day  from  the  north.  4.  We 
must  take  care  not  to  catch  cold.  5.  Do  you  catch 
cold  easily.?  6.  Not  when  I  am  quite  well.  7.  Well, 
how  are  you  to-day.?  8.  I  am  glad  to  say,  I  feel 
quite  well.  9.  Then  you  have  recovered  from  the 
severe  cold  ?     10.  In  fact  I  had  taken  a  severe  cold. 

11.  How  does  it   come  that   you  remember  that.? 

12.  I  am  pleased  that  you  remember  such  a  trifle. 

13.  You  were   on  the  train   when  you  took  cold. 

14.  I  took-a-seat  opposite  you.  15.  O  yes,  I  re- 
member you  now  very  well  .3  16.  I  recovered  very 
rapidly,  of  course.  17.  May  I  close  the  window  for 
you.?  18.  Please  do  not  put  yourself  out  on  my 
account.  19.  Then  will  you  not  take  a  seat  here 
on  this  side .?     20.  I  do  not  care  for  it,  thank  you. 

^  Present  tense  with  fd^on.     ^  ben  gattjert     3  gut 

Vocabulary  for  the  Conversation. 
htX  5(ttgettBltff,  f/ie  moment.  letbcf,     unfortunately^     I   am 

bic  S95ct(C,  the  while,  time.  sorry  to  say. 

frf|iJttCtt    ^anl,    many    thanks       IJcr^Ud),  cordially,  greatly. 

(lit.  '  fair  thanks ').  !^uffcntU(ift,  I  hope. 

Conversation   23. — (Scfunbl^eit  unb  XOtiitx. 

I.  28ie  befinben  @ie  [tc^  f)eute  inorgen  ? 

2.  ©d^onen  5Dan!,  ic^  befinbe  micf)  stemlid^  tt)oy. 
I.  §at  e^  bei  Sf)nen  in  ber  9?ad)t  geregnet? 

?.  ®g  l^at  nid^t  geregnet,  aber  ein  bi^c|)en  gebonnert. 


Les.  XXIV.]  IMPERSONAL   VERBS.  l8S 

.  giirdjten  @ie  fid)  Dor  bem  S5onner  ? 

2.  ^i)  nein,  ic^  fiird^te  mid^  gar  nid^t  bai:)or. 
.  SBie  befinbet  [ic^  Sf)r  §err  Skater? 

2.  ®er  SSater  befinbet  fic^  leiber  nid;!  fe^r  tDof^L 
.  ©rinnern  ©ie  fic^  an  meine  f (eine  ©d)tx)efter  ? 

2.  3<^  erinnere  tnid^  i()rer  gan^  gut. 
.  aSiirbe  e^  S^ren  §errn  SSater  freiien,  fie  ju  f e^en  ? 

2.  3^^^^^'/  ^^  tDiirbe  il^n  getDi^  ^er^lid^  freuen. 
.  SSenn  e§  Si)nen  gefaEt,  fo  will  id)  fie  mitbringen. 

2.  2)a§  tt)urbe  mir  fe^r  lieb  fein,  aber  ©ie  biirfen  \xi) 
ntc^t  ju  fe{)r  bemiif^en. 
.  3^  meinte,  er  fonitte  fic^  eine  SBeile  ntit  il)r  unter^ 
I)alten. 

2.  SlKerbingg,  er  unterf^dlt  fid^  gem  mit  ^inbern. 

.  SBann  tnirb  er  fic^  er^oten,  meinen  @ie  ? 

2.  §offentltd^  tt)irb  er  fic^  balb  er^olt  \)ab^n. 
.  SBoIIen  @ie  fid)  nid)t  einen  91ugenblid  fel^eit  ? 

2.  S^  banfe,  td^  barf  mid^  je^t  nic^t  fe^en. 
u.  f.  W. 

Reading  24. 

Enjoy 
S3on  gJlarttn  Uftert. 

greut  eud)  be^  Seben^,  tDeil  nod)  ha§>  flampd^en  glii^t, 

while  lamp        burns 

^Pfliidet  bte  9tofe,  e|'  [ie  berblii^t. 

pluck  fades. 

5D?an  fd)afft  fo  gern  fid)  ©org'  unb  Tlixlf. 

seeks        (for)  himself  care  pains 


1 86  ORDER   OF    GERMAN   SENTENCE.      [Les.  XXV 

@ud^t  Somen  an^  unb  finbet  fie, 

thorns 

Unb  Id^t  ba§>  9?ei(d)en  unbemerft, 

violet        unnoticed 

^a^  un^  am  9Bcge  biiiijt 

(Repeat  first  two  lines  as  chorus). 

SBenn  fi^eit  bie  ©d^opfung  fid)  t)erpEt 

shyly  creation  hides 

Unb  lant  ber  Sonner  ob  nn^o  (iriiUt, 

above         bellows 

@o  lad^t  am  Stbenb  nadj  bcm  ©turm 

S)te  ©onne  nn^  fo  fdjiin. 
grent  end;  be^  2e6en^3,  n.  f.  w, 

SBer  9iebltd^feit  nnb  2!reue  ixbi, 

honesty  loyalty  practices. 

Unb  gern  bem  armern  95rnber  gibt, 
Sei  bem  baut  fic^  ^^f^'i^^^i^^^it 

builds  for  herself  content 

@D  gern  tf)-r  ^iittd^en  an. 

cottage 

great  trnS)  be^  Seben^,  u.  f.  to. 

LESSON     XXV. 

Order  of  the  German  Sentence. 
I.  TAe  question  for  the  student  to  ask  himself  in 
constructing  a  Gej^mafi  sentence  is  not :  Might  I 
noty  or  might  not  a  German^  possibly  say  thus  and 
so  ?  but :  What  is  the  normal,  average  German  way 
of  saying  this  ? 


Les.  XXV.]     ORDER  OF  GERMAN   SENTENCE.  1 8/ 

2.  2)ai§  t)on  S^ncii  bcftctttc  SButi^  ift,  cinigc  £cfc* 
Hiurctt  au^gcttommcH,  geftcrn  in  gutcr  Orbnuitg  auf 
ber  SBiBItot^cf  angefommcn. 

3.  Learn  this  sentence ;  observe  the  position  of 
participles  relative  to  words  modifying  them,  also  of 
the  various  elements  of  the  predicate. 

4.  Every  German  sentence  follows  one  of  three 
orders,  depending  on  the  position  of  the  personal 
verb,  and  accordingly  designated  as  Normal,  In- 
verted, or  Transposed. 

5.  The  Normal  order  seems  to  English  people 
the  natural  one :  the  subject  first,  immediately  fol- 
lowed by  the  verb.  (£r  jdjidt  mir  ha^  93uc^,  "He 
sends  me  the  book.*' 

6.  In  the  Inverted  order,  the  personal  verb  stands 
before  'the  subject :  ©d^idt  er  mir  \^0i^  93uc^  ?  "  Does 
he  send  me  the  book.'^" 

7.  In  the  Transposed  order,  the  personal  verb  is 
transposed  to  the  end  of  the  clause :  3Senn  er  mir 
ba§  Su(^  fd^tdt,  **If  he  sends  me  the  book.'* 

8.  German  and  English  do  not  differ  greatly  in 
the  first  two  cases  if  we  regard  only  the  position  of 
the  personal  verb.  Only,  in  English,  the  progres- 
sive and  the  emphatic  forms,  separating  a  verb  into 
auxiliary  and  participle  or  infinitive,  make  the  differ- 
ence seem  greater  at  first  sight. 


1 88  ORDER   OF    GERMAN   SENTENCE.      [Les.   XXV' 

I.     Normal  Order. 

9.  The  Normal  order  is  that  observed  in  the 
principal  clause  of  declarative  sentences,  the  only 
exceptions  being  cases  i  and  5  of  the  Inverted  order. 

10.  The  following  is  the  order  of  the  main 
elements  in  the  Normal  sentence  :  — 

1.  The  subject. 

2.  Simple  predicate,  or  personal  (inflected)  verb. 

3.  Modifying  adjuncts  of  the  verb,  if  any. 

4.  Non-personal  part  of  the  verb,  if  any;  and,  if 
both  are  present,  in  this  order :  participle,  infinitive. 

@r  fc^icft  inir  ha^  ^nd)^  "He  sends  me  the  book.'' 
9Kein  greunb  tDirb  mir  ha§>  Sud)  bath  nac^  ^^cuife 

juriidgefcl)tcft  ijobm,  "My  friend  will  soon  have  sent 

the  book  back  home  to  me." 

11.  The  Normal  order  is  observed  after  the  gen- 
eral connectives :  unb,  aber,  alletn,  fonbern,  betfn,  ober, 
and  sometimes  enttreber. 

II.    Order  of  Minor  Elements. 

12.  The  arrangement  of  the  elements  of  the  Ger- 
man sentence  is  based  upon  the  feeling  that  t/ie 
extremities  of  the  clause  are  the  important  positions ^ 
receiving  the  natural  emphasis^  with  the  balance  in 
favor  of  the  latter  end. 

I.  On  this  ground  the  verb-stem  in  compound 
tenses  takes  its  place  at  the  end  of  the  clause,  while 
the  subject  stands  at  the  beginning. 


Les.   XXV.]      ORDER   OF   GERMAN   SENTENCE.  1 89 

2.  On  the  same  principle  any  modifier  of  the 
verb  that  is  to  receive  especial  emphasis  is  placed 
at  the  beginning  of  the  clause  (Inverted  order, 
case  I.) 

A  self-evident  corollary  of  this  rule  is,  that  not 
more  than  one  element  should  be  thus  placed. 

13.  In  general,  word-modifiers  of  the  subject 
precede  it  even  when  themselves  limited  by  phrases : 
„®in  Don  SSorurteilen  freier  Ttann/'  "A  man  free 
from  prejudices."  Phrases  and  clauses  follow,  as 
in  English;  „(Sin  'SJlann  au^  bem  9Sol!e/'  "A  man 
of  the  people."  „®in  Wann,  ber  tdg(id)  arbeitet/'  **A 
man  who  works  every  day." 

14.  No  true  predicate  elements  may  come  be- 
tween the  subject  and  the  personal  verb  in  the 
normal  order.  "I  always  ask,"  "He  often  waits," 
are:  „^^  frage  tmmer/'  „@r  Waxkt  oft.''  However, 
various  adversative  adverbial  conjunctions  may 
occupy  this  forbidden  position:  „@r  aber  !ommt 
nii^t,''  „@ie,  jeboc^,  ge^ert  Ijetm.'' 

i5»  The  principle  of  emphasis  toward  the  end 
seems  to  determine  the  order  of  the  elements  of 
the  predicate. 

1.  A  noun  is  more  important  than  a  personal 
pronoun  and  accordingly  always  follows. 

2.  An  indirect  object  usually  follows  a  direct 
object,  perhaps  because  more  important  (the  indirect 
object  is  commonly  a  person)  or  because  it  has  a 


190  ORDER   OF   GERMAN   SENTENCE.      [Les.  XXV 

closer  relation  to  the  verb.     This  is  especially  true 
if  both  objects  are  persons  or  both  things. 

It  applies  also  to  pronouns,  so  that:  3.  A  dis- 
syllable follows  a  monosyllable,  and  e^^  and  [tc^  pre- 
cede all  other  forms.  But  e^,  if  abbreviated  to  ^^, 
may  follow. 

4.  However,  the  principle  and  not  the  rule  deter-^ 
mines  the  position.  Whichever  of  two  objects  is 
to  be  emphasized  will  come  last.  Thus,  if  the 
question  be :  To  whom  did  he  introduce  my  brother  ? 
the  answer  will  be :  ,,®r  f)at  Stjren  Sruber  bem  2lb^ 
t)o!aten  t)orge[teIIt/'  But  if  the  question  be:  Whom 
did  he  introduce  to  the  lawyer.?  the  answer  is 
„@r  i)at  bem  5lbt)ofaten  Sf)ren  Sruber  t)orgefteI(t.'' 

5.  An  adverb  of  place  or  manner  seems  more 
important  than  one  of  time,  hence  the  latter  pre- 
cedes :  (£r  ^at  nitd^  geftern  bort  geje^en.  @r  ijat  mid) 
^eute  freunbM)  gegrii^t.  The  adverb  of  time  usually 
precedes  a  noun  object  while  an  adverb  of  place 
follows. 

6.  A  phrase  follows  a  single  word. 

16.  Any  word  when  especially  modifying  another 
stands  next  to  it,  usually  before.  ,,@r  i)at  metnen 
93ruber  nic^t  gefe^en^'  is  a  general  negative  of  the 
proposition ;  „(gr  i)at  nic^t  meinen  Siruber  ge[e{)en" 
makes  the  „md)V*  limit  especially  ^meinen  fflruber," 
as  though  anticipating  „|onbern  ben  Sfjtigen/' — **not 
my  brother  hut  j/ours,'* 


Les.  XXV.]      ORDER  OF   GERMAN   SENTENCE.  IQt 

17.  While  the  arrangement  of  the  elements  of 
the  predicate  between  personal  verb  and  participle 
or  infinitive  is  often  modified  by  other  considerations, 
as  those  of  euphony  and  the  personal  equation  of 
the  speaker,  the  above  rules  are  sound  and  safe  for 
the  student  to  follow. 

18.  At  the  end,  when  both  are  present,  the  in- 
finitive follows  the  past  participle. 

In  tl^is  case  in  a  subordinate  clause  the  personal  verb  often 
stands  just  before  the  two,  and  always  \i  there  are  two  infinitive 
forms  at  the  end ;  (Sr  fragte,  ob  x6)  ben  Widxm  tniirbc  gefe^eii  ^aben, 
or  „  .  . .  gefe^eti  Ipben  ti^iirbc."  But  „(gr  fragte,  ob  tc^  nirf)t  l)dtte 
ge^cn  foUen",  never  ,, . . .  ge^en  foUen  ptte." 

19.  In  independent  participial  constructions  the 
participle  follows  its  own  modifiers ;  95on  9Jeib  er- 
fitUt,  "Filled  with  envy,"  biefe^  jugegeben,  "this 
being  conceded,"  hm  2lrm  gef)o6en,  "lift  your 
arm.*' 

20.  In  the  matter  of  the  involution  of  clauses  the 
best  German  follows  the  rule :  Finish  each  clause 
before  beginning  another.  Of  course  this  does  not 
apply  to  relative  clauses.  In  this  rule,  an  infinitive 
phrase  with  „ju''  expressed  is  treated  as  a  clause. 

21.  Some  words  have  different  meanings  accord- 
ing to  their  position,  thus  alletn  mein  ©ruber,  "  but 
my  brother  ";  mein  93ruber  aHein, "  my  brother  alone." 
(Setbft,  \i)dn,  aud^,  ail  mean  'even'  when  they  precede 
another  element,  but  following  they  mean  respec- 
tively *  .  .  .  self,'  'already,'  'also'. 


192  ORDER  OF   GERMAN  SENTENCE.      [Les.  XXV. 

Vocabulary. 
ber  ^rafibent,  president.  etttne^mcit,  take,  derive  (from, 

blc  9)ZetWttttg,  opinion.  dative  case  in  German). 

bic  5ltt)§gabe,  expense.  brurf ett,  print. 

\At  Uttfoften,  expenses.  UmfUttft,  in  vain. 

'hXt   Scfcf^Ur,    (reading-trace),       Ibcftanbtg,  constantly. 

mark  of  wear.  futtbcttt,  but. 

5UrC(^tfummett,  get  alo7tg.  iii^^Cr,  hitherto. 

tJprf d^icgCtt,  le7td,  advance.  attC^  Jttf atttmettOCrCti^ttCt,  reck- 

iJCtfotgCtt,  supply,  oni7zg  all  together ^  taking  all 

in  all. 

Exercise  XXV. 

I.  ©in  neuer  ©tubent  ift  geftern  f)ter  angefommen. 
2.  @r  l^at  ntc^t  genug  ®elb  mitgebrac^t,  urn  ein  Sa^r  ju 
bletben.  3.  @r  aber  meint,  er  ^abe  fel)r  Did.  4.  Slber 
[eine  be[ten  greunbe  tDcrben  i^m  gelDi^  ®elb  Dorfdjie^en. 

5.  ®ein  cilterer  S3ruber  Ijat  it)n  bi)§I)er  mit  ®elb  Derforgt. 

6.  3lIIein  biefer  altere  93ruber  ti:)irb  tf)m  nidjt  t)tel  langer 
^elfen  !bnnen.  7.  ©ie  ^o^zxi  iDotjt  biefe  9Jfeinung  ber 
3eitung  entnommen?  8.  Seine  mir  befannte  3^i^i^^9 
\)oX  jemafe  feinen  9?amen  gebrncft.  9.  ?(lfi/,^  @ie  (jaben 
f)enle  nidu^o  iiber  il)n  ^  in  ber  3^it^tJ^9  gelefen  ?  10.  3d) 
I}abe  bie  B^^^^^S  umfon[t  nad)  feinem  Stamen  gelefen. 
II.  Um  anf  nnferen  ©tubenten  jnrudjnfommen  —  er  ift 
nic^t  nnr  arm,  fonbern  (xVii)  o^ne  grennbe.  12.  ©r  n)irb 
aber  red)t  balb  grennbe  gen)innen,  benn  er  ift  flei^ig  unb 
frennblid).  13.  Sc|  tnerbe  ben  ©tnbenten  morgen  friil) 
bem  ^raftbenten  Dorftellen.  14.  Unb  ic^  JDerbe  e^  tt)m 
nod)  3  (jente  abenb  beim  9lbenfebrot  fagen. 

^  If  alfo  is  followed  by  a  pause,  a  comma,  it  has  no  effect  on 
the  sentence  order,  but  if  the  connection  is  close  it  causes  inver- 


Les.  XXV.]       ORDER  OF   GERMAN  SENTENCE.  1 93 

sion.     2  the  phrase  iu  ber  3^ttling  might  quite  as  well  precede 
md)t8  iiber  i^n.    ^^ygt,'  or,  with  ^eute,  'this  very'. 

Exercise  25. 
I.  These  two  ^  students  have  just  come  back  from 
their  brother's  house.  2.  This  brother  is  not  very 
rich,  but  he  ^has  ^often  ^advanced  ^them  ^money. 
3.  He  will  not  be  able  to  do  that  much  longer,  for 
he  has  bought  a  newspaper.  4.  I  hear,  [the]  one 
of  those  boys  has  gained  many  friends  in  the  city. 
5.  Even  a  man  well-supplied-with-money  ^  cannot 
do  everything.  6.  You  might  introduce  the  younger 
student  to  the  president.  7.  I  shall  be  very  glad 
to  introduce  him  to  the  president,  as-well-as3  to 
other  friends  of  mine.  8.  And  you  might  have  lent 
the  elder  student  some  of  your  books.  9.  I  have 
already  lent  them  to  him.  10.  Reckoning  every- 
thing together,  they  will  be  able  to  remain  here  a 
year  more.  n.  Yes,  they  will  have  enough  money 
to  pay  all  necessary  expenses.  12.  They  both  read 
constantly  the  books  recommended-to-them. 4  13.  I 
believe  they  will  get  along  all  right. 

*  S^^i/  ^^  bciben.     ^  Tr.  both  as  adjective  phrase  before  Tlamx, 
and  as  relative  clause.     ^fott)ie.     '♦cf.  note2. 

Vocabulary  for  the  Conversation. 
Ht  ^Clegeit^ieit,  opportunity.  ttB^Olett,  come  for,  go  for, 

bic  S50Utfa^rt,  boat-trip.  Beftctten,  order. 

cine  Sootfa^rt  mat^en,  go  boat-     rubcrn,  rozv. 

ing.  tticit,  far. 

bic  ^artic',  trip.  meinetluegen^  for  all  I  care. 

ciiic  ^JSartie  mac^eu,  take  a  trip. 


94  ORDER  OF   GERMAN   SENTENCE.       [Les.  XXV. 

Conversation.  —  Die  Bootfal^rt. 

.  @te  tvoUm  Dielleidit  einen  ©pajiergmtg  madjtn? 

2.  3c^  tt)urbe  fe^r  gern  einen  ©^)a3tergang  maiden. 
.  S)er  SSeg  nadj  bem  glu^e  ift  St)nen  nidjt  ju  iDcit? 

2.  2lci^  nein,  ber  2Beg  bort^tn  ift  mir  gar  nic^t  tDeit. 
.  2Sir  fomiten  bann  eine  !leine  Sootfa^rt  madjen. 

2.  Sine  33ootfa{)rt  auf  bem  g^Iu^e  tt)dre  mir  gerabe  red^t. 
.  Qtvd  greunbe  t)on  mir  mi)djten  bie  ^artie  mit  un^ 
madjen. 

2.  SBarum  nid^t  ?  S^re  g^reunbe  lonnen  ba§  Soot  rubern 
f)elfen. 
.  ajceine  greunbe  !i3nnen  aber  ntc^t  fef)r  gut  rubern. 

2.  ©ie  {)aben  f)ier  eine  ©elegenf)eit,  rubern  ju  lernen. 
.  Slljo  ic^  foil  fie  einlaben,  mitjugefjen? 

2.  ©ie  foHen  meinettoegen,  alle  3^^'^  g^reunbe  einlaben. 
.  SBir  tDoUen  um  funf  U{)r  bereit  fein. 

2.  "^i)  h:)erbe  f(^on  t)Dr  fiinf  Uf)r  bereit  fein  lonnen. 
.  ®a^  fiir  uuso  befteKte  Soot  ift  erft  um  fiinf  Uf)r  ju 
f)aben. 

2.  ®a§  ift  mir  fd^on  red^t ;  alfo,  um  fiinf  Vi\)x  am  3^lu^e. 
.  Slber,  id)  ()oIe  ®ie  I)ier  um  f)a(b  fiinf  ak 

2.  ®ut,  unb  bann  f^olen  toir  bie  anbern  ab. 

Etc.,  etc. 

Reading  25. 
^er  SiittJe  mtb  ber  $afc» 

(Sin  2ott)e  toiirbigte'  einen  brotligten^  §afen  feiner 
nd^ern^  Sefanntf^aft.  „2(ber  ift  e^  benn  Wa^x/'  fragte 
i^n  einft  ber  §afe,  „ba^  eurf)  £ott)en  ein  elenber,  frd^enber 


Les.  XXVI.]       ORDER    OF    GERMAN    SENTENCE.         1 95 

§a^n  fo  teid^t  tjerjagen^  fann  ?"  „3lHerbing§  ^  i^t  e§  h)al^r/' 
anttDortete  ber  Sot^e,  „unb  e§  ift  eine  attgemeine  2lnmer!ung, 
ba^  ti:)ir  gro^en  Stiere  burd^gdngig^  eine  gett)iffe  Heine 
(Bd)Wa(i)l}^xt  an'^  vin§>  i)ai>m.  ©o  iDirft  bu,  §um  g^em^el/ 
t)on  bem  ©lef anten  ge^ort  f^aben,^  ba^  if)m '°  ba§  ©runjen 
eineg  ©c^meine^  ©d^auber  unb  ©ntfe^en  tx\vzdtJ'  ,Mai)x^ 
^aftig  ?^' "  unterbrad^  '^  i^n  ber  §afe.  „3a,  nun  begreif '  '^ 
id^  aud^,  Waxnm  tt)ir  §afen  un^'^  jo  entfe^Iid^  tior  ben 
§unben  furd^ten/' ''^  sefftng. 

'  deem  worthy  of,  favor  with.  ^  droll,  comical,  ^nearer,  inti- 
mate. ■*  chase  away,  put  to  flight.  ^  to  be  sure,  certainly.  ^  in 
general.  ^  in  ourselves.  ^  more  commonly,  jnm  ^eifpieL  ^  @0 
tDirft  bu  gel^ort  l)aben,  and  you  have  probably  heard.  ^°in  him. 
"do  you  mean  so?  ^^ unterbre'c^en.  "begretfe,  comprehend. 
**  fid^  fiirc^ten,  to  be  afraid. 

LESSON   XXVI. 

Order  of  the  German  Sentence. 
The  Inverted  Order. 

1.  The  inverted  07'der  diffei^s  from  English  in 
only  one  case,  A  relative  pronoun  is  never  omitted 
in  German, 

2.  2)a^  SButi^^  \sst\^t^  \i)  in  ber  ^anb  ^a6e^  ttiiirbe 
ttiir  Beffcr  gcfatten,  pttc  iri^  ben  SSerfaffer  nie  gefe^cn. 

3^  Learn  this  sentence;  note  the  position  of  the 
verb  in  each  of  its  three  clauses  together  with  the 
kind  and  pecuHarity  of  the  clause. 

4.  The  arrangement  in  the  Inverted  order  differs 
from  that  in  the  Normal  order  only  in  the  inversion 


196       ORDER    OF    GERMAN    SENTENCE.         [Les.   XXVI. 

of  the  subject  and  personal  part  of  the  verb.  It  is 
necessary  therefore  to  consider  only  when  and  for 
zvJiat purpose  such  inversion  takes  place. 

The  inverted  order  belongs  to  principal  clauses,  except  case  2 
below. 

5.  There  are  five  distinct  cases  where  the  In- 
verted order  is  required :  — 

1.  When  any  part  or  adjunct  of  the  predicate, 
comprising  often  a  subordinate  clause,  begins  the 
sentence.  Wvc  t)at  er  ba^  95u(^  gefi^tdt,  "He  has 
sent  the  book  to  me.'* 

2.  Often  in  conditional  clauses,  to  give  the  effect 
of  tt)enn  when  this  word  is  omitted.  @(f)idt  er  mir 
\>^^  Sud),  f 0  tut  er  tr)o{)I,  "  If  he  sends  me  the  book, 
he  does  well." 

3.  In  Interrogative  sentences.  §at  er  mir  ba^ 
93uc^  gefc^tdt  ?     "  Has  he  sent  me  the  book .?  '* 

4.  In  optative  or  imperative  sentences ;  that  is, 
when  a  command  or  desire  is  to  be  expressed, 
©djiden  ©ie  mir  ba^  S3u(^,  "  Send  me  the  book!" 

5 .  For  impressivefiess ;  to  express  surprise, 
usually  with  bo(^  or  |a.  §at  er  mir  boc^  "^o.^  33ud) 
gefd^idt,  "Why,  he  has  sent  me  the  book !" 

6.  The  co-ordinating  connectives  do  not  require 
inversion.  Nor  is  there  always  inversion  after  the 
adverbial  conjunctions,  as  aud},  bod),  baljer,  alfo. 


Les.   XXVI.]       ORDER  OF  GERMAN  SENTENCE.  1 97 

7.  It  will  be  noted  that  only  cases  i  and  5  differ 
from  English  usage,  while  even  i  has  many  paral- 
lels, as  in  "  Never  did  I  see  the  like." 

8.  In  the  Inverted  order  an  object  pronoun 
generally  precedes  a  noun  subject :  ®eftern  f)at  x\)n 
mein  ©ruber  gefel)en. 

The   Transposed   Order. 

9.  The  arrangement  in  the  Transposed  order 
differs  from  that  in  the  Normal  order  only  in  the 
transposition  of  the  personal  verb  to  the  end  of  the 
clause.  It  is  necessary,  therefore,  to  consider  only 
w/ien  such  transposition  is  required. 

10.  The  Transposed  order  is  observed  in  de- 
pe7ident  clauses,  introduced  by  the  conjunctions 
bamit,  ba^^  06,  etc.,  or  by  relatives, 

11.  The  following  examples  illustrate  the  Trans- 
posed order :  — 

1 .  Sd)  iDetfe,  ba^  er  mtr  ba^  93ud)  ge[rfjidt  f)at, '"  I 
know  that  he  has  sent  me  the  book." 

2.  2lte  er  mir  "^Oi^  93uc|  fdjidte,  "When  he  sent  me 
the  book." 

3.  J)a§  Sudj,  tueldje^  er  mir  juriidgefc^idt  ^(xi,  *'The 
book  which  he  has  sent  back  to  me." 

12.  The  conjunction  baf],  when  its  representative 
is  purely  formal  and  dispensable  in  English,  may  be 
omitted.  In  this  case  the  dependent  clause  has  the 
Normal  order;  ,,@r  fagt,  \>o5^  er  gemig  (jak,''  but  „Sr 
fagt,  er  f)abe  genug.'' 


198  ORDER  OF  GERMAN  SENTENCE.       [Les.   XXVI 

13 •  The  conjunction  tDenn  may  be  omitted ;  in 
this  case  the  dependent  clause  has  the  Inverted  order, 
as  in  Enghsh:  „aBare  er  ftarf,"  "Were  he  strong." 

14.  With  these  two  sole  exceptions  the  dependent 
clause  always  has  the  Transposed  order. 

Vocabulary. 

bcr  ^ttftJ^iikr,  fdlow-pupil.  bebcnfctt,  consider. 

ber  ^^U^f,  pot.  beffcrn,  improve,  better, 

bte  ^(affc,  class,  ticrttat^loffigeit,  neglect. 

bic  SJurftcttuttg,  introduction.  ticrftfittbtg,  sensible. 

bic    S3e!atttttfc^aft,    acquain-  iiBcl  nc^meit,  take  amiss. 

tance.  ijffCtt,  open. 

"^^^  ^ttiftcrtt,  crackliftg.  gcrabc  aVi^f  point  blank. 

anberit,  change^  alter,  oBtQOl^l',  although. 

Exercise  XXVI. 

I.  ^onnen  ©te  \\6)  je^t  erinnern,  trie  \>a^  SKabdjer 
mil  ber  iDci^en  50?%  ^ei^t?  2.  S)a§  fann  id}  leibei 
ni(^t,  obtt)ol}I  i^  fie  oft  gefdjen  t)abe.  3-  ^orgeftern  fa^ 
fie  neben  mir  in  ber  St'taffe.  4.  S)a  ^  fatten  @te  i^ren 
?famen  boi^  Don  il)rem  Suc^e  lefen  follen.  5.  Ciefe  fie 
i^r  95ucf)  bo(^  ^  gar  ntd)t  offen  liegen !  6.  §atte  id)  ein^^ 
mat  eine  foldje  ®elegent)eit,  fo  tDiirbe  id)  fie  gerabe  au^ 
urn  i'^ren  91amen  bitten.  7.  @e|en  @ie  fid^  alfo  f)eute 
neben  fie.  8.  S(^  meine,  ha^  ajfitfc^nter  nnb  9Kitfd^n=^ 
terinnen  bod^  !eine  ^orfteUung  brani^en.  9.  Slber  tnasB 
foU  ic^  mad)en,  tDenn  fie  e^  iibel  nimmt?  10.  S)a^  toirb 
fie  fid)er  nid^t,  benn  fie  fd)eint  rec^t  Derftdnbig  jn  fein. 
II.  S^r  ^ater,  it)e(d)er  t)or  einigen  Sagen  I)ier  toar,  ()cttte 


Les.   XXVI.]       ORDER    OF    GERMAN    SENTENCE.         1 99 

fie  bod)  ben  anbern  Sdjiilern  borftellen  [oKeit.  12.  ^at 
fie  tf)r  3?ater  benn  niemanb  tiorgeftefit?  13.  Scl)  gtaube, 
er  ijat  ia§>  ganj  Hernac^ldffigt.  14.  |)atte  ber  $)?ann  e^ 
bod^  ni(^t  Dergeffen!  15.  ©etinbert  faun  e^  boc^  je|t 
m(f)t  tDerben.  16.  SBer  3  ttwa^^  fo  lange  kben!t,  roirb  am 
@nbe  nic^t^  tun.  17.  3c^  tvd^  ha^  ic^  e^  ntc^t  ^atte 
6effern  !onnen. 

^  Then.  '^ '  Why,'  or  *  well/  at  beginning.  ^  *  Whoever,'  or 
*  one  who.* 

Exercise  26. 

I.  Would  you  not  like  to  make  the  acquaintance 
of  that  girl?  2.  Is  she  the  girl  who  wears  the  blue 
hat  and  laughs  so  loud  ?  3.  A  blue  hat  she  certainly 
has,  but  whether  she  laughs  loud  I  do  not  know. 

4.  Even  if  she  does,  you  need  not  be  afraid  of  her. 

5.  As  I  I  came  into  the  room  this  morning  J.  ^heard 
3  a  ^girl  glaugh.  6.  ^To-me  3it  ^sounded  like  the 
crackling  of  thorns  under  a  pot.  7.  That  was  cer- 
tainly not  this  girl,  although  she  laughs  a-great-deal.^ 
8.  Introduce  me  to  the  girl  anyway. 3  9.  Were  I 
only  sure  of  her  name !  10.  Why,4  he  has  actually 
forgotten  her  name!  n.  No,  that  I  certainly  have 
not,  but  pronounce  it  I  cannot.  12.  You  say  you 
know  her  name,  and  yet  you  cannot  speak  it.? 
13.  One  cannot  always  pronounce  everything  that 
one  can  read.  14.  Then  5  do  not  try  to  introduce 
me  to  her. 

^3(t«  or  tt)ie.  ^Die(,  rcd)t  ttiel  ^j^od^  or  o]^nct)iu.  -^Express 
by  inversion,  with  bod}.     ^  Wo,  after  verb. 


200  ORDER  OF  GERMAN  SENTENCE.       [Les.   XXVI. 

Vocabulary  for  the  Conversation. 

ber  <B^ahttt,  harm.  rateit,  advise. 

bcr  3^tttJCtluft,  waste  of  time.         tierlattgett,  desire. 

bcr  23a«b,  volume.  ift    S^itett  —  geftiUig,    would 

"^Xt  ^efc^ir^tC,  history.  you,  like  (salesman's  phrase)? 

bic  ^OtC,  ^^^^  (in  music).  c§  tft  mtr  rer^t,  //  suits  me. 

btC  9^0tCtt,  w^/^J,  music.  ft^ribltd^,  harmful. 

'^^^  ©ebtti^t,  poe7n.  Cbeit  niti^t,  «^^  exactly. 

aurici^ten,  ^^^j  ^«//j^.  etttia,  perchance. 

Conversation  25.  —  Per   £efeftoff» 

I.  SSa^  fiir  em  Su(^  t)eriangen  @ie  gu  fef)en? 

2.  3Bag  fiir  Su(i)er  [)aben  ©ie  benn  I^ier? 
I.  S[t  S()nen  t)te][Iei(^t  ein  Stoman  gefalltg? 

2.  9Kir  iDdre  ein  guter  9{oman  (^^^Xii  red^t. 
I.  8iat  Sf)r  §err  SSater,  ba^  @ie  SRomane  tefeit  [oKen? 

2.  3letn,  ber  3Sater  rdt,  ba^  id^  gar  leine  9?omane  tefe. 
I.  ®tau6t  S^r  §err  Skater,  ba^  bie  9fiomane  fd^ablid) 
f  eten  ? 

2.  @r  glaubt  eben  nic^t,  ba^  fie  t)iel  ©c^aben  anric^ten. 
I.  3Ba§  ^at  er  benn  gegen  fie,  ttjenn  td^  fragen  barf? 

2.  @r  finbet,  ba^  bag  Sefen  ber  Slomane  ein  g^ituerluft 
fei. 

I.  Sllfo  iDoIIen  ©te  etoa  ©ebtd^te  ober  ®ef(^i(i)te? 

2.  3^  tt)oHte  lieber  ©ebid^te,  it)e(cf)e  man  fingen  !ann. 
I.  SBcire  tc^  ^w  3t)rer  ©tette,  fo  iDiirbe  id)  |)eine'^  „93uc^ 
ber  Sieber''  faufen. 
2.  9laten   ©ie  tpirflic^  baju,   fo  laufe  id^  ben  erften  ^ 
a3anb. 


Les.   XXVII.]  THE    INFINITIVE.  20I 

I.  ©oil  id)  ntd)t  and)  @d)u6ert'^  Sieber  fiirSie  beftellen, 
bamit  @ie  bie  9coten  bajii  t)aben  ? 
2.  S^/  befteHen  ©ie  mir  gefdiligft  ©c^ubert'g  Sieber. 

Etc.,  etc. 

Reading  26. 
^cr  (Star. 

Ser  alte  ^ciger  SRori^  f)atte  in  jeiner  ©tube  einen  abge^ 
ric^teten '  ©tar,  ber  einige  SBorte  f^^rec^en  fonnte.  2Benn 
5.  S.""  ber  S^S^^^i^f  ♦  „©tdr(ein,  Wo  bift  bu?''  jo  fdfjrie  ber 
©tar  attemal :  ,,®a  bin  ic^." 

®e§  3Ja(^bar^  fleiner  ^arl  f)atte  an  bem  SSogel  eine  ganj 
befonbere  g^reube  unb  mad)te  bemfelben  ofter^  einen  93eju(f). 
211^  ^arl  mieber  einmal  ^infam,  tDar  ber  ^dger  (^hm^ 
mi)t  in  ber  ©tube,  ^arl  fing  gefd^tuinb^  ben  33ogeI,  fted'te 
i^n  in  bie  STafc^e  unb  toollte  bamit  fortfd^Ieid^en.^ 

Sllein  in  tbm^  bem^  2lugenb[ic!e  tarn  ber  ^dger  ^ur 
2^ur  l^erein.  @r  ba(f)te  bem  ^naben  eine  g^reube  gu  mac^en 
unb  rief  ime  gett)obnUd^  :  „©tdrlein,  tx)o  bift  bu?''^unb 
ber  SSogel  in  ber  Sraf(f)e  be§  ^haben  fd^rie,  fo  laut  er 
fonnte :  „®a  bin  ic^  !''  e^r.  b.  sc^mib. 

drained.  ^  jum  33eif|)tet,  for  instance.  ^  just  then.  *  quickly. 
^  slip  away.     ^  that  very. 

LESSON   XXVII. 

The  Infinitive. 

I.  T/ie  verbal  infifiitive  always  stands  after  its 
modifiers  ;  511  is  tcsed  or  not  used  almost  precisely  as 
to  in  English, 


202  THE    INFINITIVE.  [Les.  XXVIL 

2.  aWeht  55rcunb  luiinfri^t,  ia^  ^nti)  ju  faufen^  urn 
fcincm  SBrubcr  jutiorsufommen^  benn  bicfcr  f|3r^t  anif) 

anticipate. 

ha\}on,  t^  5u  faufcn. 

3*  Learn  this  sentence ;  note  the  position  of  the 
infinitives,  the  words  on  which  they  are  dependent, 
and  the  use  of  ju. 

4«  The  infinitive  is  used  more  in  German  than  in 
Enghsh,  since  it  corresponds  to  the  entire  scope  of 
the  Enghsh  infinitive  and  in  part  to  that  of  the  par- 
ticiple. 

Verbal   Infinitive.     I.    With  gu* 

5«  The  infinitive  is  used  with  ju  in  German  on 
the  whole  where  *to'  is  used  in  Enghsh,  i.  e.,  as 
a.  complement  of  most  verbs  (of  those  not  specified 
in  the  next  section);  d.  of  nouns;  c.  adjectives;  d. 
the  adverbs  ju,  too,  and  genug ;  and,  e.  of  the  prepo- 
sitions 'oI)ne/  *um*  and  *an[tatt' :  @r  ^offte  mtcJ)  ju 
fef)en;  bie  §offnung  mic^  ju  fe^cn;  er  tDar  begierig 
mic^  ju  fe^en ;  er  font  ju  fpdt  (urn)  midj  ju  fe£)en ;  er 
gtng,  oljiie  mic^  ju  fef)en.  It  will  be  noticed  that  the 
English  uses  the  participle  in  some  of  these  cases. 

6.  After  other  prepositions  than  the  three  named 
the  German  uses  the  infinitive  phrase,  but  in  appo- 
sition with  an  anticipating  pronoun  (a  ha-  com- 
pound), as  (£r  bac^te  baran,  m\6)  einjulaben,  "He 
thought  of  inviting  me"  (lit.  He  thought  thereof, 


Les.   XXVII.]  THE    INFINITIVE.  2O3 

or,  of  it,  to  invite  me),  or,  the  ha-  compound  may  be 
followed  by  a  clause  as  (Sr  ^offtc  babitrd)  reicf)  ju  l^er^ 
ben,  ba^  er  ein  93uc^  [cf)rie6,  "  He  hoped  to  become 
rich  by  writing  a  book." 

7.  In  all  the  preceding  cases  the  infinitive  may 
have  any  variety  of  objects  and  adverbial  modifiers, 
but  not  a  subject  other  than  the  subject  of  the 
governing  word,  while  the  English  may  express  such 
a  subject,  usually  as  a  genitive.  All  phrases  of  the 
latter  sort  must  in  German  be  turned  into  clauses, 
as  "The  hope  of  my  coming,"  ®ie  §offnung,  baf3  id) 
fommen  tt)erbe;  "He  was  eager  for  me  to  see  you," 
@r  iDar  begiertg,  ba^  id)  ®ie  fel)e ;  "  He  thought  of  my 
inviting  you,"  ®r  bad^te  baran,  ba^  tc^  ®te  etnlaben 
iDerbe  (or  fonnte) ;  etc.  However,  if  the  verb  be  one 
that  takes  a  double  accusative,  or  supplementary 
objective,  the  infinitive  may  in  this  case  have  a  sub- 
ject, as  (£r  bat  mid),  ©ie  einjulaben,  "  He  asked  me 
to  invite  you." 

8.  The  infinitive  with  ju,  and  generally  preceded 
by  urn,  *in  order,'  is  used  in  adverbial  phrases  to 
express  purpose  or  result.  (£r  fam,  urn  ju  fragcn,  ob 
id)  gef)e,  "He  came  ta  ask  whether  I  was  going"  ; 
®r  tarn,  urn  ju  crfa^ren,  bafs  id)  )d)on  fort  fei,  "  He 
came,  only  to  learn  that  I  was  already  gone." 

9.  The  infinitive  with  ju  may  also  be  used  as  sub- 
ject of  a  sentence  under  the  same  limitations  as  in 
7.     W\d)  je^t  ju  [ef)en,  tt)dre  iinmbglic^  for  the  more 


204  THE    INFINITIVE.  [Les.  XXVII. 

common,  S^  lt)are  immoglidj,  mid)  je^t  511  fe^en.  But 
"For  him  to  go  now  would  be  absurd,"  is  to  be 
rendered  baf^  er  je^t  gtnge,  tt)are  ladjerlid). 

10.  After  Ijabert;  9Ba§  ^a[t  bu  ju  tun;  after  fetn 
with  passive  sense:  SSa^  ift  gu  tun?  "What  is  to  be 
done  ? " 

11.  In  syntax  the  infinitive  phrase  with  ju  is 
treated  as  a  clause  and  is  set  off  by  a  comma,  no 
matter  how  close  the  connection  in  sense. 

II.    Without  p, 

12.  As  complement  of  iDcrben,  the  modal  auxilia- 
ries, and  fef)en,  Iioren,  fii^ten,  t)ei^en,  mad)en,  t)e(fen, 
(affen,  leljten  and  lerncn,  the  infinitive  without  ju  is 
used  in  German  as  in  English  without  *to.'  The 
nine  verbs  named  take  an  accusative  object  of  the 
person,  which  is  at  the  same  time  the  subject  of  the 
infinitive.  Sc^  l)6rte  iijn  ftngen,  er  te^rte  mic^  [tngen, 
etc.  The  use  of  the  present  participle  of  the  gov- 
erned verb  in  English,  "  I  heard  him  singing,"  does 
not  change  the  meaning  as  a  rule,  and  the  German 
represents  it  by  the  infinitive. 

13.  The  infinitive  without  ju  may  be  used  as  sub- 
ject of  a  sentence  under  the  same  restrictions  as 
with  ju.  The  form  without  ju  is  more  suited  to 
poetry  and  proverbs.  Thus,  @etn,  ober  nidjt  fetn, 
"To  be,  or  not  to  be" ;  Seiern  ift  beffer  aU  feiern,  "It 
is  better  to  fiddle  than  to  be  idle/' 


Les.  XXVIL]  THE    INFINITIVE.  205 

14.  After  ge^en,  with  jagen,  rciten,  faf)ren,  fpajieren, 
fd^Iafen,  etc.,  '*to  go  hunting,  riding,"  etc.,  and  after 
bletben,  finben,  and  rarely  a  few  other  verbs  with 
ftet)en,  [t^en,  etc.,  to  express  condition,  where  EngHsh 
uses  the  present  participle,  33(cit)en  ©ic  [ii^cn,  ''Re- 
main sitting,"  ''  Keep  your  seat " ;  Sd)  fanb  iljn  fc{)Ia' 
fen,  ''  I  found  him  sleeping." 

15-  In  exclamations,  Setjt  giirucfgel)en !  "Go  back 
now! "  and  as  substitute  for  the  imperative  in  signs 
and  official  orders,  Sfitdjt  anritljreit,  ''Do  not  touch" 
("Hands  off").  Stn[tetgen!  Um[teigcn!  9(uioftetgen ! 
(Get  in)  "All  aboard,"  (Get  over)  "Change  cars," 
"Get  out"  (at  end  of  trip). 

16.  After  laffen  frequently,  and  always  after  fid) 
laffeit.  the  governed  verb  has  passive  sense,  (£r  Itef^ 
ben  S!na6en  rufen,  "  He  had  the  boy  called,"  S)a§  Iaf3t 
fid)  benfen  (lit.  That  lets  itself  be  thought),  "That 
can  be  imagined." 

III.     The   Substantive   Infinitive. 

17.  As  substantive  the  infinitive  is  used  much  as 
the  present  participle  in  English  is  used.  It  is 
capitalized,  is  declined  as  a  neuter  noun  and  is 
limited  by  adjectives  and  genitives  of  nouns.  In 
this  way  either  a  subject  or  an  object  may  be  ex- 
pressed, but  not  both.  2)a§  ©ingen  btefer  Sieber, 
ba^  fd)(ed}te  Stngen  bie[e^  SJfanne^o;  but  scarcely 
©iefe^  9Wannc^  ©ingen  biefer  £ieber,  though  thi^^  is 


206  THE    INFINITIVE.  [Les.  XXVII. 

not  impossible.  Of  course  this  substantive  infini- 
tive may  occur  in  any  relation :  subject,  object,  or 
object  of  a  preposition.  (£r  fprad)  t)oni  ©ingen  biejer 
£teber,  "He  spoke  of  the  singing  of  these  songs." 
This  must  not  be  confused  with  "He  spoke  of  sing- 
ing these  songs,"  where  the  *  singing'  has  true 
verbal  sense,  and  means  (£r  \\)vad)  bat)on,  bie[e  Sieber 
SU  fingen. 

Vocabulary. 

btC  SScifC,  manner.  fottntn  ♦  ♦  ♦  tttttljitt,  ^e/p,  avoid, 

ba!§  25erfircr!^ett,  crime.  ^laubcrn,  converse,  chatter. 

"^^^  5(u§fe^eil,  looks.  em^fC^Ien,  recommend. 

"^^^  S5oIf§Ueb,  popular  song.  (affCtt,  have,  cause. 

tlOrteilftaft,  advantageous.  auf^ijrett,  stop,  cease. 

tCt^Cltb,  charming.  ttbct^au^t,     anyway,    in    any 

ftctf,  stiff.  case. 

Oett)0^nlt(i^,  common.  eittfjlti^,  simply. 

niitig,  necessary.  tierittUtliC^,   /  suppose,  suppos- 

auffattenb,  noticeable.  ably. 

DtvUtttn,  forbid.  ttttgcfat)r,  about. 

tlOr^ic^Cn,  prefer.  Crttiartett,  expect. 

fijrcngett,  burst.  att^Ia^en,  laugh  at. 

f  (i^ttieigen,  say  nothijig,  be  silent.       na(i^(auf  CU,  run  after. 


Exercise  XXVII. 

I.  S)a^  ©tngen  foId)er  Steber  follte  t)erboten  fein. 
2.  (£§  ift  aber  bod)  !etn  S^erbredjen,  [oldje  Sieber  (311) 
[tngen.  3-  Sd)  t)abe  fie  ja  oft  ftngen  I)oren.  4.  §i3ren' 
®ie  bod^  nur'  etnmal'  \^^^  fdjicdjte  ©tngen  bte[e<3 
SJRanne^!    5.  9?cid)  Sifdje  fingen  foil  iibertjaupt  nidjt 


Les.  XXVII. ]  THE    INFINITIVE.  20/ 

DorteiKjaft  fein.  6.  Sd)  tDiirbe  e§  Dorjte^en,  nad)  Sifc^e 
fpajieren  ju  gel)en.  7.  3Sir  JDiirben  ben  2Kann  gerne 
anbere  Sieber  [ingen  I)i3ren.  8.  34)  ttJerbe  bie  Steber 
[pater  l)on  jemanb  Slnberm  [ingen  Ia[[en,  9.  S)er  arme 
9J?ann  tDiirbe  [eI6er  ntc^t  baran  benfen,  bte  2ieber  tDteber 
5U  [ingen.  10.  3Ba^  St)nen  at[o  nti[3[altt,  i[t  [eine  aBei[e 
bie  Sieber  jn  [ingen?  n.  (£^  i[t  genng,  um  einem  bie 
Dfjren  jn  [prengen,  t)on  [einem  Sln)o[el)en  jn  [d^tneigen. 
12.  Sd)  !ann  nid)t  nml}in  jn  lac^en,  tnenn  id)  it)n  an[angen 
[et)e  jn  [ingen.     13.  Se|t  aber,  nic^t  mef)r  |)lanbern! 

*  Just  hear  once. 

Exercise  27. 

I.  The  man  hopes  to  sing  for  us  after  supper. » 
2.  But  singing  after  meals  ^  is  not  to  be  recom- 
mended. 3.  Well,  let-US-have  3  him  sing  one  song 
anyway.  4.  His  singing  of  4  popular-songs  is-said  to 
be  very  charming.  5.  I  heard  5  him  once  sing 
several  songs.  6.  He  remained  standing  a  whole 
hour,  and  sang  without  stopping.  7.  His  manner 
of  singing  such  songs  is  a  little  too  stiff  [in  order] 
to  please  me.  8.  Singing  too  loud  is  a  common 
fault  of  ^  young  singers.  9.  It  is  not  necessary  to 
be  stiff  in  order  to  sing  simply.  10.  He  spoke  of 
singing  7  after  supper,  n.  It  is  about  time  for  him  ^ 
to  begin  to  sing.  12.  He  does  not  expect  to  sing  all 
the  time.  13.  He  expects  us  to  help  him  sing  cer- 
tain songs.      14.  My  father  went  walking  when  he 


208  THE    INFINITIVE.  [Les.  XXVII. 

saw  him  coming.      15.  I  suppose  he  does  not  hke 
singing.     16.  He  tried  to  sing,  only  to  be  laughed  at. 

17.  For  him  8  to  go  walking  now  is  quite  noticeable. 

18.  Well,  what's  to  be  done.?     19.  Run  after  him.? 

^  D^ad^  2^if(^C,  or  more  precisely,  itad)  bent  ^Ibenbeffcit.  ^  nad) 
2;ifd^e,  ^J^affen  wit.  ^non,  or  genitive  alone.  5  pej-fect  tense. 
^  bei,  or  genitive  alone,  ^i.  e.  of  intending  to  sing.  ®  See  this 
Lesson  I,  9. 

Vocabulary  fop  the  Conversation. 

bcr  D^leifCttbc,  ///^  tr-avehr.  VX^^tW,  act,  play. 

bet  ^eamtC,  the  official.  Xis\t\\  (of  tickets),  buy. 

bcr  3«fifH^l*Cr,  the  conductor.  aBfa^tClt,  depart.    . 

ber  @rf)Offncr,  t/ie  brakeman.  fdltmctl,  delay,  fteglect. 

bcr  ^affagtCr',  the  passenger.  Ctuf^CrrCU,  shut  in. 

\s\t  23eqttcmltd)fett,  comfort.         crratctt,  guess. 

bte  5frt,  majiner,  fashion.  trcffCtt,  hit. 

ba^  G^Ott^C,  the  compartment.  aUc^,  all,  everybody. 

lattger,  considerable.  braU^Ctt,  abroad. 


Conversation  26.  —  Pie  Hctfe, 

©rtDarteit  @te  jemate  in  S)eut)d)Ianb  511  retfen  ? 

2.  %&)  ^offe  e§  tDemgften^  ju  tun, 

@ie  miff  en,  ber  Svetfenbe  ^at  bran^en  ntdjt  fo  t)teL 

Sequemlic^Mten  afe  Ijter  jn  Sanbe  ? 
2.  3^  erinnere  mid^,  ba§  gefjort  ^u  ^aben,  aber  it>te  ift 

ba§  §u  Derftefjen? 

@ie  fennen  alfo  bie  bentfdje  9trt  ntd^t,  langere  Stetfen 

jn  madjen  ? 
2.  34>  ^^^^^  bie  beutfd^e  2lrt  ^u  reifen  gar  nii^t. 


1.ES.  XXVII.l  THE    INFINITIVE.  2O9 

I.  3Bie  [oil  id)  aufaugen,  urn  e^^  3()nen  311  erflaren? 
2.  Mad)m   6ie  ben   Seamten,    (affen   ©ie  micf)  ben 
3leifenben  fein. 

I.  9?un  alfo,  e§  tft  3^it  abjufal^ren.     @te  tperben  S^r 
93tEetfd)oncseId[tI)akn? 
2.  3att)o^I,  id;  tt)ei^  Qenug,  urn  ein  billet  ^u  faufen. 

I.  SBenn  alle^  fertig  i[t,  [0  ruft  ber  3i^9fid)rer :  Sltle^ 
einftetgen ! 
2.  ®a  tDerbe  id^  nid^t  fdumen  einjufteigen, 

I.  S)er  ©djaffner  fperrt  bie  9veifenben  in  ha§>  Soupe 

ein;  balb  Ijeifst  e^:  ®ie^en  an^[teigen! 

2.  2BoI(en  ©ie  bie  (Siite  I)aben,  mir  ba§  gu  erfldren? 

I.  S[t  e^  St)nen  ju  inel,  ba^  jn  erraten? 

2.  SKeint  eg  tr)ol)I,  bie  ^^affagiere  nai)  ©ie^en  foden  au^- 
fteigen  ? 

I.  ®etroffen !  Etc.,  etc. 

Reading  27. 

ajforgen  mn§  id)  fort  t)on  fjier 
Unb  niu^  9l6fdjieb  nel)men; 

leave  take 

D  bn  aIter)(^on[te  Qkx ! 

charmer 

©djeiben,  ba<3  bringt  ©rdmen. 

grief 


210  THE    PARTICIPLES.  [Les.  XXVIII. 

S)a  id)  bic^  fo  treu  geliebt, 

When 

U6er  aEe  Tta'^tn, 

measure 

(SoU  xdj  bi(^  t)erlaffen, 
©oU  irf)  bi(^  Derlaffen. 

SBenn  ^tDet  gute  greunbe  fittb, 

S)te  einanber  feitnen, 
©onrt'  unb  5Konb  betDcgen  [td^, 

move  (from  their  courses) 

@^e  fie  [id^  trennen. 
9?od)  t)iel  grower  ift  ber  ©c^merj, 

SBenn  ein  treu  t)erliebte^  §erj 
Sn  bie  grembe  jie^et, 

foreign  lands 

Sn  bie  grembe  jie^et 


LESSON    XXVIII. 

The  Participles. 

1 .  T/ie  participle  is  preceded  by  its  modifiers  ;  the 
chief  concern  is  how  to  render  English  participles  by 
other  constructions. 

2.  Sttbem  cr  ntcitte  Stimnte  prtc,  tarn  bet  im 

Hearing  my  voice  (  )  the     in- 

S^attcn  ftel^cnbe  ^iingling  )3lii^lid^  ^crtiorgclaufcn  unb 

the-shade-standing         youth  came  suddenly  running  forth     and 

griff  ben  SRSuBer  entfc^Ioffen  an* 

attacked  the     robber       decidedly 


Les.  XXVIII.]  THE    PARTICIPLES.  211 

3.  Read  this  sentence  carefully;  note  the  posi- 
tion and  form  of  the  German  participles,  also  where 
English  might  use  other  participles.  The  parti- 
ciples are  much  less  used  in  German  than  in  English, 
as  is  explained  in  detail  below. 

I.     Present   Participle. 

4.  The  present  participle  may  be  used  as  an 
attributive  adjective,  but  as  predicate  adjective  only 
in  a  few  cases,  and  these  where  the  participle  has 
become  more  or  less  independent,  such  as  retjenb, 
'charming,'  rafenb,  *  frantic,'  etc.  As  has  been 
noted  already,  the  so-called  *  progressive  form '  of 
the  verb  does  not  occur  in  German.  Thus  we  may 
say,  bie  aufge^enbe  ©onne,  *'the  rising  sun,"  but  not 
bie  Sonne  ift  anfgef)enb.  Unlike  the  English,  the 
German  attributive  adjective  may  even  be  limited 
by  a  phrase,  as  bie  Ijinter  bem  93erge  fintenbe  Sonne, 
lit.  "the  behind-the-mountain-sinking  sun,"  or  by 
an  object,  as  ber  il)n  6e(etbtgenbe  3tebrnd,  lit.  '^the 
him-off ending  expression."  In  official  and  encyclo- 
pedia style  this  condensation  is  often  carried  to  great 
lengths. 

5«  Of  course  this  participial  adjective  can  be  used 
substantively,  a  noun  being  understood,  as  ber  $Rei= 
'Imht,  *  the  traveler,'  ha^  Seletbigenbe,  *the  offensive' 
(act  or  expression).  But  otherwise  the  participle 
is  not  used  substantively,  being  replaced  as  verbal 
noun  by  the  infinitive.     See  Lesson  XXVII. 


212  THE    PARTICIPLES.  [Les.  XXVIIl. 

6.  A  few  present  participles  may  be  used  as 
adverbs,  as  auffallenb,  'strikingly,'  au^neljmenb, 
*  exceptionally.' 

7.  The  great  majority  of  cases  in  which  the 
present  participle  in  English  takes  the  place  of  a 
clause  must  in  German  be  rendered  by  a  clause. 
Thus  the  adjective  construction,  **  A  man  carrying 
a  heavy  load,"  must  in  German  be  turned  into  a 
relative  clause :  Sin  Wann,  ipeld^er  eine  fd^tDcre  Saft 
tragi  (or  trug);  and  the  many  cases  in  which 
the  participial  phrase  is  an  adverbial  element  of 
time,  cause  or  manner,  such  as  *' Meeting  me  this 
morning,  he  asked  me  to  dine,"  •*  Not  knowing  what 
else  to  do,  I  accepted,"  "  Holding  tight  with  both 
hands,  he  kept  from  falling,"  should  all  be  turned 
into  clauses  with  the  proper  conjunction  introdu- 
cing the  finite  verb.  In  classic  poetry  these  con- 
structions with  the  participle  are  not  infrequent  in 
German,  but  modern  prose  avoids  them. 

8.  Finally  the  absolute  participial  construction, 
as  **  My  friend  not  liking  the  letter,  I  wrote  another," 
must  always  be  rendered  as  a  clause,  "  Since  my 
friend  did  not  like  the  letter,"  etc. 

II.     Past   Participle. 

9.  The  past  participle  finds  its  chief  use  in  the 
formation  of  the  perfect  tenses  and  of  the  passive 
voice. 


Les.  XXVIII.]  THE    PARTICIPLES.  21 3 

10.  But  it  is  also  used  freely  as  adjective,  both  as 
attribute  and  as  predicate,  and,  through  the  adjec- 
tive, as  substantive :  (£r  ift  eingelabcn,  bie  ©ingela- 
benert,  etc.  In  the  same  way  it  is  also  used  as  an 
adverb,  and  several  past  participles  serve  as  con- 
junctions and  prepositions:  gefe^t,  'granted,'  a\\^- 
genommen,  *  excepted'  or  *  excepting,'  etc. 

11.  Adjective  and  adverbial  phrases  with  the 
past  participle  are  much  more  common  than  with 
the  present,  but  for  most  of  these  constructions  in 
English  German  prefers  a  clause.  Thus  "A  man 
beloved  by  everybody,"  may  be  rendered  Sin  tion 
jebermann  geltebter  Tlann,  but  a  relative  clause  is 
much  better.  So  in  *'  Offended  by  the  expression, 
I  withdrew,"  while  we  may  say  S)urc^  ben  Sln^brnrf 
betetbigt,  jog  \iS)  mid)  juriicf,  the  clause  S)a  ic^  bnrc^ 
ben  Sln^brnd  beleibigt  tvav,  etc.,  is  perhaps  more 
common.  With  the  past  participle  even  the  abso- 
lute construction  is  permitted,  though  less  common. 
®te  Slrbett  t)oIIenbet,  begaben  tDtr  un^  jur  9inf)e,  better 
9lte  bie  Slrbett  DoHenbet  wax,  etc. 

12.  After  !ommen  and  geljen,  the  past  participle 
in  German  represents  the  mode  of  motion  or  the 
gait,  as  @r  tarn  gelaufen,  *'He  came  running." 

13-  The  past  participle  alone  is  used  as  a  substi- 
tute for  the  imperative  in  military  and  other  lordly 
commands,  as  Stufgepafjt,  *'Pay  attention";  9^tdjt 
lang  gefetert,  "Do  not  rest  long,"  etc. 


214  THE    PARTICIPLES.  [Les.  XXVIII. 

III.     Future   Passive   Participle. 
14.  The  present  participle  with  511  constitutes  a 
future  passive  participle,  as  an  attributive  adjective 
only,  in  such  constructions  as,  Sine  nicfjt  ju  Derjet()enbe 
Sumniljeit,  "A  stupidity  not  to  be  pardoned." 

Vocabulary. 
bcr  (Svfolg,  success,  7'esulL  tciuft^ett,  disappoint. 

bcr  %\a\if  plan.  bur^tricbett,  thorough. 

bic  (Srflarmtjl,  explanation.  erltiad)fett,  grown  up. 

aufatmctt,  take  breath.  bCtblitfft,  dazed,  co7ifused. 

ttUi^marfieU,  arra^tge.  m\\\\\s\%  laconically. 

einfc^en,  see,  recognize.  ttUUltterbrU^Ctt,      uni7iterrupt- 
evluaf|nCtt,  mentiojt,  refer  to.  edly. 

fuu!c(lt,  sparkle.  JJCfcl^t,  supposing,  granted. 

^or(i)cn,  //>/^?;2.  gefaffett,  «r«/w,  <ri?^/. 

^ertJorbrtttcjeu,  produce.  nii^ltt^,     1  ^^j^/z//. 

Idrf)cltt,  j^wz/^.  bc^iilfliri^,  J  helpful. 
fc^Iic^teit,  settle. 


Exercise  XXVIII. 

I.  SSor  greiibe  Ictd^elnb  fam  ^  ber  junge  5Kann  fetnem 
grcunbc  cntgegen.'  2.  a}?it  funfelnbcm  2luge  erjdfilte  er 
Doit  jeincm  Srfolge.  3.  S)er  in  einfadjert  9Borten  Gr== 
^^dl)Ienbe  (jatte  6alb  t)oIIenbet.  4.  Slufatmenb  {)or(ijte  er 
aitf  bie  311  ertt)artenbe  9luttDort.  5.  S)er  greimb  fal) 
ctiua^  lierbtiifft  aiu3.  6.  i^on  ber  9?adjricfjt  getaufdjt, 
antlportete  er  nur  !urj  iinb  ein[tl6ig.  7.  S)er  Siingling 
fing  iDieber  o.\\  uitb  ).i(aiibertc^  ununter6rod)en  fort.^ 
8.  „®efel^t/^  fagte  er,  „ic^  Ijdtte  e^  anber;^  gemadjt,  it)a^ 


Les.  XXVIII.]  THE    PARTICIPLES.  215 

bann?''  9.  S)er  (SrtDacI)[ene  ging  JDcg,  aba  balb  !am  er 
juriidgelaufen.  10.  „Setrogeit  t)aft  bit  mic^,  bu  biirclj^^ 
triebener  @c^dm!''  n.  ,,yi\d)t  fo  (aut  gefdjrieen!''  hat 
ber  ?tnbere.  12.  5)ann  fing  ber  9Utcre  ettDQio  ge(a[fener 
mieber  an.  13.  Salb  iDar  bte  Sadje  au^gemadjt  unb 
gefd)Iid)tet 

^  came  to  meet.     ^  chattered  on. 


Exercise  28. 

I.  A  young  man  smiling-with-joy '  came  running 
into  the  house.  2.  Taking-breath  ^he  ^began  to  tell 
of  his  plan.  3.  The  (man)-addressed  looked  calmly 
at  the  narrator.  4.  Dazed  and  disappointed  the 
younger-(man)  ceased  talking.  5.  Why  had  his 
narrative  ^  not  produced  ^the  ^result  ^to-be-expected  ? 
6.  The  grown-up  friend  seemed  to  feel  [himself] 
cheated.  7.  He  exclaimed  :  "  Supposing  I  were  a 
thorough  rascal ;  would  I  have  done  that .?  "  8.  The 
younger  man,  seeing  his  error,  began  excusing  him- 
self. 9.  He  spoke  of  3  wishing  3  to  be  useful  to 
others.  10.  This  he  had  hoped  to  do  by  4  writing 
jthe  jbook  2referred-to.  And  thus  he  went  on 
talking  incessantly,  n.  The  explanation  being  5 
finished,  the  young  man  ceased  talking.  12.  "  Spoken 
like  a  man,"  exclaimed  the  other  ;    *'take  a  seat !  " 

"  Tr.  both  as  adjective  phrase  before  SJiauil  and  as  relative 
clause.  2  Tr.  '  that  narrated.  ^  See  Lesson  XXVII,  I,  6.  *  See 
Lesson  XXVII,  I,  6.     s  See  this  lesson  I,  8. 


2l6  THE    PARTICIPLES.  [Les.  XXVIII. 

Vocabulary  for  the  Conversation. 
bcr  S3rieftrager,  postman.  gefte^cn,  confess. 

bic  33ncfmarfe,  postage-stamp.      iJur^eigcM,  show. 

bic  Uu^e,  ounce.  C^tHc^,  hojiest. 

bic  (l$Cbu[)r, /^^,  charge.  franHett,  postpaid. 

ba^  ^OUdert,   e^welope.  umgcI)CUb,  ^^  return  mail. 

nnf^cbetl,  suspend.  umftct|Cttb,  ^/z  //^^  reverse  side, 

nuffti^tebeu,  postpone.  reverse. 

Ctttri^tCtt,  pay.  itberttiebett,  exaggerated. 

Conversation  27.  —  Der  Brieftrdger. 

I.  |)aben  ©ie  ben  ertDarteten  93rief  empfangen? 

2.  SZein,  ben  erti:)arteten  Srief  ^abe  id^  nic^t  em))fangen. 
I.  Stant  ber  Srieftriiger  geritten  ober  gefdjren  ? 

2.  Sein^  t)on  beiben  ;   er  !am  gegangen. 
I.  (£f)rltcl)  geftanben,  I)at  er  nidjtio  gebrac£)t  ? 

2.  5Run  ja,  el^rlic^  geftanben,  er  l^at  einen  Srtef  gebrarf)t. 
I.  2Bar  ber  Srtef  franfiert  ober  nic^t? 

2.  2)er  rnir  iiberbrad^te  33rtef  tDar  franfiert. 
I.  SSorgejeigt;  id)  ntod)te  ben  Srief  anfet)en. 

2.  SSor^eigen  barf  id^  if)n  nic^t. 
I.  SSerben  ©ie  ben  Srief  nmgel)enb  beantoorten ? 

2.  5Ric^t  umge^enb,  aber  ndd^ften^;    aufgefd^oben  ift 
nic^t  aufge!)oben. 
I .  SBato  ift  "^0^.  nmftet)enb  anf  bem  Sont)ert  gefc^rieben  ? 

2.  3c^  ^abe  bie  umfte^enbe  ©eite  nid^t  betra^tet. 
I.  3ft  ba!3  nid}t  eine  reijenbe  Sriefmarf e ? 

2.  „3iei5enb"  lommt  mir  ettt)a§  iibertrieben  bor. 
I.  3Ba§  ift  bie  jn  entridjtenbe  ©ebiifjr  fiir  einen  getnuljn^ 
lichen  Srief? 

2.  ®ie  ©ebiibr  auf  einen  Srief  big  ju  einer  ^alben  Unje 
ift  jtt)ei  6ent.        Etc.,  et?. 


Les.  XXVIII.]  THE    PARTICIPLES  2\^ 

Reading  28. 

^o§  ^crftroi^ette  9fiing(citt. 

93on  Gtd^enborff. 

Sn  einem  !u!)ten  ®runbe 

valley 

2)a  gefjt  ein  9}?u^Ienrab. 

millwheel 

I :  a)?ein'  Stebfte  t[t  t)erf(^tt)unben, 

vanished 

S)ie  bort  getDotjnet  ^at. :  | 

@te  ^at  nttr  %xtv!  Derjproc^en, 
®a6  mtr  etn'n  Sting  babei ; 
j :  @te  I}at  bie  2^reu'  gebrocfjen, 

SRein  SRinglein  fprang  entjn^et. :  | 

broke  in  two 

Sd)  moc^t'  ate  ©ptelmann  reifen 

minstrel 

SBeit  in  bie  SSelt  ^inau^, 
I :  llnb  [ingen  meine  SBeijen, 

lays 

Unb  ge£)n  Don  §au^  ju  §au§. :  | 

^or'  id)  ba^  2Knf){rab  ge^en, 
Sc^  ttJei^  ni(i)t  tDa^  ic^  tt)iE; 
(:Sc^  modjt'  am  liebften  fterben, 
^a  tpar'^  auf  einmal  [till. :  I 


2l8  THE    SUBJUNCTIVE.  [Les.  XXIX. 

LESSON     XXIX. 

Details  of  the  Subjunctive. 

1.  Since  the  Subjunctive  in  German  has  more 
distinct  forms  than  in  English ^  it  is  necessary  to 
e^nploy  m.ore  care  in  learning  its  forms  and  its  uses, 

2.  ^cr  ^Priifibcnt  mcmte,  bcr  junge  9Kann  fe^e  tiw^, 
^\^  06  cr  tto^  .^offnung  pttc,  bag  cr  bie  ©telle  tx-^ 
^alten  filnne. 

3«  Learn  this  sentence ;  examine  the  subjunc- 
tives, note  on  what  each  is  dependent  and  the 
nature  of  the  uncertainty  imphed. 

4.  As  indicated  in  Lesson  XIX,  the  governing 
factor  in  the  use  of  the  Subjunctive  Mood  is  the 
intent  of  the  speaker  or  writer.  If  he  wishes 
to  express  uncertainty,  doubt  or  negation,  the  verb 
in  the  subordinate  clause  is  Subjunctive,  but  if  he 
wishes  to  treat  the  proposition  in  question  as  a  fact, 
the  verb  is  Indicative. 

5.  However,  a  series  of  practical  rules  can  be 
given  to  aid  the  student  in  doubtful  cases. 

6.  The  Subjunctive  Mood  is  used : 

I.  After  certain  verbs,  adjectives  or  nouns  with 
the  senses :  affirmation,  doubt,  denial,  question, 
fear,  hope,  wish,  command,  belief,  feeling,  report. 
After  some  of  these  words  it  is  less  easy  to  regard 
a  subordinate  clause  as  implied  fact,  but  it  is  pos- 
sible after  any  of  them,  hence  the  final  test  is  the 


Les.  XXIX.]  THE    SUBJUNCTIVE.  219 

intent  of  the  speaker.  This  makes  it  possible  to 
express  in  German  many  fine  shades  of  meaning 
that  are  not  to  be  given  in  EngUsh  with  so  few 
words.  Sc^  befiirdjte,  bafe  er  franf  jet  expresses  no 
more  than  the  fear  ;  ^d)  befiirdjte,  bafe  er  fran!  ift  im- 
plies a  conviction  to  this  effect.  ^6)  t)erlancje,  ba^ 
er  f)eimget)t,  expects  the  result  much  more  confidently 
than  3(^  Derlange,  ha^  er  t)etmgel)e.  After  words  in- 
dicating *  report  *  the  construction  is  commonly 
called  "indirect  discourse,"  but  is  subject  to  the 
same  rule  as  after  other  governing  words.  Ttan  \aQt, 
ba^  er  Iran!  fet  leaves  the  matter  as  report ;  Wan 
fagt,  ba^  er  frani  ift  assumes  the  report  to  be  true. 

Note  that  the  governing  word  may  be  a  noun  or 
an  adjective  quite  as  well  as  a  verb.  2)ie  ^^urdjt, 
bafe  er  Iran!  [ei ;   Sc^  bin  begierig,  ha^  er  gef)e. 

The  effect  of  one  governing  verb  in  the  indirect  discourse  may 
continue  throughout  a  long  paragraph,  whereas  in  EngHsh  it  is 
necessary  to  repeat  the  verb  of  report  with  almost  every  new 
sentence.  The  governing  verb  may  even  be  implied  from  the 
beginning,  as  (Sr  ^citte  t)a^  getan  ?  i.  e.  "  Do  you  say  that  he  did 
that  ?" 

2.  After  certain  conjunctions  :  afe  iDenn  and  afe 
ob  invariably ;  bamit,  um  ba^  and  ba^,  '  in  order 
that',  usually  ;  ob  and  tDenn,  *  whether',  '  if '  usually 
in  past  tenses,  less  frequently  with  present  tenses. 
SBenn  introducing  a  pure  (hypothetical)  condition 
is  followed  by  the  indicative, 


220  THE    SUBJUNCTIVE.  [Les.  XXIX. 

3.  As  the  Conditional,  expressing  the  hypotheti- 
cal conclusion  after  various  sorts  of  conditions,  both 
the  forms  with  tDiirbe  and  the  shorter  subjunctive 
forms  used  as  substitutes  (see  Lesson  XIX). 

4.  As  the  optative  Subjunctive,  expressing  a 
wish,  which  may  usually  be  interpreted  as  dependent 
on  some  verb  or  conjunction  understood.  3Sare  ic^ 
nur  reii^ !  (fo  tDiirbe  id^  gtiidltc^  fetn) ;  Slc^  (tc^  tDoIIte), 
ba^  ic^  reic^  tvaxt !    O  tjcitte  id)  ha§>  nid^t  gejagt !  etc. 

5.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  for  the  Imperative. 
®et)en  tt)tr,  "Let  us  go"  ;   (£r  ge{)e,  "Let  him  go." 

Vocabulary. 
bet  Q^ianht,  belief.  tun,  act. 

bie  5lufga!ie,  lesson,  exercise,  itBereinftimmen,  agree. 

bte  SeftiOtt,  lesson.  Unmeife,  unwise. 

bie  ^erien,  holiday {s).  ftrenge,  severe. 

^(i^  Stubium  (pi.  -ten),  study,     raf^,  fast,  swift. 
Braut^en,  )  ^^^^  tiurgeriirft,  advanced. 

biirfett,      )  ^  fottft,  otherwise,  besides. 

fotbettt,  take,  require. 


Exercise  XXIX. 

I.  ©c^reiben  tt)ir  fcf)neller,  bamtt  tr)tr  nid^t  bie  le^ten 
feien!  2.  SBaren  \o\x  bod)  fdjon  mtt  ber  Slufgabe  fertig ! 
3.  SBenn  \\kx  e§  auc^  iDdren,  fo  !ommt  gteic^  eine  anbere 
barauf.  4.  SBtr  mufeten  aber  bei  ber  itad)ften  ntd)t  fo 
rafc^  arbeiten.  5-  S)er  2ef)rer  l)offte,  bafs  tt)ir  eine  Idn^ 
gere  Slufgabe  ne^men  !6nnten !    6. 5Da^  xohxt  nur  ^albe 


Les.  XXIX.]  THE    SUBJUNCTIVE.  221 

2(r6eit,  metnte '  er.  7.  @t  ()dtte  gett)i3()nttc^  t)ie(  t)orgc== 
riicftere  ©d^iiler  ge^abt  8.  ijaben  @te  iljit  gefragt,  o() 
fie  gelDofinUcf)  Uier  ©tubten  f)aben  ?  9.  Sr  tDeife  fd)on,^ 
bafe  bte[e  Slufgabe  lang  genug  tft,  UJenn  ber  ©c^iiler  [onft 
brei  ©tubien  I)at  10.  Xut  er  bodj,3  ate  Ijatten  iDir 
fonft  ntc[)t!3  ju  fc^retben!  n.  S^  tt)oIIte,  tvix  fonnteit 
einmal  gerten  ^aben.  12.  9Ketn  SSater  tuunjc^t,  ba^  id^ 
ber  erfte  in  ber  Stlaffe  jei.  13.  ?Iber  tomn  bu  e^  bift 
{tvaxt\U),  fo  !ann  (fonnte4)  ic^  e^  nidE)t  fein.  14.  S)ein 
Skater  {)at  tDot)t  geljort,  ba^  ber  Sef)rer  ftrenge  i[t  (fei)4. 

15.  @^  ift  bod)  tDO^I  beffer,  er  bleibe  bei  biefem  ©lauben. 

16.  Sd)  tDerbe  xtjU  tDiffen  laffen,  ha^  er  e^  nic^t  ift. 

*  Lit.  *  thought,'  but  implying  that  the  thought  was  expressed, 
hence  translate  'said.'  ^  well  enough.  ^Why;  see  Lesson 
XXVI,  2,  5.  **  Translate  a  second  time,  using  the  verbs  in  paren- 
theses. 

Exercise  29. 

I.  The  teacher  asked  whether  anyone  in  the  class 
had  written  all  the  sentences.  2.  Some  of  the 
pupils  thought  that  the  exercise  was  too  long. 
3.  All  agreed  that  it  was  pretty  difficult.  4.  The 
teacher  demanded  ^that  2they  ^give  ^two  ^hours  (to) 
jthe  ^work.  5.  If  this  were  not  enough,  he  would  ^ 
make  the  lesson  shorter.  6.  The  pupils  acted  as 
though  they  were  really  disappointed.  7.  If  they 
had  not  been  so  2-  they  would  probably  have  said  so  2-. 
8.  *^  If  any  one  have  not  time,"  said  the  teacher,  "he 
need  but 3  say  so 2-."     9.  "Even  if  we  were  more 


222  THE    SUBJUNCTIVE.  [Les.  XXIX. 

advanced,"  said    some,   2"  we  ^could  ^scarcely  ^do 

that  4  .much."  10.  The  teacher  feared  that  he  had 
4  5 

been  miwise.  n.  The  pupils  knew  that  he  had  been 
so  2-.  12.  If  one  lesson  takes  two  hours  ^ [then] 5  ^four 
^will  ^take  ^eight  ^hours.  13.  I  am  sure  that  no  one 
can  give  that  much  time  (to)  his  studies.  14.  If 
only  the  day  had  thirty  hours  !  15.  He  needs  at 
least  forty-eight  hours  in  order  that  he  finish  his 
work. 

^Future  subjunctive  (indirect    discourse  dependent  on  *'he 
said "  implied).     *e^.     ^nur.     ^fo.     ^  jo. 

Vocabulary  for  the  Conversation. 

bcr  @l^trm,  shade,  sunshade  ox  rcbCtt,  speak,  talk. 

umbrella.  tlCtbCtbcU,  spoil,  ruin. 

bcr  DflcnCttfr^trm,  umbrella.  ftiiren,  disturb. 

ber  SJlo^fi^tD   (pi.  -OJ),  mos-  BefOtflt,  anxious. 

quito.  "^^XW^^,  that  way. 

^(aubent,  talk,  chatter.  fji^tUCtgCU,  keep  still. 

Conversation  28.  —  Per  5pa3iergang. 

I.  ©agten  ®ie,  ba^  @te  fertig  feien  ? 
2.  5lein,  id)  fagte,  ba^  id^  nic^t  fertig  fei. 

I.  ®e^en  tDtr  nac^  bem  gfuffe  [pajieren! 
2.  ©e^en  tDtr  bod^  Iteber  \k(x&j  bem  9Balbe ! 

I.  ^iinfcljen  @te,  ba^  ber  ©ruber  mitgelje? 
2.  6^  ift  tDol^l  beffer,  er  bleibe  ^u  §aufe. 

I.  SBirb  er  uivo  ftoren,  iDciin  cr  iii:ti]el]t? 

2.  ©r  tt)irb  un^  nid;t  ftoren,  tDenn  er  ru^ig  bleibt. 


Les.  XXIX.]  THE    SUBJUNCTIVE.  22  3 

I.  Soil  id)  iljn  fragen,  oh  er  rul)tc]  Wcibcn  fann? 
2.  ^a,  fragen  ©ie  i^n  nur,  ob  er  f(f)tt)eigen  fann. 

I.  S^erlangen  ®ie  benn,  baf]  er  gar  nicf)t  rebe? 
2.  ^c^  i)erlange  iDemgften'o,  ba^  er  nid^t  !plaubere. 

I.  @te!)t  c^  ntdjt  an^^,  aU  ob  e^>  regnen  tDerbe? 
2.  6^  fie^t  freilic^  barna(^  au^,  aber  ge^en  tvxx  bod^ ! 

I.  ^ragen  @te  bod)  einen  ©d)irm,  bamit  St)r  |)ut  ntc^t 
tierborben  iDerbe ! 
2.  ®attttt  ©ie  ntd^t  beforgt  feien,  ne^me  id)  einen  9{egen= 
fc^irm  mit, 

I.  §aben  @ie  get)ort,  ba^  e^  im  SBalbe  SWo^fito^  gebe? 
2.  Qd^  ^abe  e^  ^Wav  ge^ort,  aber  ic^  glaube  nic^t,  ba^  e§ 
h:)a^r  fei. 

Etc.,  etc. 

Reading  29. 

(Silt  Srief. 

^ein  lieber  ©ro^fo^n! 

^rf)  banfe  2)ir  fiir  beinen  Srief,  Saburd^  ^aft  2)u  mir 
eine  g^reube  gemac^t.  ^lod)  lieber  ni5rf)t' '  ic^  S)ic^  felbft 
bier  ^aben»  Qd^  tt)o(Ite,  ^u  fonnteft  fliegen  unb  Idmeft  gu 
nn^,  tt)ie  eine  2erd^e.  2Bir  ti:)otIten  ®irf)  rec^t  ^flegen^  unb 
(ieb  ^aben.  3<^  ^^b^  ^i<^  ^^^^  erfrfjredft/  ba^  ®u  i;)oran 
ft^eft  in  ber  erften  San!  unb  befommft  immer  9^ummer  1. 
^mn  id)  bin  bange/  3)u  bift  ^u  flei^ig.  —  ®ie  liebe  ®ro^= 
mutter  moc^te  and)  gem  nacb  barmen  fommen,  unb  jie  fjat 
2)td^  unb  aKe  fel^r  lieb  unb  moi^te  &nd)  gem  fe^en  unb 
fiiffen,  i^x  fleinen  ©^iebogeL     ©§  ift  un§  fel^r  leib,5  ba^ 


224  THE    INDECLINABLES.  [Les.  XXX. 

\mx  ®uer  £teb(f)en    an  93ater§  ©eburt^tag   mcf)t  ^oren 
fonnten.     2tber  e§  ift  ju  tt)eit,  unb  bie  STone  finb  tt)D^l 
untertDegg  erfroren  ober  Dom  SBinbe  i:)ertt)eE)t.     ^rf)  ii:)oHte, 
ic^  fonnte  einmal  mit  Qnd)  jingen  unb  f^)te(en  unb  fod^en. 
®ein  ©ro^t)ater, 

3^  i\  .^  r  u  m  m  a  c^  e  r. 
^mogcn;   id)  ntbd^tc  noc^  Ueber,  I  should  like  still  better. 
^  rec^t  ^flegett,  take  good  care  of.     ^  ^  ^^^g  ^|^({^  ^.gf^t  er[d)re(f t,  I 
was  greatly  startled.     *  id^  bin  bangc,  I  am  afraid.     ^  ®§  ift  un« 
fc^r  leib,  we  are  very  sorry. 

LESSON    XXX. 

The  Indeclinables. 

1.  T/ie  hidecli7tables,  especially  ja,  \^^^f  "^^^f 
rtiO^I  and  auc^,  constitute  fmich  of  the  distinctive  at- 
mosphere of  colloquial  German.  The  student  should 
cultivate  a  feeling  for  them  and  use  them  on  every 
possible  occasion. 

2.  tlnfct  9k(i^6ar  ift  bp^  mo^I  fii^on  angcf ontmcn ; 

why !  surely 

ItJir  fc^ctt  j[a  bort  ba<§  Sir^t  au)^  feincm  g^wp^^^  ^criiBcr* 
fd^cinen. 

3.  Learn  this  sentence;  note  the  meaning  of 
each  particle  and  its  place,  comparing  with  the 
English. 

Under  Indeclinables  will  be  grouped  such  gen- 
eral instructions  as  can  be  given  regarding  ad- 
verbs, prepositions,  conjunctions  and  interjections. 


Les.  XXX.]  THE   INDECLINABLES.  22$ 

I.    Adverbs. 

4.  The  adverb  is  indeclinable,  but  has  forms  of 
comparison,  which  have  been  given,  Lesson  XVI. 
There  is  no  general  ending,  like  the  English  -ly,  to 
form  adverbs  from  adjectives.  Every  adjective  in 
its  uninflected  form  may  serve  as  adverb  if  the 
sense  permits. 

5.  A  few  adverbs  may  retain  the  final  -e,  which 
was  once  the  common  termination  of  most  adverbs : 
feme,  lange,  friitje,  but  this  -e  is  not  required. 

6.  For  ordinal  adverbs  the  termination  of  a 
strong  genitive  is  used:  erften^,  jlDeiten^,  firstly, 
secondly,  etc. 

7.  Adverbs  of  direction  are  formed  with  the 
suffix  -tDiirt^,  -wards,  as  ^eimtDdrt^,  *  homewards,* 
xMwaxi^f  *  backwards/ 

8.  @et}r  means  *  very  *  when  limiting  adjectives 
and  adverbs,  but  modifying  verbs  it  means  'very 
much.'  "I  love  him  very  much"  is  not  to  be 
translated  Sc^  Hebe  tt)n  [e{)r  Diel,  but  Sd)  ttebe  iljn  fe(}r. 

9«  3Bot)l  is  not  the  adverb  'weir  =  <in  a  satis- 
factory manner  (this  is  gut),  nor  is  it  the  American 
introductory  *  Well,'  with  its  many  shades  of  mean- 
ing (this  is  German  nun),  but  it  represents  *  to  be 
sure,'  'indeed,'  'I  suppose,'  and  other  similar  ex- 
pressions, often  implying  an  objection  or  a  doubt 
held  in  reserve.  Sc^  fenne  i^n  tDO^t,  "  I  do  indeed 
know  him,  —  but — ."  ©u  fennft  ifjn  tt)oI)(?  "I 
suppose  you  know  him  ?  '* 


226  THE    INDECLINABLES.  Les.  XXX.] 

10.  @(f)on    has,   aside   from    its    precise    sense, 

*  already,'  shades  Uke  the  EngUsh  *  all  right,'  *to  be 
sure,'  indicating  an  unwilling  concession.  @r  ift 
jdjon  ait  genug,  *'Oh  yes,  he  is  old  enough,"  "He 
is  old  enough,  to  be  sure"  (the  whole  falling  inflec- 
tion on  the  word  alt).  In  such  cases  iX)olj(  and  jdjon 
approach  each  other  closely.  Only  frequent  hear- 
ing of  these  particles  will  give  their  fine  shades, 
but  the  student  who  wishes  to  talk  like  a  German 
must  learn  them. 

11.  3ci  is  confirmatory  with  implied  surprise  at 
another's  ignorance  or  neglect.  @ie  finb  [a  fpat 
(stress  on  jpat),  "Why,  you're  late  "  ;  or  (stress  on 
finb),  "Well,  you  are  late  (stress  on  a^r  implying 
"  Don't  deny  it ").  But  again,  @te  finb  aber  fpat  is 
expressed  by  "Well,  you  are  late  "  ;  implying  only 
surprise.  Sci  may  greatly  strengthen  an  admonition, 
%m  ba^  la,  "  O  do  that "  ;  Xne  ba§  la  ntd^t  (stress  on 
[a),  "  Don't  do  that  for  anything." 

12.  S)odj   has,   aside   from    its   common    sense, 

*  after  all,'  many  nice  shades,  adding  strength  to  an 
appeal,  or  implying  surprise.  It  may  be  substituted 
in  the  sentences  of  the  preceding  paragraph,  in  the 
first  (stress  on  fpat)  with  scarcely  appreciable  change 
of  meaning;  in  the  second  (stress  on  bod)),  "You're 
late  after  all "  ;  in  the  third,  with  either  of  two 
meanings,  **Do  it  anyway,"  or  "O  come,  do  it"; 
in  the  fourth  (stress  on  tuc),  "  Please  don't  do  that." 


Les.  XXX.]  THE    INDECLINABLES.  22/ 

13.  ?{uc^  means  *also,'  *  too,'  in  which  case  it 
usually  follows  the  word  it  especially  modifies, 
though  it  may  precede  if  this  does  not  cause  con- 
fusion with  the  second  meaning  'even,'  which  it 
has  usually  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  ©r  l)at 
c^o  and]  gejagt,  "  He  said  it  too  "  ;  but  91uclj  er  i)at  e^ 
gefagt,  "Even  he  said  it."  For  *  even  if,'  and)  may 
follow  the  subject  of  the  clause,  SSenn  er  e^  and)  ge^ 
fagt  i)at,  "  Even  if  he  said  it." 

II.     Prepositions. 

In  Lessons  V  to  VII  the  common  prepositions 
have  been  given  which  govern  the  accusative,  the 
dative,  and  the  accusative  or  dative. 

14.  A  few  common  prepositions  govern  the 
Genitive  case.  They  are  tnegerr,  *  on  account  of,' 
iDa^renb,  *  during,'  ftatt  or  anftatt,  '  instead  of,'  and 
urn  . .  .  tDiHen,  *  for  the  sake  of.'  When  toegen  governs 
a  personal  pronoun  it  occurs  in  combination,  follow- 
ing the  stem  of  the  pronoun  with  -et  added  :  meinet^ 
Uiegen,  feinettDegen,  if)retti:)egen,  unjerettDcgen.  The 
same  treatment  is  observed  with  itm . . .  tDttleri :  um 
metnettDtUen,  etc. 

15 •  The  prepositions  afford  innumerable  idioms 
and  are  among  the  most  difficult  features  of  German 
to  acquire  because  the  difficulties  cannot  be  classi- 
fied and  learned  by  rule.  The  pupil  should  learn 
to  look  for  many  of  these  idioms  in  'the  dictionary 


228  THE    INDECLINABLES.  [Les.  XXX. 

in  connection  with  the  verb  with  which  they  are 
commonly  used,  if  not  found  under  the  head  of  the 
preposition  itself.  A  few  of  the  more  familiar 
words  are  discriminated  in  the  Appendix,  p.  249  ff. 
Reference  to  these  is  needed  in  preparing  the 
Exercise  of  this  Lesson. 

III.     Conjunctions. 

16.  The  co-ordinating  conjunctions  unb,  a6er, 
enttDeber,  ober,  atlein,  fonbern,  benn,  have  no  effect  on 
the  construction  in  German.  Pupils  have  difficulty 
often  in  understanding  why  benn,  'for,'  is  in  this 
group,  as  it  seems  so  closely  related  to  *  because/ 
tDetL  Observation  will  show  that  the  sentence  is 
always  practically  finished  before  a  benn-clause ;  the 
benn-clause  is  supplementary  or  parenthetical.  SIber 
may  stand  wherever  in  English  the  word  *  however ' 
may  be  introduced.  Free  and  discreet  use  of  aber 
is  quite  characteristic  of  a  German  style. 

17.  Subordinating  conjunctions  are  many;  the 
commonest  are  discriminated  in  the  Appendix, 
p.  255.  They  indicate  that  the  verb  should  be  at 
the  end  of  the  clause.  They  introduce  mostly 
adverbial  elements  of  place,  time,  cause,  manner 
and  degree,  but  also  objective  elements. 

18.  Adverbial  conjunctions  are  very  numerous. 
They  cause  inversion  in  the  clause  to  which  they 
belong,  being  more  truly  adverbs  than  conjunctions. 


Les.  XXX.]  THE    INDECLINABLES.  229 

Yet  they  show  a  certain  relation  to  the  preceding 
clause  or  sentence. 

1.  bann;  bamate;  baim  is  consecutive  =;  *next' 
or  '  thereupon.'  S)amate  is  absolute  *  then,' '  at  that 
time.' 

2.  S)a:  t)ier:  bort;  I)ier  is  'here'  when  con- 
trasted with  there.  Sort  is  'there,'  'yonder.*  S)a 
is  used  for  'here,'  when  not  contrasted,  quite  as 
much  as  tjier.  Srf)  bin  ba,  "  I  am  here."  ©a  has 
also  temporal  sense  =  barauf,  '  thereupon.'  @r  !am 
XivS)i,  ba  cjing  ic^  Ijetm,  "  He  did  not  come,  thereupon 
(or  so)  I  went  home." 

3.  9?un:  je^t;  nun  is  consecutive  and  logical, 
'now,'  'next.'  Sc|t  is  absolute  'now,'  'at  this 
time.'  Thus  we  discriminate  between  bann  and 
bamate.  But  the  phrase  '  now  and  then '  =? .  occa- 
sionally, is  bann  unb  tuann. 

4.  ©od^ :  noc^ ;  bod)  is  adversative  and  emphatic. 
9loc^  is  temporal  and  additive.  Confusion  is  caused 
here  by  the  double  meaning  of  English  '  still '  and 
*  yet,'  both  of  which  render  either  bod)  or  noc^.  But 
the  pupil  must  learn  that  '  yet '  and  '  still '  at  the 
beginning  of  the  English  clause  have  one  meaning, 
=  bod),  and  anywhere  else  another,  =  nodj,  whereas 
the  German  words  are  not  restricted  in  position. 
9^00^  ein  means  '  another,'  i.  e.,  '  one  more,'  %&j  tDiH 
nod)  etn  ®Ia^,  "  I  want  another  (one  more)  glass," 
while  ein  anbere^  means  'an  other,'  i.  e.,  'a  different.' 


230  THE    INDECLINABLES.  [Les.  XXX. 

IV.     Interjections. 

19.  9lc^  corresponds  to  English  *  Ah  ! '  and  also 
to  *  O  ! '  It  expresses  many  shades  from  joy  to 
grief.  Sld^ja!  "O  yes  indeed!"  9(cf),  ba^  id)  fort 
tudre !  "  O  that  I  were  away  from  here !  2(dj  ®ott, 
''  O  God! "  or  "O  Lord! "  (the  latter  shade  an  ex- 
clamation of  mere  surprise  or  comical  dismay). 

Germans  use  the  name  of  God  with  much  more 
freedom  than  is  permitted  in  English,  and  yet  with- 
out irreverence.  Thus  the  above  exclamation,  or 
S)ii  liedcr  ®ott !  or  the  asseveration  bd  ®ott  may  be 
heard  without  intended  offence  from  ladies  and 
Christians. 

20.  To  make  a  better  call  the  words  ^euer  and 
SKorb  are  prolonged  into  geuerjo !  and  9Worbio ! 

21.  i^^ui!  (pron.  hwee)  indicates  an  instantaneous 
action.  ^Pfut  (pron.  pfwee)  means  'for  shame!' 
*  shame  1 ' 

Vocabulary. 

bcr  ^iti^f  industry,  care  ;  mit  bttig  ^ttttomoBtC,  automobile. 

JJlCtf^,  on  purpose.  \^ix^  35or^aBcn,  purpose. 

ber  ^a^bar,  neighbor.  "tS^^^^yxX^t^S^m^t^  school  build- 
bcr  ^au^tle^rcr,   head-master,  ing. 

principal.  *^ti^   Ultgltitf,    misfortune,   ac- 
btC  5(ttgft,  anxiety.  cident. 

V\t  ayiijglic^feit,  possibility.  ^a§  9iatftatti§,  courthouse. 

bie  (^efaljr,  danger.  errcidjCU,  reach,  get  to. 

bie  ^Uitf  cold.  ttUgcllCU,  begin,  open. 

bic  ^435cifc,  way,  maimer.  \itXV^\^t\\^  calm,  compose. 


Les.  XXX.]  THE    INDECLINABLES.  23 1 

gcfa^rU(i^y  dangerous.  it^erfalj'rcn,  run  over. 

fc^it^eu,  save,  protect.  tiCrmeibCtt,  avoid. 

forgCU    fiit   fltJ^,    take   care  of      ttlCtbCtt  {'dXi^),  become  {of), 

oneself  tttttiorfid^tig,  careless, 

telC^Jonicrett,  telephone. 

Exercise  XXX. 

I.  SntiDeber  ba^  9Kdbdjen  muB  jur  ®(i)ule  gegangen 
fein  ober  e^  iDirb  auf  [einem  dimmer  feiu.  2.  @te  ift 
aber  t)or  einer  ©tunbe  an  bem  genfter  Uorbeigegangeu. 

3.  |)at   fie  benn  nidjt^  t)on  i()rem  SSorf)aben   gejagt? 

4.  @ie  ^at  nic^t  nur  ntd^t^  babon  ge[agt,  [onbern  fie  I)at 
mic^  mit  glei^  uermieben.  5.  DbtDo^t  fie  oI)ne  iinfer 
aSiffen  au^  bem  §aufe  ging,  fo  I)a6e  ic^  bod^  if)rettt)egen 
feine  SIngft.  6.  (Sie  tuirb  mit  ben  anbern  ©d^itlern  um 
jtt)dlf  U^r  t)on  ber  ©d^ule  fommen.  7.  9I(^,  @ie  fagen 
ba^  nnr  fo,  bamit  id)  feine  Slngft  I)abe.  8.  Sd)  Derge^e 
ja  Dor  SIngft ;  liegt  benn  't^^^  ©djnigebaube  \o6i  t)on 
£)ier?  9-  Sd)  benfe  an  bie  9J?oglid)feit,  ba^  fie  t)on 
einem  Slutomobil  iiberfa^ren  tuorben  tDare.  10.  SSor 
biefem  Ungtiid  \)0i  e^  bod)  I)ier  feine  ®efal)r!  n.  ®a^ 
mag  fc^on  fein,  aber  toenn  e^  aud^  feine  ®efa{)r  \^^i,  fo 
tt)ill  id)  bo(^  fiir  mid^  fel)en.  12.  @ie  tDolIen  aber  bod^ 
6ei  biefer  Sdlte  nid^t  in  bie  ©tabt  ge^en?  13.  Unb 
ttjenn  id^  nnr  bei  bem  "Ro^^^^x  fragen  tDoKte,  tDann 
bie  @dt)nle  angef)t?  14.  2BaI)renb  @ie  fid)  anf  biefe 
SBeife  bern^igen,  tt)ill  i(^  nad^  ber  @d)nte  teIepf)onieren. 
15.  Stn  ben  ^;)auptief)rer  natiirlid) ;  tDer  toeife,  ob  fie  nii^t 
\t%i  bortift? 


232  THE    INDECLINABLES,  [Les.  XXX. 

Exercise  30. 

I.  Oh  dear',  who  knows  what  has  "become  of  that 
girl  ?  2.  Of  what  girl  are  you  speaking  then  ? 
3.  As  if  you  did  not  know  !  4.  Why,  my  daughter 
has  either  gone  down  town  or  to  school.  5.  To  us, 
however^,  she  said  nothing  about  it.  6.  Although 
she  had  her  old  dog  with  her,  yet  we  have  great 
fear  3  of  some  accident.  7.  O  pshaw  4!  however 
dangerous  it  may  be  in  the  city,  she  will  take  care 
of  herself  all-right. 5  8.  In  order  that  you  may  be 
saved  from  this  anxiety,  I  will  telephone  to  her 
teacher.  9.  But  what  if  she  has  not  yet  gotten 
to  the  school-building  ?  10.  When  you  telephone, 
do^  ask  the  teacher  when  the  school  begins. 
II.  I  will  not  only  telephone,  but  I  will  go  my- 
self to  the  school.  12.  She  may  be  ever  so  care- 
less, but  she  will  surely?  come  safely  home.  13.  I 
will  telephone  from  the  schoolhouse,  whether  she 
has  been  there  or  is  on  the  way  home.  14.  That 
will  relieve  me  very  (much),  even  though  there  is 
no  real  danger.  15.  Well,  31-suppose  ^you  ^know 
where  the  school  is.  16.  One  must  go  past  the 
court-house.  17.  Even  if  I  did  not  know,  yet  I 
could  ask.  18.  But  a  man,  even  the  best  of  them, 
likes  to  avoid  questions.     19.  How  you  talk!^ 

'  m-)  ®ott  1  ^  aber.  ^  ^^q^i  a  ^^  ^^^8 !  ^  fc^on.  ^  ya,  after 
verb,    ^bod),    ^Sag  @ie  fagenl 


Les.  XXX.]  THE    INDECLINABLES.  233 

Vocabulary  for  the  Conversation. 
bcr  BttJcrf,  purpose.  bcr  ^ori^ft^ttttcl^terp  high- 

bcr  ©(i^nftftcKCf,  author.  school  teacher. 

biC  9Wutterf^rar!^|C,   native  wxitxXtw  Judge. 

tongue.  tJiti^tio,  thorough. 
bic  UnibCtfitot',  university. 

Conversation  29.  —  Dom  Stubtum  ber  5prad?e. 

I.  SBarum  ftubieren  @ie  benn  iiberljaupt  S)eut[(^? 
2.  ^c^  ftubiere  ®eutfc£),  bamit  i^  e^  f^re^en  lerne. 

I.  ©rtuarten  @te  e^  jemate  tDte  ein  S)eutfd}er  ^u  fpred^en  ? 
2.  3)a§  nun  tt)ot;l  nic^t,  allein  \&j  tt)itt  e§  fj)recf)en,  fo  gut 
\i)  fann. 

I.  §aben  @te  benn  gar  feinen  anbent  3^^d  babei? 
2.  g^reilid^,  id^  h)il(  nid^t  nur  fj)re(^en,  fonbern  o.\x6:j  tefen 
lernen. 

I.  Unb  ju  tt)el(^em  3^^de  moHen  ®ie  tefen  fonnen? 
2.  ^d^  tDttt  ja  bie  gro^en  beutfd^en  ©c^riftftetter  in  if^rer 
SKutterf^rad^e  tefen. 

I.  SBotten  @ie  auf  einer  beutfd^en  Untoerfitat  ftubieren  ? 
2.  3d^  mod^te  auf  einer  beutfc^en  Unit>erfitdt  ftubieren, 
ober  bod^  tt)enigften^  in  ®eutfd^lanb  reifen. 

I.  SBei  mem  t)aben  @ie  bi^t)er  3)eutfct)  ftubiert? 

2.  %ij  tjabe  e§  bei  einem  ^od^fc^uUe^rer  au^  ^ari;)arb 
ftubiert. 

I.  @r  tDar  tt)o^t  ein  tud)tiger  Sel)rer? 

2.  So  tt)eit  id^  urteiten  fann,  ift  er  ein  fet^r  guter 
Se^rer. 


234  THE    INDECLINABLES.  [Les.  XXX. 

I.  Unb  @ie  tDoUen  tDciter  ftubieren,  tDaljrenb  @ie  l)ter 
finb? 
2.  "^aWoU,  id)  f)abe  bie  ©^^rad^e  lieber,  je  Idnger  id)  fie 
ftubiere.     Etc.,  etc. 

Reading  30. 

(SJuter  monh,  bu  gei^ft  fo  ftitte 

3n  bie  2lbenbh)Dlfen  l^in ; 
Sift  fo  ru^ig  unb  id)  fu^Ie, 
®a^  ic^  olfjne  9luf)e  bin. 
3:raurig  folgen  meine  Slide  beiner  ftiHen,  beitern '  93a{^n :  ^ 
D  tr)ie  l^art  ift  mein  ©efd)icf e,  ba^  id)  bir  nid^t  folgen  fann ! 

©uter  SKonb,  bir  tr>ill  ic^'^  fagen, 
2Ba^  mein  banged  ^erje  frdnft,^ 
Unb  an  tt)en,  mit  bittern  ^lagen, 
35ie  betriibte^  ©eele  benft. 
©uter  SRonb,  bu  fannft  e^  tt)iffen,  tt)eiIbufo  i;)erfc^tt)iegen5 

bift, 
SBarum  nxeine  2^rdnen  flie^en  unb  mein  ^erj  fo  traurig  ift. 

Sort,  in  jenem  fleinen  Stale, 

SBo  bie  bunfein  Sdume  ftel^n, 
3Ja^'  bei  jenem  2Safferfatte, 
SBirft  bu  eine  §utte  fel)n ; 
©ef^^  burc^  SBdlber,  md)'  unb  ffiiefen,^  blitfe  fanft  hnxd)'^ 

g^enfter  ^in, 
©0  erblitfeft7  bu  glifen,  aHer  3Kdbd;en  ^onigin. 

'  cheerful.  ^  path.  ^  grieves.  *  troubled. 

*  discreet. 


APPENDIX. 


APPENDIX. 


Rules  for  Gender. 

1.  Masculine  are:  Names  of  male  living  beings  un- 
less ending  in  -d)tn  or  -lein,  including  the  noun  agent 
in  -er  :  ^naht,  boy,  Setter,  teacher  ;  names  of  seasons, 
months  and  days,  and  most  stones :  ©ommer,  3[Rontag, 
^iefel,  flint,  ^teg,  gravel ;  polysyllables  in  -tg,  -ic^,  and 
-ing,  ^ortig,  king,  ^ranic^,  crane,  §ering,  herring. 

2.  Feminine  are  :  names  of  female  living  beings  un- 
less ending  in  -c^en  or  -lein  :  %xavL,  woman,  <Qenne,  hen  ; 
most  names  of  trees  and  flowers,  IXtme,  elm,  ©id^e,  oak, 
9telfe,  pink ;  most  polysyllables  ending  in  -e  not  names 
of  male  living  beings  and  not  with  the  prefix  ®e-  ;  all 
polysyllables  in  -ei,  -ie,  -f^ett,  -feit,  -f(i)aft,  -ulb,  -nn^, 
-in,  -if,  -ion,  -tdt  (most  of  which  mark  abstract  nouns): 
^artei,  party,  ^opk,  copy,  ©d^onfjeit,  beauty,  3^ertig!eit, 
skill,  g^reunbfc^aft,  friendship,  ©ebulb,  patience,  ®ul= 
bung,  toleration,  ©dngerin,  singer,  Sogif,  logic,  Seftion, 
lesson,  Jlaritdt,  rarity. 

3.  Neuter  are:  all  nouns  ending  in  -cfjen  and  -lein, 
regardless  of  the  natural  gender,  names  of  metals  and 
of  most  materials,  most  names  of  countries  and  cities, 
the  infinitive  when  used  as  a  substantive,  words  and 
signs  not  properly  nouns  when  used  substantively. 
Most  nouns  with  the  prefix  @e-  if  not  names  of  male 

237 


238  APPENDIX. 

creatures,  most  nouns  in  -ni^,  -turn,  and  -fal :  2Rdb($en^ 
girl,  ^ndblein,  boy,  ©olb,  gold,  SCuc^,  cloth,  ®e^en, 
going,  'i^a^  „2Benn/'  the  '  if.' 

4.  Compound  nouns,  with  very  few  exceptions,  have 
the  gender  of  the  last  element :  ba^  Sanb,  ba§  3Sater[anb. 

Double  Gender,   Double   Declension    Double 
Meaning. 

In  many  nouns,  usually  words  of  less  frequent  occur- 
rence, the  gender  is  not  fully  established.  The  author- 
ity of  any  good  dictionary  may  be  accepted. 
■^  I.  But  when  meanings  are  differentiated  along  with 
gender  or  declension,  attention  must  be  paid  to  the 
latter  also. 

2)ie  2K^),  a/p,  ber  311^,  nightmare, 

®a§  93anb,  ribbon^  bond,  ber  93anb,  volume, 

®a^  33auer,  bird-cage,  ber  Sauer,  peasant, 

®a§  Sunb,  bundle,  ber  33unb,  tie,  knot,  league, 

®a§  Sf)Or,  choir  (part  of  a  church),  ber  6^or,  chorus, 

®ag  ®rbe,  inheritance,  ber  @rbe,  >^<f/r. 

®a§  (also  ber)  ©ift,  poison,  bie  ©ift,  dowry, 

SDa^  (also  ber)  ©e^alt,  salary,  ber  ©ef^alt,  contents, 

®ie  §eibe,  >^^^//^,  ber  §eibe,  heathen. 

®te  §ut,  guard,  ber  §ut,  >^^/. 

Ste  ^unbe,  knowledge,  ber  ^uttbe,  customer. 

®a§  ?!Jlarf,  marrow,  bie  SDtarl,  boundary, 

2)ie  3Jlaft,>^^^r,  ber  3Raft,  ^^^/. 

S)a^  3Keffer,  ^/^^^,  ber  3Keffer,  measurer. 


APPENDIX.  239 

®a^  Slei^,  twig,  ber  SfJei^,  rice, 

2)a^  Sd;ilb,  sign,  ber  6rf)i(b,  j"///<?/^. 

3)ie  ©ee,  i"^^,  ^<:^^//,  ber  <See,  lake. 

®a^  Steuer,  rudder,  bie  6teuer,  /<^.r. 

®a^  ^i\\i,  foundation,  ber  ©tift,/<^. 

®a^  S^au,  r^/^,  ber  %<x\x,  dew. 

Sa§  S'eil,  J-z^^r^,  ber  %^\\,  fraction,  part, 

2)a^  3:^or,  gate,  ber  %Qx,fool. 

®a^  SSerbienft,  /^j',  ber  SSerbienft,  wm/. 

®ag  2Be^r,  //^/«,  bie  SSe^r,  defense. 

2.  The  declension  of  these  words  differs  according 
as  their  gender  throws  them  into  different  classes,  as 
ba^  ©d^ilb,  bie  6c^i(ber,  ber  ©c^ilb,  bie  ©c^ilbe. 

3.  A  considerable  number  of  nouns  have  two  plurals, 
but  without  difference  of  meaning.  In  the  following 
the  difference  in  the  plurals  coincides  with  a  difference 
of  meaning : 

2)ag  Sanb,  tie,  pi.  33anbe ;  ribbon,  pi.  93dnber. 

2)a^  ®ing,  pi.  ®inge,  general  sense ;  pi.  SDinger,  in 
pity  or  contempt. 

®a§  ®eft(^t,  vision,  pi.  ©efi^te,  face,  pi.  ©efid^ter. 

®a§  Sanb,  estate,  pi.  Sanbe ;  country,  pi.  Sdnber. 

Sag  Sic^t,  candle,  pi.  Sic^te ;    light,  pi.  Sic^ter. 

Sag  2Bort,  connected  speech,  pi.  SBorte,  vocables,  pi. 
Sorter. 

®er  SKann,  z^^^i-^^/,  soldier,  pi.  3Kannen;  w^«,  pi. 
9Jldnner. 

2)er  g^rift.  Christian,  pi.  g^riften  ;  ef)rift(ug),  C/^r/>/, 
has  no  pi.,  but  the  singular  is  generally  given  with  full 
Latin  forms :  g^riftug,  S^rifti,  g^rifto,  S^riftum. 


240  APPENDIX. 

Uses  of  the  Article. 

1.  The  definite  article  is  used  in  German  and  not  in 
Eriglish  :  With  abstract  nouns  and  with  names  of  mate- 
rials in  general  assertions :  3)te  Siige  ift  ^ci^Ud^,  False- 
hood is  odious ;  ®ie  Sutter  ift  teuer,  Butter  is  dear — but 
not  in  proverbs,  as  $Rot  brid^t  ©fen.  Need  breaks  iron 
(i.  e.  necessity  knows  no  law)  ;  so  also  with  class  nouns 
in  the  plural :  (£r  Itebt  bie  SSogel,  He  loves  birds  ;  with 
3Sater,  5!)iutter,  and  Christian  names  used  in  the  family : 
5Der  aSater  ift  ba.  Father  is  here;  2Bo  ift  bet  ^arl? 
Where  is  Charles  ?  with  proper  names  when  preceded 

by  an  adjective,  but  not  in  apostrophe :  ber  Heine  ^arl, 
little  Charles,  ber  alte  93lu(^er,  old  BlUcher ;  with  names 
of  seasons,  months  and  days :  ber  ©ommer  ift  l^ier, 
summer  is  here,  ber  ^uli  ift  £)et^,  July  is  hot  —  but  not 
when  the  month  is  preceded  by  a  date,  as  ber  i;)ierte 
3uli,  the  Fourth  of  July,  and  note  here  also  the  absence 
of  preposition  or  genitive ;  with  feminine  names  of 
countries  :  bie  ©d^h)ei§,  Switzerland ;  in  many  idiomatic 
phrases,  as  in  ber  ©d^ule,  in  school,  im  §tmmel,  in 
heaven, 

2.  The  definite  article  serves  often  instead  of  a  pos- 
sessive adjective  with  names  of  parts  of  the  body,  the 
clothing  and  the  kindred  of  the  subject,  because  the 
possession  is  clearly  implied  ;  @r  \jOX  ben  §ut,  ba^  93ein, 
bie  5!Jlutter  tierloren,  he  has  lost  his  hat,  his  leg,  his  mother. 
Sometimes  the  article  is  accompanied  by  a  dative  of 
possession :  ^fjm  ift  bie  ^Btutter  geftorben.  His  mother 
(lit.,  the  mother  to  him)  has  died. 


APPENDIX.  241 

3.  The  definite  article  takes  the  place  of  the  indef- 
inite article  in  the  distributive  expression  =  per :  ^^i)n 
pfennig  ba§  $funb,  ^en  pence  a  pound,  einmal  bte  2BDcf)e, 
once  a  week, 

4.  The  indefinite  article  is  omitted,  though  used  in 
English,  before  the  names  of  occupations  and  ranks 
when  used  to  characterize  in  the  predicate  a  person 
already  identified :  SiJlein  SSruber  ift  ^aufmann,  my  brother 
is  a  merchant. 

Exceptions  to  Class  i,  First  Declension. 

1.  The  following  nouns  have  the  nominative  either 
-e  or  -en,  but  belong  now  to  this  class.  However, 
those  marked  ^  have  also  a  genitive  without  -§,  which 
gives  them  thus  a  possible  weak  declension  throughout : 

g^rieben,  peace,  ^gunfen,  spark,  ©ebanfe(n),  thought, 
©lauben,  belief,  §aufen,  heap,  5iame(n),  name,  ©amen, 
seed,  6rf)aben,  injury,  3Bi((e(n),  will,  SBtHe,  9Jame, 
®eban!e  very  rarely  have  the  nominative  n. 

2.  The  following  add  n  throughout  the  plural : 
93auer,  peasant,  ©ei:)atter,    'cousin,'  ?Ku§!el,  muscle, 

Starf)el,  sting,  3Setter,  cousin,  and  colloquially  ^antojfel, 
slipper,  ©tiefel,  boot, 

3.  Latin  derivatives  in  -or,  take  -§  in  the  singular 
and  may  be  placed  in  this  class,  but  take  -en  in  the 
plural;  ber  ®o!tor,  be§  ®oftor^,  bte  ®o!toren. 

4.  33a^er,  Bavarian,  and  ^ommer,  Pomeranian,  are 
weak  throughout. 


^4^  Al>l>ENmX. 

Exceptions  to  Class  2,  I.  Declension. 

1.  The  following  masculine  monosyllables  have  their 
plural  in  -er,  with  Umlaut,  according  to  class  3  : 

9Kann,  man,  ©ott,  God,  Seib,  body,  ©eift,  spirit, 
i'Surm,  worm,  aStc^t,  wight  (okixd^y  in  SofetDiifit,  villain), 
ffialb^/^r^^j"/,  ©traud^,  /^//j-/^,  ©trau^,  bouquet,  "Oxi,  place, 
9(anb,  r//;/.  The  first  six  can  be  remembered  by  sim- 
ilarity and  contrast  in  meaning. 

2.  The  following  masculine  monosyllables  belong  to 
the  weak  declension ;  they  are  grouped  so  as  to  make 
memorizing  easier:  g^iirft,  prince,  %x\Xii, prince,  ©raf, 
count,  §elb,  hero,  §err,  lord,  sir,  30lenf^,  man,  ©brift. 
Christian,  SRo^r,  Moor,  9larr,  fool,  %^x,  fool,  Sum^), 
vagabond,  ©ec!,  y^/,  ^^/JF,  ^fau,  peacock,  ©!pa^,  sparrow, 
33dr,  bear,  §trt,  shepherd,  ©cfjenf,  cupbearer, 

3.  The  following  masculine  monosyllables  are  strong 
in  the  singular  but  weak  in  the  plural:  ®orn,  thorn, 
SWaft,  ^//^i-/,  Jlert),  nerve,  '^\c\Sm,  psalm,  ©ee,  /(35>^<?,  ©^orn, 
spur,  ©taat,  state,  ©tra^l,  beam,  ray,  3in§,  rent,  interest. 

Exceptions  to  Class  3,  I.  Declension.' 

1 .  The  following  monosyllabic  neuters  take  -e  instead 
of  -er  in  the  plural :  %<x^x,  year,  §aar,  hair,  %<xox,  pair, 
SfJo^r,  reed,  6()or,  choir,  %\^x,  animal,  §eer,  army, 
SJteer,  ocean,  2Bef)r,  dam,  93oot,  boat.  It  will  be  noted 
that  they  have  nearly  all  a  long  vowel  followed  by  -r. 

2.  The  following  are  weak  in  the  plural :  93ett,  bed, 
§er§,  heart,  D^r,  ear.  §er^,  has  the  irregular  singular, 
§er§,  §er§eng,  ^er^en,  ^er;^. 


APPENDIX.  243 

Uses  of  the  Genitive  Case. 
The  Genitive  Case  indicates  i.  possession,  kinship, 
authorship,  general  relationship,  verbal  object  or  sub- 
ject, partitive  relation,  etc.,  mostly  relations  expressed 
by  the  possessive  or  by  *of  '  in  English.  2.  It  is  the 
object  direct  or  indirect  of  certain  verbs,  mostly  reflexive, 
as  frf)onen,  to  spare,  ftc^  erinnern,  to  remember,  bebiirfen, 
to  need,  fid^  fc^dmen,  to  be  ashamed  of,  berauben,  to  de- 
prive of,  3.  The  object  of  certain  adjectives,  as  be= 
it)U^t,  conscious,  fdfjig,  capable,  geben!,  mindful,  i;)ott,  full, 
tt)urbig,  worthy.  4.  The  object  of  a  few  prepositions, 
as  tt)egen,  on  account  of,  tt)df)renb,  during,  ftatt,  instead 
of,  5.  The  Genitive  sometimes  expresses  manner  or 
time,  as  abenb§,  or  be§  2lbenb§,  in  the  evening  (custom- 
ary or  repeated),  meine^  SBiffen^,  within  my  knowledge^ 
leine^tDeg^,  by  no  means. 

Uses  of  the  Dative  Case. 

The  Dative  Case  represents:  i.  the  indirect  object 
of  most  transitive  verbs,  the  one  to  or  for  or  against 
whom  the  action  is  done :  ®er  3Jlann  o^ob  ber  ^^od^ter  ba§ 
Sud^,  The  man  gave  his  daughter  the  book;  2.  the  prin- 
cipal object  of  many  verbs  that  in  English  are  re- 
garded as  transitive  and  govern  some  with  and  some 
without  a  preposition,  the  chief  meanings  being  ap- 
proach, favor,  gratitude,  resemblance  and  their  oppo- 
sites,  as  %i>i  banfe  bem  SKanne,  /  thank  the  man,  3lnt= 
tDorten  ©ie  bem  SSater,  Answer  your  father,  2)a§  33ud^ 
ge^ort  ber  2^od^ter,  The  book  belongs  to  the  daughter ; 


244  APPENDIX. 

3.  a  relation  of  interest  more  remote  than  that  com- 
monly ascribed  to  the  indirect  object,  especially  with 
impersonal  verbs  and  phrases,  @§  ge^t  bem  SSater  gut. 
The  father  is  prospering,  ®ag  bric^t  ber  50tutter  bag  §er§. 
That  is  breaking  mother's  heart  (dative  of  possession), 
5!)ia(f)'  mir  feine  ©ummf^eit.  Commit  no  stupidity  (ethical 
dative)  ;  4.  the  complement  of  many  adjectives  with 
the  meanings  given  in  2  :  5Da§  ift  mir  angene^tn.  That  is 
agreeable  to  me,  ©r  ift  mir  lieb,  I  am  fond  of  him ;  5.  the 
object  of  certain  prepositions,  as  mit,  au^,  nac^,  i:)on,  ^u, 
and  of  certain  others  when  indicating  a  state  of  rest, 
as  in,  t)or,  an,  etc.,  ®er  SSogel  fa^  auf  bem  Saume,  The 
bird  was  sitting  on  the  tree. 

Uses  of  the  Accusative  Case. 

The  Accusative  Case  represents  :  i.  the  direct  object 
of  a  transitive  verb,  @r  {)at  ben  §ut.  He  has  the  hat ; 
and  also,  2.  the  supplementary  object  of  certain  tran- 
sitive verbs,  as  Ief)ren,  nennen,  fragen,  @r  lel^rte  ben 
©driller  bie  3Kufif,  or  @r  leljrte  ben  Srf)uler  fingen.  He 
taught  the  pupil  music,  or  taught  him  to  sing ;  "^(xXi 
nennt  ben  9Jlann  ben  Sufttgmac£)er,  They  call  the  man  the 
merrymaker ;  3.  the  cognate  object  of  certain  verbs, 
(gr  f^ielt  ein  gett)agte§  ©))iel.  He  is  playing  a  bold 
game ;  4.  the  complement  of  certain  adjectives,  which 
may  also  take  the  Genitive,  @g  ift  einen  Scaler  h)ert, 
//  is  worth  a  dollar;  5.  the  object  of  certain  pre- 
positions, as  fiir  and  burd^,  and  of  certain  others 
when  indicating  motion  toward,  as  in,  auf :  ©a^  auf 


APPENDIX.  245 

ben  33aum,  seated  itself  upon  the  tree;  6.  specific  time, 
in  dates,  as  ben  Iften  %vX\,  July  first  (date  of  a 
letter);  7.  definite  measure  of  time,  space,  etc.,  ©^ 
bauert  etne  ©tunbe,  //  lasts  an  hour,  (£r  gebt  etne  3[ReiIe, 
He  is  going  a  mile ;  8.  absolute  construction,  "ti^w,  2^ee 
t)orbei,  tea  (being)  past. 

Note  to  3.  —  Not  every  verb  that  takes  a  double  object  in 
English  does  so  in  German.  'They  chose  him  captain'  is  in 
German  @ic  tDd^Iten  i^n  pm  §au^ttnann. 

Verbs  Governing  the  Genitive  Case. 

1.  With  Genitive  only  :  bebiirfen,  need,  ertDd^nen,  men- 
tion, gebraud^en,  make  use,  gebenfen,  recall,  mention,  ents 
beaten,  dispense  with,  fatten,  wait  for,  la(f)en,  laugh, 
fd)onen,  spare,  f^otten,  mock,  i;)ergeffen,  forget.  All  of 
these  but  f()otten,  Iacf)en  unb  fatten  may  take  the  Ac- 
cusative instead.  (3))otten  and  (a(f)en  take  the  Accusa- 
tive  after  iiber,  and  bcirren  the  Accusative  after  auf . 

2.  With  Genitive  as  indirect  object:  anflagen,  accuse, 
berauben,  rob,  entlaffen,  dimiss,  entfe^en,  remove,  dis- 
possess, uberfuf)ren,  convict,  iiber^eugen,  convince,  t)ers 
fic^em,  assure,  tx)urbtgen,  think  deserving,  and  the 
following  reflexives,  in  which  the  reflexive  pronoun  is 
the  direct  object :  anne^men,  adopt,  take  up  with,  be^ 
bienen,  make  use,  bemdc^ttgen,  get  possession,  ent^ alien, 
abstain,  erbarmen,  take  pity,  freuen,  enjoy,  erinnern, 
remember,  fd^dmen,  be  ashamed,  g^reuen  and  fcl)dmen 
may  also  take  the  second  object  in  the  Accusative  after 
liber,  erinnern  the  Accusative  after  an. 


246  APPENDIX. 

Verbs  Governing  the  Dative  Case. 

1.  Certain  verbs  which  in  English  are  regarded  as 
transitive  take  in  German  the  Dative  Case  only  :  antti:)ors 
ten,  answer^  begegnen,  meet,  banlen,  thank,  bienen,  serve, 
fel^Ien,  lack,  ail,  folgen,  follow,  gef affen,  please,  gel^ord^en, 
obey,  ge^oren,  belong,  gefrf)e^en,  happen,  glaubett,  believe, 
gleid^en,  resemble,  ^elfen,  help,  leib  tun,  grieve  (as  in  @§ 
tut  mir  leib,  I  am  sorry),  nil^en,  serve,  be  of  use,  red^t 
fein,  suit,  fd^aben,  harm,  trauen,  trust,  tt)iberfteE)en, 
resist,  tDo^l  tun,  do  good,  benefit,  and  many  more  with 
similar  or  opposite  meanings. 

2.  The  Dative  Case  as  indirect  object  represents  the 
person  to  or  for  whom  the  action  is  done,  with  verbs 
meaning :  give,  bring,  communicate,  command,  send, 
show,  advise,  and  their  opposites. 

Adjectives  Governing  the  Genitive  Case: 
33ar,  bare,  lacking,  bett)U^t,  conscious,  eingeben!,  mind- 
ful, frei,  free,  rid,  gett)i^,  sure,  lebig,  rid,  md(i;ttg,  master 
of,  in  control,  miibe,  tired,  fatt,  tired,  satiated,  fd^ulbig, 
guilty,  fidget,  certain,  sure,  )o^^,full,  tr)ert,  worth,  h)urbt0, 
worthy. 

Adjectives  Governing  the  Dative  Case: 
aifjnlid^,  similar,  angene{)m,  agreeable,  6e!annt,  familiar, 
known,  banlbar,  grateful,  feinb(ltd^),  hostile,  fremb, 
strange,  unknown,  freunblid^,  friendly,  folgfam,  docile, 
ge^orfam,  obedient,  geit^ad^fen,  equal,  able,  a  match  for, 
gut  (only  in  predicate),  kindly  disposed,  l^olb,  gracious, 


APPENDIX.  247 

favorable^  Ieicf)t,  easy,  Ite6,  dear,  na^e,  near,  fd^lDer, 
difficult,  teuer,  dear,  treu,  /-r^^^/,  iiberlegen,  superior, 
Derbunben,  obliged,  borteil^aft,  advantageous,  ttjert,  ^^^r, 
precious,  tuittfommen,  welcome,  and  many  other  less 
common  adjectives  with  the  general  sense  of  approach, 
appurtenance,  helpfulness,  suitability,  friendliness,  re- 
semblance and  their  opposites. 

Adjectives  Governing  the  Accusative: 
©etDai^r,  aware,  getDO^nt,  accustomed,   Io§,  rid,   fatt, 
sick,  tired,  tt)ert,  worth,  may  take  an  accusative  instead 
of  a  genitive. 

Some  adjectives  with  prepositions  unlike  those  con- 
necting the  same  adjectives  in  English :  ad^tfam  (auf) 
(ace),  attentive  to,  arm  an  (dat.),  poor  in,  aufmerffam 
auf  (ace),  watchful  of,  attentive  to,  bange  t>or  (dat.), 
afraid  of,  befd^dmt  iiber  (ace),  ashamed  of,  beforgt 
um  (ace),  anxious  about,  bUnb  an,  or  auf  (dat.),  blind 
in  (an  eye),  bofe  auf  (ace),  angry  with,  eiferfiid^tig 
auf  (ace),  jealous  of,  em^finblic^  9^9^tt  (ace),  sensitive 
toward,  fd^ig  ju  (dat.),  fit  for,  franf  q,xk  (dat.),  sick  of 
(a  disease),  neibifc^  auf  (ace),  envious  of ,  reid^  o:(\.  (dat.), 
rich  in,  ftd)er  i)or  (dat.),  secure  against,  ftolj  auf  (ace), 
proud  of,  t>erliebt  in  (ace),  in  love  with. 

Prepositions  Governing  the  Genitive  Case. 

3lnftatt,  also  ftatt,  instead  of,  au^er^alb,  outside  of, 
bie^feit^,  on  this  side  of,  ^alber  (with  personal  pronouns 
-^alben,  as  beinet^alben  or  -^alb,  with  be^^alb)  for  the 


248  APPENDIX. 

sake  of,  innerf^alb,  inside  of,  jenfeit^,  on  that  side  of 
fraft,  by  virtue  ^(authority  given),  laut,  according  to 
(a  document  or  command),  Idng^,  alongside  of,  mttte(§, 
luittelft,  by  means  of  (an  instrument),  oberl^alb,  above 
(on  a  stream,  road  or  slope),  feiten^,  071  the  part  of,  tro^, 
in  spite  of,  rarely  in  rivalry  with  (in  this  sense  with 
dative),  "^  ungearf)tet,  despite,  notwithstanding,  unit)eit, 
not  far  f7'07n,  unter^alb,  below,  i)ermoge,  by  virtue  of, 
tDd^renb,  during,  ^tt)egen,  on  account  of,  "^ii^illen,  or 
^  um  .  .  .  iDiCIen,  for  the  sake  of  Those  marked  ^  follow 
their  object. 

Prepositions  Governing  the  Dative  Case. 
2lu^,  out  of,  from,  au^er,  outside  of,  aside  from,  bei, 
by,  near,  at  the  house  of,  \imx[.vc\.,  within  (limits  of  time), 
entgegen,  toward,  against,  gegeniiber,  fci^cing,  opposite, 
gemd^,  according  to,  in  accordance  with,  mit,  with,  to- 
gether with,  \K(X&j,  to,  toward  (not  with  persons),  after 
(sequence),  according  to,  nd(f)ft,  near  to,  nebft,  along 
with,  i7i  addition  to,  famt,  together  with,  fett,  since,  for 
(length  of  time),  i)on,  from^  of  by  (agent  in  passive 
voice),  i\x,  to  (with  persons),  at,  ^utoiber,  in  opposition  to. 

Prepositions  Governing  the  Accusative  Case. 
33i§,  until,  as  far  as  (in  the  latter  sense  more  com- 
monly bi§  x\.(xi),  bi§  auf,  6i§  an,  bi^  %\x),  burdE),  through, 
by  77ieans  of,  fiir,  for  (a  person),  gegen,  against,  of^ne, 
without  (=  not  having),  um,  aroimd,  at  (time  of  day), 
for  (price),  ii;)iber,  against  (opposed  to). 


APPENDIX.  249 

Prepositions  with  either  Dative  or  Accusative. 
When  physical  motion  is  expressed  or  implied  the 
following  prepositions  take  the  accusative,  otherwise 
the  dative.  Sometimes  an  emotion,  a  purpose,  or  a 
tendency  has  the  same  effect  as  a  verb  of  physical  mo- 
tion :  an,  to,  at,  o?i,  auf,  07t,  upon,  to,  toward,  for  (time 
ahead),  ^inter,  behind,  in,  in,  into,  \Kht\i,  beside,  iiber, 
over,  above,  about  (^cause  of  action),  unter,  under,  among, 
i)or,  before,  against  (protection),  ^tt)tf d^en,  between. 

Some  Prepositions  Discriminated. 

1.  Sin:  am  93ette,  at,  by,  or  beside  the  bed  (yet  betm 
Sette  is  much  the  same,  and  neben  bem  93ette,  beside 
or  alongside  the  bed) ;   am  g^ieber  fterben,  to  die  of 

fever  (yet  we  say  i;)or  ^dlte,  or  t)or  ©ram  fterben,  and 
§unger§  fterben,  to  die  of  cold,  grief,  hunger);  an 
einem  ^ieber  leiben,  to  be  ill  of  or  with  a  fever  (but 
oca  ber  ^dlte  or  t)or  Kdlte  leiben) ;  an  ba^  g^enfter  ge^en, 
to  go  to  the  window  (but  also  gum  J^enfter  ge^en, 
not  quite  the  same  assurance  of  getting  there ;  narf) 
bem  g^enfter  gefjen,  to  go  to  or  toward  the'  window ;  bi^ 
(xn  ba^  ^enfter  ge^ea,  to  go  as  far  as  the  window ;  t)or 
ba§  g^enfter  ge^en,  to  go  to,  i.  e.  to  a- place  just  in  front 
of,  the  window, 

2.  At :  if  on  the  other  hand  we  take  English  at, 
which  is  the  commonest  equivalent  of  an,  we  may 
note  these  common  cases  in  which  some  other  pre- 
position must  be  used  to  render  it :  at  three  0^ clock; 
um  3  U^r  ;  at  home,  ju  §aufe  ;   at  these  words,  bei 


250  APPENDIX. 

btefen  SSorten  ;  at  the  post-office^  auf  ber  ^oft ;  at  the 
mark,  nac^  bem  3^^^^  (fcf)te^en)  ;  at  school,  in  ber 
©d^ule ;  to  laugh  at  one,  iiber  jemanb  lad^en  ;  etc. 

3.  Set ;  mit :  bei  is  '  at  the  house  of,'  mit  '  in  company 
with.'  Thus,  (gr  tDar  mit  mir  bei  ^f^nen.  He  was  with 
me  at  your  house.  Note  well :  bei  is  seldom  English 
^by'  (by  means  of  =  burd^  ;  by,  through  the  agency 
of  =  Don)  and  never  the  '  by  '  with  the  agent  in  the 
passive  voice. 

4.  2ltt§ ;  tJOtt :  au^  indicates  source,  reason,  material ; 
Don,  starting-point,  distance,  composition.  Thus,  (Sr 
ift  o^x^  $ari§  unb  fommt  foeben  Don  ^otn.  He  is  from 
Paris  (i.  e.  his  home  is  there)  and  has  just  come  from 
Cologne;  2)a§  ift  Don  §oI^  unb  ift  au§  einem  alten  6tu^I 
gemad^t.  That  is  of  wood  and  is  made  out  of  an  old 
chair  (yet  au§  might  be  used  for  Don  in  this  sentence) ; 
6§  ift  jtoei  5Keilen  Don  bier,  //  is  two  miles  from  here; 
6r  fagt  ba§  Don  mir  au§  Srger,  He  says  thatofmefrom 
vexation. 

5.  Son ;  iibcr  after  f^red^en :  Don  is  more  superficial, 
liber  indicates  more  time  and  attention,  iiber  also  in- 
troduces the  theme  of  conversation.  Thus,  ©ie 
fjjrec^en  Don  3^^^^/  "^^^y  ^^^  speaking  of  you,  ©ie 
f^red^en  iiber  ©ie.  They  are  discussing  you,  ^(x(^vc\. 
©ie  nidE)tg  Don  mir  may  mean  Say  7iothing  of  me,  or 
Say  nothifig from  me. 

6.  Slug;  burc^;  tion:  au§,  the  motive,  burrf;,  the  means, 
Don,  the  deliberate  agent.  Thus,  2)a§  n^urbe  Don  bem 
jungen  5!Jlanneau^  ©iferfud^t,  unb  }tt)ar  burd^.eine  jtoeitc 


APPENDIX.  251 

§anb  gefd^rieBen,  That  was  written  by  the  young  man 
from  jealousy^  and  through  the  hand  of  another, 

.  To,  with  verbs  of  motion :  To  go  to  the  window 
(any  destination  in  or  about  the  building),  (xxi  ba§  ^en= 
fter  (but  see  also  an  in  paragraphs  preceding)  gefeen; 
to  a  neighbor^ s^  ^u  bem  S^ad^bar  ;  to  the  river  (or  any 
point  in  town)  jur  93ru(f  e,  etc. ;  to  the  post-office^  court- 
house, castle,  university,  auf  bie  ^oft,  auf  ba§  3ftatf)aug, 
etc. ;  to  town  (from  without  in  the  country)  jur  ©tabt, 
to  town,  *  down  town '  (to  the  business-part  from  any 
other  part)  in  bie  ©tabt ;  to  Boston,  to  Germany  (any 
destination  larger  than  the  town)  nad^  93ofton,  nad^ 
Seutfd^knb. 

•.  A  sort  of  compound  preposition  is  afforded  by  the 
addition  of  an  adverb  with  related  sense  after  the 
object  of  the  simple  preposition.  Thus,  in§  §au§  l^in^ 
ein,  into  the  house,  axx^  bem  §au§  f)inau§,  out  of  the 
house,  jum  g^enfter  therein,  in  at  the  window,  etc.  The 
latter  word  is  really  a  separable  prefix  with  a  verb  of 
motion  expressed  or  understood.  ®er  SSogel  flog  ^um 
3^enfter  ^inau§.  The  bird  few  out  of  the  window  (lit.  at 
the  window  out),  ^d^  laffe  i^n  x(\6)i  in§  §au§  herein, 
/  shall  7iot  let  him  [come)  into  the  house.  In  the  first 
case  we  may  say  also  flog  au§  bem  g^enfter,  and  in 
the  second  we  may  omit  ^erein,  but  the  sentences  as 
given  are  peculiarly  German,  and  the  idiom  should 
be  learned  and  cultivated. 

».  9tac^  or  auf  before  the  object  with  ju  following 
give  a  more  distinct  notion  of  motion  approaching. 


252  APPENDIX. 

©egen  .  .  .  JU  means  '  facing/  '  in  the  direction  of '  with- 
out implying  motion  towards.     SSon  .  .  .  au§  indicates 
a  source  of  motion  or  base  of  action.    6r  ift  'oon  §au§ 
an^  Iatf)oli)d;,  Ife  is  Catholic  by  birth.     3Son  ^ter  au^ 
fann  man  e^  fe^en.  One  can  see  it  from  here.     3Son  . .  . 
an,  from  . . .  on,  tXber  ba^  ®ad^  If^inau^  or  l^inh)eg.  Out 
above  the  roof.    S)er  §unb  f^rang  an  i^m  t)inauf.  The  dog 
jumped  up  on  him.     §tnter  un§  f)er.  Along  behind  us. 
In  many  cases  there  is  a  choice  of  prepositions,  as  in  English, 
but  by  employing  what  would  appear  to  be  the  very  same  option 
in  another  case    the    learner   might  fall  into    a  ludicrous  error. 
Only  careful  observation    and   continued   practice   will  bring  a 
measure  of  correctness  and  confidence  in  this  field. 

Separable  Prefixes. 

The  separable  prefixes  are  adverbs  with  a  peculiarly 
close  relation  to  the  verb.  They  are  chiefly  adverbs  of 
place,  direction  and  relation,  corresponding  to  prepo- 
sitions with  similar  meanings.  Some  of  the  most  com- 
mon are : 

316,  off,  (XXK,  at,  to,  on,  auf,  up,  upon,  au^,  out,  away, 
bet,  to,  beside,  bai;)on,  away,  ba^in,  thence,  along,  baf)er, 
he7ice,  along,  bar,  there,  out,  ein,  in,  into,  ^X[X<^|^<^|^XK,  toward, 
fort,  forth,  away,  ^er,  hither,  \jm,  thither,  along,  lo§, 
loose,  free,  mit,  with,  along,  nad^,  after,  along  after, 
nteber,  down,  Dor,  before,  forth,  Dorbet,  past,  tt)eg,  off, 
away,  tt)eiter,  on,  farther,  ^u,  to,  toward,  ^uriicf,  backy 
gufammen,  together. 

Most  of  these  may  further  be  compounded  with  the 
adverbial  particles  of  direction,  l^in?,  away  from  the 


APPENDIX.  253 

speaker,  and  ^er=,  toward  the  speaker,  as  l^ina6fef)en,  to 
look  down  from  where  the  speaker  is,  l)erabfe^en,  to 
look  down  to  where  the  speaker  is.  When  so  com^ 
pounded  the  resultant  verb  has  usually  a  literal  sense, 
while  the  simple  compounds  with  the  above  words 
often  have  peculiar  idiomatic  meanings. 


Verbs  both  Separable  and  Inseparable. 

The  particles  burcf),  urn,  iiber,  unter,  Winter,  Wihtx, 
tDteber,  are  compounded  with  a  large  number  of  verbs, 
especially  verbs  of  motion. 

2)ttr(i^  in  the  separable  compounds  means  through  = 
past,  as  through  a  membrane,  a  barrier,  past  a  point ; 
the  inseparable  burd^  means  through,  from  e?id  to  end, 
all  over,  thoroughly.  ®er  ^onig  reifte  burrf).  The  king 
passed  through  (i.  e.  the  village),  but  ®er  ^ontc^  burd;= 
reifte  ba§  Sanb,  The  king  traveled  over,  or  entirely  across 
the  country. 

Urn  in  separables  means  about,  circuitously ,  or,  in 
transitive  verbs,  over,  over  again,  upside  down;  the 
inseparable  um  makes  transitives  with  the  meaning 
round  about ,  or  to  surround  with.  "^(xxK  ging  tDeit  um. 
They  went  far  around ;  ©d^reibe  ba§  um,  re-write  that ; 
2)er  ^agen  iDurbe  um'gefe^rt.  The  wagon  was  upset. 
SKanumging'  ben  33efe^(,  They  evaded  the  order ;  ©ie  um= 
ftellten  ben  3Bagen,  They  surrounded  the  wagon;  ®a§ 
©efic^t,  t>on  ^e((en  §aaren  umleuc^' tet.  The  face  sur- 
rounded by  the  light  of  her  bright  hair. 


254  APPENDIX. 

ilBer,  separable,  means  across^  over  (remaining),  and 
over  (the  edge) ;  inseparable  it  means  out-  (excess,  sur- 
passing), over  (again),  and  over  (all  over).  SOBir  fuf^ren 
ben  3Kann  iiber,  we  took  the  man  across ;  but  28ir  uber= 
fu^'ren  ben  "^o^xv^,  we  overran  the  man.  U'bergie^en, 
spill,  iibergie'^en,  suffuse,  douse,  flood;  ii'berge^en,  go 
over  or  across,  iiberge^'en,  omit,  neglect. 

Uttter,  separable,  means  under,  on  the  under  side ; 
inseparable  it  means  i7i  between,  separating,  lXn'ter= 
fd^Iagen,  turn  under y  fold  (the  arms),  unterfd^la' gen, 
intercept,  embezzle;  un' terJ^ alien,  hold  under,  \xx\XtxS)<:!Xi^XK, 
entertain. 

Winter  and  Intber  occur  as  separables  only  once  or 
twice  each.  2Bteber  occurs  as  inseparable  only  once ; 
iDte'ber^oIen,/?/^/^  again ;  tt)teber^o'Ien,  repeat. 

Coordinating  Connectives, 
Followed  by  the  normal  or  direct  order : 

abet,  but=  however,  nevertheless,  may  have  any  place 
that  may  be  taken  by  'however ' :  Qc^  bleibe  l^ier,  aber 
er  ge^t  fjeim,  or  er  aber  gefjt  l^eim,  I  remain  here,  but 
he  is  going  home. 

aHettt,  but{^=^only)^  same  as  aber,  introduces  after- 
thought or  obstacle ;  may  stand,  with  this  meaning, 
only  at  beginning  of  clause ;  elsewhere  it  means  alone. 

"htXiViffor,  expressing  an  added  or  parenthetic  reason. 

entttieber,  either,  only  correlative  with  ober,  or ;  not  to 
be  used  as  adverb,  as  He  is  not  going  either  (6r  ge(;t 


APPENDIX.  255 

and)  nid^t),  nor  as  pronoun,  as  He  is  not  either  (i.  e. 
neither  of  two)  (@r  ift  f  eine§  t)on  beiben) ;  sometimes 
followed  by  inversion. 

ober,  or^  correlative  to  enth)eber,  sometimes  otherwise 
(=  fottft),  as  Do  this,  or  I  go  (2^ue  ba^,  ober  id^  gel^e). 

fottbcrtl,  ^/^/  (<?;^  //^<f  contrary),  especially  when  cor- 
relative in  ni^t  nur . .  .  fonbern  aud^  ;  always  preceded 
by  a  negative,  as  9iid^t  td^,  fonbern  mein  Sruber  tt)ar 
e§,  //  o/^i*  «^/  /,  but  my  brother ;  @r  ^at  ba§  ntd^t 
gefagt,  fonbern  ba§  ©egenteil,  ZT^  ^/^  ;/^/  say  that,  but 
the  opposite. 

ttttb,  and.  When  the  subject  of  a  preceding  clause  is 
resumed  in  the  shape  of  a  pronoun,  inversion  may 
follow  u  n  b :  2)er  5iJlann  ift  ba  gett)efen,  unb  ^at  berfelbe 
nad^  bit  gefragt.  The  man  was  here  and  asked  after 
you. 

ttiebcr,  neither,  negative  of  enttt)eber.  After  nod^,  nor, 
the  correlative  to  tt)eber,  inversion  is  customary,  as 
aSeber  \&)  \o(xx  (or  it)ar  ic^)  ba,  nod^  \joX  er  nttd^  einge* 
laben,  neither  was  I  there,  nor  did  he  invite  me. 

Subordinating  Conjunctions. 

The  following  are  the  commonest  subordinating  con- 
junctions, requiring  the  transposed  order : 

ate,  when  with  past  tenses,  sometimes  as  (see  tt)enn); 
as  after  comparisons  of  equality  (better  \d\^) ;  than  after 
comparatives ;  ate  ob,  as  if  ate  tt)enn,  as  if  or  as  when, 
ate  h)ie,  as  when  ;  ate  followed  by  inversion,  the  same, 
ate  l^dtte  er  gefagt,  as  if  he  had  said. 


256  APPENDIX. 

bx^f  until;  sometimes  bi§  ba^. 

ba  (distinguish  from  ba  meaning  there  by  position 
of  the  verb)  where^  when^  since  (inasmuch  as);  ber  Drt, 
ba  \i)  i^n  fa^,  the  place  where  I  saw  him ;  ber  ^ag,  ba 
id^  if)n  fa^,  the  day  when  I  saw  him  ;  2)a  icf)  i^n  fa^,  fo 
tDei^  id^,  bajs  er  ba  toar,  i"/;^^^  I  saiv  him^  I  know  he  was 
there. 

bantit  (distinguish  from  bamit  meaning  therewith  by- 
position  of  the  verb),  in  order  that ;  with  the  same 
meaning  though  less  frequent,  ba^,  fo  ba^,  auf  ba^,  yxm 
ba^. 

ba§,  ihat^  introducing  indirect  statements,  may  be 
omitted,  whereupon  the  dependent  clause  has  the  nor- 
mal order ;  see  also  bamit ;  "^o!^  or  bamit  .  .  .  rtic^t  is 
often  the  rendering  of  lest, 

cl^C  (note  that  this  is  neither  preposition  nor  adverb) 
before. 

ittbem,  while,  just  as,  since  (causal)  (distinguish  from 
inbem  meaning^/  that  point),  often,  especially  in  stage 
directions,  to  be  suppressed  in  favor  of  the  mere  present 
participle :  3Ka£  (inbem  er  i^n  gro^  anfief^t).  Max  {look- 
ing at  him  with  wide  open  eyes). 

tttbc^,  tttbeffett,  sanie  as  inbem,  but  less  frequent. 

jc  .  .  .  ,  befto,  the  .  .  .  ,  the .  . .  ,  with  comparatives ;  ^e 
me^r  ©ie  gegen  if)n  fagen/  befto  fefter  i)alte  xij  mi)  an  i^n. 
The  more  you  say  against  him  the  closer  I  will  hold  to 
him.  Note  that  the  transposed  order  comes  after  je 
only,  the  inverted  after  befto. 


APPENDIX.  257 

nai^t^tnif  after  (distinguish  from  nad^bem  meaning 
afterward  by  the  position  of  the  verb). 

06,  whether^  introduces  indirect  and  implied  ques- 
tions (do  not  use  tt)enn  for  this  purpose).  D6  id^  i^n 
fenne  ?  ( You  ask)  whether  I  know  him  ?  OhtOts\)\f  06= 
fc^Ott,  otglc^p  or  06  .  ♦  ♦  fd^on,  06  ♦  ♦  ♦  gl^^r  although, 
d6  ♦  ♦  ♦  avii),  even  though,  ob  \&j  if^n  aud^  ^affe,  ^2^^;^ 
though  I  hate  him.  Also  with  about  same  meaning: 
Xotwxi  gleid^,  toenn  .  .  .  fc^on,  tt)enn  .  .  .  o<\xi),  and  tt)te' 

fcitp  fettbem,  i'///<r<?  (temporal).  @eit  is  also  a  preposi- 
tion, and  feitbem  an  adverb;  distinguish  by  construc- 
tion. 

fo  .  .  .  ^Vii^^  however . . .  /  fo  gro^  er  auc^  tft,  however 
great  he  is,  or  great  as  he  is, 

foBalb,  fotnie^  fo  oft  (without  following  tt)te),  as  soon 
as ;  ©obalb  mein  ©of)n  herein  ift.  As  soon  as  my  son  has 
entered. 

tro^bem^  notwithstanding  {the  fact  that)  ;  often  tro|= 
bem,  ba^. 

Itid^rcttb,  while  (temporal) ;  n)d^renb  xi)  ba  fa^,  during 
the  time  I  was  sitting  there ;  tDte  x&j  ba  fa^,  at  some 
moment  while  I  was  sitting  there  ;  al§  id^  mtd^  f^^te,  as 
I  took  my  seat. 

toann^  when,  introduces  indirect  questions  only  ;  3Kan 
fragte,  tt)ann  h)ir  gef^en,  7%o^  asked  when  we  were  going ; 
?^ragen  ©ie,  tt)enn  ©ie  ge^en.  Ask  when  you  go ;  g^ragen 
©ie,  06  fie  get^en.  Ask  whether  they  are  going. 


258  APPENDIX. 

totnrtf  when^  with  present  and  future  tenses  (compare 
aB  and  tt)ann),  whenever,  with  any  tense,  2Bir  Iplauberten 
it) enn  tt)ir  fufjren.  We  talked  when{ever)  we  drove ;  if, 
with  any  tense,  usually  subjunctive  mode  if  the  tense 
is  past;  2Bir  gef^en,  lt)enn  tx)ir  fonnen,  either  We  shall  go 
if  we  can,  or  We  go  whenever  we  can  ;  @r  ginge,  it) enn 
er  fonnte.  He  would  go  if  he  could.  2Benn  fd^on,  etc., 
see  ob. 

mcil,  because  (the  meaning  while  is  archaic,  and  the 
student  should  be  cautioned  against  employing  it). 

mic^  how  in  indirect  questions,  as  after  comparisons 
of  equality,  ©r  fingt  eben  fo  gut,  tt)te  ic^  j^iele.  He  sings 
as  well  as  I  play  ;  than  (not  good  usage  :  see  al§) ;  as, 
while  (temporal)  see  tt)d^renb  ;  tDie  .  ,  .  au(^,  however .  .  . 
'(vk  gut  er  and)  ftngt,  however  well  he  sings. 

UiO,  where  in  indirect  questions,  tDO  .  .  .  aud^,  where- 
ever,  in  case  that  (colloquial)  ;  ti:)ol^in,  whither^  tPOl^er, 
whence,  in  indirect  questions. 


VERBS  OF  THE  OLD  CONJUGATION. 


Forms  not  given  go  according  to  the  New  Conjugation.  In  general,  those 
verbs  are  omitted  vvhich  only  occasionally  have  forms  of  the  Old  Conjugation. 
Principal  parts  are  in  full-faced  type.  The  definition,  if  etyraologically  re- 
lated, is  in  Italics.  A  hyphen  prefixed  indicates  that  the  verb  only  occurs  with 
a  prefix.  In  the  Present,  the  two  forms  given  are  the  second  and  third  persons 
singular  of  the  Indicative.  In  the  Preterit,  the  upper  form  is  the  Indicative,  the 
lower  the  Subjunctive.  Forms  in  parenthesis  are  less  common,  or  poetical. 
Compounds  are  to  be  sought  under  the  simple  verb. 


Infinitive. 


Present. 
2.  3.  p.  sg. 


Preterit. 
Indie.  Subjunc. 


Impera- 
tive. 


Past 
Participle. 


haden 

bake 
-bdren  1 

beifein 

bite 
bergen 

hide 
htvUtn 

burst 
bicQen 

bend 
bieten 

bid,  offer 
binben 

bind 
bitten 

beg 
blafcii 

blow 
bleiben 

remain 
hUidyen 

bleach 
hvaten 

roast 


birgft 

tXXQt 

tntfleft 
birft 


felafeft 
blafi 


bratft 
brot 


but 

bufe 
-bar 

-bare 

m 

biffc 
havQ 

(bdr^e),  biirgc 
barfl,  hovil 

(barfte),  b5rfte 
bog 

bbgc 
bat 

UU 
banb 

bdnbe 
bat 

tixte 
blk$ 

bliefe 
blicb 

bliebc 
bltd) 

brfet 

briete 


bier 


birg 
birft 


gebacfen 

-boreit 

gebiffen 

QcbovQen 

geborflett 

gebogeit 

geboten 

Qtbunten 

Qtbettn 

geblafen 

gebUeben 

9ebl{d)eit 

gebraten 


I  Only  in  gebdrett,  "bear,"  "bring  forth." 


259 


26o 


VERBS   OF   THE   OLD   CONJUGATION. 


Infinitive. 


Present. 

2.  3.  p.  Sg. 


Preterit. 
Indie.  Subjunc. 


Impera- 
tive. 


Past 
Participle. 


bred)ett 

break 

-bcrbctt  ^ 

tingen 

hire 
trefd)en 

thresh 

bringen 

crowd 
efTen 

eat 
fabrett 

go 
fallen 

fall 
fattgen 

catch,  seize 
fed)ten 

fight 
-fe^Uti  * 

finbett 

find 
fled)ten 

braid 
flei^en 

be  diligent 
fliegen 

fly 

fltef)cn 
flee 


hum 


-birbft 
-birbt 


brijc^eft 
brifd^t 


brad) 

br(i(^e 
-bieb 

-bielie 
-barb 

-bttrbe 
bung  (bang) 

biinge 
(brafd)),  brofd) 

(brajc^e),  brofd^e 
-bro# 

-brbffc 
brang 

brangc 
afl 

fubr 

ftcl 

flele 
ftng  (fteng) 

flnge  (fienge) 
fod)t 

fod^tc 
faftl 

(-fa^ic),  -fo^ic 

fanb 

fanbe 
flo  d)t 

flbd^tc 

ftiffe 
fiog 

fiob 


brid& 


-birb 


brifd^ 


9ebrod)en 

-btebcn 

-borben 

gebungen 

gebrofd)en 

-brofTen 

gebrungen 

gcgeffett 

gefabren 

gefaden 

gefangeit 

gefod)tett 

-foblen 

gefunben 

gefiod)ten 

gefiifTen 

geflogrn 

gcflobett 


'  Only  in  gebeibcn,  "thrive."  2  Only  in  oerberben,  "perish." 

3  Only  in  oerbrie^en,  "vex." 

4  Only  in  befcbUlt^  '"command,"  and  empfcli^Uttf  "commend." 


VERBS    OF    THE    OLD    CONJUGATION. 


261 


Present. 
2.  3.  p.  sg. 


Preterit. 
Indie.  Subjunc. 


Impera- 
tive. 


Past 
Participle. 


flieflen 

flew 
fragen 

ask 
frefFen 

eat 
frferen 

freeze 
9areu 

ferment 
geben 

give 
gebeti 

go 
gdtett 

have  value 

-gefFctt ' 

pour 
-gfntieti2 

be  tike 
glelten 

glide 
gitmmen 

glimmer 
grabctt 

dig 

seize 
balten 

liold 
bangen 

hang 
hauen 

cut,  chop 


(fragft) 

(frdgt) 
ftiffe[t 


filbt(giebft) 
gibt  (giebt) 


giltfl 
gilt 
-giffeft 


grab  ft 
grabt 


^altft 
pit 

pngft 
pngt 


fibfjc 
(frug) 
(frugc) 

fraBe 
fror 
frbrc 

QOV 

gijre 
gab 

gdbe 
ging  (gteng) 

gingc  (gienge) 
gait 

(gdlte),  gBlte 

-gd§c 

goffe 
-gann 

(-ganneX  -gonne 
BUdy 
glitfie 

gittt 

glitte 
glomm 

glbmme 
grub 

griibe 
flHff 

griffc 
bielt 

^icltc 
bing  (bleng) 

^ingc  (gienge) 
bieb 

t)tcbe 


fri§ 


gib  (gicb) 


gilt 


geflofTen 

gcfragt 

gefreffen 

gefroren 

gegoren 

gegeben 

gegangcn 

gegolten 

-gefTrtt 

gcgoffen 

-gonnen 

gegHd)en 

geglftten 

grglommen 

gegraben 

gegrlffen 

gebaltett 

gebangrn 

gebauen 


»  Only  in  oergefTen,  "forget." 


a  Only  in  bcginnen,  "  begin." 


262 


VERBS    OF    THE    OLD    CONJUGATION. 


Infinitive. 


Present. 
2.  3.  p.  sg. 


Preterit. 
Indie.  Subjunc. 


Impera- 
tive. 


Past 
Participle. 


bebeit 

heave,  raise 

be  called 
^clfctt 

help 
felfen 

chide 

choose 
lUeben 

cleave 
tlimmen 

climb 
tlitiQen 

sound 
fneifen 

pinch 
tncipen 

pinch 
{omnten 

come 
tviedycn 

creep 
{ixvtn 

choose 
laten 

load,  invite 
laffeit 

let,  cause 
laufen 

run 
Uihen 

suffer 
leil^en 

lend 
lefen 

read 

lie 


(fo'.nmft) 
(fbmmt) 


(tabft) 
(labt) 
laiieft 

im 

lauffi 

Iftuft 


liejcft 
lieft 


hob,  huh 

l)obe,  t)Ut)e 

balf 

fiffe 
toi 

lofe 
(lob 

flobe 
ftomm 

flommc 
{Icing 

flange. 
fniff 

Iniffc 
tnipp 

fam 

Idntc 
(rod) 

tv'66)e 
(or 

fbre 
lub 

lUbe 
Hefl 

licfec 
Ifef 

liefe 
iitt 

littc 
Ueb 

Itcl)e 
(ad 

la]e 
lag 

Ifige 


i^ilf 


Iie§ 


Qcl)ohen 

geljei^cn 

gebolfett 

gefiffen 

ge(ofen 

gedoben 

gedommen 

gedungen 

gc(niffrit 

gedtippen 

gelommen 

ge(rocl)(n 

ge(oren 

gelaben 

gelaffen 

gelaufen 

gelitten 

geliefien 

gelefen 

gelegen 


VERBS    OF    THE    OLD    CONJUGATION. 


263 


Present. 
2. 3.  p.  sg. 


Preterit. 
Indie.  Subjunc. 


Impera- 
tive. 


Past 
Participle. 


-lieven ' 
-Ungen^ 

Iofd)en 

go  out  (of  a  fire) 
lugen 

iie 
maf)len 

grind 
mtiten 

avoid 
me  If  en 

milk 
mefTctt 

mete,  measure 
nef)mtn 

take 
-ncfen  3 

pitifen 

whistle,  pipe 
Pdegen 

nurse,  be  accus- 
tomed 
preifeit 

praise 
queUen 

flow  forth 
rdcl)en 

avenge 
tattn 

advise 
reiben 

rub 


lifc^cft 


tnat)lt 


(millfl) 
(miltt) 

mlffcft 
tnifet 

nimmft 
nimmt 


quittft 
qutUt 


ratft 
rat 


-lor 

-I5re 
-lang 

-laugc 
lofd) 

imt 

log 

iht 

mubl 

mii^lc 
mieb 

miebc 
molt 

m5lfe 

ma^c 
nabm 

na^me 
-nad 

-niifc 
-nofi 

ttbffe 
Pftff 

Pfiffe 
(fflaQ)  pfliog 

pflagc 
pried 

pdcfe 
quod 

qubUe 
(rod)) 

(rbc^O 
riet 

rietc 
rieb 

riebc 


li|c^ 


(mill) 

mife 

nimm 


quia 


-loren 

-lutiQtn 

9eIofd)en 

aelogcn 

gemablen 

gemieben 

gemoKen 

ecmefTett 

Qcnommtn 

-nefeti 

-nofFen 

gcpftffett 

aepflogen 

gepriefen 

Qcquotltn 

gerod)en 

Qttattn 

gerieben 


*  Only  in  oerlteren,  "  lose." 

2  Only  in  geltngen,  "succeed,"  and  mi^Ungett,  "fail." 

3  Only  in  genefen,  "get  well."  4  Only  in  gettieflcn,  "enjoy.* 


264 


VERBS    OF    THE    OLD    CONJUGATION. 


Infinitive. 


Present. 
2. 3-  p.  sg. 


Preterit, 
Indie.  Subjunc. 


Impera- 
tive. 


Past 
Participle. 


veifien 

tear 
rcltcii 

ride 
viedycn 

smell 
ringcit 

wring,  wrestle 
rinncn 

run 
rufeii 

call 
faufeti 

swill,  drink 
faugen 

suck 
fd)affen 

create 

resound 

fd)eiben 

separate 
id)tinen 

appear 
fd)f(ten 

scold 
fd)crcn 

shear 
fd).cben 

shoue 
fd)te^eit 

shoot 
fd)  in  be  It 

flay 
fd)lafen 

sleep 


fttufft 
jauft 


-fdjicljt 


|d)iltft 

|d)ierft 
jdjiert 


fc^lafft 
fd)lQft 


via 

tifje 
vitt 

ritte 
rod) 

rang 

rttnge 
ranit 

ranne,  ronne 
rtcf 

riefc 
(off 

foffe 
fog 

fd)uff 

fd)on 

jd^oUe 
-fdjab 

fd)icb 

fd)tcn 

fd^iene 
fd)alt 

ici^blte 
fd)or 

Wove 
fdjob  ] 

fd)0« 

fct)offe 
fd)unb 

j(i)Unbc 
fd)Iief 

fd)liefe 


fd}ilt 
|d)ier 


gcriffcn 
geritten 
gerod)en 
gerungett 
geronnen 
gerufen 
gcfoffen 
gefogen 
0efd)affen 
gefd)onen 
-fd)cf)en 
gefd)teben 
gefd)tenen 
gefd)0lten 
gefd)oren 
gefd)oben 
gefdjofTcn 
gefd)unben 
gefd)lafen 


X  Only  in  Q^id)ii)cn,  "happen." 


VERBS    OF    THE    OLD    CONJUGATION. 


265 


Infinitive. 


Present. 
2.  3.  p.  sg 


Preterit. 
Indie   Subjunc. 


Impera 
tive. 


Past 
Participle. 


strike 
idyltidycn 

slink,  sneak 
fd)lctfcn 

whet 
fcl)lei#en 

slit,  split 
fcl)ltefen 

slip,  creep 
fcl)lief|en 

shut 
idyXxtiQtn 

entwine,    swal- 
low, sling 
fd)meij|en 

smite 
fd)mel)en 

melt 
fd)naubeti 

snuffy  snort 
fd)neitett 

cut 
idyvanhtn 

screw 
fd)redPen 

be  frightened 
fd)reiben 

write 
fd)rctcti 

cry  out 
fd)reiten 

stride 
fd)n>dirMt 

ulcerate 


fcbwefgen 

be  silent 
idyvotWtn 


fd^mtljeft 
fc^milat 


fdiricfft 


fc^tDittft 


fd)lug 

fdilUge 
fd)Iid) 

fcC)«ff 
fcl)loff 

wm 

fd)Io# 
fcl)Iang 

fc^Iange 
fd)mi^ 

fd^miffc 
fd)moI| 

fc^molgc 
fd)nob 

fd)nitt 

fd^nitte 
fdjrob 

yc^robe 
fd)raf 

fc^rafe 
fd)r<cb 

fd^riebe 
fd)rle 

fd^rice 
fd)rftt 

fd^ritte 
fd)n>or 
(fdjTOMr) 

(fd^tDorc) 

jd^ttjUrc 
fd)n>{e() 

jd^toiege 
fd)won 


jc^mila 


fd^rtd 


fc^tt)iU 


gcfdjiaacn 
0efd)lid)en 
OCfd)Iiflfcn 
gefd)Uf7en 
gefd)loffcn 
0cfd)loffcn 
gefd)lun9en 

9cfd)m<ffen 

9efd)moI|en 

9efd)noben 

9efd)nUten 

gefdirobett 

9efd)ro(fen 

9efd)r{eben 

9efd)rieen 

9efd)rhten 

9efd)n>iegen 
9efd)n>onett 


266 


VERBS    OF    THE    OLD    CONJUGATION. 


Present. 
2. 3.  p.  sg. 


Preterit. 
Indie.  Subjunc. 


Impera- 
tive. 


Past 
Participle. 


idytoimmen 

swim 

idyminten 
disappear 

idyroitiQcn 
swing 

idytobten 
swear 


see 
fctit 

be 
ficfccn 

seethe,  boil 
fingen 

sing 
UtiUn 

sinft 
ftnnen 

think 
ft^ett 

sit 
fpeiett 

spew 
fpintten 

spin 
fplciflcn 

split) 
fpred)en 

speafi 
fpricflci* 

sprout 
fpringen 

spring,  jump 
fted)en 

prick 
flecfen 

stick 


fiel)ft 
1iet)t 


fpridift 
tpri(!^t 


Mm 

fticft 


(fd^ioamme), 

fd)n)anb 

fdjroaubc 
fd)n>attc) 

idyxoov, 
idywnt 

(f(3^tt)Brc), 
fd^toitre 
fal) 

roar 

fott 

flebetc 
fang 

fange 
fanf 

fdttle 
fann 

(^anne),  j5nne 
fa« 

tpicc 
fpann 

(fpanne),  jpbnne 
fpUJi 

fpliffe 
fpr  ad) 

fprad^e 
fpro# 

tprSffe 
(prang 

jprcinge 
ftad) 

ftSd^e 
flaf 

fJMe 


fei 


fprid) 


fticf 


gefd)n>ommen 

gefd)n>unben 
gefd)n)ungen 
gefd)ti>oren 

gcfeften 

getoefcn 

gefotten 

gcfungeti 

gefunfen 

gefonnen 

gefcffcn 

gefpfccn 

gefponnen 

gcfplfffen 

gefprod)en 

gefproffcn 

gefprungen 

gef}od)en 

geflocfen 


VERBS    OF    THE    OLD    CONJUGATION. 


267 


Present 
2.  3.  p.  sg 


Preterit 
Indie   Subjunc. 


Impera- 


Past 
Participle. 


stand 
fleblcn 

steal 
f^etgen 

ascend 
^erben 

die 
flieben 

fly,  scatter 
iiinten 

stink 

push 
flretd)en 

stroke,  graze 
fire  iten 

dispute,  strive 

bear,  carry 
treffett 

hit 
tretben 

drive 
treten 

tread 
triefen 

drip 
itinUn 

drink 
tvUQtn 

deceive 

txm 

do 
toad)fen 

wax,  grow 

weigh 

toaidyen 

wash 


ftie^lfi 
ftie^It 


fttrbfl 
ftirbt 


ftbfeefl 

mt 


trdflfi 
tragt 

triffft 
trifft 


trittft 
tritt 


tuft 
tut 

toac^fi 


toafc^eft 
toam 


flattb 

flanbe(ftiinbe) 

flieg 

ftiege 
flarb 

(ftarbe),  ftUrbe 
flob 

ftfibc 
ftanl 

flanfe 

men 

flteBc 
firid) 

ftrit^e 
Hvitt 

flritte 
trug 

trUgc 
tvai 

trSfe 
trieb 

triebe 
trat 

irate 
trof? 

trSffe 
tvant 

tranle 
trog 

trdge 
iai 

tate 

toud)d 

miid^fe 
tt>og 

toiigc 
toufd) 

tt)uj(!^e 


ftie^l 


ftirb 


trift 


tritt 


9ef)ant)en 

gefloblen 

getlUgen 

gefiorben 

gefloben 

geflunfen 

gefiofjcn 

geflrid)en 

geflritten 

getragen 

getrofFcn 

getriebett 

getreten 

getroffett 

getrunfen 

getrogen 

getan 

getoac^fett 

getoogett 

getDafc^en 


268 


VERBS    OF   THE    OLD    CONJUGATION. 


Infinitive. 


Present. 

2.  3.  p.  Sg. 


Preterit. 
Indie.  Subjunc. 


Impera- 
tive. 


Past 
Participlr. 


toeben 

weave 
-toegett ' 

n»eid)en 

yield 
tocifcn 

point  out 
toerben 

woo 
toerben 

become 
werfen 

throw 
totegen 

weigh 
xointcn 

wind 
-mtnnen  * 

geibett 

accuse 
gicbcn 

move,  draw 
gwingeti 

force 


toirbft 
toirbt 

totrft 
tt)irb 

toirfft 
tolrft 


n>ob 

tt)obe 

-WOQ 

-tuogc 
tDtd) 

loic^c 
toted 

toicfe 
waxh 

tDurbc 
wavt,  tourbe 

tourbe 
warf 

UJiirfc 

toogc 
wanb 

ttjanbe 
toann 

(todnneX-roonne 
Jicb 

83gc 
jtoattg 

atDonge 


h)irb 


loirf 


fiewoben 

-mogen 

getotc^en 

oen>iefen 

0en>orben 

getDorben 

getoorfen 

getDogen 

getounben 

-wonnen 

gejieben 

gejogen 

gestoungen 


*  Only  in  bctoegett,  "induce  "  2  Only  in  getoinnetl,  "win.' 


VERBS  OF  THE  NEW  CONJUGATION.     269 

IRREGULAR  VERBS  OF  THE  NEW  CONJUGATION. 

Forms  not  given  are  regular. 


Infinitive. 

Present. 

Preterit. 

Impera- 

Past 

2. 3  p.  sg. 

Indie.  Subjunc. 

tive. 

Participle. 

brettnen 

braiinte 

(jebrantit 

burn 

brenntc 

brtngen 

brad)t6 

Qthxadyi 

bring 

bra(t)tc 

benten 

bacl)te 

9ebaci)t 

thmk 

bdc^te 

burfen 

barf  ft 

burftc 

wanting 

gcburft  * 

be  permitted 

barf  I 

burfte 

babcti 

^afl 

I)atte 

gebabt 

have 

^at 

l)attc 

(ennen 

(annte 

gefannt 

know 

tenntc 

(pitnen 

f  anil  ft 

(onnte 

wanting 

gcfonnt^ 

can 

fonn  I 

!5nntc 

ntogen 

magft 

mocl)tc 

wanting 

gcmodjt* 

may,  like 

magi 

mbd^te 

tniiffen 

mufet 

mu^tc 

wanting 

ecmufft  2 

must 

mufei 

miifete 

ttentien 

naniite 

genannt 

natne 

nenntc 

reimen 

raitnte 

-^ 

(jerannt 

run 
fcnbrn 

send 

rennete 
fanbte 

fenbete 

/  gefanbt 
{ gcfcnbet 

foneii 

foUft 

fontc 

wanting 

9cfc»nt2 

shall 
toenben 

turn 

foHi 

foflte 
wanbte 

rocubete 

rgemanbt 
( getoenbet 

IDiffCIl 

tceifet 

rou^tc 

getou^t 

know 

tDeifei 

roiifetc 

tooHen 

roinft 

iDOtlte 

toolle 

gemont 

will 

toiUi 

woflte 

I  Also,  ist  person  singular.  2  Instead  of  the  participle,  the  infinitive  is 
used  to  form  the  compound  tenses  of  the  "  modal  auxiliaries,"  when  an  infinitive 
depends  upon  the  verb. 


ALPHABET  IN  GERMAN  SCRIPT. 

The  same  written  character  we  use  is  taught  in  the  Ger- 
man schools,  and  it  is  generally  used  by  foreigners  when  they 
write  German. 

CAPITAL.         SMALL.  CAPITAL.        SMALL.  CAPITAL.       SMALL. 

final 

a    .^      ^  /       r  /  ^ 

M     /        a^    J        ^   / 

^  /      /  /      /^ 


TJm.lau.ts. 


GERMAN   SCRIPT. 


1. 

7.       CJ^-tA^iT^^^^^.  8.    ^^-^  9.       ^^^^f^, 

II.     ^^c^-fJ-^^^f^,  12.      c^^V^^S^. 

13.     V^/C^^a^^^.  14-    ^C<Ai''f;/^^'-t^t^^C^.         15.      6^ 

16.    y^tt'-i^/^^ ,  I7«     cj^-f^^^ii^*  18. 

19.       ^-^Z^^^.  20.        5^^-^^.  21.       'C^n^* 

22.        y€4j^^i!f^,  23.        (Zi^^AC'^'/^f^,  24.        C^^:^^^'. 

25.         ^^^.  26.       ^^/^^ 


OC/ii'-»^,  (/-C^.  C^-u^f^* 


GERMAN   SCRIPT. 


2. 


2.      y:^^^^    f^^'^    {/A/^f^ 


L/C^^^-fff^^tJ^'CV^ii'-      ^^^^'-f^^,       ^C¥^-^^^^    '6        «=»^^J 


'■/^^       ^^i^-f/         Cf^^tJt'Oj  x'^sf>?^^^         'O^'C^/^ 


GERMAN    SCRIPT. 


3. 


^^^^  ^^:>^~ 


/^y^^f^      ^-t/^-O         ^-Cif^/^^  ^^   ^'^^^^^^»^     aft^r^. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


1.  When  a  separable  or  inseparable  verb  is  indicated  as  belonging  to  the  Old 

Conjugation,  or  as  an  irregular  verb  of  the  New  Conjugation,  the  prefix 
must  be  thrown  off  before  looking  for  the  verb  in  the  list  at  the  end.  Sepa- 
rable verbs  are  indicated  by  a  hyphen  between  the  prefix  and  the  simple 
verb.  Compounds  with  obvious  meanings,  as  juvitcf^gcl^cn,  are  not  always 
given  a  place  in  the  Vocabulary. 

2.  The  genitive  singular  and  nominative  plural  of  nouns  are  indicated  thus  : 

(fatten,  ~§,  -avtctt,  i.  e.,  the  genitive  singular  is  &avtCM§,  and  nominative 
plural  &avtcn  ;  <Btt\nitV,  -§,  -,  genitive  singular  (Sd^iiler^,  nominative 
plural  same  as  nominative  singular.  The  genitive  singular  of  feminine 
nouns  is  not  indicated. 

3.  The  gender  and  declension  of  nouns  in  ci)en  and  teilt  are  not  indicated. 

4.  Adjectives  used  as  adverbs  or  nouns,  or  when  in  the  comparative  or  super- 

lative, excepting  those  of  irregular  comparison,  are  not  inserted  separately. 

5.  Definitions  in  Italics  {evening)  are  English  words  historically  related. 

6.  Abbreviations 


C).  =  Old  Conjugation, 

irreg.  N.  =  irregular  verb  of  the 
New  Conjugation, 
impers.     =  impersonal  verb, 
refl.  =  reflexive  verb. 

h.  or  s.     =  auxiliary  ^abcn  or  feirt. 
s.  =  auxiliary  ieitt. 


■m. 

=  masculine. 

/. 

=  feminine. 

«. 

=  neuter. 

gen 

=  genitive. 

dat. 

=  dative. 

ace. 

=  accusative. 

adj. 

=  adjective. 

5t 

a0,  off,  away,  down,  from, 

at. 
W^tf  w.  a  b  c,  alphabet. 
3lBcnb,  m.  -^,  -t,  evening. 
5t0Cttb5rotr    n.    -(e) §,    -e, 

evening     bread,     supper, 

tea. 


2(BcttbUcbr  n.  -(e) §,  -er, 
evening  song. 

5l6enbrotr  n.  -(e)  §,  eve- 
ning glow. 

5(6enbfonncnWetttrm.-(e)§, 
evening  sunshine,  sunset 
glow. 

5lBenbttnj(fer  f.  evening  cloud. 

tkbtx,  but,  however. 


277 


278 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


aft=fofiren,  O.  s.  go  off,  start 

a6=I)angen,  O.  hang  off  or 
down,  depend  upon,  tion 
(with  dat). 

ttB4)0(enr  call  for. 

a6=^t(fettr  pick  off. 

aB=retfett,  s.  travel  off,  de- 
part. 

a^'Xid}ttnr  set  right,  train. 

SlbWiebr  m.  -(e)§,  -e,  de- 
parture, farewell,  dis- 
charge, leave. 

a:6=frf)reiBen,  O.  write  off, 
copy. 

aB=ftctgen,  O.  s.  descend, 
get  out. 

al6=tt)efcnbr  absent. 

5l5ttJefenI)ett,  f.  -en,  absence. 

ad)f  ah!  oh  !  alas ! ;  a^  @ott, 
oh  dear ! 

OJ^tr  eight,  eighth 

^^if  f.  attention,  heed,  care. 

ai^tgeftn,  eighteen. 

ar^tatgr  eighty. 

5(bref'fc,  /.  -n,  address,  di- 
rection. 

abicu'  (abe')/  ac/tVw,  good- 
by. 

5(biecttti',  n.  -§,  -e,  adjective. 

5lb(er,  77i.  -§,  -,  eagle. 

Whotf,  m.  -^,  Adolphus. 

3lbtier'Bium,  n.  -§,  -ten,  ad- 
verb. 

1lih\)otaVf  m.  -en,  -en,  law- 
yer. 

(iftnlii^,  like. 

aWf  all. 

ttUein,  alone,  only;  but,  yet. 

anerbinn^f  by  all  means,  to 
be  sure,  undoubtedly. 


afierlei',  all  kinds  of,  of  all 
kinds. 

anoemetUf  common  to  all, 
general. 

afinta()(t(^,  gradually. 

5U^f)a5et',  n.  -§,  -c,  al- 
phabet. 

al^f  as,  than,  when;  al§ 
ob,  al§  tuenn,  a.?  though, 
as  if. 

alfo,  accordingly,  conse- 
quently. 

am  =  an  bent. 

3l'nten,  amen. 

3(merifa,  w.  -§,  America. 

an  (dat.  or  ace),  on,  in,  by, 
to;  onwards,  farther. 

anber,  3.nother,  other,  dif- 
ferent. 

cinbernr  alter. 

anber^r  otherwise,  differ- 
ently. 

anhtx^tvo,  elsewhere. 

anhtxif^alh,  one  and  a  /la//. 

5lttefbo'tC,  /.  -n,  anecdote. 

5(nfangr  ^^.  -^/  -ange,  be- 
ginning. 

an^fanrjeur  O.  begin. 

att=ne6ctt,  O.  s.  go  on,  begin; 
approach,  concern. 

ttncjenefjtttr  pleasant. 

an-QXtifcnf  O.  attack. 

5ln9ftr  f.  ?ingfte,  anxiety, 
fear. 

an''i)aUtnf  O.  hold  on,  stop. 

an^fommtnf  O.  s.  com^  on, 
arrive. 

^tttmerFuncif  /.  -en,  re- 
mark,  observation,  com- 
ment, note. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


279 


ttlt'ltefttnettr   O.    accept;    as- 
sume. 
att=rtdfttett,  do,  cause. 
ttn=f(^auenr  gaze  at. 
an=feften,  O.  look  on  or  at. 

claim;  in — ne^tnen,  claim. 

anftatt,   (gen.),  mstead  of. 

3lntttJ0rtr  f.  -en,  word  in  re- 
turn, answer. 

antttJOtten,  answer  (dat.  of 
person). 

anttiefenb,  present. 

an=3ie5cnr  O.  draw  on,  put 
on 

5ftjfe(r  m.  -§,  3XpfeL  apple. 

5(^ifc(^attmr  m.  -(e)  §,  -ctume, 
apple-tree. 

5(^rU',  w.  -§,  -e,  April. 

3lr6ettr  /.  -en,  work. 

axhtiitrif  work 

argetltti^,  angry,  vexed. 

5lrttftme'tif,  f.  -en,  arith- 
metic. 

5(rm,  m.  -(e) §,  -e,  arm. 

arm,  poor. 

5lrt,  f.  -en,  kind,  species, 
manner. 

arttfir  of  good  kind,  well- 
behaved. 

5lrtt'fe(r  f;L  -§,  -,  article. 

5lrat,  w.  -e§,  mgte,  phy- 
sician. 

9(tem,  7;i.  -§,  breath. 

Q«(^,  also,  too,  even. 

aitf  (dat.  or  ace),  upon,  at; 
up,  on ! 

auf^atmcUr  take  breath. 

auf=^ftrfen,  look  up. 

nuf  b'ttf?,  in  order  ^/za/. 


attf=brujfettr  impress. 

auffaUenb,  noticeable,  strik- 
ing. 

5(uf9a6e,  f.  -n,  lesson,  task. 

auf=Ge^cn,  O.  g^W  u/?. 

auf=gel)enr  O.  s.  ^0  w/>,  rise. 

auf^e^en,  O.  heave  or  lift 
up,  suspend. 

aitf=prett,  stop,  end,  cease. 

auf=ma(^en,  open. 

ttuf=|jaffett,  pay  attention. 

auf  rc((it=fteUcn,  place  upright. 

auf^  —  auf  bag. 

auf=f<^teBett,  O.  postpone. 

auf=fte5en,  O.  s.  stand  up, 
get  w/j,  rise. 

auf^fuj^en,  hunt  w/>. 

5luftrag,  7^.  -eg,  -age,  com- 
mission, errand. 

auf=tra9enr  O.  serve  (at 
table). 

auf=tun,  O.  open. 

aufttiartg,  upwards. 

5lunCr  n.  -g,  -n,  ^3;^. 

2itt9(c)(etnr  little  ^3;^. 

5lu0cn5Urf,  m.  -(e)§,  -e, 
moment,  instant. 

aitcjen^ltrfltrftr  instantly. 

5lu9uft'r  m.  -g,  -e,  August. 

tiVi^  (dat),  out,  out  of. 

$(ugbrurf,  m.  -g,  -iidfe,  ex- 
pression. 

a«g=brurfen,  express. 

augetnan'ber,  apart,  asunder. 

augeinanber=geften,  O.  s. 
separate. 

5(uggaBc,  /.  -n,  expense. 

^(u^gangr  m.  -(e)  §,  -ange, 
owdet,  exit. 

(in^^^t\)txit  O.  s.  ^6>  out. 


28o 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


nuSgenommen,    excepting, 
excepted. 

au§4ajftcn,  laugh  at. 

3luManb,  n.  -(c) §,  foreign 
country. 

au§4affcn,  O.  omit. 

au^=jna(^cn,  arrange. 

au§-neftmen,  O.  take  out, 
except;  au^ne^menb,  ex- 
ceptional. 

auS^rufen,  O.  cry  out. 

5(u§rufuu9§ttiortr  n.  -e§, 
— orter,  exclamation  word, 
interjection. 

ou§=ruften,  rest  out,  repose. 

au^^fcftctt,  O.  look,  appear. 

ouf?en,  oM^side,  withowf. 

au^er  (dat),  on  the  ow^side 
of,  withow^,  besides. 

aufjerbentr  apart  from  that, 
besides,  moreover. 

an^txi}aih  (gen.  or  dat.),  on 
the  outsme  of,  withowf^ 
beyond. 

nnfmoxhcniiid),     extraordi- 
nary,   remarkable ;    ex- 
tremely. 

an^-^pxtdjctif  O.  pronounce. 

au^=ftetncn,  O.  s.  dismount, 
get  out. 

au^ttienbtg,  owfside,  out- 
ward, withow^  book,  by 
heart. 


ftr  m.  -e§,  -ad)e,  brook. 
SSarfer,  m.  -§,  -,  baker. 
^adtottl,  n.  -{e)§,  -c,  ba- 
kers' wares. 


^ahf  n.  -t^,  -ctber,  hath. 

babcu,  hathe. 

S3abc5immer,  n.  -§,  -  bath- 
room. 

S3aSn,  /.  -en,  path,  road. 

S3a^tt6of,  w.  -(e)§,  -ofe, 
station. 

i^alh,  soon ;  balb  —  balb  — , 
now  —  now  — . 

^a%  m.  -e§,  -a\lt,  ball 

S5anbr  n.  -e§,  -anber,  &and, 
ribbon ;  m.  -e§,  — cinbe, 
volume. 

SSanbe,  f.  -n,  bond,  fetter. 

han^(t),  anxious,  fearful. 

S3anf,    f.    -dn!e,    bank, 
bench. 

f>aVf  in  cash. 

SSarmen,  n.  -§,  name  of  a 
German  city. 

^afc(,  w.  -§,  name  of  a 
Swiss  city. 

6aucn,  build;  labor  on  the 
land,  till. 

^ttuer,  in.  -n,  (-§),  -n, 
peasant;  S3auer§mann,  m. 
the  same. 

SSautitr  w.  -e§,  -ctume,  tree, 
beam. 

^antnUati,  n.  -(e)§,  -after, 
leaf  of  a  tree. 

S3dutn(5cnr  little  tree. 

be-p  inseparable  prefix, 
strengthening  the  mean- 
ing of  verbs,  and  forming 
new  ones;  prefix  forming 
adjectives. 

S3camtc,  m.  w.  official. 

^eantmortcttr    answer     (a 
question). 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


281 


fiebaucrn,  regret. 

Bebcrfen,  cover,  overcast. 

hthcnUn,  irreg.  N.  consider. 

]&ebculen,  signify. 

hthcnicxxhf  important. 

^ebeutwng,  /.  -en,  impor- 
tance, significance. 

23cbtnguncj,  f.  -en,  condition. 

fiebitrfen,  irreg.  N.  need,  re- 
quire. 

S3efeftl,  m.  -e§,  -e,  mandate, 
order. 

l^cfeftlen,  O.  command. 

l^cfinbcn,  O.  refl.  find  one's 
self,  do,  be. 

l^cfrcicn,  make  free,  liber- 
ate. 

6cftt6(ctt,  feel  of. 

^efiiri^ten,  fear. 

hcQCQmn,  (dat),  s.  run 
against,  meet. 

5c9Ctfterttr  inspire. 

Begierig,  eager  for. 

beginnen,  O.  begin. 

beg(citen,  accompany. 

begreifcn,  O.  comprehend. 

SSegriffr  m.  -(e)§,  -e,  idea; 
tm  S3egriffe  fetn,  be  on  the 
point  of. 

fftf^alttn,  O.  hold,  keep. 

beftitlflii^r  helpful,  useful. 

l^ci  (dat.),  by  the  side  of,  by, 
near ;  at  the  house  or  store 
of. 

Bctbe,  both. 

S3ctfoll,  m.  -§,  applause. 

S5etn,  n.  -e§,  -e,  bone,  leg. 

bcina()C,  nearly,  almost. 

SSetf^tcI,  n.  -(e)§,  -t,  in- 
stance, example. 


^tx^tUf  O.  bite. 

^tlanni,  known,  acquainted. 

^ef  aunt  Waft,    f.    -en,    ac- 
quaintance. 

befommen,  O.  get,  receive. 

i>t\t\>if  lively,  animated. 

bclcgcn,  lay  on,  secure,  en- 
gage; belay. 

beleibtgen,  affront,  insult. 

be(euc^ten,  light  up. 

'^tUVi6)iVimf   f.    lighting,   il- 
lumination. 

^elgicn,  n.  -§,  Belgium. 

beUcbt,  popular. 

^tlif  m.  -e§,  the  ''Belt''  (in 
Denmark). 

bemuften,    refl.    take    pains, 
endeavor. 

bctjuem,  convenient,  comfor- 
table. 

^t(\ntmlx6)Uxif  f.  -en,  com- 
fort. 

^txtxif  ready. 

berettctt,  prepare. 

iitxtxi^f  already. 

S3crg,  m.  -c§,  -e,  mountain. 

^erlin'r  n.  -§,  Berlin. 

berubitjcn,  calm,  compose. 

betitftmt,  famous. 

beritftren,  touch. 

bcfcfitiftigt,    adj.    occupied, 
busy. 

befell  (if  ttgettr  occupy,  busy. 

ht^ti)tvtn,  give,  bestow. 

befdftmu^enr  soil. 

bcfj^ii^ettr  guard. 

befi^eitr    O.    sit    upon,    pos- 
sess. 

bcfonber,  particular,  especial. 

befonbcr^,  especially. 


282 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


l^eforgt,  anxious. 

l^effcr,  better. 

l^effcrn,  improve. 

l^eftttubifi,  constantly. 

Ibefteften,  O.  stand  firm;  — 
au§  (with  dat),  consist 
of. 

Ibeftefien,  put  in  place,  or- 
der. 

]6efttmmen,  direct,  determine. 

S5cfu(^r  w.  -(e) g,  -e,  visit. 

^efuc^cn,  seek  for,  visit. 

^efui^aitnmer,  n.  -§,  -  vis- 
it-room, reception-room. 

Beten,  pray. 

SBetunungr  /•  accent. 

htixnht,  sad. 

S3ett  (S3ette),  n.  -(e)§, -en, 

JeunruStgcttr  make  uneasy. 

htt)OX,  before. 

hmaf)tmf  preserve. 

ftettJegettr  move;  refl.  move, 
be  removed. 

^ctocgung,  f.  -en,  motion. 

BettJoSnettf  dwell  in,  occupy. 

S3ettioI)ner,  m.  -§,  -,  in- 
habitant. 

]6ctt)unbcrn,  wonder  at,  ad- 
mire. 

6caaf)(ctt,  pay. 

^tBHotSef,  f.  -en,  library 
(public). 

^'M\t>i^tiax' f  m.  -§,  -e,  li- 
brarian. 

^t^notljefatmmcr,  n.  -§,  -, 
library-room,  library. 

hiehtVf  upright. 

Bicgctt,  O.  bend. 

SBienc,  /.  -n,  bee. 


S3tcr,  n.  -eg,  -z,  beer. 
S3Ub,  n.  -e§,  -er,  picture. 
SBittet'r  n.  -(e) §,  -e,  ticket, 

billet. 
ftlHig,  adj.  cheap;  just. 
iDtnben,  O.  bind. 
S3tnbettJort,  w.  -(e)g,  -Mer, 

binding  word,  conjugation. 
i>X^   (ace),  to,  until,  as  far 

as. 
S5lt(^ett  {h\')^^tn),  bit,  little, 

trifle. 
i>x^))tXf     as     far     as     /i^r^; 

hitherto. 
^Xiitxif  O.  beg,  ask  for. 
hxiitXf  bitter. 
Ua^txXf  O.  blow. 
maiif  n.-(e)§,  -atter,  leafj 
hlaitU^f  Itdiiless. 
hlaUf  blue. 
^hx,  n.  -e§,  lead. 
hhxhtxif  O.  s.  be  left,  remain.. 
S3(ctftift,  m.  -(e)§,  -e,  lead- 
pencil. 
6(irfen,  look. 

^Vxd,  w.  -(e) §,  -e,  glance. 
hVxnhxXf  gleam. 
S3(ti?,  w.  -eg,  -e,  lightning. 
Mi^ettr  lighten,  glisten,  flash. 
Mofh  bare;   merely,   simply, 

only. 
Mitftettr    blossom,    flourish ; 

blow. 
^hxmt,  f.  -n,  flower ;  bloom. 
S3Iunt(e)(cttt,  flowret. 
S3(ut,  -eg,  &/00C?;  health. 
^(utettr  bleed. 
S3oben,  m.  -g,  -i3ben,  garret; 

bottom. 
fBoot,  n.  -eg,  -e  or  -ote,  &oa/. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


283 


SBootfa^rt,  f.  -en,  boat-trip, 

f>H{t),  bad,  angry. 
■  fSvaUn,  m.  -^,  -  roast. 

6rau(ftctt,  need,  want. 

S3rauttf(ftttJei9r  n.  -§,  Bruns- 
wick. 

SBraut,  f.  -dute,  betrothed 
wife ;  bride. 

SSrauttgamr  w.  -§,  -e,  be- 
trothed husband ;  bride- 
groom. 

drati,  good,  brave. 

6rc(fiettr  O.  break. 

hxtxit  broad. 

S3remcn,  n.  -^,  Bremen. 

l^rcnncttr  irreg.  N.  burn. 

SSrennga^r  w.  -eg,  illumina- 
ting gas. 

S3riefr  w.  -e§,  -e,  letter; 
brief. 

23rtef(^enr  little  letter,  note. 

S5rief!aftcttr  w.  -§,  -  letter- 
box. 

SSricfmatfc,  /.  -n,  postage- 
stamp. 

SBneftragcr,  m.  -§,  -,  letter- 
carrier. 

hxXMtn,  irreg.  N.  &nwg. 

SBrot,  n.  -e§,  -z,  bread. 

S3t3t(^|Cttr  little  bread,  roll. 

a3tuber,  m.  -§,  -iiber, 
brother. 

Britbcrltj^,  brotherly,  in  a 
fraternal  manner. 

]6ruficnr  roar,  bellow,  bray. 

S3ruffe(r  w.  -^,  Brussels. 

S3tuft,  f.  -iifte,  breast. 

'^M^f  n.  -e§,  -iid^er,  book. 

seller. 


SSutS^fta^c,  7^i.  -n,  -n,  letter 

of  the  alphabet. 
Buj^ftaMe'ren,  spell. 
bureau',  n.  -^,  -§,  bureau; 

office. 
SSurg,  f.  ~en,  fortress,  castle. 
^xtX^tXf    m.   -§,    -,    citizen, 

burgher. 
SSuraermctftet,  m.  -§,  -  &wr- 

gomaster,  mayor. 


Gljataftcr,  m.  -§,  -e,  c/iar- 

Afternic',  f.  chemistry. 
©ftina,  w.  -§,  China. 
(Sljut,  m.  and  n.  -e§,  -ore, 

chorus,  choir. 
(i\)XxSit  m.  -en,  -en,  CAm- 
G^tceru,  m.  Cicero.         [tian. 
(^olumhn^,  m.  Columbus. 
Gou^e'r  n.  -§,  compartment 

of  a  car ;  coupe. 
(^out)txt\  n.  -§,  -e,  envelope. 


2) 

ha,  there,  then;  as,  since. 
ballet,  thereby,  at  the  same 

time. 
^ad)f  n.  -e§,  -etcher,  roof. 
hahnxdf,  therethrough,  there- 

by. 
bafitt,  therefor,  for  that;  id) 

!ann  nid)t§  bafiir,  I  cannot 

help  it. 


284 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


bagegen,  against  that,  on  the 

contrary. 
baftcr'r  thence;  for  that  rea- 
son, consequently;  along. 
baljin'r  thither,  so  far,  along, 

away. 
ba5ttt=faftrctt,  O.  s.  go  away, 

off. 
bamolg,  at  that  time,  then. 
^amt,  f.  -n,  lady. 
batntt'r  therewith,  with  it ;  in 

order  that. 
banar^'     (barnad)),     there- 

after,  after  that. 
"^anCf  m.  -n,  -n,  Dane. 
bonc'Ben,    beside    it,    close 

by. 
^dntmaxff  n.  -§,  Denmark. 
bonifd^r  Danish. 
%ax\tf  m.  -e§,  thanks. 
banf^ar,  thankful. 
banfen  (dat.),  thank. 
hann,  then. 
bar  (=ha),  there. 
bar  an',  thereon,  on  that  or 

it. 
barauf   (brauf),  thereupon, 

upon  that 
^satan'^tn    (brau^en),   out- 

side,    out    there,    out    of 

doors,  abroad. 
barttt'r  therein,  in  that. 
barin'nen,     therein,    wside, 

within. 
barnar^i'r   that   way;    there- 

after. 
baru'Bcr,  thereover,  above  it, 

at  it. 
\saxvim\  on  account  of  that, 

thereior^. 


ha^f  that,  so  that,  in  order 

that. 
batie'rcn,  date. 
battel,  /.  -n,  date   (fruit). 
Saturn,  n.  -§,  -a,  date. 
bauern,  endure,  last. 
bauern,  move  to  pity. 
^aumettr  w.  -§,  -  thumb. 
batiOtt'f  thereof  or  from,  of 

it  or  them. 
batJor'r  before  or  for  that. 
bagu'r  in  addition. 
^crfc,  /.  -n,  covering,  ceil- 

ing. 
befltnte'rcn,  decline. 
betn,  thy,  thine. 
hcxnnad)%  according  to  that, 

accordingly. 
hmUxif  irreg.  N.  think,  be  of 

opinion. 
benn,  then,  in  that  case,  now ; 

for. 
bcnnOJ^,  nevertheless. 
bcr,  the;  that;  which. 
bcrjcntgc,  the  one,  that  one. 
bcrfcIBc,    the    selfsame,    the 

same. 
be^ftalJ,    on    that    account, 

therefore. 
bc^mcoettr  on  that  account. 
htnilidj,  clear. 
htnt^^,  German. 
^eutfrfie,  m.  -n,  -n,   (the) 

German. 
^CUtWlanbr  n.  -§,  Germany. 
^csem^cr,    m.    -§,    Decem- 
ber. 

btencn  (dat.),  serve. 
Wiener,  m.  -§,  -  servant. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


285 


^icn^tag,  m.  -§,  -t,  Tues- 
day. 

bic§  (biefer),  this,  the  lat- 
ter. 

btcnJcUr  while. 

^ing,  n.  -e§,  -t,  thing. 

bor^,  though,  yet,  neverthe- 
less, however,  I  am  sure, 
you  know,  but,  I  hope, 
why  yes. 

^099Cr  /.  -n,  hnW-dog. 

^onaUr  f.  Danube. 

^onncr^an,  m.  -^,  thunder- 
call. 

bonnerttr  thunder. 

^onner^tag,     m.     -§,     -e, 

^ounerttiettcr!  by  thunder! 
^orfr  w.  -eg,  -orfer,  village. 
^iirftfien,  little  village. 
^orn,  w.  -t^,  -en,  -e  or 

-orner,  thorn. 
bort  (borten),  yonder,  there. 
bortfitn,  thither. 
brauf?ett,  see  barauften. 
brci,  three. 
breimol,  three  times. 
brei^trjr  thirty. 
brct5el)nr  thirteen. 
brctaeftntr  thirteenth. 
^rc^bcttr  w.  -§,  Dresden. 
brtngenb,  urgent. 
brinnctt,  see  bartnnen. 
brttt,  ^/tfrd 
britten^r  thirdly. 
broftcUr  threaten. 
brottt9(t)r  rfro//,  comical. 
^rofrftfc,  f.  -x\,  hack ;  drosky. 
briibcn      (bariiben),      oz'^r 


brurfcn,  print. 

briirf en,  press  ;  squeeze. 

bruntettr  see  barunten. 

bu,  ^/zoM,  you. 

buntttt,  stupid,  foolish. 

^utnmfiett,  /.  -en,  folly,  stu- 
pidity. 

\>\xnltlf  dark. 

bUttfeltt,  grow  dark. 

burt^i  (ace),  through. 

btttdftau^,  throughout,  abso- 
lutely; quite. 

butj^gangtg,  pervading,  gen- 
eral, in  general. 

burri&4cfctt,  O.  read  through. 

burcfttrtcben,  thorough. 

biirfeitr  irreg.  N.  be  per- 
mitted, may;  need. 

^ilrrc,  /.  -n,  drowth. 

^\xx\i,  m.  -e^,  thirst. 

burftctt  (biirj^en),  thirsty  be 
thirsty. 

cbcttf  even,  just,  precisely. 

t6)if  genuine. 

(Srfc,  /.  -n,  corner. 

ebcl,  noble,  precious. 

(gbuarb,  m.  -§,  Edward. 

zt)tf  ere,  before. 

ci)t\>tm,  before  this  time,  for- 
merly. 

eftet,  previously,  sooner, 
rather. 

ttjven,  honor. 

e()tU(^,  honest. 

(&x,  n.  -c§,  -ex,  egg. 

i^id}C,  f.  -n,  oak. 

eigen,  ozvn;  proper;  peculiar. 


286 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


-iirter,  q^xdiXity-word,  ad- 
jective. 

etgentlit^i,  real,  really. 

cin,  a,  an,  one. 

ettt=,  separable  prefix,  into, 
in. 

einan'bct,  one  a.nother,  each 
other. 

etnerret,  one  and  the  same, 
all  the  same,  of  one  kind. 

ctnfar^,  simple. 

©tnflut,  m.  -e§/  -iiff^/  m- 
fluXj  influence. 

etnigr  on^^  anj;;  pi.  etntge, 
some. 

etn=Iabett,  O.  mvite. 

©MabunSr  f.  -en,  mvitation. 

einma(,  one  time,  owce,  just, 
only. 

Gtnma(ein§,  n.  -e§,  -e,  one 
time  one;  multiplication- 
table. 

ettt=ne6ntenr  O.  take  m,  cap- 
tivate. 

Cttt^r  one,  one  thing. 

ctn=W(afen,  O.  s.  go  to  sleep. 

(gtttficbler,  m.  -§,  -,  hermit. 

einfUBtg,  monosyllabic,  la- 
conic. 

cttt=f<>errctt,  shut  in. 

einft,  once,  once  on  a  time, 
some  time. 

ein=fktnen,  O.  s.  step  or 
climb  in,  get  in,  or  aboard. 

etnftntal^r  once. 

Ctn=tCt(ett,  divide. 

etn=tretettr  O.  s.  enter. 

(?inltJof)ner,  m.  -§,  -,  inha- 
bitant. 


(gttt5af)(r  f.  singular. 

eitt^elttf  single,  individual. 

@i§,  n.  —e§,  ice. 

@tfen,  n.  -§,  iron. 

©ifenbaftttr  f.  -en,  railroad. 

(gleftri^ttat',  /.  electricity. 

chnh,  wretched,  miserable. 

©lefant'r  m.  -en,  -en,  ele- 
phant. 

elfr  eleven. 

elft,  eleventh. 

©U'fCf  fern.  prop,  noun, 
Eliza. 

(SItern  (pi.),  parents. 

em^jfangen,  O.  receive,  v^el- 
come. 

©m^fang^Stmtnct,  n.  -§,  ~, 
reception-room. 

cm^feftlen,  O.  recommend, 
commend,  give  regards  to  ; 
take  leave. 

Sm^fefilung,  f.  -en,  com- 
mendation, compliments. 

cm^finbcn,  O.  perceive,  feel. 

^ttbc,  n.  -§,  -n,  end. 

mhlid},  finally,  at  last. 

©ngel,  m.  -§,  -,  angel. 

(^n^lanh,  n.  -§,  England. 

©nglanber,  m.  -§,  -,  Eng- 
lishman. 

enolifi^,  English. 

tnU  (emp=),  inseparable 
prefix,  earlier  ant ;  against ; 
forth,  from,  out,  away. 

entbcrfettr  discover. 

enteljrcttr  dishonor. 

entfltcl)cn,  O.  s.  fly  away,  es- 
cape. 

entjjegcn  (dat.),  against. 

etttgegnen,  object,  rejoin. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


287 


tntfjalUn,  O.  contain,  with- 
hold. 

entlaufen,  O.  s.  run  away. 

entncfitnen,  O.  derive  (from, 
dat.). 

entrtrftten,  pay. 

entfcftctben,  O.  decide. 

cntfr^loffettr  decided,  coura- 
geous. 

cntfr^ulbtgen,  excuse. 

(^ntfc^en,  n.  -§,  -,  terror. 

cntfe^Uc^,  terrible. 

entf^jrittoen,  O.  s.  rise;  run 
away. 

enlttJcber,  either;  enttoeber — 
obex,  either  —  or. 

Cttt^ttiet,  in  two,  asunder, 
apart. 

ent3ttiei=f^nttgcn,  O.  s.  or  h. 
spring  in  two,  burst  apart. 

er,  he. 

er-r  insep.  prefix,  same  with 
ur=,  adding  to  verbs  the 
idea  of  beginning,  en- 
deavor,  acquisition. 

txUidtn,  perceive. 

er^linbettr  s.  grow  or  get 
blind. 

(&xhc,  f.  -n,  earth. 

©rbgeWof?,  n.  -e§,  -offe, 
ground-floor,  first  story. 

erctgnettr  refl.  happen. 

erfaftren,    O.    learn,    find 
out. 

(Stfafirung,  /.  -en,  expe- 
rience. 

(Srfo(gr  w.  -e§,  -t,  result, 
success. 

erfrtercn,  O.  s.  freeze. 

crfittten,  i\x\fil,  fill. 


crgretfettr  O.  seize,  lay  hold 
of. 

cr^alten,  O.  receive,  come  in 
possession  of;  sustain. 

erjebettf  O.  raise ;  refl.  rise. 

erinnern  (gen.),  refl.  re- 
member. 

etfa(tettr  refl.  catch  cold. 

erfennen,  irreg.  N.  recognize. 

erfltttettf  make  clear,  de- 
clare;  state. 

(Srfldrungr  /.  -en,  explana- 
tion. 

exlanhcnf    permit,     (pers. 
dat). 

(^xlanffni^,  f.,  permission. 

^xUf  f.  -n,  alder. 

txhihm,  O.  suffer,  sustain. 

cxqnidtn,  quicken,  refresh. 

cxxattn,  O.  guess  out. 

erretr^en,  attain,  get  to. 

crft^attcitr  echo,  resound. 

erWetnettf  O.  s.  shine  forth, 
appear. 

crWrcrfen,  O.  (N.)  s.  (also 
refl.)  be  frightened  or 
startled. 

erft,  first,  only ;  not  until. 

erftatttten,  s.  be  amazed. 

crftcn^r  firstly,  in  the  first 
place. 

txtxinUn,  O.  s.  be  drowned. 

erttJat^fcn,  grown  up. 

ertudljnen,  mention. 

erttJartcn,  expect. 

ernjeifett,  awake. 

txtotxhtrtf  O.  acquire,  gain. 

^x^f  n.  -eg,  —e,  ore. 

eratifiten,  relate,  tell. 

©rsajhtng,  /.  -en,  narrative. 


288 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


crateftettr  O.  bring  up,  edu- 
cate. 

er^iekn,  aim  at,  attain. 

e§,  it,  there;  e§  ftnb,  there 
are. 

©fc(,  m.  —§,  —,  ass,  donkey. 

cffen,  O.  eat;  (Sffen,  n.  food. 

(gt^tmmer,  n.  -§,  -   eat'mg- 
room,  dining-room. 

Ctltcftc,  some. 

©tfdfl,    /.    name    of   a    river, 
Adige. 

ettua,  nearly,  about,  indeed. 

elttia^,     some,     something, 
somewhat. 

eucr,  your,  yours. 

©ttto^ja,  n.  -§,  Europe. 

(Stti*    (old    form   iuwer,   for 
euer),  ^'owr. 

etntg,  eternal. 

^em^cl,  w.  -^,  -  example. 


SaBetr  f.  -n,  fable. 
ga^nc,  f.  -n,  flag,  vane. 
fasten,  O.  s.  drive,  go  (in  a 

wagon  or  boat),  fare. 
gaftroelb,    n.    -(e) g,    -er, 

gaftr^IaUr  m.  -(e)§,  -e  or 
— dne,  time-table. 

Stlftrtr  /.  -en,  passage,  jour- 
ney. 

gallc,  /.  -n,  pit-fall,  trap. 

fanettr  O.  s.  /a//;  seem. 

falW,  false. 

galfr^fiett,    /.    falseness, 
treachery. 


gatnt'Itc,  /.  -n,  family. 

fangen,  O.  catch,  seize. 

j^axHf  f.  -n,  color. 

faffCJtf  hold,  contain;  lay 
hold  of,  seize. 

faftr  almost. 

gauft,  f.  -ctuyte,  fist. 

^thtnax'f  m.  -§,  -t,  Febru- 
ary. 

gebcr,  f.  -n,  feather,  pen. 

feber(o§,  featherless. 

gcbettncffer,  w.  -g,  -,  pen- 
knife. 

Ut^Un  (dat),  fail,  be  want- 
ing to,  the  matter  with. 

f  etern,  celebrate ;  be  idle. 

geiertag,  m.  -(e)§,  -e,  holi- 
day. 

getttb,  m.  -e§,  -e,  foe. 

getnfi^mcrfer,  m.  -§,  -, 
gourmand. 

ge(b,  n.  -e§,  -er,  /zV/(i, 
country. 

gclfenrtff,  w.  -(e)  §,  -e, 
rocky  r^^/  or  ledge. 

Scttftcr,  n.  -§,  -,  window. 

gcrtcn  (pL),  vacation,  holi- 
days. 

fern,  far. 

fcttig,  ready. 

gerttglett,  /.  dexterity. 

fcft,  fast,  firm,  mighty. 

geft,  n.  -e§,  -e,  festival,  fete, 
feast. 

fett,  fat. 

geuer,  7z.  -§,  -,  fire. 

geucrjo!  ffr^/ 

ftnben,  O.  find,  think. 

Singer,  7;z.  -§,  -,  finger. 

finftcr,  dark. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


289 


StWf  m.  -e§,  -e,  fish. 

ffottetn,  flatter. 

gletfr^r  n.  -eg,  -e,  //^^/z, 
meat. 

gfetf?,  m.  -e§,  industry;  mtt 
glei^,  on  purpose. 

ffct^tg,  industrious. 

gltegc,  /.  -TT,  /^/3;. 

flteQCn,  O.  s.  or  h.  fly. 

flicten,  O.  s.  or  h.  flow. 

Slitgcl,  m.  -§,  -,  wing. 

Slugcltittr  f.  -en,  folding- 
door. 

%lVL^f  m.  -eg,  -iiffe,  river. 

fofgctt  (dat),  s.  follow. 

forbcritf  take,  require. 

Sorft,  m.  —eg,  — e,  forest. 

fort,  /or//?,  away!  begone! 
be  off ! 

fort^faftren,  O.  s.  keep  on, 
make  a  further  remark, 
continue. 

fort^teitctt,  O.  snatch  or 
drag  forth  or  away. 

fort=fr^|(ct(Sctt,  O.  s.  slink 
away,  slip  away. 

Stage,  f.  -n,  question. 

frajjen,  N.  (O.),  ask. 

gragcaetri^Ctt,  n.  -g,  -,  ques- 
tion-mark. 

franfictt,  postpaid. 

5tanfret(^,  w.,  -g,  France. 

grango'fc,    w.    -en,    -en, 
Frenchm2in. 

fronsfl'ftfr^r  French. 

%xavif  f.  -en,  woman,  wife. 

graulcitt,  young  lady,  Miss. 

fret,  free,  open;  \)a^  grete, 
the  open  air,  out-of-doors. 

greifteit,  /.  -en,  freedom. 


^XtllX^t    truly,    indeed,    for- 
sooth. 

grettag,  m.  -g,  -e,  Friday. 

fremb,  strange,  foreign. 

gtembc,  /.  foreign  country. 

freffen,  O.  eat  (of  animals) 

greubc,  /.  -n,  joy. 

freuen,  make  glad;  refl.  re- 
joice. 

grcuttb,  m.  -eg,  -e,  friend. 

greunbln,    /.     -nen,     lady 
friend. 

freunbUj^,  friendly,  kind. 

greitttbfr^aft,  /.  -en,  friend^ 
ship. 

grtebe,  m.  -ng,  -n,  peace. 

Srtebrtdft,  m.  -g,  Frederick. 

grtebrt(iflftta#c,  f.  -n,  Frede- 
rick street. 

frtfd^,  /r^j/j. 

fro5,  glad,  joyous,  happy. 

ftotnm,    worthy,    good,    de- 
vout. 

gruriftt,  /.  -iid^te,  frw/f   (of 
the  earth  or  field). 

fritf),  early. 

ftiiftet,  sooner,  earlier. 

gritftHng,  m.  -g,  -e,  spring. 

grit^ftitrf,  n.  -(e)  g,  -e,  ear- 
ly piece,  breakfast. 

friiftftitrfen,  take  breakfast. 

fiigen,   fit,   unite,   do;   refl. 
submit. 

fuf)(en,  feel. 

fitftrcn,  lead,  conduct,  carry 
on. 

gutter,  m.  -g,  -  guide. 

fitHen,  fill. 

fitnf,  five. 

fiittft.  fifth. 


290 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


fiinfaefttt     (funfael^n),     fif- 
teen. 

funfetg  (fxtnfato),  fifty. 

fnnUin,  sparkle. 

fitr  (ace),  for, 

}^nxd}ir  f.  fear. 

fiitt^iten,     fear;    refl.    be 
afraid. 

fitrc^terUcft,  frightivX. 

giirttujrt,  n.  -(e) §,  -i3rter, 
for-word,  pronoun. 

gutr  m.  -e§,  -iif^e,  foot. 

guPobcn,    m.    -§,    -oben, 
floor. 

gttf^ttieg,  m.  -(e) §,  -e,  foot- 
way, side-walk. 


©aBc,  f.  -w,  gift. 

QJaBel,  Z'.  -n,  fork. 

^^an^f  whole,  wholly,  quite, 
entirely. 

gar,  very,  altogether,  quite, 
absolutely;  well-done;  in- 
deed ;  gar  m^i,  not  at  all ; 
gar  !etn,  none  at  all. 

(Garten,  w.  -§,  -arten,  gar- 
den, 

%axiXitXf  m,  -^,  —,  gardener. 

Q5a^,  n.  ~c§,  -t,  gas. 

(^a^Ucftt,  n.  -(e)§,  -er  or 
— e,  gaslight. 

©aft,  m.  —eg,  -dfte,  guest. 

9C=r  inseparable  prefix ; 
with,  together ;  prefix  for- 
ming adjectives  and  col- 
lective nouns. 

&cbad,  n.  —§,  baker's  wares. 


ge^tttcn,  O.  bear,  bring 
forth;  geboren,  born. 

&thmhe,  n.  -eg,  -,  building, 
edifice. 

geBen,  O.  give. 

Q^cUf,    n.    -(c)g,    -e, 
prayer. 

(^eBitge,  n.  -g,  -,  mountain 
range  or  region. 

geJorctt,  'born;  see  gebdren. 

geBrauj^en,  use. 

C^eBitftr,  /.  -en,  fee,  charge. 

(^e^urt^tag,  m.  -(e) §,  -e, 
birthday. 

Q^thid)if  n.  -(e)g,  -e,  poem. 

©efajr,  f.  -en,  danger. 

gefti^rltri^,  dangerous. 

gefotten  (dat.),  O.  please. 

gef aUtji^  pleasing,  courteous ; 
tft  ^^nen  ettnag  gefdHtg? 
do  you  wish  anything? 

gefatttgft,  if  you  please. 

gegettf  gen  (ace),  toward, 
against. 

gCQCttuftcr  (dat),  over 
against,  opposite. 

(^tQtntoaxi,  f.  presence,  pres- 
ent time. 

gcften,  O.  8.  go. 

^d)OX^tn,  (dat.),  listen  to 
(with   submission),   obey. 

QJctge,  f.  -n,  fiddle,  violin. 

(55etft(td&C,  m.  (deck  as  adj.), 
clergyman. 

gcJaffctt,  calm,  cool. 

OCltittftOr  fluently. 

^Mf  yellow. 

&tlhf  n.  —eg,  — er,  money. 

&cltfitnimt,  f.  -en,  oppor- 
tunity. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


291 


geUttOen,  O.  s.  impers.,  be 
successful. 

gcltCtt,  be  valid,  aimed  at, 
pass  for. 

Q5emtt(bc,  n.  -§,  -,  painting, 
picture. 

gemetn,  common. 

©entitfc,  n.  -§,  vegetables. 

Q^cmvii(e),  n.  -§,  -(e)r, 
spirit. 

(^tntxaV,  m.  -e§,  -alt,  gen- 
eral. 

gcnug'r  enough. 

Q5eugra^:^te',  /.  -fen,  geo- 
graphy. 

^tXcCiStf  straight,  precisely, 
directly,  exactly,  just. 

gerabe  au§,  point  blank. 

^tx\m\  slight. 

(iJerma'tttar  /.  Germany. 

gem  (gerne),  gladly. 

gem  ^afictt,  like. 

QJcfangr  m.  ~§,  -dnge,  song. 

QJcfangfiurift,  n.  -(e)§,  -iid^er, 
hymn-&oo^. 

gcfi^cjcn,  O.  s.  impers.  hap- 
pen. 

^cW^^i^f  /.  — n,  story,  his- 
tory. 

Q5ef(^ijf(e),  n.  -§,  -,  lot, 
fate. 

OJeWrcdftt^ttJort,  n.  -(e) ^, 
-orter,  article. 

Okfr^fintarf,  m.  -(e)§/  taste. 

QJefii^ntarf^faj^e,  /.  matter  of 
taste. 

QJeWmeibc,  n.  -§,  jewelry. 

gcfj^ttitnb,  quick. 

gcfcgnct,  blessed. 

nefctlcn,  associate. 


OJefeUfcJaft,  f.  -en,  company, 
society. 

Q5efe^r  n.  -e§,  -e,  law. 

gefe^t,  granted,  supposing. 

©eftj^t,  n.  -(e)§,  -e  or  -ex, 
sight;  /ace. 

gefteften,  O.  confess. 

geftcrttf  yesterday. 

gefut^t,    popular,    sought 
for. 

gefUttb,  healthy,  well. 

C^iefuttb^ett,  /.   -en,  health, 
"toast." 

getxitnnettr  O.  win,  gain. 

gettii#,  certain;  surely. 

gettiUJultJ^i,  usual. 

(^t|jfc(,  m.  —§,  —,  top,  peak. 

(^(anSf  m.  -e§,  splendor. 

(^la^,  n.  -e§,  -dfer,  glass. 

glaferttr  of  glass. 

WanU(n)f  m.  -n^,  -n,  be- 
lief. 

gfauBen,  believe ,  think,  sup- 
pose. 

glcicj,  like,  immediately,  all 
the  same,  although. 

mode,  f.  -n,  bell. 

(^(iicf,  n.  -e^,  happiness. 

gliiif Itd^,  happy ;  lucky, 

g(u()ett,  glow. 

Q5oIb,  n.  -e^,  gold. 

golbettf  golden. 

QJiJtfie,  m.  -§,  Goethe. 

Q^Mf  m.  -e^,  -fitter,  God; 
bet  ©ott,  by  heaven  ! 

Q5ra5,  n.  -e§,  -dber,  grave. 

(^xaff  m.  -en,  -en,  count. 

Q^raftn,  f.  -ncn,  countess. 

(^tam,  m.  -^,  grief. 

gtnmcn,  grieve. 


2C}2 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


Q5ramnta'tif,  /.  -en,  gram- 
mar. 

(^ra§,  n.  -e§,  -dfer,  grass. 

nxaUf  gray. 

&xit^tnlanhf  n.  -§,  Greece. 

fitcfir  great,  big. 

grogarttg,  grand,  big. 

Q5ro#tttutterr    f.    -iitter, 
grandmother. 

QJro^fofttt,  m.  -(e)§,  -o^ne, 
grandson. 

(^ru^tjater,    m.    -§,    -ater, 
gv2indfather. 

griin,  green. 

Q^xnnhf  m.  -e§,  -iinbe,  low 
ground,  valley. 

grunenr  grow  green. 

grttttaen,  grwnL 

QJrutr  w.  -e§,  -iifee,  gr^^^ 
ing,  salutation,  regards. 

gruten,  greet,  salute. 

gut,  good,  well,  kind. 

Q5ut,  w.  -(e)§,  -liter,  prop- 
erty. 

(SJiitCr  f.  goodness. 

fiitttgr  ^o^c?^  kind. 


§aat,  n.  -e§,  -e,  hair. 
f)ahtn,  irreg.  N.  /laz/^. 

§aftn,  w.  -e§,  -ct^ne,  cock. 
f)alf),  half. 

^al^,  m.  -e§,  -alfe,  neck. 
ftaltettr  O.  hold,  keep ;  stop. 
^atnlDurg,  w.  -§,  Hamburg. 
^anb,  /.  -ctnbc,  /tanfi. 
janbedt,  handle,  treat  of. 


^anbWrift,  /.  -en,  manu- 
script. 

§anbfcftu6f  m.  -(e) g,  -e, 
glove. 

^anbtuii&p  w.  -^,  -iid^er, 
towel,  napkin. 

^anbtticrfr  w.  -(e)  §,  -e, 
handwork,  trade. 

l^angen,  O.  hang. 

§anno'tier,  w.  -g,  name  of  a 
city. 

^an^r  m.  -en§,  Jack;  (^o^ 
I}an'ne§). 

§on§(^ienr  little  Jack,  Jacky. 

^arfe,  /.  -n,  harp. 

^CLtif  hard,  severe. 

§ttfc,  mi.  -n,  -n,  hare. 

^a|?,  ;w.  -fjeg,  /zaf^. 

r)a^(t(i^,  hateiuX,  homely. 

^(i\x)(^if  n.  -c§,  -auptet,  head, 
chief. 

^^axt\)iUi)UX,  m.  -§,  -,  prin- 
cipal  (teacher). 

^au^tntann,  m.  -(e)  §, 
-anner  or  -lente,  captain. 

^anpt^ahtf  f.  -abte,  head 
city,  capital. 

§au^ttt)erf,  n.  -(e)§,  -e, 
main  work. 

^anpitooxi,  w.  -(e)§,  -otter, 
head-zvord,  noun. 

§au§,  n.  -e§,  -dufer,  house. 

^an^tnXf  f.  -en,  housedoor. 

^ani,  f.  -ante,  hide,  skin. 

ftcJctt,  O.  lift. 

§C(^t,  m.  -e§,  -e,  pike 
(fish). 

§etbcl5crgr  w.  -§.  Heidel- 
berg. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


293 


^ettttr  homewsLvd,  home.  i 

^cimatf  f.  -en,  home. 

I)ctm=9c6enr  O.  s.  go  home. 

))txmix6)t  home-like,  com- 
fortable; secret. 

i)txmtoaxi^f  homeward. 

getnttr^,  m.  -§,  Henry. 

Sctfiettr  O.  be  called  or 
named,  mean,  signify. 

i)txitv,  cheerful. 

Ijctsen,  heat. 

^cihf  m.  -en,  -en,  hero. 

ficlfen  (dat.),  O.  help. 

Jefi,  clear,  bright. 

§ennc,  f.  -n,  hen. 

f)eVf  hither,  ago,  since. 

ficraB'r  down  hither,  down. 

ftcrauf,  up  here. 

§cr^ftr  m.  -e§,  -e,  autumn. 

§erbc,  f.  -n,  /t^rc/,  flock. 

Ijcretn'r  m  /i<?f^,  iw;  come 
in! 

f}txtxn  Uxtxmtxx,  O.  s.  eome 
in. 

fternar^',  heresiiter,  after- 
wards. 

^ettr  w.  -n,  -en,  master, 
lord,  gentleman,  Mr.,  Sir ; 
ber  §err,  the  Lord. 

ftcrrltd),  lordly,  splendid. 

Jcr=fa9en,  ^03;  over,  recite. 

i)txn'htv=id}dntxXr  O.  shine 
across. 

^ttnn'itXf  down  /t^r^. 

ftcrutttcr=faficn,  O.  s.  fall 
down. 

Scrtior'=^rtn9Ctt,  irreg.  N. 
produce. 

§crtJor4aufcnp  O.  run  forth. 

^era,  w.  -en§,  -en,  heart. 


ftcr^nri^,  heartily. 

Scute,  to-Ja^;. 

fteut^utagc,  nowadays. 

I)tcr,  /j^r^. 

ftierfter,  to  /i^r^,  hither. 

^imtnelr  m.  -§,  -,  heaven, 
sky. 

fttmm(tf(^,  heavenly. 

f}XXX,  hence,  that  way,  away; 
(opposite  of  ^er). 

5tttttb'=rufenr  O.  shout  down. 

fttnauf,  up  hither,  up  there. 

ftinau^'r  out  hence,  forth, 
away. 

ftinettt',  in  thither,  into. 

Stttge^en,  O.  s.  go  along, 
pass. 

I)tn=!otntnenr  O.  s.  come 
there. 

f)tnten,  behind. 

Sinter,  hinder,  behind. 

I)tnun'tcr,  downward. 

Sinuntet'ttJerfen,  O.  throw 
down. 

Sittttieg',  Siway,  off. 

Stn=3tel)en,  O.  s.  go  forth  or 
away. 

SorS,  ^bl)ev,  am  :^od}ften,  high. 

gocSbeutfdft,  high  German. 

§0(^frf)u(e,  f.  -n,  higher- 
school  (University). 

©ocSWuUeSrer,  m.  -§,  -, 
highschool  teacher. 

Pi^ften^,  at  the  highest,  at 
most. 

^ocfisett,  f.  -en,  high  or  fes- 
tive time,  wedding. 

§of,  m.  -eg,  -ofe,  courtyard, 
court. 

Ijoffen,  hope. 


294 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


Joffentltrft  (adv.),  it  is  to  be 

hoped,  as  I  hope. 
^offnungr  /.  -en,  hope. 
^Bl^c,  f.  -n,  height,  altitude ; 

in  bie  §o^e,  up. 
^Vi^tf  f.  -n,  hole,  cave. 
:^oIb,  gracious,  charming. 
5o(ett,  fetch,  bring. 
h^lh  n.  -e§,  -e  or  -olaer, 

wood. 
§ii(5<^en,  little  piece  of  wood. 
^oUfotjhf  f.  -n,  wood-coal, 

charcoa/. 
l^ort^en,  hearken,  listen. 
Pren,  /i^ar. 

5ul6fcti,  pretty,  fine,  nice. 
^n\f  im  $Ut,  in  no  time. 
^itlfe^  f.  -n,  help;  gu  §iilfe, 

help! 
^Uttb,    m.    -eg,    -e,    dog, 

hound. 
^Uttbctt,  w.  -§,  -e,  hundred. 
^nn^tXf  m.  -§,  hunger. 
ftungern,  hunger. 
Ijttn^ng,  hungry. 
^nif  m.  -e§,  -iite,  /la/. 
fjittCttr   keep,   keep   to;    refl. 

take  care,  beware. 
fitter,  m.  -^,  —,  guardian. 
^ittti^Ctt,  n.  -§,  -,  cottage. 
^nitt,  f.  -w,  hut. 

\i)Xf  her,  their ;  ^"^x,  your. 
xi)XX^,    hers,    theirs;    ^^rtg 

yours. 
tm  =  in  bem. 
immct^  always,  constantly. 


in  (dat.  or  ace),  in,  into,  at 

Axif  suffix  forming  feminine 
nouns  from  masculines. . 

tnbem'  in  that,  meanwhile, 
while,  since. 

tttbet  (-ffen),  in  that,  mean- 
while, nevertheless,  while. 

inner Jalfi    (gen.    or    dat.), 
withm. 

innifi,  warm,  ardent. 

in^^cfonberc,    in   particular, 
especially. 

Snterjeftion',  f.  -en,  inter- 
jection. 

Snfdfirift,  /.  -en,  ascription. 

inmenbigp     mward,     mside, 
within. 

irgcnbttiOf  2inywhere. 

irrcn,  be  in  error;  refl.  be 
mistaken. 

Sfel^erg,     m.     a     mountain 
near  Innsbruck. 

Sta'Iien,  n.  -§,  Italy. 

Stalie'ner,  m.  -§,  -    (the) 
Italian. 

itaUc'nifr^  (adj.),  Italian. 


\(if  yes,  indeed,  you  know,  of 
course,  why ;  yea. 

jagenr  hunt,  chase. 

Sdgcr,  m.  -§,  -,  hunter. 

Safttr,  n.  -e§,  -e,  year. 

Safttc^scitr  f.  -en,  season  of 
the  year. 

Safttftnnbertr  n.  -§,  -e,  hun- 
dred years,  century. 

3cinnar',  m.  -§,  -e,  January. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


295 


jttttioljrf  yes,  indeed. 

jc,    ever,    according   as,   the 

(with  compar.). 
jcb     (jeber),    each,    every; 

either. 
iebenfttH^r  at  all  events. 
icbetmanttf  every  man,  every 

one. 
jeboii^'r  nevertheless,  yet. 
jegltdfl^  every,  each. 
itmal^f  at  any  time,  ever. 
jemanbr     somebody,     some 

one,  any  one. 
jcn-    (jener),    yonder    one, 

that. 
ienfctt(§)     (gen.),    on    that 

side,  htyond. 
Scfu^r    m.    -n,    -It,    -nm, 

Jesus. 
U^tf  now. 

Soljann^  m.  -§,  John. 
3ttbCr  m.  —n,  —XI,  Jew. 
Sutjenbr  f.  youth. 
Stt'tt,  m.  July. 
ittttHr  young. 
Sltttfifctr  /.   -n,  young  girl, 

virgin,  maiden. 
Suttgfraitr    /.    -en,    young 

woman,  maiden. 
^unglingf  m.  —^,  -c,  young 

man. 
Sunif  m.  June. 


^affcCr  m.  -§,  coffee. 
^a()n,  m.  -c§,  -a^m,  boat. 
Slaifcr,  in.  -^,  -,  emperor. 
tali,  cold. 


Sidlitr  f.  cold,  coldness. 
SlanuV,  n.  —§,  — e,  camel. 
Siatnerab'r  m.  -§  or  -en,  -en, 

comrade,  companion. 
S!amttt'r  m.  -(e) §,  -t,  chim- 
ney, fireplace;  fireside. 
^amntf     m.    -e§,    -amme, 

comb. 
famtnen,  comb. 
fom^feitr  fight. 
fann§  =  !ann  \)a^. 
^axif  m.  -§,  Charles. 
^iaxld)tn,  Charley. 
WdUf  w.  -§,  -,  cheese. 
Ua^tf  f.  -n,  cat. 
fanftxif  buy. 
^aufmann,  m.  -(e)g,  -dnncr 

or  -leute,  merchant. 
fauntf  hardly,  scarcely. 
ttin,  not  one,  no  one;  gar 

fetn,  now^  at  all. 
!ctttC^ttiC9§,  by  no  means. 
better,  m.  -^,  -,  cellar^ 
^ettttcr,    m.    -^,    -,    butler, 

waiter,  servant. 
fennettr  irreg.  N.  know. 
tenner,   m.   -^,   -,   expert, 

judge. 
Slerfcr flitter,    n.    prison-bar, 

grating. 
^iefetbaumr  w.  -(e) ^/  -^'^- 

tne,  pine  tree. 
Slteferl)0(5f  w.  -e§,  pine  wood. 
Sltnbr  n.  -e§,  -or,  child. 
riinberstmtner,     n.    -§,    -, 

children's  room,  nursery. 
UxnUf  n.  -(e)  §,  -t,  chin. 
2xx6)tt  f-  -n,  church. 
Stivd)txiluhf   n.   -(e)§,  -er, 

church-song,  hymn. 


296 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


^trf(^C,  /.  -n,  cherry. 
^(ttgc,  /.  -n,  complaint. 
flagen,  complain. 
Ulamr  yn.  -e§,  -cinge,  sound, 

clang. 
tlat>p^r  clap!  clack. 
ftaVf  clear,  bright 
Sllaffe,  /.  -n,  class. 
^(eib,  n.  -z§>,  -tx,  garment, 

article  of  clothing,  dress. 
lUxUt  little,  small. 
SiXetnigfcit,  f.  -en,  trifle. 
^letngclb,    n.    -§,    change, 

small  coin. 
Hinrjen,  O.  sound  ring. 
Ko^fcUr  knock. 
flug,  shrewd. 
^nabCr  m.  -n,  -n,  boy. 
Sitntc,  n.  -eg,  -e,  knee. 
fntftcrttr  crackle. 
Slo^r  m.  -e§,  -od^e,  cook. 
ixs^m,  cook. 
Coffer,    m.    -g,    -,    cof/^r, 

trunk. 
^iJftler,  m.  -^,  man's  name. 
fommetir  O.  s.  come. 
iioubuftcur'r     m.     -§,     -e, 

^idntg,  wi.  -g,  -e,  ^m^. 

iiontgtttr  /.  -nen,  queen. 

Sifinigretrf),  w.  -eg,  -e,  ^/w^- 
dom. 

^onjunflton'r  /.  -en,  con- 
junction, [can. 

f^nnZMf    irreg.    N.    be    able, 

Slonscrt'r  n.  -e§,  -e,  concert. 

Sto:pf,  w.  -eg,  -o|)fe,  head. 

^oratt,  m.  -g,  Koran. 

iliir^cr,    m.    -g^    -,    body; 


forrigicrenr  correct. 

foftfiar,  <:o^^/3;. 

foften,  co.y^. 

ixa^tUf  crack. 

^raft,  /.  -dfte,  strength. 

IxaMtxif  crow. 

Ixaxd,  ill,  sick. 

frdttfen,  pain,  grieve. 

^rcibCr  f.  -n,  chalk;  crayon. 

^rctg,  w.  -eg,  -e,  set,  circle, 

band. 
^rtcg,  m.  -eg,  -e,  war. 
^rone,  /^.  -n,  crown. 
^xn^t  fn.  -eg,  -iige,  pitcher, 

jug. 
^iii^ie,  f.  -n,  kitchen. 
Um^h  f'  -n,  ball,  sphere. 
fni}l,  cool. 

^unft,  f.  -iinfte,  art. 
^u^jfcr,  n.  -g,  copper. 
Jura,  short ;  cwrf. 
fiirgUr^r  recently,  lately. 
fiiffettr  kiss. 
^utfcftctr   m.   -g,  -    coac/i- 

man,  driver. 


laBettf  refresh,  quicken. 

lad}tn,  laugh. 

Id^tlrXf  smile. 

Idr^erUj^r  absurd. 

labctir  load. 

Saben,  w.  -g,  -dben,  shop, 

store. 
(of)mr  lame. 
!ildmp^tn,    n.    -g,    -,    little 

lamp. 
2ampt,  f.  -n,  lamp. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


297 


2anb,  n.  -c§,  -e  and  -dnber, 
land,  country;  ^ter  gu 
Sanbe,  in  this  country. 

fittttbe^morf,  /.  -en,  bound- 
ary. 

Sanbrnanttr  w.  -(e) §,  -(in- 
ner or  -leute,  farmer. 

iianb^manur  m.  -(e)  §,  -an- 
ner  or  -leute,  fellow- 
countryman^  citizen  of  the 
same  country. 

lan^(c),  long,  a  long  while. 

lanjjc    f}tx,    long   ago    or 
since. 

longer,  considerable. 

Idngftr  long  since. 

(affctt,  O.  let,  cause,  leave. 

£aft,  /.  -en,  load. 

fiafter,  n.  -§,  vice. 

(atei'nifr^,  Latin. 

Saufr  7«.  -g,  -ctufc,  course. 

Jaufcn,  O.  s.  or  h.  run. 

fattfenbr  running,  current, 
present. 

2ant,  m.  -§,  -e,  sound. 

lani  (gen.),  according  to. 

lani,  loud,  aloud. 

lantcn,  sound,  run,  go. 

ianitXf  pure;  mere,  nothing 
but. 

(el6en,  have  life,  live. 

Sebettr  n.  -§,  -,  life. 

2ci>tn^ianf,  m.  -e§,  -ctufe, 
life's  course,  way  of  liv- 
ing. 

Uf>tti>dfil,  farewell! 

hhtvn,  of  leather,  leathern. 

(egettf  lay;  cause  to  lie. 

Sejne,  f.  -n,  back  or  arm 
(of  a  chair), 


leftren,  teach. 
iicfirer,  m.  -§,  -  teacher. 
iti^tf  light,  easy,  fickle. 
^tihf  n.  ~c§,  pain,  harm;  e§ 

tl)ut   (or  ift)  mtr  letb,  I 

am  sorry. 
(etber,  alas !  unfortunately,  I 

am  sorry  to  say. 
leterttr  play  the  lyre. 
(ei^ettr  O.  lend. 
Sefttott'r  /.  lesson. 
(cnfen,  guide. 
^cv^t,  f.  -n,  lark. 
lernen,  learn. 
(efen,  O.  read. 
^efef^ur,   f.  -en,  marks  of 

wear  (in  reading). 
Scfcftitrfr  n.  -(e)§,  -e,  read- 
ing-piece. 
(e^t,  last,  latest. 
kur^tCtt,  give  light,  shine. 
Se«te     (pi.),    people,    men, 

folks. 
fitt^t,    n.    -e§,    -er,    light, 

candle. 
Ite^,  lovely,  dear;  —  ^abtn, 

like,  love. 
Stefirften,  Ste6,  n.  little  love, 

sweetheart. 
fite^Cr  /.  love. 
lithtn,  love. 
lithctf  rather ;  mtr  ift  Heber, 

I  prefer. 
UeBItj^,  lovely. 
fitefinttgr  w.  -§,  -e,  darling, 

favorite. 
fitcbr  n.  -c§,  -er,  song. 
fitcbj^eur  little  song. 
(iefcrn,     ddiver^    give     (a 

battle). 


298 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


licgenr  O.  h.  or  s.  lie;  e§ 
Itegt  nttr  nidjt§  hatan,  I 
care  nothing  for  it. 

fiindftettr  Carrie. 

linf^,  left,  to  the  left. 

Qippt,  f.  -n,  lip. 

fitft,  f.  cunning,  deceit,  craft. 

fittcratur,  f.  -en,  literature. 

Su6,  n.  — e§,  praise. 

(ol^Cttr  praise. 

2od},  n.  -c§,  -bdjcx,  hole. 

£fiffel,  m.  -§,  -,  spoon. 

Sonbon,  n.  -§,  London. 

^OXdtV,  f.  Lurley. 

(o§=  (separable  prefix), 
loose. 

XflfeUr  solve,  (of  tickets) 
buy. 

Sbttic,  m.  -n,  -n,  lion. 

SfittJenljautr  f.  -ante,  lion's 
skin. 

Suft,  f.  -iifte,  air. 

fittft,  -iifte,  pleasure;  Suft 
^aben,  be  inclined. 

(iiftcrn,  greedy. 

(ufttg,  merry,  jovial,  cheer- 
ful ;  amusing. 

fittftf^tclr  n.  -§,  -z,  pleasure- 
play,  comedy. 

^yxWitX^  m.  -^,  Luther. 


Waa^^t  f'   name  of  a   river, 

Meuse. 
ntarifiettr  make,  do,  act,  play. 
ntar^ttg,  mighty. 
SJlttbdjCtt,  girl ;  maiden. 
^iD'laBbcIcin,  n.  -§,  -,  maiden. 


M^l)imif  f.  -en,  meal-time, 

meal. 
9Jlai,  m.  -(e)g,  -e  or  -en, 

May. 
9WaIr    n.    -(e) §,    -e,    time, 

turn,  bout. 
maUxif  paint. 
man,  one,  people,  they.     ^ 
mandi(er),  many,  many  a. 
tnanj^mal,    many    a    time, 

sometimes. 
SJlantt,  m.  -c§,  -dnner,  7/jaw, 

husband. 
SJlotttUttr  an  Italian  city. 
SJldrdfienr    story,    tale,    leg- 
end. 
SJlatf,  /.  -en,  mark,  a  coin 

=  100  ^fenntge  =  about 

25  cents. 
9}lar!t,  wi.  -c§,  -axliz,  mar- 
ket, mart. 
9Jlarft^(a^,    m.    -e§,    -d^e, 

market  place  or  square. 
matfdfltc'rcnr  march. 
SJliirSr  ^/z.  -eg,  -e,  March. 
ajlafdji'nc,  f.  -n,  machine. 
9Kaff,  n.  -eg,  -e,  measure. 
3Jlaf?ett  (pi.),  bounds;  iiber 

al(c  3)^af3en,  exceedingly. 
maften,     feed     with     mast, 

fatten. 
ayiau(,  n.  -eg,  -duler,  mouth 

(of  beasts). 
'MdM^f  f.  -dufe,  mouse. 
9JlQ«§d)cn,  little  mouse. 
SJltiufcfttfie,    /.    -n,    mouse- 

trap. 
aJlcer,  w.  -e§,  -e,  sea. 
mcfir,  more;  tne^rere  (pi.), 

several. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


299 


aWcJrfiett,  /.  -en,  plural,  plu- 
rality. 

Tltf)tS(ti)l,  f.  plural  (num- 
ber). 

SWcUc,  f.  -n,  mile;  the  Ger- 
man mile  equals  about 
five  English  miles. 

meitt,  my,  mine. 

ntctnctt,  think,  mean. 

mciner,  mein  (gen.  sg.  of 
id]),  of  me,  my;  um  met- 
net  iDtEcn,  for  my  sake; 
metnettDegen,  on  my  ac- 
count; for  all  I  care. 

SJletttung,  f.  -en,  meaning, 
opinion. 

metftp  most;  (superl.  of 
\)id). 

mciften^r  mostly,  at  most. 

Tlti^itVf  m.  -^,  -,  master. 

Tlclohit'f  (-eV),  f.  -Ven, 
melody,  air. 

SPZemel,  f.  name  of  a  river. 

ajlenbcl^foljn,  m.  -^,  Men- 
delssohn,      [human  being. 

SUcttf^,  m.  -en,    -en,    man, 

mcrlUiurtJtg,  remarkable. 

S^cffcr,  n.    ^,  -,  knife. 

'^lttaU\  n.  -e^,  -e,  metal. 

mm,  f.  milk. 

milbr  mild. 

TliUion',  f.  -en,  million. 

SJltnu'te,  /.  -n,  minute. 

mif^faUtn,  O.  displease. 

mit  (dat.),  with;  too,  also. 

mii=hnMtn,  irreg.  N.  bring 
along. 

tnit^gcjettr  O.  s.  go  along, 
go  (with). 

SDIttfeib,  n.  -§,  sympathy. 


mit =retfcn,  s.  travel  along 
(with). 

SJlttfc^uletr  m.  -§,  -,  fellow- 
pupil.  : 

SJlittao,  m.  —§,  -c,  mid-day, 
noon. 

SJltttag^effcn,  w.  -§,  -,  m«(i- 
(ia3;  eating,  noon-meal, 
dinner. 

SJlittc,  /.  wic^dle,  midst 

'Mxiiclf  n.  -§,  -,  middle, 
medium,  means. 

3)ltttc(fittgcr,  in.  -§,  -,  mj(/- 
dle-finger. 

mtttcl^  (gen.),  by  means  of. 

3Jlttttt)orf)r  m.  -§,  -e,  mJc/- 
week,  Wednesday. 

ntUgen,  irreg.  N.  like;  be 
possible,  may. 

mfi^nj^,  possible. 

OTgUdEifeit,  f.  -en,  possi- 
bility. 

9Jlo'nat,  w.  -§,  -e,  month. 

9Jlonbr  m.  -e§,  -e,  moon. 

ajlontag,  w.  -§,  -e,  Monday. 

ajlorb,  m.  -(e)§;  arjorbto! 
murder ! 

9Jlotnett,  m.  -§,  morning. 

morgen,  to-worrow;  mor- 
gen  friil),  to-morrow  early, 
to-morrow  morning ;  ntor- 
gen  abenb,  to-morrow 
evening. 

aWotrriettlicbr  w.  -(e)§,  -er, 
morning  hymn. 

aJlorgenrot,  «.  -(e)§,  dawn. 

aWorgenftunbCr  f.  -n,  mor- 
nmg  hour. 

"M^^tiiti,  m.  -§,  -g,  wo.?- 
quito. 


300 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


mnhtf  tired. 

Mnf}tf  f.  trouble,  pains. 

5mW(cn)rab,      n.     -(e)§, 

— aber,  wz7/-wheel. 
W^UtXf    m.    -§,    man's 

name. 
tttu(tt|j(t3tc'ren,  multiply. 
SJlund^en,  n.  -§,  Munich. 
aWunb,  m.  -e§,  -e,  -iinber, 

mouth. 
muttb(0§,  mouthless. 
9Kufc'itnt,  n.  -g,  -e'en,  ww- 

aWufif,  /.  music. 

SWufifkljrcr,  m.  -§,  -,  mu- 
sic-tea.cher. 

mitffett,  irreg.  N.  be  obliged 
to,  must. 

TlWxmftnq,    m.    -^,    idle- 
ness. 

9Jlttt,  m.  -e§,  mood,  courage ; 
spirits. 

aWuttcr,  f.  -litter,  mother. 

Sffl\xiitx\^xa^tf  f.  -n,  mother- 
tongue. 

Wlni^t,  f.  -u,  cap. 


9J 

nadft  (dat),  after,  to. 

9Zad&^ar,  w.  -§  or  -n,  -n, 
neighbor. 

nar^beiUr  after  //za/,  after, 
according  as. 

nati6=5c'r,  afterwards. 

nar^^aitfettf  O.  s.  chase 
after. 

9la(^mtttag,  w.  -?,  -e,  after- 
noon, 


^ItL^i,  f.  ~a&^it,  night. 

^a^ix^aUf  f.  -en,  nightin- 
gale. 

'^a^ix^6)f  m.  -e§,  -e,  des- 
sert. 

9Za(^t5Ugr  m.  -(e) §,  -iige, 
night-\.v3.m. 

nttft(c)r  n^ar^  w/^/i. 

9^dfte,  /.  nearness,  neighbor- 
hood,  vicinity. 

ttojcr,  nearer,  intimate. 

9lame,  i/j.  -en§,  -en,  waw^. 

^arr,  m.  -en,  -en,  fool. 

'^'d^'^tn,  little  nose. 

S^iifrfier,  m.  -§,  -,  dainty  fel- 
low. 

^ainx\  f.  -en,  nature. 

naiuxTxdif  naturally,  of 
course. 

nc^Ctt  (dat.  or  ace),  beside, 
by,  with. 

9k5cnf(u#r  m.  -e§,  -iiffe, 
tributary  river,  branch. 

9leBentt)ort,  n.  -(e)§,  -brter, 
beside  zuord,  adverb. 

nth^t  (dat.),  along  with,  be- 
sides. 

Slcffe,  m.  -n,  -n,  nephew. 

neljmettr  O.  take. 

9^etbr  m.  -e§,  envy,  jeal- 
ousy. 

neitt,  no. 

nennen,  irreg.  N.  name. 

9left,  w.  -e§,  -er,  nest. 

neUr  w^'w. 

9^eujajtr   n.   -§,   -e,   A^^w- 

neuliciftr  newly,  recently, 
neuttr  wm(?. 
neuntf  nin^/}. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


301 


neunsefjttr  nineteen. 

neunaigf  ninety. 

ni^if  not. 

nid}i^,  naught,  nothing. 

nte,  at  no  time,  never. 

ttteber,  down,  downward. 

nlcber^Iaffettr  O.  let  down; 
refl.  alight. 

tttema(§,  at  no  time,  never. 

ntemanb,  nobody. 

ntmmcr,  no  more,  never. 

tttmmcrmeftr,  never  inore, 
never. 

ntroenb^r  nowhere. 

nit,  dial.  =  nt(^t. 

nod),  still,  besides,  moreover, 
as  yet. 

nojft  niditf  not  yet ;  nocf)  eixi, 
one  more. 

9Zotbamertfa,  n.  -§,  North 
America. 

9'lorben,  m.  -en§,  north. 

9Jot,  f.  need,  distress. 

9Zote,  f.  note,  musical  char- 
acter. 

nSttn,  needinl,  necessary. 

^lot'x^'hn^,  n.  -§,  -iic^er, 
note-book. 

notttJCnbtg,  necessary. 

^Ut)tVh,  f.  -n,  tale,  short 
story;  (distinguished  from 
D^omari/  longer  story  or 
Romance). 

9^iJtJcm5er,  m.  -§,  -,  Novem- 
ber. 

^umvxtXf  f.  -n,  number, 

nun,  now,  now  that ;  Yfell, 

nnXf  only. 

^\x%  f.  -iiffe,  nut, 

X^W^^f  useful. 


D 

D,  0! 

o^f       whether;       (archaic) 

above,  over. 
06  —  au^f  although. 
ofieitr  ?ihove,  on  high. 
DberflQj^c,  /.  -n,  surface. 
O^crft,  m.  -eg  or  -en,  -c  or 

-en,  colonel. 
oBcrft,  uppermost. 
oBg(ct((|,  although. 
obWon,  although. 
D^ft,  n.  -c§,  fruit. 
of)tt)of}lf  although. 
ober,  or. 
Cfen,   m.   -§,   cfen,   stove, 

oven. 
offcn,  o/>^w. 
offentHd^,  public. 
£)fft5tc'r,  m.  -g,  -e,  officer. 
liffnen,  open. 
oUf  oft,  often. 
lifter^,  often. 
o()!  oh! 

O'ftetm,  m.  -§,  -e,  uncle. 
oI)nc  (ace),  without. 
ojttcbent,  besides. 
O^r,  n.  -(e) §,  -e,  ^or. 
OftoBcr,    m.    -g,    -,    Oc^o- 

iblf  n.  -§,  -e,  0//. 
Dnfe(,  m.  -§,  -,  uncle. 
€)t>tXf  f.  -n,  o/>^ra. 
Orbnung,  f.  -en,  ordinance, 

rule ;  order. 
Crtr  m.  -(e) g,  -e,  or  tixtcx, 

place. 
Dften,  w.  -§,  east. 
^itxxu^f  n,  -§,  Austria, 


302 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


^aav,  n.  -c§,  -c,  pair;  etn 
paav,  a  few, 

padcn,  pack,  seize,  lay  hold 
of. 

^apitt'r  n.  -§,  -e,  paper. 

^axi^\  n.  Paris. 

^axff  m.  -e§,  -t,  park. 

5[5artte',  f.  -en,  trip,  party. 

SJSaffanicr'r  m.  -§>,  -e,  passen- 
ger. 

Jjaff ettf  pass  muster,  fit,  apply. 

^aftor,  m.  -§,  -en,  pastor. 

^aul,  ni.  -^,  Paul. 

^erle,  /.  -n,  pearl. 

^erfcr,  m.  -^,  -,  Persian. 

^erfo'nensug,  m.  -(e)§,  -ii^ 
ge,  accommodation  train. 

pfennig,  m.  -c§,  -e,  penny, 
a  coin  =  i/ioo  of  a  Ttaxi 
=  about  2^  mills. 

^fcrb,  w.  -c§,  -z,  horse. 

^i^ferbeftafjn,  A  -en,  horse- 
railroad. 

^fcrbcBaftttttiagcnr  m.  -§,  - 
horse-car. 

^flan^e,  f.  -n,  plant. 

%^^^^f  f-  care,  attendance. 

:|jf(egen,  wait  upon,  care  for. 

mWf  /.  -en,  duty. 

^ffiirfettr  pluck. 

^fut,  /i(?.'  foh  !  for  shame ! 

556i(ofo^I)te',  /.  -i'cn,  philo- 
sophy. 

%x\^tXf  m.  -§,  -,  pilgrim. 

Wo'le,  f.  -n,  pistol. 

Won,  m.  -(e) §,   -cine,  />/an. 

?i5la^,  m.  -e§,  -ct^e,  />./oc^, 
seat. 


^laubcrn,  converse,  chatter. 

|jlo^li(^,  suddenly. 

^oxticx\  m.  -§,  -§,  />or^£?r. 

^oft,  /.  -en,  post,  post-oi- 
fice,  mail. 

^rofibent'r  m.  -en,  -en,  pres- 
ident. 

^rcbigeitr  preach. 

^retfettr  O.  praise. 

^re^ofitiott',  f.  -en,  prepo- 
sition. 

^xm^tn,  n,  -§,  Prussia. 

'^xono'mtxtf  n.  -§,  -ina,  pro- 
noun. 

^U^Ufum,  n.  -§,  public. 

^xiii,  m.  -(e)§,  -e,  desk. 

^um^erntrfclr  w.  -§,  /^w/it- 
pernickel. 

^untt,  m.  -e§,  -e,  />om^ 
period. 

^JunftUr^,  prompt. 


quolen,  torment. 
ixntUc,  f.  -n,  or  OueH,  m. 
— §,  -en,  spring. 


m 

Sflab,  «.  -e§,  -aber,  wheel. 

raft^i,  fast,  swift. 

rafenb,  frantic. 

fftai,  m.  -e§,  -die,  advice,  de- 
cree. 

raten,  O.  advise,  counsel, 
guess. 

9fiatl)att§,    w.    -e^f    -ciufer. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


303 


council-house,     city-hall, 
court-house. 

OJat^au^fcKer,  m.  -§,  -,  city- 
hall  cellar. 

IRatljatt^turm,     m.     -(e)  §, 
-iirmc,  city-hall  tower. 

ratfant,  advisable. 

Oiotfet,  n.  -^,  -,  riddle. 

rauiCtt,  steal,  deprive. 

9iou6er,  m.  -§,  -,  robber. 

xand)tn,  smoke. 

JRaum,  m.  -e§,  -auxm,  room, 
place.  [away. 

rautnen,   make  room,  clear 

raufr^ctir  move  with  a  noise, 
rustle,  rush,  roar. 

Oicr^nung,  /.  -en,  reckoning, 
bill. 

9^e(^t,  w.  — e§,  -e,  n'^/t^^  jus- 
tice ;  red^t  ^abett,  be  right. 

xcd}i,   right,    straight;    very, 
well. 

rer^t§,  right,  to  the  right. 

rebeur  talk,  speak. 

9flebctcil,  m.  -(e) §,  -e,  part 
of  speech. 

Sficblit^fctt,  /.  honesty. 

9ficgcl,  f.  -n,  rule. 

tReocitr  m.  -^,  —,  rain. 

Oficgenfr^trnt,  m.  -(e) §,  -e, 
umbrella. 

refite'ren,  reign  over,  rule. 

regncttr  ram. 

9^et(ft,  n.  -c§,  -e,  realm. 

xti^f  rich. 

xtx^tUf  reach,  hand,  pass. 

tcif,  W/7^. 

rctitr  clear,  pure. 

tetn(id),  neat,  clean. 

O^eifc,  f.  -w,  journey. 


reifeitr    h.    or    s.    journey, 
travel. 

iReifettbCr  m.  w.  traveler. 

reifjen,  O.  tear,  snatch  away, 
drag. 

xtxitxif  O.  h.  or  s.  ride  (on 
horseback). 

iReiter,     m.     -§>,     -,     rider, 
horseman. 

Oletter^mann,    m.    -(e) §, 
-(inner,  dragoon. 

tRettljferbr  71.  -(e) §,  -e,  WJ- 
m^  horse,  saddle  horse. 

tclgenbf  charming. 

fReftourattott'r  A  -en,  restau- 
rant. 

fRetour'Mttet',  n.  -(e)§,  -e, 
return-ticket. 

Xttitn,  rescue,  save. 

Oflftcttt,  m.  -e§,  Rhine. 

ttd^tt0f  right,  correct. 

rter^ien,  O.  smell. 

Oflterje(r  m.  -§,  -  bolt. 

diin^f  m.  —c§,  -e,  ring. 

CltngfingCtr  m.  -§,  -,  ring- 
finger. 

Dfltttglcin,  little  ring. 

xim^nm,    round    about,    all 
around. 

rtnnen,  O.  run,  flow. 

dtod,  m.  -t§>,  -Mz,  coat. 

Xd\)f  rude,  raw^  rough. 

Dfiomon'r  m.  -(e)§,  -e,  novel, 
romance. 

iHo man Wreificr,    m.   -^,   -, 
novelist. 

9fiiimer,  m.  -§,  -,  (the)  Ro- 
man. 

Siits\tf  f.  -n,  rose. 

9lof?,  n.  -eg,  -e,  steed. 


304 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


diot,  m.  -§,  proper  name. 

XOif  red. 

dlMtxtf  m.  -§,  -,  ridge, 
back. 

ritrfttiart^,  hsickwards. 

ruberitr  row. 

^nff  m.  -§,  -c,  call. 

r«fen,  O.  call  out,  cry  out, 
shout;  call  to,  summon. 

Ofiuftc,  f.  rest,  quiet. 

rul)en,  rest. 

rul)tg,  quiet,  at  rest,  uncon- 
cerned. 

ruttb,  round. 

fHnnhtdU^iUci,  n.  -t^,  -t, 
roundtrip  ticket. 

9flu ffc,  m.  -n,  -n,  (the)  Rus- 
sian. 

ruffiW   (adj.),  Russian. 

fHnf^lanh,  n.  -§,  Russia. 


(Baal,    m.    -e§,   -ale,    hall, 

saloon,  parlor. 
Ba^tf  f.  -x\,  thing,  affair. 
Soci^fen,  n.  -§,  Saxony. 
Badf    m.   -c§,   -Me,   sack, 

bag. 
fagcn,  say,  tell. 
BaU,  n.  -c§,  -c,  salt. 
famt  (dat.),  together  with. 
Bam^ia^f  m.  -^,  -z,  Satur- 

day. 
Sanb,  m.  —c§,  sand. 
fanftr  soft,  gentle. 
(Sanoct,  m.  -^,  —,  singer. 
Batttlf  m.  -§,  —,  saddle. 
@a^,  m,  H^,  -ci^e,  sentence. 


fauer,    sour,    disagreeable, 

hard. 
fnumcnr  delay. 
®cftabe(tt)r    m.   -§,    -aben, 

harm,  damage ;  e§  tft  fd^a^ 

be,  it  is  a  pity. 
friftaben  (dat),  harm,  injure; 

scathe. 
Wablid^,  harmful. 
©J^af,  n.  -e§,  -t,  sheep. 
fcfiaffen,  O.  create,  produce, 

be     busy     about,     work; 

shape. 
Scftaffnetr  m.  -§,  -   porter, 

brakeman. 
Wavxtn,  refl.  be  a.y/iawed. 
B6)ax,  f.  -en,  troop,  host. 
(Scfiatten,  m.  —§,  —,  shadow. 
©(^aubcr,  m.  -§,  -,  shudder- 
ing, horror. 
Waueitr  look,  behold;  see. 
e*ttuMftttf)(,     m.     -(e)g, 

—Vi^le,  rocking-chair. 
S(^auttt,    m.    -eg,    -durne, 

foam,  froth ;  scum. 
Sr^awf^ief,    n.    -(e) §,    -e, 

spectacle;  play. 
(B^anW^tU)an^,  n.  -e§,  -au^ 

fer,  play/zoM.y^,  theatre. 
fdjeiben,    O.    s.    part;    ha^ 

©d)etben,  parting. 
B^txn,   m.   — e§,   — e,   sheen, 

light. 
fcftctnen,  O.  .y/im^,  seem,  ap- 
pear. 
Sd^emel,  m.  -§,  -,  footstool. 

fi^irfen,   send,  refl.   prepare, 
be  fitting. 

fcj^ie^citf  0.  shoot 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


305 


Sifttff,  11.  -C§,  -C,  ship. 

Sr^iffriienr  little  ship. 
Srfjiffer,  m.  -§,  -  boatman ; 

skipper. 
^d)xUctf  m.  -§,  Schiller. 
(Bd)ixm,   m.   -§,  -e,    shade, 

shield. 
^Bdfladiir  f.  -en,  battle. 
fdftlafcn,  O.  sleep,  be  2isleep. 
(Bd)laU^mnuVf     n.     -§,     - 

sleeping-voom. 
(5(ft(ag,  m.  -c§,  -age,  blow ; 

warble  (of  a  bird). 
Wlooen,  O.  strike,  beat. 
f«(cc^t,  bad. 
frfilctr^icnr  O.  s.  move  softly, 

creep,  slink. 
^d}Vt^ttn,  settle,   pacify. 
fr^Uef^cttr  O.  close,  shut,  lock 

up;  form. 
(B^lo^,,  n.  -e§,  -offer,  lock; 

castle,  palace. 
(5(^(uffcl,  m.  -§,  -,  key. 
^d^mtdtxtf      taste,      savor, 

smack. 
Sj^mers,   m.   -e§   or  -en§, 

-en,  pain,  smart. 
(ScJ^micb,  m.  -e§,  -e,  .ymiV/z, 

black^mz7/j. 
ftftmitrfcn,  adorn. 
Sdiincc,  m.  -e§,  snow. 
fd)nctbenr  O.  cut. 
Srfinctbetr  m.  -§,  -,  tailor. 
fi^neten,  .ywozc;. 
fi^neK,  fast,  quick. 
©dftttcfisu^r  >n.  -(e)  §,  -iige, 

fast  train,  express  train. 
ff^Ottr    already,    betimes,    at 

least,     surely,     doubtless, 

even ;  fd^on  red^t,  all  right. 


Won,  handsome,  fair,  beau- 
tiful. 

fc^ii^fettf  draw,  draw  in,  in- 
hale. 

Srf)ii^futtg,  f.  -en,  creation. 

Sr^ornftetn,   m.  -(e)g,   -e, 
chimney. 

<S(tiottranbr  n.  -§,  Scotland. 

Sc^ranfe,  /.  -n,  barrier. 

Stftrerfettr  m.  -^,  -,  terror, 
fright. 

fj^recfcn,  O.  N.  to  be  afraid ; 
frighten. 

8cfirctfibu(^,  n.  -(e) §,  -u= 
djer,  writing  ^oo/e. 

fj^rctBcttr   O.   write. 

Sj^ret^feber,  f.  pen. 

<S(firtft,  /.  -en,  writing. 

3j^riftftctter,     77^.     -§,     - 
writer ;      ©(^rtftfteHertn, 
woman  writer. 

S(^rttt,  m.  -(e) g,  -e,  pace. 

Sr^uftr  ^^.  -^^/  -e.  ^/^o^. 

Srf)U^ma(^er,  w.  -§,  -,  shoe- 
maker. 

©rfiulb,  /.  -en,  fault,  debt. 

fc^ulbt^r  guilty,  to  blame. 

8(^u(c,  f.  n.  school. 

8fftu(er,  w.  -§,  -,  scholar, 
pupil. 

'Bd)uiQchmhCf    n.    -§,    -, 
.yc/?oo/-building. 

(Sc^u^r    w.    -eg,    protection, 
defence. 

fc^it^en,  save,  protect. 

Sr^ttiari^fjett,   f.  -en,   weak- 
ness. 

(8rfttt)a9Ctr  m.  -§,  -ctger,  bro- 
ther-in-law. 

(Bditoalhe,  f.  -n,  swallow. 


3o6 


GERMAN -ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


^d)toan,  m.  -§,  -am,  swan. 
jd^toax^f     black,     swarthy, 

szvart. 
^^toax^hxoif   n.   -§,   black- 

bread. 
fj^ttieBcn,  float,  hover. 
©dftttJebc,  m.  -n,  -n,  Szvede. 
Scfttneben,  n.  S,  Sweden. 
fi^tticbiW    (adj.),  Swedish. 
^d)ti)^if<^n,    s.    or    h.    roam, 

rove. 
friftttietgcn,  O.  be  silent. 
Si^ttietn,  n.  —c^,  —e,  swine, 

hog. 
<Bd)tom,  f.  Switsevlsind. 
Sc^ttieiser,  m.  —^,  -,  Swiss. 
fj^ttielgen,  revel. 
ft^ttJCtf     grievous,     sore, 

heavy. 
<Bd)totxi,  n.  -e§,  -ev,  sword. 
8cf)ttJertge!(irr,  n.  -§,  sword- 

clash. 
Si^mcftcr,  /.  -rt,  sister. 
f(^mimtnett,  O.  h.  or  s.  swim. 
^d^toiixtxif  O.  swear,  vow. 
Sr^ttJUtr  m.  -§,  -me,  oath. 

fcrfjft,  .yt>fA. 

fetftatg,  sixty. 

See,  f.  -en,  sea. 

See,  w.  -(e)  §,  -en,  lake. 

Seele,  /.  -n,  soul. 

fegnen,  bless. 

feften,  O.  see. 

U^Xf  very,  very  much. 

fetttr  his,  its. 

fetn,  O.  s.  be. 

fett  (dat.),  since. 

fettbetttr  since  that,  since. 

(BciUf  f.  -n,  side,  page. 


fe(0  (after  ber),  .y^//same, 
same. 

fe(l6er,  self. 

felJft,  self;  even. 

fef^ftsufrteben,  .y^//-satisfied. 

felten,  rare;  seldom. 

fenben,  irreg.  N.  send. 

©e^Jtem^er,  m.  -§,  -  Sep- 
tember. 

fe^en,  .y^/,  place;  refl.  seat 
one's  self,  sit  down. 

ft(^,  himself,  herself,  itself, 
themselves,  one  another. 

ytd)tXf  sure,  secure,  certain. 

fie,  she,  they. 

Ste,  you. 

fieBen,  seven. 

fieftent,  seventh. 

fieft  ( en )  seftn,  seventeen. 

fie5(en)5t0,  seventy. 

Steg,  w.  -e§,  -e,  victory. 

Stegel,  m.  -§,  -,  seal. 

ftegen,  conquer. 

8i(6e,  /.  -n,  syllable. 

ftngen,  O.  sing. 

3tn9en,  n.  -§,  singing. 

Singer,  m.  —^,  —,  singer. 

finfen,  O.  sink. 

Sinn,  m.  -e§,  —c,  sense, 
meaning;  mind,  spirit. 

<Si^,  m.  -c§,  -c,  seat. 

fi^en,  O.  sit. 

fo,  so,  thus,  then,  if;  so! 
indeed ! 

foBalb,  as  soon  as;  imme- 
diately. 

foeften,  just,  now. 

fofort,  forthwith,  immedi- 
ately. 

fogar,  even. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


307 


fotjictdfl,  immediately. 

Softn,  m.  -c§,  -b^ne,  son. 

W^  (fold^er),  such,  such  a. 

<Bolhaf,  m.  -en,  -en,  soldier. 

futten,  irrcg.  N.  shall, 
should;  be  obliged  to;  be 
said  to. 

(Bommtx,  m.  —§,  —,  summer. 

3ommcr3Ctt,  /.  -en,  summer- 
time. 

fottbcrJar,  peculiar,  strange. 

fottbern,  but  (after  a  nega- 
tive). 

(Bonnahtnh,  m.  -§,  -e,  eve- 
ning before  Sunda.y,  Sat- 
urday. 

(Sonne,  /.  -rt,  sun. 

8onnenMitntr  m.  -(e)§,  -e, 
sun  screen,  jwn-umbrella. 

©onntag,  m.  -§,  -e,  Sunday. 

fonft,  else,  otherwise;  for- 
merly. 

Sorge,  f.  -n,  care. 

foroen,  take  care. 

3ortc,  f.  -n,  sort,  kind. 

fotooftl  —  al^,  both  —  and. 

(Bpankn,  n.  -§,  Spain. 

(BpanicXf  m.  —§,  —,  Spaniard. 

ipanx^d)  (adj.),  Spanish. 

W^if  late. 

f^oteften^r  at  the  latest. 

flJa^ie'rcn,  h.  or  s.  go  out  for 
exercise  or  pleasure;  fpa^ 
gieren  qe^en,  go  out  walk- 
ing; fpagieren  \a^ven,  go 
out  driving ;  [pagieren  veU 
ten,  go  out  nding. 

©^asiergangr  m.-(e)§,  -an- 
qe,  walk,  promenade. 

®^C(f,  m.  -e§,  bacon. 


S^jcife,  f.  -n,  food. 

eueifefartc,  /.  -n,  bill  of 
fare. 

f^jcifen,  take  food,  dine. 

Spiegel,  m.  —§,  -,  mirror. 

^pitif  n.  —^,  -e,  play. 

f^telen,  play. 

^pitlmann,  m.  -(e) §,  -ctn^ 
ner  or  -leute,  player,  mu- 
sician, fiddler. 

(S^ieltjogel,  m.  -§,  -bqel, 
playing  bird. 

(S^telatmmcr,  n.  -§,  -  play- 
room. 

flJt^en,  sharpen  (pencils). 

'Bpxadit,  f.  -n,  speech,  lan- 
guage. 

f^rerfjen,  O.  speak. 

f^jrengen,  burst. 

®|)tt(iflttiort,  n.  -(e)§,  -bt^ 
iet,  saying,  maxim. 

f^rtngen,  O.  s.  or  h.  spring, 
jump. 

©Ipruc^r  m.  -e§,  -ixd^e,  pro- 
verb. 

^iaht,  f.  -cibte,  city. 

^ia\>ixaif  m.  -(e)§,  -ate, 
city  council. 

<Btahinf}x,  f.  -en,  city  clock. 

©taftlfeber,  /.  -n,  steel  pen. 

^iCL%  m.  -e§,  -dUe,  stall, 
stable. 

©tanb,  m.  -e§,  ante,  condi- 
tion; tm  ftanbe  fetn,  be 
able. 

©tar,  m.  -(e)§,  -e,  .yearling. 

ftarf,  strong,  severe,  heavy. 

<BtdxU,  f.  strength. 

©tortetn,  little  .yearling. 

fStation'r  /.    en,  station. 


3o8 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


^iait  (gen.),  instead  of. 
fterfctt,    stick,    remain    fast, 

fix,  put. 
ftcften,  O.  stand,  be. 
fte()(en,  O.  steal. 
fteif,  stiff. 

ftetoen,  O.  s.  ascend,  rise. 
Stein,  m.  -e§,  -e,  stone. 
<Bitinioi}lt,  f.  -n,  stone-coal,, 

hard  coal. 
(BUUc,    f.    -Xi,    place,    posi- 
tion. 
ftcttcn,  put,  place,  set. 
ftetr^en,  O.  s.  die. 
©tern,  m.  -e§,  -z,  star. 
ftet^,  steadily,  constantly. 
©ttefet,  m.  -§,  -  boot. 
ftttt(e),  still,  quiet. 
Stitte,  /.  -n,  stillness,  quiet. 
Stintme,  f.  -n,  voice. 
fttmmen,  vote. 
©ttrn,     /.     -en,     forehead, 

broM^. 
<Btod,  m.  -e§,  -Me,  stick; 

story  (of  a  house). 
etorfttier!,     n.    -(e)g,    -e, 

floor,  story. 
ftots,  proud. 

'Btoxd),  in.  -e§,  -brd^e,  stork. 
ftijren,  disturb. 
©trafgelb,  n.  -§,  -ex,  fine. 
8traf?e,  /.  -n,  street, 
ftrerfen,  stretch. 
^ixdd)l)f)Uf  n.  -e§,  -olger, 

strike  wood,  match. 
©trett,  m.  -e§,  -e,  dispute, 

strife,  quarrel. 
ftretten,  O.  strive,  fight. 
ftreng,  severe,  strict. 
^ixof),  n.  -e§,  straw. 


(Strul)6ut,   m.   -(e)§,   -uie, 
straw-hat. 

Strom,    m.    -(e)§,    -bme# 
stream. 

ftrijnten,  stream. 

^iuhtf  f.  -n,  sitting  room. 

Stitrf,  n.  —§,  -e,  piece ;  play. 

Sturfdfien,  little  piece. 

Stubent',  -en,  -en,  m.  stu- 
dent. 

ftttbte'ren,  study. 

^in\>xvimt   n.    -§,    ©tubien, 
study. 

^tnf)l,  m.  -e§,  -ii^Ie,  stool, 
chair. 

Stunbe,  f.  -xi,  hour,  lesson, 
hour's  walk  (league). 

Sturm,    m.    -eg,    -iirme, 
storm. 

SuBftantb',  n.  -e§,  -e,  sub- 
stantive. 

fut^en,  seek,  search  for. 

Suben,  m.  -§,  south. 

fiibttr^,  southward. 

Su^^c,  f.  -xx,  soup. 

fii^,  sweet. 


Xa^,  m,  -e§,  -e,  day. 

i'a^lx6),  daily. 

%Cilt   n.   -e§,   -alex,   valley, 

dale. 
XahXf  m.  -§,  -,  (German) 

dollar,  about  72>  cents. 
XdiXiXitxibaviVXf     m.     -(e)§, 

-durne,  fir-tree. 
^ante,  f.  -n,  aunt. 
tanaen,  dance. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


309 


to^fct,  excellent,  brave. 

Xafd)C,  /.  -n,  pocket,  satchel. 

Xa^Uf  f.  -n,  cup. 

%aif  f.  -en,  deed. 

XanhCf  f.  -n,  dove. 

tciufdjen,  deceive,  disappoint. 

^aufenb,  n.  -§,  -e,  thousand. 

Xee,  m.  -§,  -,  tea. 

%tx\f  m.  n.  -e§,  -e,  part ; 
deal. 

tcirttietfe,  part  wise,  partly. 

UUpf^onkxtn,  telephone. 

XtUn,  m.  -§,  -,  plate. 

^^cnot',  m.  -§,  -e  or  -ore, 
tenor  (singer). 

^e^^it^,  m.  —§,  -z,  carpet. 

itmXf  dear,  precious,  be- 
loved. 

^fiea'ter,  n.  -§,  -  theatre. 

Xi]eohoXf  m.  -§,  Theodore. 

ttef,  deep. 

'^hVf  n.  -e§,  -e,  animal. 

S^lerrjarten,  m.  -§,  -arten, 
2inim2i\- gar  den,  zoological 
garden,  park. 

^tnte,  /.  -n,  ink ;  tint. 

Xi^d),  m.  -c§,  -e,  table. 

%i^d}qtM%  n.  -§,  -e,  prayer 
at  table,  blessing. 

%i^d)hx,  m.  -§,  -,  cabinet- 
maker, joiner. 

2:tWtu(^,  n.  -e§,  -n^ex, 
table-cloth. 

%\telf  m.  -§,  -,  title. 

^odjter,  f.  -i3d}ter,  daughter. 

^iirfltcrd&cn,  little  daughter. 

^Ob,  m.  -C§,  (-e),  death. 

Xoxtf  m.  ~t^,  -one,  tone, 
sound.  [sel. 

%r>^if  m.  ~e§,  -opfe,  pot,  ves- 


Xox,  n.  -(e) §,  -e,  gate. 

tiJten,  kill. 

tiit=fdf)(ttrjen^  O.  strike  dead, 
kill. 

Zxd^if  f.  -en,  dress,  load, 
volley. 

ixa^txif  O.  bear,  carry. 

^rantttiagett,  m.  -§,  -,  street- 
car. 

trand^teren,  carve. 

^rane,  /.  -n,  tear. 

^ranfr  m.  -e§,  -ctnfe,  drink. 

tronJcn,  give  to  drink,  soak, 
drench. 

fraueur  trust 

%xanm,  m.  -e§,  -outnc, 
dream. 

traatrtg,  sad. 

trcffcn,  O.  hit,  fall  upon, 
meet. 

tretfieur  O.  drive. 

trenncn,  separate,  divide ; 
refl.  part. 

Xrc^J^C,  f.  -n,  staircase; 
etne  ^reppe  l^od^,  second 
story. 

trcten,  O.  s.  tread,  step. 

treUr  true,  faithful. 

^reuc,  /.  truth,  honor. 

trinfen,  O.  drink: 

Xxxiif  m.  -e§,  -e,  tread,  step. 

Xrommefr  f-  -n,  drum. 

triJftcUr  comfort. 

tro^  (gen.  or  dat),  in  spite 
of. 

2;ro^  (3:!ru^),  m.  -e§,  de- 
fiance. 

troljbctttr  nevertheless. 

Xudfir  n.  -e§,  -itd^er,  cloth, 
canvas,  duck;  shawl. 


310 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


tiiiJjttg,  sound,  heavy,  thor- 
ough. 
inn,  O.  do,  act. 
^itr,  /.  -en,  door. 
Xt^xoV,  n.  -§,  Tyrol 


n 

u*  f,  tt>.,  itnb  fo  loetter,  and  so 
farther,  etc.,  &c. 

hM,  evil,  ill,  bad ;  ubel  ne^- 
men,  take  amiss. 

nhtn,  practice. 

it^cr  (dat.  or  ace),  over. 

n^ttaU,  all  over,  every- 
where. 

u5cretn'=fttmmen,  agree. 

ii^crfaft'rcn,  O.  run  over. 

it^erffwt,  w.  -e§,  overflow, 
profusion. 

iifierge'^ettr  O.  deliver. 

iiBer^au^t',  in  general,  on 
the  whole,  anyway. 

u6et(affen,  O.  turn  over, 
leave. 

it^crmurgcn,  over  to-mor- 
row, day  after  to-mor- 
row. 

uBcrncft'mCtt,   O.   undertake. 

nhtxxodf  m.  -(e)g,  -Me, 
overcodX. 

itl^cr^^fe^cn,  set  over, 

ubcrfe^'ejir  translate. 

it^erfc^'ungr  f.  -en,  transla- 
tion. 

Ubet5tcf)cr,  m.  -§,  -,  over- 
coat. 

it^ungf  f.  -en,  practice,  exer- 
cise. 


Ur)Ianb^  m.  -§,  name  of  an 
author. 

Vif)Xf  f.  -en,  hour;  watch, 
clock ;  tvk  t)iel  Vif)x  ift  eg, 
what  time  is  it? 

urn  (ace),  around,  at,  for. 

nm  ha^,  in  order  that. 

urn  —  ttJlKen  (gen.),  on  ac- 
count of. 

umaeftenb,  by  return  mail. 

umfter'^trrenr  wander  about. 

umljin'^fiittnett,  irreg.  N.  to 
help,  forbear  (used  with 
a  negative). 

itm^cOtet^en,  O.  rewrite,  re- 
model. 

umf(^itet'5cn,    O.    circum- 
scribe. 

UtttfOttft'r  in  vain. 

umftcftenb,  reverse,  on  the 
reverse  side. 

attn^ftetgenr  O.  change  cars. 

Utt'-f  prefix  of  negation,  cor- 
responding to  Eng.  un-, 
in-;  it  generally  has  the 
accent. 

wnartig,      ill-behaved, 
naughty. 

nnhc^xdYix^f  inconceivable. 

unhtmtxtif  i^nnoticed. 

unftcfttmmt,  indefinite. 

unb,  and. 

ungefttjr,  about,  nearly. 

ungern,  wwwillingly,  reluc- 
tantly. 

tlnglurfr  n.  -(e)g,  -e,  ill- 
luck,  misfortune. 

Itnttjerfital',  f.  -en,  univer- 
sity. 

Unf often  (pl.)>  expenses. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


311 


Unrei^t,  n.  -§,  -c,  wrong; 
uurcd^t  ^ahcn,  be  wrong. 

Unfci)U(b,  /.  innocence. 

itnfet,  our,  ours. 

ttltten,  below,  beneath,  down. 

tttttct    (dat.    or    ace),    un- 
der. 

unterBre'r^Cttr  O.  interrupt. 

unterbcffcttr  meanwhile. 

unter-geften,  O.  s.  go  under, 
set. 

nnitxf^alh  (gen.  or  dat.),  be- 
neath, under. 

untetftaCtCttr    O.    refl.    con- 
verse, entertain  one's  self. 

untcrttieQ^,   under   way,    on 
the  way. 

ununtctbtorSftctt,  wwinter- 
rupted. 

untjorfidftttg,  careless. 

unttieife,  unwise. 

unmctt    (gen.  or   dat.),   not 
far  from. 

«nttio()(,  unwell. 

Un^t,  f.  -n,  ounce, 

uxUihnf  judge. 

Urfac^Cr  /.  -n,  cause. 


\),  z=  t)on. 

^aitVf  m.  -§,  -(iter,  fa- 
ther. 

^aitvlanh,  n.  -§,  father- 
land, one's  own  or  native 
country. 

35aterranb§ncb,  n.  -c§,  -ev, 
patriotic  song. 

35ci(r^en,  n.  -§,  -,  violet. 


tJer=r  inseparable  prefix,  add- 
ing to   verbs   the.  idea   of 
loss,  reversal,  complete  or  • 
intense     action ;     and     of 
change  of  condition. 

t)cxad}icn,  despise. 

Uer^effern,  make  better,  im- 
prove. 

tierBteten,  O.  forbid. 

tJcrBtnben,  O.  bind  up, 
oblige. 

tierblufft,  dazed. 

tietB(uf)ett,  fade,  die. 

35erBrecften,  n.  -^,  -,  crime. 

tierBrennen,  irreg.  N.  burn 
up. 

S5er6um,  n.  -§,  -a  or  -en, 
verb. 

tjerbcrBen,  O.  spoil,  ruin. 

tierbtcnen,  earn,  merit. 

'^txhxnih  m.  -t§>,  -\i\\t,  vexa- 
tion. 

Uerebertt,  ennoble. 

35erfaffcrr  m.  -^,  -,  compo- 
ser, author. 

Uerfaffen,  compose. 

tJcrgannen,  gone  by,  past, 
last. 

tJerge^en^r  in  vain. 

tJetgcffettr  O.  forget. 

S^ergifmtcfttmettt  (S^ergife- 
memnic^t),  n.  -§,  -,  for- 
get-me-not. 

i)CVQhidfCn,  O.  compare. 

^Beronugettr  n.  -^,  -  satis- 
faction, pleasure. 

UCtljet'ratet,  married. 

tjerirrcttr  refl.  lose  one's  way. 

tJcrjagettr  chase,  or  drive 
away. 


312 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


licrfaatfctt,  sell. 

Dcrflinoen,  O.  die  away. 

tJCrlanoen,  require,  demand. 

^txlamcxif  n.  -§,  -,  longmg, 
desire. 

Uerlaffen,  O.  leave,  aban- 
don. 

Uerletften,  O.  lend,  bestow, 
confer. 

UerlteBtr  loving,  in  love. 

tJerlieren,  O.  lose;  berloren, 
lost,  forlorn,  ruined. 

tietmctben,  O.  avoid. 

Uermiigcn,  irreg.  N.  be  able. 

ticrmittltti,     presumably, 
probably. 

tiernai^Iaffigett,  neglect. 

S5ernunft,  /.  reason. 

ticrniinftigr  sensible. 

ijcrrateur  O  betray. 

S5er§r  m.  —e§,  — e,  verse. 

SBerfamtttlttttg,  f.  en,  as- 
sembly, gathering,  meet- 
ing. 

tJerfaumen,  miss,  neglect. 

tJetfr^teben,  different,  vari- 
ous. 

tierfd^Itegenr  O.  close,  shut. 

t)tx\d)limtn,  O.  swallow  up. 

tJcrfjfittitcgctt,   discreet. 

tierMttJtnbenr  O.  s.  disap- 
pear. 

tytvU^trtf  transfer,  remove ; 
rejoin. 

ticrfinfen,  O.  fade,  die. 

tierforgcn,  supply. 

Uetf|jrcd)cn,  O.  promise. 

SSerftanbr  m.  -e§,  under- 
standing,  sense. 

tierftanbigr  sensible. 


Uerftel)cn,  O.  understand ; 
refl.  c§  ber]tel)t  m,  it  is 
a  matter  of  course,  of 
course. 

tJerfur^en,  attempt,  try,  en- 
deavor. 

ticrttcft,  deeply  engaged  in, 
absorbed. 

tJerttJcftettr  blow  away. 

berttJcrfen,  O.  throw  away, 
re  j  ect. 

ticraetfiettr  O.  pardon. 

35ctter,  m.  -§,  -n,  cousin. 

t)itlf  much. 

titeHettfttr  perhaps. 

\)UXf  four. 

tJterntal,  four  times. 

Uteri,  fourth. 

^Xtxitl,  n.  -§,  -,  fourth  part, 
quarter. 

tJterten^r  fourthly. 

tJier^clfttt,  fourteen. 

fterstg,  forty. 

SSogclr  m.  -§,  -bqel,  bird. 

3539 (e) (cm,   little   bird. 

^oU,    n.    -(e) §,    -olUt, 
people. 

SSori^Buj^,  n.  -e§,  -M)er, 
folksbook. 

^olUiuhf  n.  -e§,  -ex,  popu- 
lar ballad. 

^otU^a^tf  f.  -n,  popular 
tradition. 

tfoUf  full. 

^tioUf  suffix  forming  adjec- 
tives. 

tjottenbcttf  end  in  full,  finish. 

tioll5tel)cn,  O.  perform, 

tjom  =  t)on  bem. 

Uon  (dat.),  from,  of;  by. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


313 


t)OX  (dat.  or  ace),  before, 
on  account  of;  bor  tJter:^ 
ge^n  ^agcn,  a  /orfnight 
ago. 

tjoran'r  on  before,  in  front, 
at  the  head. 

tiorau^'^fcfiettr  O.  foresee. 

tiorfiei-fajrcttr  O.  s.  go  ^3;  or 
past. 

t)Oxf>tUQtl)mf  O.  s.  pass. 

Uorgctiirft,  advanced. 

tjorgeftcrnr  before  yesterday, 
day  before  yesterday. 

^oxf^ahtn,  n.  ^§,  -,  purpose. 

tJorfter,  before,  previously, 
first. 

^OXX^f    former,    preceding, 
last,  next  before. 

i)OX-UUttf  O.  read  aloud. 

tJorrc^t,  before  the  last,  last 
but  one. 

2?ormttta9,  m.  -^,  -t,  before 
midday,  forenoon. 

tiotr^^fc^licgctt,  O.  lend,  ad- 
vance. 

95orfiI6c,  /.  -n,  prefix. 

S^orftobtr  f.  -ahiz,  suburb. 

bot^ftettctt,  place  before,  in- 
troduce. 

35orftcfiun9,  f.  -en,  introduc- 
tion. 

tJortcU^oft,   advantageous. 

tjortrcff'ltj^,  excellent,  ad- 
mirable. 

tioru'^cr^gcljen,  O.  s.  go  by 
or  past. 

S5oturtct(,  n.  -§,  -z,  preju- 
dice. 

tiottodrt^f  forwards;  for- 
wards! 


S^ormortr  w.  -(e) §,  -i3rter, 

before  word,  preposition. 
tior-seioen,  show,  display. 
tJor^Stclftenr  O.  prefer. 


aSariftt,  f.  -en,  watch,  guard. 

hJarfcr,  valiant. 

2Baffen5ruber,  m.  -§,  -iiber, 
brother  in  arms. 

SSagen,  m.  -^,  -,  wagon,  car. 

ttiaftr,  true;  ntc^t  itial^r,  is  it 
not  true,  or  so? 

ttJoftrenb     (gen.),    during; 
while. 

ttJaftrfjaf'tig,  true,  truly,  in 
fact. 

ttiaStMetttltdft,  having  the 
appearance  of  truth,  prob- 
able. 

SSalb,  m.  -c§,  -diber,  forest, 
wood,  grove. 

SSanb,  f.  -ctnbe,  wall  (of  a 
room). 

njanbern,  s.  or  h.  wander. 

SSangc,  f.  -n,  cheek. 

toann,  when? 

ttJartttr  warm. 

SBcirmCr  f.  worwth,  heat. 

ttiarten,  wait  for,  auf  (ace). 

^ttiart^,    -ward,    adverbial 
ending. 

ttiatunt',  on  account  of  what, 
why? 

ttia§,  what,  that  which,  what- 
ever)  tuag  fiir,  what  for, 
zvhat  kind  of? 

Staffer,  n.  -§,  -,  water. 


314 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


SSaffetgru^c,  /.  -n,  water- 
pit  or  tank,  cistern. 

SBaffetfali,  m.  -(e)g,  -aHe, 
waterfall. 

tuerfen,  wake  up,  awa^^. 

ttJcber,  neither;  toeber  — 
nod),  neither  —  nor. 

tticg,  awaj;,  forth. 

2Bcg,  w.  -G§,  -e,  way^  road ; 
toeg,  make  way!  iDcg  ba, 
out  of  the  way ! 

tt)e0en  (gen.),  on  account  of. 

ttJCfi^geftettr  O.  s.  go  away. 

tt»e9?rct#en,  snatch  away. 

SSef),  n.  -e§,  — e,  woe,  pain. 

ttJe^Cf  W(9^/  alas ! 

SSeftmutr  /.  sadness. 

2BeiI)nad^tr  f.  -en,  Christ- 
mas. 

aBeiftnatSftt^Bautttr  m.  -(e) §, 
-dume,   Chrismas-tree. 

aBctftnat^t^tag,  m.  -(e)§,  -e, 
Christmas-Jaj;. 

tticU,  because,  since. 

SSeile,  f.  while,  space  of 
time,  leisure. 

SBcin,  m.  -e§,  —z,  wine. 

meinen,  weep. 

SScifc,  /.  —n,  manner,  wise; 
melody,  air. 

ttietfc,  wise. 

mctf?,  white. 

ttJett,   zvide,   far,    distant. 

totXti)    (ii:)el(^er),    which, 
what,  that,  who. 

SSScHe,  /.  -n,  wave,  billow. 

2Be(t,  /.  -en,  world. 

menig,  little. 

ttJcnigftcn^r  at  least. 

ttjcnn,  wA^w,  if. 


ttJCtttt  —  an^f  although. 

menngleic^,  although. 

tticr,  who,  he  w/io,  whoQver; 
irer  ba,  who's  there! 

ttJcrben,    O.    s.    become, 
grow. 

$Ber!,  n.  -e§,  -e,  wor^. 

SSerftag,  m.  -e§,  -e,  word- 
ing day. 

totttf  worthy,  worth;  dear. 

ttic^ftal^,  on  account  of  w/ia^^ 
wherefore? 

SSeftcn,  m.  -g,  w^.yf. 

SSetter,  ii.  -§,  -,  weather, 
storm,  tempest. 

ItJti^ttg,  weighty,  important. 

ttJiber    (ace),  against. 

ttite,  how,  in  what  way; 
as. 

ttiteber,  again. 

ttJtcbet-fotnmenr  O.  s.  come 
again. 

nJtebcr^^feftettr    see    again ; 
SBteberfe^en,  n.  meeting. 

SSieUr  n.  -§,  Vienna. 

SBiefe,  /.  -n,  meadow. 

ttJtcnJOfilr  although. 

ttitlb,  wild. 

aStlfternt,  m.  -§,  William. 

2Bt(8crtnftraf?e,  f.  William 
Street. 

SSttten,  m.  -§,  -,  will,  de- 
sign, purpose ;  utn  tneinet- 
iDtllen,  on  my  account. 

ttJtttfommcnr   zvelcome. 

SBinb,  m.  -c§,  -e,  wind. 

SStntet,  m.  -§,  -,  winter, 

toixtiid),  actually,  really. 

ttitffcn,  irreg.  N.  know, 
know  how  to,  be  able. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


315 


SSiffenWaft,  /.  -en,  science, 
knowledge. 

tDO,  where,  in  which;  when, 
if. 

c,  f.  -en,  week. 
ge,  f.  -n,  wave. 

SBogenlprall,  m.  -§,  wave- 
dash. 

tOOf)tXf  whence? 

tUOfttUr  whither,  what  way? 

tt)Of)tf  well. 

tt)Of}l,  to  be  sure,  indeed, 
probably,  I  presume ;  \a 
tDoP,  yes  indeed,  why  cer- 
tainly. 

ttiol^ran,  well  then  !  come  on! 

^oWdtcxixtf  f.  -en,  benefac- 
tress. 

hJOIincnr  dwell,  reside. 

"^t^^n^an^t  n.  -c§,  -dufer, 
dwelling-house. 

^of^nnnq,  f.  -en,  dwelling, 
lodging,  apartment. 

SBolfr  m.  -e§,  -olfe,  wolf. 

SSolfc,  f.  -n,  cloud. 

mpfiettr  irreg.  N.  will,  be 
willing,  wish,  desire. 

ttiottett,  woolen. 

tDOmiif    wherewith,     with 
what  or  which. 

tt}f>tan^,  whereout,  out  of 
what  or  which. 

ttjortn,  wherein,  in  what  or 
which. 

aSort,  n.  -e§,  -e,  otiev, 
word;  SSorte  =  words 
connectedly,  as  language ; 
SBorter  =  words  discon- 
nectedly, as  parts  of 
speech. 


^btUxWdi,  n.  -(e)§,  -u^ 
c^et/  word-hook,  diction- 
ary. 

aSiJrtletnr  n.  -§,  -,  little 
word. 

ttioru!6erf  wheres-t,  whereof, 
over  what  or  which. 

ttiotiottr  whereof,  of  or  con- 
cerning what  or  which. 

ttJPSWf  whereto,  for  what 
purpose  ? 

njunbcr^ot,   wonderful. 

ttJunberttr  refl.  and  impers. 
zvonder. 

ttiunberfam,  wonderful. 

tonnhtxWon,     wonderfully 
beautiful. 

ttiunWett,  wish. 

Uiitrbtgettr  deem  worthy  of, 
honor  with  (pers.  ace, 
thing  gen.). 

SBitftCr  /.  -n,  waste,  wilder- 
ness, desert. 


Bdfirr  f.  -en,  number;  tale. 

aa^Cettr  count. 

Sa^lttfoxt,  n.  -(e)§,  -bvtex, 

number-?x'orJ,    numeral. 
^af^mf  tame. 

Scifiitf  fit.  -e^,  -Ci^ne,  tooth. 
^axif  tender,  delicate. 
Se^ttr  ten. 

Seftnmaf,  ten  times. 
aefint,  tenth. 
3etgefinger,  m.  -§,  -,  index 

finger. 
5eigen,  show,  point  out. 


3i6 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


3ei(er  f.  -n,  line. 

3eit,  /.  -en,  time ;  tide. 

Seitalterr  n.  -§,  -  age,  pe- 
riod. 

3eitticr(uft,  m.  -§,  -,  loss 
of  time. 

3cttun0r  A  -^ti,  newspaper. 

Settttiott,  n.  -(e)§,  -orter, 
time-worJ,  verb. 

ger-f  inseparable  prefix,  add- 
ing the  idea  of  apart, 
asunder,  in  pieces. 

aerfirer^Cttr  O.  break  to 
pieces. 

Serquetfj^Cttr  crush,  quash. 

5Crtet#en,  O.  tear  in  pieces. 

^erftiiren,  destroy. 

Stegelftetttr  m.  -(e)§,  -e, 
brick. 

ateften,  O.  draw,  tug;  s. 
march,  go. 

Stcfr  ?^.  -e§,  -e,  aim,  goal. 

jtCtttltdft,  suitable,  proper, 
seemly,  tolerably,  pretty. 

3tcr,  /.  ornament,  charmer. 

3terbc,  f.  -n,  ornament. 

SimmtX,  n.  -§,  -  timber; 
structure;  room. 

Stmmetmann,  ?n.  -(e)  §, 
-dnner  or  -leute,  carpen- 
ter. 

Btfte'rne,  f.  -n,  cistern. 

Bttro'ne,  /.  -n,  lemon. 

Stttcrn,  tremble. 

5U  (dat),  to;  too. 

au^Brtngen,  irreg.  N.  bring 
to,  spend. 

SUrfcttr  dart,  flash. 

SndtXtt)txff  n.  -(e)§,  con- 
fectionery,  candy. 


aucrft'r  at  first. 

5tt=fattett,   O.   s.   fall   to  or 
in. 

gufaUtgr  by  chance. 

3ttfrie'bett>    at    peace,    satis- 
fied. 

3«ftte'benSett,    /.    content- 
ment. 

3«9f    m.    -e§,    -iige,    tug; 
draught;  train, 

au^rjefien,  O.  concede. 

Sugfuftrer,  m.  -§,  -    train 
leader,  conductor. 

3ug(etcft',  at  the  same  time. 

Smlnft,  f.  draught  of  air. 

3u()orer,  m.  -§,  -,  auditor. 

SnfxtnU,  f.  future. 

BUhi^Vf  at  last,  .finally. 

^nm  =  gu  hem. 

m-tnad)tn,    shut,    close, 
fasten. 

3«n9e,  f.  -n,  tongue. 

5ur  =  gu  ber. 

mtt^t'-lommtn,   O.   s.   get 
along. 

Suriirf',  back,  backwards. 

aururf^gefien,  O.  give  back. 

^uxM^^tf}tn,  O.  s.  back  out, 
desert. 

guritrf^Wtrfen,  send  back. 

aufam'men,  together. 

aufammen^faKen,  O.  s.  fall 
down,  fall  in  ruins. 

Sttfanttnen-l^altenr    O.    hold 
together. 

aufammcn-tcriftnett,   take   or 
reckon  together. 

axttior'r  before. 

autJor^Jomtnen,  O.  s.  antici- 
pate. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


317 


gatttiei'lettr  at  times,  some- 
times. 

3tt»anatgf  twenty. 

Btoanm%  twentieth. 

gttiar,  indeed,  to  be  sure. 

Sttierf,  m.  -(e)§,  -e,  pur- 
pose, aim. 

gttiei,  two. 

5ttJeicr(et,  of  two  kinds. 

3tt>eifel,  m,  -^,  -,  doubt. 


3ttJet0r  ^»  -^^/  -^'  bough; 

twig. 
5ttictma(f  two  times,  twice. 
5tt)eit,   second. 
SttieitCtt^,  in  the  second  place, 

secondly. 
5ttJifci^ett   (dat.  or  ace),  be- 

tween. 
5ttiijlfr  twelve. 
Sttiiilftf  twelfth. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY 


i'tber 


1.  German  words  or  parts  of  words  spaced  ( 5(  b  C  Tl  b )  are  those  historically 
related  to  the  English  (or  a  part  of  it)  at  the  head  of  the  article. 

2.  For  abbreviations  and  further  explanations,  see  the  German-English 
vocabulary. 

address,  anreben. 
address,  E  b  r  e  f  f  e,  /.  -n. 
adjective,    (Stgenfc^aft^tDort, 

n.  -(e)§,  -iirter,  ^rbje!^ 

1 1  b,  n.  -§>,  -e. 
admire,  belDunbern. 
advance      (lend),     t?orf(^te^ 

J3en,  O. 
advanced,  borgeriidt. 
adverb,  S^eBentDort,  n.  -(e)  §, 

-orter,    51  b  t)  e  r'  16  (mm) , 

n.  -§,  -bten. 
advise,  raten  (dat.). 
afraid  (be  — ) ,  f iircfjten,  refl. 
after,  xxatS)  (dat.). 
afternoon,    "^adjmittac^,    m, 

-§,  -e. 
again,  tDtcber,  no^mdi§. 
against,  g  e  g  e  n,  iDtber 

(ace), 
age    (a    fortnight   — ),    bor 

btergel^n  ^aqtn. 
ago  (an  hour  — ),  bor  etner 

©timbe. 
agree,  iiberetnftimmen. 
agreeable,  angenel^m. 


a,  an,  ettt. 

able  (be  — ),  !onnen. 

about,       concerning, 

(ace), 
about,  nearly,  ungefa^r. 
about,   (be  —  to),  tm  S3e- 

griffe  fetn. 
above,  iiber,  ober^alb  (gen.), 
accept,  anne^men,  O. 
accident,  Unglixc!,  n.  -§,  Un- 

gtii(fgfall,  m.  -(c)g,  -dUe. 
accompany,  begletten. 
account  (on),  (itm)  —  ine^ 

gen ;  on  my  account,  (um) 

meinettnegen. 
accusative,  ?lccxtfattb,  in. 

-e§,  -e. 
acquaintance,  S3e!anntf(^aft, 

f.  -en. 
acquainted     (be    —    with), 

fennen,  irreg.  N. 
act  (as  if),  tun,  O.  (al§  ob). 
actually,     iDtrflic^,      Voa^z^ 

l^aftig. 


319 


320 


ENGLISH-GERMAN    VOCABULARY 


ah,  a  (^. 

alive  (be  — ),  live,  leben. 

all,    all,    gana;    all    right, 

fd^on  (red^t). 
almost,  faft. 
alone,    a  it  e  t  n ;    let   alone, 

bleiBen   (or  ftel^en)   Iaf= 

fen. 
aloud,    I  ant;    read    aloud, 

borlefen,  O. 
alphabet,      mc,      n,      %l^ 

pl)ahti\  n.  -§,  -e. 
already,  fd^on. 
also,  an^,  mit 
although,  obtDO^I. 
always,  immer. 
America,  ?l  tn  e  r  i !  a,  n.  -§. 
an,  a,  e  i  n. 
and,  u  n  b. 
and  so  forth,  u  n  b  f  0  tvextcv, 

u.  f.  tv. 
angry,  drgerltd^. 
animal,  ^ier,  n.  -e§,  -e. 
another,  eirtanber;  nod^  etn. 
answer,  ^Inttvovt,  f.  -en. 
answer,     ant  tvotten,     ht^ 

ant  iDorten,  ertuibern. 
anxiety,  5Ingft,  f. 
anyway,    benn,    iibcr^au|3t, 

bod§. 
anywhere,     irgenblDO ;     not 

anywhere,  nirgenbttjo,  nir^ 

0enb§. 
apiece,  ha§  (Stiidf. 
appear,  erfd^einen,  O. 
apple,  51  p  f  e  I,  m.  -§,  ^(pf  el. 
apple-tree,  51  p  f  e  I  baum,  w. 

-(e)§,  -aume. 
April,  51  p  r  i  r,  m.  -§,  -e. 
arise,  auf^ftcj^en,  O.  s. 


arm,  51  r  m,  m.  -e§,  -e. 
arrive,  an^fommen,  O.  s. 
article,    @ef(f)Ie(^tgtt)ort,    n. 

-(e)g, -brter;  STrtt'lel, 

w.  -§/  -. 
as,    al§;    as    though,    a  I  § 

ob. 
as,  like,  itJte. 
as,  since,  ba. 
as  yet,  nod^. 
ask,  fragen,  N.  (O.). 
ask    for,    bitten,    O.    (with 

um). 
at,  um  (ace),  3U  (dat),  in. 
at  (the  store  or  house  of), 

bet  (dat.). 
attention,  ^(^t,  f.  pay  — ,  — 

geben. 
aunt,  3:!ante,  /.  -n. 
author,  S[^erfaffer,  m.  -§,  -. 
autumn,  §erbft,  m.  -e§,  -e. 
avoid,  bermetben/  O. 


B 

back,  guriidf,  ti^ieber  ha. 
bad,  fd^Ied^t. 

baker,  33  d  d  e  r,  m.  -§,  -. 
ball  (dance),  S3  a  11,  m.  -§, 

-ctHe. 
band,  ^reig,  m.  -e§,  -e. 
bath-room,     S3  a  b  e  aimmer, 

11.  —§,  —. 
bathe,  b  a  b  e  n. 
be,  fein,  O.  s. 
beautiful,  fdC)bn. 
beautiful   (wonderfully  — ), 

it)  u  n  b  e  r  fd)bn. 
because,  toeil. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN    VOCABULARY 


321 


become,  Irerben,  O.   s.    (of, 

au§). 
bed  (go  to  — ),  gu  S3  e  tie 

g  c  ^  en. 
before,  t)  0  r  (dat.  or  ace). 
begin,  an^fanqen,   O. ;   he^ 

g  in  nen,  O. 
beginning,   5lnfang,    m.   -§, 

-dnge. 
Belgium,  93  e  I  g  t  e  n,  n.  -§. 
believe,  g  I  a  u  b  e  n. 
belong,  gepren  (dat). 
below,  beneath,  unten. 
Berlin,  Berlin',  n.  -§. 
beside,  neben. 
besides,      aufeerbem',      noc^ 

(baau). 
between,    3  tn  t  f  (^  e  n    ( dat. 

or  ace). 
bill,  9ied)nung,  f.  -en. 
bill     of    fare,     ©peifefarte, 

f.-n. 
bind,  b  i  n  b  e  n,  O. 
bird,  9^ogel,  m.  -§,  -ogel. 
black,  fc^tnars. 
blackbread,        (Sd^lnarabrot, 
blind,  b  It  n  b.  [n.  -§. 

blow,  b  I  a  f  e  n,  O. 
blue,  b  I  a  It. 
bold,  !ii5n. 

book,  93n(^,  n.  -e§,  -iid^er. 
bookseller,  93  u  d^  pnbler,  m. 

-§, -. 
boot,  ©ttefel,  m.  -§,  -. 
born,  g  e  b  0  r  e  n. 
both,  b  e  t  b  e. 
bottle,  g  I  a  f  (^  e,  f.  -IX. 
boy,  ^nabe,  m.  -n,  -n. 
branch,  Hft,  m.  -e§,  n^ie, 
bread,  93  r  0  t,  n.  -c§,  -e. 


break  ( —  to  pieces),  (ger)^ 

b  r  e  d^  e  n,  O. 
breakfast,       grii^ftiid,       n. 

-(e)§,  -e. 
breakfast,  frii5ftii(fen. 
breath  (take  — ),  aufatmen, 

5ltem  l^olen. 
bridge,  93  r  ii  (f  e,  /.  -n. 
bright,  ^eH,  !Iar. 
bring,  b  r  t  n  g  e  n,  irreg.  N. 
bring   with    or    along,   niit= 

b  r  i  n  g  e  n,  irreg.  N. 
broad,  b  r  e  i  t.  [-iiber. 

brother,    93  r  u  b  e  r,    m.   -§, 
brother-in-law,      ©(^Inager, 

m.  -§,  -ctger. 
Brussels,  93  r  ii  f  f  e  I,  n.  -§. 
build,  bauen. 

building,  ©ebdube,  n.  -§,  -. 
bum,  b  r  e  n  n  e  n,  irreg.  N. 
busy,  befd^afttgt. 
but,  aber;  nur. 
butter,  93utter,  f. 
buy,  faufen. 
by,  by  means  of,  mit  (dat.), 

bet  (dat.),  mittelg  (gen.), 

bon  (dat.),  burd}  (ace). 
^y  (go  —),  for  b  e  i^fa^fyren, 

O.  s. 
by  the  side  of,  neben  (dat). 


call,     name,      n  e  n  n  e  n, 

irreg.  N. 
call,  summon,  ritfen,  O. 
called   (be  — ),  ^eifeen,  O. ; 

what    is    that   called,    inie 


Z22 


ENGLISH-GERMAN    VOCABULARY 


calm,  gclaffcn. 

can,  !  0  n  n  e  n,  irreg.  N. 

cap,  WiX^t,  f,  -n. 

capital,  ^aupi\iat)i,  f.  -ahit. 

captain,      ^aupimanw,     m. 

-(e) §,  -dnner  or  -leute. 
car,  SBagen,  m.  -§,  -. 
car     (railway    — ),     (Sifen- 

ba^ntoagen,  m.  -§,  -. 
care  for  (desire),  iDiinfdjen, 

tvoUcn,  mogen. 
careless,  unborfic^ttg. 
carpenter,  3^ii'^"ic^tnann,  m. 

-(e) §,  -(inner  or  -leute. 
carpet,  ^cpptd),  m.  -§,  -e. 
carrier    (letter   — ),    S3rief^ 

trctger,  m.  -§,  -. 
carry,  tragen,  O. 
carve,  trancfiieren  (pr.  tran^ 

fd^te'ren). 
case,  gaU,  m.  -§,  -aHe. 
case  (in  grammar),  (^af  u§, 

m.  —,  -. 
cash,  6are§  @elb,  n.  -c§ ;  pay 

cash,  Bar  bega^len. 
castle,     ©cr}Iofe,     n.     -fje§, 

-offer. 
cease,  stop,  anf-I)oren. 
ceiling,  ©ec!e,  /.  -n. 
cellar,  teller,  m.  -^,  -. 
century,  ^al)rl)unbert,  n. 

-§r  -e. 
certain,  geiuife. 
certainly,  inol^L  geiuife;  why 
.    certainly,  \a  tuol)!. 
chair,  ©tul}!,  m.  -eg,  -ii^Ie. 
change,  !Ieine§  @elb. 
Charles,  .^  a  r  L  m.  -§. 
charming,  rcigenb. 
cheat,  bctriigcn,  O.,  tduftficn. 


cherry,  ^trfdje,  f.  -n. 
child,  ^inb,  n.  -eg,  -er. 
choose,  U)dI)Ien. 
church,  ^  i  r  d)  e,  /.  -n. 
citizen,-  S3iirger,  m.  -§,  -. 
city,  ©tabt,  f.  -ctbte. 
city  hall,  diat^au^,  n.  -eg, 

-ctufer. 
claim  to,  tnoHen. 
class,  ^  I  a  f  f  e,  Z'.  -n. 
clean,  rein. 
clear,  flax. 
clock,  H^r,  f.  -en;  at  what 

o'clock,  urn  iniebtel  IT^r? 
close,  5U==ntadCjen. 
coachman,    ^  u  t  f  d^  e  r,    m. 

-g,  -. 
coal,  ^  0  1^  I  e,  f.  -n ;  char- 
coal,   §ol3  !  0  ^  I  e ;     hard 

coal,  (Stein !  o  ^  I  e. 
coat,  diod,  m.  -eg,  -Mt, 
coffee,  ^  a  f  f  e  e,  in.  -g. 
cold,  tali. 
cold  (catch  — ),  er  !  d  1 1  en, 

refl. 
cold,  (£r!dltung,  f.  -en. 
Cologne,  ^  d  I  n,  n.  -g. 
colonel,   OBerft,    m.    -eg    or 

-en,  -e  or  -en. 
color,  garbe,  f.  -n. 
come, !  0  m  m  e  n,  O.  s. 
come  back,  tnieber  !  o  m  m  en. 
come     in,     ■^cr  e  t  n  - !  o  m  == 

m  e  n,  O.  s. ;  come  in,  ^er^ 

etn! 
commence,  an-fangen,  O.  bc= 

ginncn,  O. 
commend,  empfeliten,  O. 
common,  gclndl]nltd),  gcmcin. 
company,  ®efeEfd)aft,  f.  -en. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN    VOCABULARY 


323 


concert,     ^  0  n  5  e  r  t',     w. 
-e§,  -e. 

conductor,  gugfiil^rer,  m.  -§, 
-,  ^  0  rt  b  u  !  t  e  H  r',  m. 
-^,  -e. 

conjunction,  ^inbeiriort,  n. 
-(e)§,  -orter,  ^on:= 
junltton',  f.  -en. 

consist  of,  bejte^en,  O.  (of 
au§)    (dat). 

constant,  beftdnbtg. 

contain,  entf)alten,  O. 

contrary  to,  gegen  (ace). 

copper,  ^  u  I?  f  e  r,  n.  -g,  -. 

copy,  ab-fd^retben,  O. 

corner,  ©dEe,  f.  -n. 

correct,  !orrigte'ren. 

cost,  !  0  ft  en. 

count,  @raf,  m.  -en,  -en. 

count,  gct^Ien. 

country,  Sanb,  w.  -e§,  -e  or 
-dnber;  in  the  country, 
auf  bent  Sanbe;  in  this 
country,  l^ter  gu  Sanbe. 

country  (one's  own  or  na- 
tive), ^aterlanb,  n.  -§. 

countryman,  citizen  of  the 
same  country,  Canb§^ 
mann,  m.  -(e)§,  -dn== 
ner  or  -leute. 

countryman,  farmer,  peasant, 
Sanbmann,  m.  -(c)§, 
-dnner  or  -leute. 

coupe,  (S^onpe',  n.  -§. 

course  (of  — ),  c§  tjerfte^t 
fic^,  natitrltd^,  jalno^I. 

court,  §of,  m.  -e§,  -i3fe. 

court-house,  diatl)an§,  n.  e§, 
-dnfer. 

cousin,  53etter,  m.  -^,  -n. 


cover,  bebedfen. 
crackle,  !niftern. 
cup,  %a\\t,  f.  -n. 
cut,  fc^neiben,  O. 


Dane,  ®  d  n  e,  m.  -n,  -n. 
dangerous,  gefdl^rltd^. 
Danish,  b  d  n  i  f  c^. 
dare,    b  ii  r  f  en,     irreg.     N. 

Inagen. 
dark   (obscure),  bimM. 
dark  (without  light),  ftnfter. 
date,  Saturn,  n.  -§,  -a. 
daughter,    '^0(^tct,    f. 

-odC)ter. 
daughter  (little),  ^od§^ 

t  e  r  d^en. 
day,  Xaq,  -c§,  -e. 
day  after  to-morrow,  iiber== 

mo  r  gen. 
day  before  yesterday,  \)  ox^ 

geftern;    one    of    these 

days,  biefer  3:^age. 
dazed,  t)erbliifft. 
deal  (a  great  — ),  bid,  redC)t 

btel. 
dear,  beloved,  1 1  e  b  ;  O  dear ! 

a(^  ©otti 
death,  ^  0  b,  m.  —c§. 
December,  ^  e  ,5  e  m  b  e  r,  m. 

-^,  -. 
decline,  be!Itnte'ren. 
deliver,  iiberretdften,  Itefern. 
demand,    berlangen,    erfor== 

bern. 
Denmark,  ^dnemar!, 

n.  -§, 


3^4 


ENGLISH-GERMAN    VOCABULARY 


depart,  ab^reifen,  s. 
deprive,  rauben   (pers.  dat., 

thing  ace). 
descend,  ftctgen,  O.  s. 
dictionary,    28i3rterbu(^,    n. 

-(e)§,  -iic^er. 
die,  fterben,  O.  s. 
different,  berfi^ieben,  anber; 

differently,  anberg. 
difficult,  fd^toer. 
diligent,  fleifeig. 
dine,    gu    TlittaQ    effen    or 

fpetfen. 
dining-room,  ©petfefaal,  m. 

-^,   -fctle,    (£^3tntmer,    n. 

-^.  -. 
dinner,  3}^tttageffen,  n.  -§,  -. 
disappoint,  taufd^en. 
do,  t  u  n,  O.  (in  interrog.  and 

emphat.  forms  involved  in 

the  simple  verb). 
do,  how  do  you  do,  tt)ie  he- 

ftnben  ©te  ftd^  ?  iuie  ge^t  eg 

S^nen? 
dog,  ^itnb,  m.  -c§,  -e. 
door,  3:^  ii  r,  f.  -en. 
door-bell,  Mingel,  /.  -n;  the 

door-bell  rings,  e§  fitngelt. 
doubt,  3ti:)etfeln. 
doubtless,  o^ne  3^stfel. 
draw  (pull),  3ter)en,  O. 
dress,  Mcib,  n.  -t^,  -er. 
drink,  t  r  i  n !  e  n,  O. 
drive,  fal^ren,  O.  s. ;  go  out 

driving,  fpagieren  fa^ren. 
during,  rDaI)renb  (gen.). 
duty,  ^fltc^t,  f.  -ett. 
dwell,  tDor)tien. 
dwelling-house,    SSolftn^ 

))a\\^,  n.  -e§,  -ciiifer. 


£ 

each,  jeber,  -c,  -eg. 

each  other,  etn  a  n  b  c  r. 

ear,  €)^x,  n.  -e§,  -en. 

early,  friil^. 

earn,  herbienen. 

earth,  (£  r  b  e,  /.  -n. 

easy,  leid^t. 

east,  O  f  t  en,  m.  -§. 

eat,  e  f  f  e  n,  O.  f  r  e  f  f  e  n,  O. 

fpetfen. 
Edward,  (Bbnaxh,  m.  -§>. 
egg,  ^  i/  n.  -eg,  -er. 
eight,  a^i. 
eighteen,  a  d^  1 3  e  ^  n. 
eighth,  a^i. 
eighty,  a  c^  1 3  i  g. 
either,  entlneber;  aud^. 
eleven,  elf. 
eleventh,  e  I  f  t. 
else,  fonft,  anberg. 
England,  @  n  g  I  a  n  b,  n.  -g. 
English,  e  n  g  1 1  f  dC). 
Englishman,  ©nglctnber, 

m.  -g,  — . 
enough,  g  e  n  u  g. 
entire,  entirely,  wholly,  gang, 
error,  ^rrtnm,  m.  -g,  -ii* 

mer. 
especially,   befonberg. 
Europe,  ^uxopa,  n.  -g. 
even,  au^,  felbft,  fogar;  even 

though,  menn  —  anij. 
evening,  51  b  e  n  b,  w.  -g,  -e. 
evening    (last    — ),    geftcrn 

a  h  e  n  b ;  Dortgen  ?l  h  e  n  b. 
ever,  je,  jemalg;  ever  so  — , 

nodi  f  0  — . 
every,  jcb(-er,  -e,  -eg). 


ENGLISH-GERMAN    VOCABULARY 


325 


every     five     minutes,     aHe 

fiinf   SP^tnuten. 
every  one,  jebermann. 
everything,  aUe§. 
example,  S3etfptel,  n.  -§,  -e; 

for  example,  gum  ^etfpiel. 
exceedingly,  au^erorbentlid}. 
exclaim,  au^rufen,  O. 
excuse,  entfc^itlbtgcn. 
exercise,  Slufgabe,  /.  -n. 
expect,  ertuarten. 
expense,  5lu§gabe,  /.  -n. 
explanation,    (Srflarung,    /. 

-en. 
express,  au^bvMen. 
express  train,  (Sd^neHgUQ,  m. 

-(e) §,  -iige. 
extraordinarily,      extremely, 

anfeer  0  r  b  e  n  Hid). 
eye,  51  u  g  e,  w.  -§,  -n. 


fact  (in  — ),  tt)tr!It(^,  tpa^r- 

Iiaftig. 
fail,  f  e  ^  I  c  rt. 
faithful,  treu. 
fall,  fallen,  O.  s. 
far,  fern,  tvdt. 
fare,  ga^rgelb,  n.  -(e) g, 

-er. 
farmer,     £anbmann,     m. 

-(e)  §,  -(inner  or  -leitte. 
fast,  f(^nell. 
father,  SS  a  t  e  r,  m.  -^,  -a- 

ter. 
fault,  getter,  m.  -§,  -. 
favor,  miirbigen    (ace.  pers. 

gen.  thing). 


fear,  SIngft,  f.  gurd^t,  f. 
February,    g  e  B  r  it  a  r',    m. 

-§,  -e. 
feel,  em|)ftnben,   O. ;  f  ii  ^  - 

I  e  n,  ref  1. 
fifteen,    f  it  n  f  3  e  1^  n, 

(funfael^n). 
fifth,  f  it  n  f  t. 
fifty,    fiinfaig     (funf  = 

fight,  ^ampf,  m.  -e§,  -ctm^ 

pfe. 
fight,  fdmpfcn. 
finally,  enblid^,  gule^t. 
find,  f  i  n  b  en,  O. 
fine,  handsome,  fd)on. 
finger,  ginger,  m.  -§,  -. 
finish,  tiollen'ben. 
fire,  g  e  u  e  r,  n.  -§,  -. 
first,  e  r  ft. 

first,  previously,  border. 
first  (at  — ),  gu  erft. 
fish,  g  i  f  dC),  m.  -e§,  -e. 
fit,  paffen. 
five,  f  it  n  f . 
floor,  gufebobcn,  m.  -§,  -0*= 

ben. 
flower,  33Intne,  /.  -n. 
fluently,  geldnfig. 
fly,  f  I  i  e  g  e  n,  O. 
follow,  folgen   (dat.),  O. 
fond  of,  IteBen,  mogcn,  gem 

with  appropriate  verb. 
foot,  g  H  fe,  m.  -e§,  -itfee. 
footstool,  ©djemel,  m.  -§,  -. 
for,  fitr  (ace.),  urn  (ace.), 

anf  (ace). 
forbid,  b  e  r  b  i  e  t  en,  O. 
forenoon,     ^  ox mittag,     m. 

-§,  -e. 


326 


ENGLISH-GERMAN    VOCABULARY 


foresee,  t)orau§  f  e  ^cn,  O. 
forest,  g  0  r  ft,  m.  -e§,  -e. 
forget,  bergeffen,  O. 
forget-me-not,      ^  e  r  g  i  fe  =^ 

m  e  t  n  n  t  (^  t,  n. 
fork,  ©abel,  /.  -n. 
formerly,  once,  e  t  n  ft,  frii^ 

fortnight    (a  —   ago),   bor 

t)  i  e  r  3  e  I  n    ^agen. 
fortunate,  gliidlid^. 
forty-eight,  a(^i  unb  \)xex^ 

four,  t)  i  e  r. 

fourth,  b  t  e  r  t. 

France,  granfreic^,  n.  -§. 

free,  fret. 

French,  f  r  a  n  g  o'ftfd^. 

Frenchman,  g  r  a  n  g  o'fe,  m. 

-n,  -n. 
fresh,  f  rtf  (^. 
Friday,   g  ret  tag,   m.  -§, 

-e. 
friend,    g  r  e  it  n  b,    m.    -e§, 

-e. 
friend  (lady),  g  r  e  u  n  b  in, 

/.  -nen. 
friendly,  freunbltd^. 
from,  t)on  (dat.),  au§  (dat.). 
fruit    (of    trees),    Obft,    n. 

-e§, 

full,  t)  or  I.    ' 


gain,  getDtnttert,  O. 

garden,    @  a  r  t  e  tt,    m.    -§, 

-arten. 
gardener,    ©  d  r  t  n  e  r,     m. 


gas,   @  a  §,   S3rcttn  g  a  §,   n. 

-eg,  -e. 
gaslight,     @  a  g  1 1  d^  t,     n, 

-(e)§,  -er  (or  -e). 
gay,  iHftig. 
gardener,     @  d  r  t  tt  e  r,     m. 

generally,  getDO'^ttltd^. 
gentleman,     @err,    m.    -n, 

-en;     gentlemen!     metne 

^errenl 
German,  beutfd^. 
German   (the),  ^eutfc^e,  m. 

-n,  -n. 
Germany,     ©eutfd^Ianb,     n. 

-§;  @  e  r  tn  a'  n  t  a,  f. 
get,  befotnmen,  O. 
get   along,   3urec^t=!otntnen, 

O.  s. 
get  in,  etn-ftetgen,  O.  s. 
get  to,  erretc^en  (ace), 
get    up,    rise,    a  u  f^ftel^en, 

O.  s. 
girl,  Mahdjen,  n.  -§,  -. 
give,  geben,  O.  fd^enfen. 
glad   (be  — ),  freuen,  refl. 
glass,  @  I  a  §,  n.  -e§,  -dfer. 
glove,  ^anbfd)u5,  m.  -(e) §, 

-e. 
go    (in   a   wagon   or  boat), 

fa^ren,  O.  s. 
go,  walk,  g  e  5  en,  O.  s. 
go  away,  it)  e  g  ^  g  e  ^  en,  O. 
go  in,  l^tnein^g  e  ^  ett,  O. 
go  out,  a  u  §  ^  g  e  1^  en,  O.  s. 
go    out    walking,    f|:)a5teren 

g  e  5  en. 
God,  @ott,  m.  -c§,  -otter, 
gold,  @  0  I  b,  n.  -e§. 
gone   (all  — ),  a  lie. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN    VOCABULARY 


327 


good,  gut. 

good-bye,  Sebcn  @te  to^II 

aiif  SBieberfe^enl 
grammar,     ©  r  a  m  m  a' t  i !, 

f.  -en. 
grandfather,     ©rofe  t)  a  t  e  r, 

m.  -g,  -dter. 
gray,  g  r  a  u. 
great,  big,  g  r  0  fe. 
Greece,    @  r  t  e  (^  enlanb,  w. 

-§. 
green,  g  r  it  n. 

grow,  become,  ttJcrbcn,  O.  s. 
grown  up,  eritjad^fen. 
guest,  ©  a  ft,  m.  -e§,  -ctfte. 
guide,  gutter,  m.  -^,  -. 
gymnasium,      @  t)  m  n  a  * 

fium,  n.  -§,  -en. 


hack,  ^rofcfjfe,  f.  -n. 

hail   (it  — s),  e§  I)agelt, 

impers. 
half,  ^  a  1 6. 
Hamburg,    §  a  m  b  n  r  g,    n. 

-§. 
hand,  ^  anh,  f.  -anbe. 
hand,  pass,  reach,  r  e  t  (^  en. 
handsome,  fd[)on. 
Hanover,   §  a  n  n  0'  b  e  r,    n. 

-§. 
happen,  gefd^e^en,  O.  s.  ev^ 
etgnen,  refl. 
happy,  glii(flt(^. 
hard,  ftar!,  ^axt,  fd^iner. 
hardly,  !aum. 
Hartz    mountains,    §  a  r  5  ^ 

gebirge,  w.  -§,  -. 


hat,  $  u  t,  m.  -e§,  -iite ;  hats 

off,  §ut  abl 
hate,  ^  a  f  f  e  n. 
have,  5  a  b  e  n,  irreg.  N. 
he,  er. 

head,  ^opf,  m.  -e§,  -o^^fe. 
health,  (^efunb^ett,  /.  -en. 
hear,  1^  0  r  en. 
heart    (learn   by  — ),   au§^ 

Inenbtg  I  e  r  a  en. 
heat,  ^  e  i  3  en. 
heaven,  ^tntntet,  m.  -^,  -. 
heavy,  fc^tner.  • 
help,     ^  e  I  f  en,     O. ;     neg. 

nic^tg  bafur  (tnn)  fonnen, 

ntc^t  nm^in  fi3nnen. 
Henry,  §  e  i  n  r  t  clj,  m.  -§. 
her  (poss.),  t^r. 
here,  ^  i  e  r. 
hereafter,  nad^^er. 
hero,  §elb,  m.  -en,  -en. 
high,  ^  0(^.  [decl. 

himself    (adj.) ,  f  e  I  b  ft,  in- 
himself    (refL  pron.),  fi(^. 
his,  fetn. 

hither,  ^xex^ex. 
Hohenzollern,     .§  0  ^  e  n  ^ 

poller  n. 
hold,  5  a  1 1  e  n,  O. 
home,  §  e  i  m  a  t,  f.  -en. 
home  (at  — ),  ba^  etm,  gu 
honest,  e^rlid^.  §aufe. 

hope,  5  b  f  f  en. 
hope    (as  I  — ),  it  is  to  be 

hoped,     ^  0  f  f  entlic^ 

(adv.). 
horse,  ^ferb,  n,  -e§,  -e. 
horse-car,  ^ferbebal^ntnagen, 

m.  -§,  -,  ^^ramtDagen,  m. 

-^,  -. 


328 


ENGLISH-GERMAN    VOCABULARY 


hotel,  ©aftr^aug,  n.  -c§,  -du== 

fer ;  §oteI,  n.  -§,  -§. 
hour,  ©tunbe,  /.  -n. 
hour  (an  —  ago),  t)or  e  t  n  er 

©tunbe. 
house,  §  a  u  §,  n.  -e§,  -aufer. 
house    (at   the   —   of),   hex 

(dat). 
house  (to  our),  311  un§. 
house-door,    §  a  u  §  t  ii  r,    /. 

-en. 
how,  lt)te? 

however,  aber,  tt)ie. .  .auc^. 
how    much,    intet)tel?    how 

many,  it)ie  t)iele? 
hundred,      §  u  n  b  e  r  t,      w. 

-§,  -e. 
hunger,  ,§  u  n  g  e  r,  m.  -§. 
hungry,  |  u  n  g  r  i  g. 
hunter,  gctger,  m.  -§,  -. 
hurry,  hasten,  etien,  s.  or  h. 
husband,    Tlann,    m.    -eg, 

-dnner. 
hymn-book,  ©efang  hu^,  n. 

-(e)g,  -iid^er. 


I,i4 

if,  roenn. 

ill,  !ranf. 

immediately,  fofort,  fogleii^. 

important,  Jt)tdC)ttg. 

impossible,  itnmiigltc^. 

improve,  tjerbeffern. 

in,  into,  in  (dat.  or  ace.)- 

incessant,   beftdnbtg,   unun== 

terbro(^en. 
inclined     (be    — ),    miigen, 

irree:.  N.,  ^-Vi\i  ^aben. 


indeed,  \a,  aber  bod),  gtrar; 

yes  indeed,  \  a  iDo|L 
index-finger,  geige  finger, 

m.  -§,  —. 
industrious,  flet^ig. 
inhabit,  hetvo^mn. 
inhabitant,  (Bintvo^nex,  m. 
injure,  fd§aben,  O.       [-§,  -. 
ink,  ^tnte,  f.  -n. 
instead,     ft  a  1 1,     an\iaii 

(gen.). 
interjection,       SluSrufungg- 

t)ooxi,    n.    -(e)§,    -orter, 

^  n  t  e  r  i  e  !  t  i  0  n',  f.  -en. 
into,  in,  t  n  (dat.  or  ace). 
introduce,  l:)or^fteIIen,  e  t  n  ^ 

fiiljren. 
invite,  e  t  n  -  lab  en,  O. 
invitation,    ^  t  n  laburtg,    f, 

-en. 
iron,  ^  i  f  e  n,  n.  -§,  -. 
it,  e§. 

Italian,  1 1  a  It  e'  n  ifc^. 
Italian  (the),  ^  t  a  It  e'  n  er, 

m.  —§,  -. 
Italy,  ^  t  a'  I  i  e  n,  n.  -§. 
its,  fein. 


James,  ^a'foh,  m.  -§. 
January,      g  ^  mi  ^  ^'^      wi. 

-§,  -e. 
John,  ^  0  ^  a  n  n',  ni.  -§. 
journey,  D^leife,  /.  -n. 
joy,  grcube,  /.  -tt. 
July,  S  u'  I  i,  m. 
June,  ^u'ni,  m. 
just,  just  so,  precisely,  eben. 
just  now,  fo  eben  (foebcn). 


ENGLISH-GERMAN    VOCABULARY 


329 


keep,  he^alten,  O. 
key,  (Sd^Iiiffel,  w.  -§,  -. 
kind,    5irt,    /.    -en,    ©orte, 

f.-n. 
kind,  gut,  frciinblicC) ;  to  be 

so  kind,  bic  @iite  ^abcn. 
kind  (of  every),  aHerlef. 
kind    (what   —   of),    tva^ 

fiir? 
king,  Monxq,  m.  -§,  -e. 
kitchen,  ^  ii  (^  e,  /^.  -n. 
knife,  2)^effer,  w.  -§,  -. 
knock,  flopfen. 
know,  tDtffen,  irreg.  N. 
know,    be    acquainted    with, 

!ennen,  irreg.  N. 


lady,  ^ame,  f.  -n. 

lady  (young),  gmuletn. 

lamp,  kamp  e,  f.  -n. 

lamplight,  2amp  enlxii)t, 
n.  -e§,  -er. 

land,  S  a  n  b,  n.  -e§,  -e  or 
-ctnber. 

language,  (Sprac^e,  f.  -n. 

large,  grofe. 

last,  le^t;  at  last,  cnblidC). 

last,  continue,  baucrn. 

last  but  one,  bor  I  e  ^  t. 

last    evening,    gcftern 

late,  fpctt.  [a  b  e  n  b. 

Latin,  I  a  t  e  t  n  tf(^  ;  in  Lat- 
in, auf  I  a  t  e  t  n  ifc^. 

laugh,  I  a  (^  en ;  laugh  at, 
au§  I  a  (^  e  n. 


lay,  I  e  g  en. 
lead,  93Ici,  n.  -c§. 
lead-pencil,      93Ieifttft,      m. 

-(e)§, -c. 
leaf,  S3Iatt,  n.  -c§,  -after. 
learn,  I  c  r  n  en. 
learn   by   heart,   au^luenbig 

fern  en. 
least,    at    least,   toenigften^, 

minbcftcng. 
leave,     depart,      start,     ah^ 

fa^^ren,  O.  s. ;  ab^ge^en,  O. 

s. ;  ab-rcifen. 
leave,  forsake,  berlaffen,  O. 
leave     (take    — ),    ?lbf(^teb 

ne^men,  O. ;  empf e^Ien,  O. 

refl. 
leg,  S3etn,  n.  -e§,  -e. 
Leipzig,  S  e  t  b  3 1  g,  n.  -§. 
lend,  I  e  i  5  en,  O. 
lesson,  5luf gabe,  /.  -n ;  ©tun^ 

be,  f.  -n. 
let,  laffen,  O. ;  let  us  go,  ge= 

^en  intr,  tnoHen  inir  ge^en. 
letter,  ^rtef,  m.  -e§,  -e. 
letter     (of    the    alphabet), 

S3u(^ftabe,  m.  -n,  -n. 
letter-carrier,      S3rteftrager, 

in.  -§,  -. 
Lewis,  2  u  b  n)  i  g,  m.  -§. 
librarian,    S3tbItot^e!ar',    m. 

-§>,  -. 
library,  SSibltot^ef,  /.;  S3t= 

bliotljcf'gimmer,  n.  -§,  -. 
lie,  I  i  e  g  en,  O.  h.  or  s. 
light,    2x6:^1,    n.    -e§,    -er 

(or-e). 
lighting,  93e  I  e  u  (^  t  u  n  g,  /. 
lighten   (it  — s),    eg    bli^t, 

impers. 


330 


ENGLISH-GERMAN    VOCABULARY 


like,  g  I  e  t  d^. 

like,  lieben,  mogen,  irreg.  N. 

like  (I  should  —),id)  mod)- 

te  gem. 
like   (be  pleased  with),  ge- 

fallen  (impers.  dat). 
little,  !Ietn. 

little  (a  — ),  (ein)  iDcntg. 
live,  I  e  6  e  n,  tno^nen. 
lock,  ©d^Iofe,  n.  -ffe§,  -offer. 
locomotive,      S  o  c  o  m  o  1 1'* 

b  e,  /.  -n. 
long,   I  a  n  g,   adv.  I  a  n  g  e ; 

no  longer,  ntcl^t  me^r. 
look  at,  an'fe!)en,  O. 
lose,  ber  H  e  r  en,  O. 
lose  one's  way,  bertrren,  refl. 
lost,    berloren;    from    t)er= 

Iteren. 
loud,  laut 
love,  n  e  b  en. 


M 

make,  m  a  (^  en. 

man,  Tlann,  m.  -e§,  -an- 

ner. 
man,  human  being,  Tt  en fd^, 

m.  -en,  -en. 
manage,  madden. 
manner,  SBeife,  f.  -,  -n. 
many,  tJtele  (pi.)- 
many,  many  a,  man(^(er). 
March,  Max^,  m.  -e^,  -e. 
market,    S^  a  r !  t,    m.    -e^, 

-attie. 
mathematics,  "iSflai^exna^ 

matter,  ^a^e,  f.  -n. 


matter    (it    is    no   — ),    e§ 

fdjabet  ntd^t. 
matter     (what     is     the    — 

with),  tva§  feljlt?  (dat.). 
may,  biirfen,  irreg.  N. 
May,   SO^ai,   m.   -(e)§,   -e 

or  -en*  [^ett,  /.  -en. 

meal,     meal-time,     ^  a  ^  t  =* 
mean  to,  intend,  n)Oflen* 
mean,  m  e  t  n  en. 
meat,  gletfd),  n.  -e§,  -e. 
meet,    begegnen    (dat.)    s. ; 

treffen,  O. 
merchant,     ^aufmann,     m. 

-(e) §,  -dnner  or  -leute. 
merry,  Iitftig. 
metal,  TtetalV,  n.  -(e)§, 

-e. 
middle,  Tlitte,  f. 
middle-finger,       SP^  1 1 1  e  I  ^^ 

finger,  m.  -§,  -. 
mile.  Tie  He,  f.  -n. 
milk,  mild),  f. 

million,  S)?  ill  ton',  f.  -en. 
mind,  ©inn,  m.  -e§,  -e. 
mine,  my,  m  e  i  n. 
minute,  SJ^  t  n  u'  t  e,  f.  -n. 
minute  (a  —  ago),  t)or  einer 

S[)^tnute. 
Miss,  grdulein. 
miss,  fail  of,  berfdumen. 
mistake,  by  — ,  au§  ^erfel^en. 
mistaken,  to  be  — ,  fid^  irren. 
moderately,  atemltc^. 
Monday,  S?^  o  n  t  a  g,  m, 

-§,  -e. 
money,  @elb,  n.  —e§,  -er. 
month,    Tto'nat,    m.    -§, 

-e. 
moon,  Tlonh,  m.  -e§,  -e. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN    VOCABULARY 


331 


moonlight,  Tlonb  cnlid)t, 

n.  -e§,  — . 
more,  m  e  ^  r ;  noc^  (t)on  — ) . 
morning,  TIotcqcxx,  m. 

-§, -. 
morning     (this    — ),    ^eute 

friil);      (to-morrow     — ), 

m  0  r  g  e  n  frii^. 
most,  m  e  t  ft. 

mother,  Wuiitt,  f.  -iitter. 
mountain,  S3erg,  m.  -c§,  -e. 
Mr.,  §err,  m.  -n,  -en. 
Mrs.,  gran,  f.  -en. 
much,  tfiei,  fe^r;  how  much, 

it)tet)tcl?   how   many,   tnie 

btele? 
multiplication    table,    ^in^ 

maletng,  n.  -c§,  -e. 
Munich,  TluxK^^en,  n.  -§. 
must,  m  ii  f  f  e  n,  irreg.  N. 
my,  mine,  m  e  t  n. 


N 

nail,  5^  a  g  e  t,  m.  -§,  -agel. 
name,  9^  a  m  e,  w.  -n§,  -n. 
name,  n  e  n  n  e  n,  irreg.  N. 
name  (what  is  the  name  of), 

tnte  ^eifet? 
narrate,    erga^Ien;    narrator 

=   the    narrating    (one)  ; 

narrative  =  the  narrated 

(thing). 
naughty,  iinarttg. 
near,  by  the  side  of,  neben 
.     (dat.). 
near,  nigh,  na^e. 
nearly,  about,  ungefct^r. 
necessary,  ni3tiQ,  nottDenbig. 


need,  bebiirfen  (gen.),  irreg. 

N. ;  braiid)en. 
neither,    ineber;    neither    — 

nor,  toeber  —  nod^. 
nephew,  5^  e  f  f  e,  m.  -n,  -n. 
never,  nte,  ntemal§. 
nevertheless,  bod). 
new,  n  c  u. 

newspaper,  Qettung,  /.  -en. 
next,  n  d  d)  ft. 
next,     coming,     following, 

!omm  e  nb. 
night,  ^ad^t,  f.  -ad)te. 
nine,  n  e  u  n. 
nineteen,  neunge^n. 
nineteenth,   neungel^nt. 
ninth,  n  e  u  n  t. 
no,  n  e  t  n. 
no,  none,  !etn. 
none  at  all,  gar  fetn. 
north,  5^  0  r  b  e  n,  m.  -§. 
northeast,    5^  0  r  b  0  ft,    m. 

-eng. 
not,  n  t  (^  t. 
not  at  all,  gar  n  t  d^  t. 
not  yet,  nod^  n  t  d^  t. 
note,  S3rtefd^en. 
note    (musical),    5^ote,    f. 

-n. 
note-book,  5^  0  tia' b  it  d^,  n. 

-§,  -iidier. 
nothing,  ntd)t§. 
noticeable,  auffaHenb. 
noun,  §au|:)ttnort,  11.  -(e)§, 

-brter;     ©nbftanttb',     n. 

~c§r  -e. 
novel,  D^loman',  in.  -(e)§,  -e. 
November,  9^obember,  m. 

-^,  -. 
now,  je^t,  nun. 


332 


ENGLISH-GERMAN    VOCABULARY 


now  (just  — ),  fo  eben  (foe^ 

ben). 
numeral,  ^(^^^'i^ott,  n.  -(e)§, 

-orter;  ^nmeta'le,  n. 

-§,  -xa. 


0!  0,  a^. 

obey,  gel^or($en  (dat.). 

obliged,    berbunbcn    (dat.)  ; 

be  obliged  to,  mitffcn. 
occupy,  dwell  in,  beh^o^ncn. 
October,     O  !  t  o  b  e  r,     m. 

-^,  -• 
o'clock,  UI}r;  at  what  o'clock, 

nm  tnictJtel  U^r? 
of,  bon  (dat). 
of,    t)on    (dat.)  ;    often    ex- 
pressed   by    genitiye    case 

alone, 
of  it  or  them,  bai)on. 
officer,  D  f  f  t  g  t  e  r',  m.  -§, 

-c. 
often,  oft. 
oil,  D  I,  n.  -§. 
old,  alt. 

omit,  au^^Iaffen,  O. 
on,  an    (dat.  or  ace),  auf 

(dat.  or  ace). 
once,    formerly,    once    on    a 

time,  etnft;  at  once,  fo^ 

Qleicfj. 
once,  one  time,  e  t  n  mat. 
one,  c  t  n;  the  one,  berientoc. 
one,  people,  they,  man. 
one  and  a  half,  anbcrtl)  alb. 
one  another,  c  i  n  a  n  b  c  r. 
only,  nur. 
onwards,  on,  an. 


open,  auf  ^mad}en,  ii  f  f  n  en. 
open,  0  f  f  e  n. 
opera,  O  ^  e  r,  f.  -n. 
opinion,  S)2etnung,  /.  -en. 
opinion   (to  be  of),  benfen, 

irreg.  N. 
opposite,   gegeniiber    (dat). 
or,  0  b  e  r. 
order,  beftellen. 
order  (in  —  that),  bamtt. 
order    (in   —   to),   um   gu. 
other,  a  n  b  e  r. 
ought  (to),  foUen  (pret  and 

plup.). 
our,  u  n  f  e  r. 
ourselves,  adj.  felbft. 
out,  a  H  §. 

over,  ii  b  e  r  (dat.  or  ace), 
overcoat,  ilhtttod,  m.  -(e) §, 

-ode. 
owe,  fdjulbtg  fetn  (dat) 


page,  (Sette,  /.  -n. 
pair,  ^  a  a  r,  w.  -e§,  -e. 
palace,    ^  a  I  a  ft',    m.    -e§, 

-afte. 
paper,  'papier',  it.  -c§,  -e. 
paper,    newspaper,   Qettuncj, 

/.  -en. 
parents,  (SItern  (pi.). 
Paris,  ^  a  r  i  §/  n. 
park,  ^arf,  m.  -(e)§,  -e; 

3:^tergarten,  m.  -^,  -drtcn. 
parlor,     ^aal,     m.     -(e)§, 

-die. 
part,  %zxl,  m.    (n.),  -(e)§, 

-e;  in  part,  gum  ^etle. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN    VOCABULARY 


333 


part  of  speech,  dithttexl,  m. 

-(c)§, -e. 
particularly,  befonberg. 
pass  (hand),  rcidien. 
pass    (an  evening),  gubrtn- 

gen,  irreg.  N. 
past,  last,  tjergangcn. 
past  (go  — ),  borbet-ge^^etn 

O.  s. ;  drive  past,  borbet^ 

fa^ren,  O.  s. 
patriotic   song,  S^aterlanb^- 

^ith,  n.  -(e) §,  -er. 
pay,  beaal^Ien;  beftreiten. 
pen,  geber,  f.  -n. 
pen-knife,    gebermeffer,    n. 

-§,  -. 
penny,  pfennig,  m. 

-e§,  -e. 
people,  Seute  (pi.),  ^^^tn. 
perhaps,  tJteHeic^t. 
permit,    eriauben,     (pers. 

dat). 
permitted    (be  — ),   biirfcn, 

irreg.  N. 
person,   ^  e  r  f  o  n',   /.   -en; 

SP^enfc^,  m.  -en,  -en. 
picture,  S3tlb,  n.  -e§,  -er. 
piece,     ©turf,     n.     -§>,     -e; 

apiece,  'iia^  ©tiid. 
piece   for  reading,  Sefejtiicf, 

n.  -(e)§,  -e. 
place,    seat,    ^lai},    m.    -c§, 

place  (in  your  — ),  an  ^^rer 

©telle. 
place  (take  — ),  happen,  ge== 

fcfie^en,  O.  s. 
plan,  ^  I  a  n,  m.  -§,  -due. 
plate,  3^eIIer,  m.  -§,  -. 
play,  fpielen. 


play  (at  the  theatre),  ©c^au^ 

fptel,  n.  -§,  -e,  ©tiicf,  n. 

e§,  -e. 
pleasant,  angene^m. 
please,    gefaEen,    O.     (im- 

pers.)  ;  tuollen. 
please  (if  you  — ),  gefdHtgft, 

bttte.  [-. 

pleasure,  55ergniigen,  n.  -§, 
plural,  Tle^t^df)!,  f.,  Wl^^t- 

\)^\i,  f.  -en. 
pocket,  %a\d^t,  f.  -n. 
poem,  ®ebt(f)t,  n.  -(e)§,  -e. 
point  (be  on  the  —  of),  im 

S3egrtffe  fetn. 
popular  song,  ^oIMieb,    n. 

-(e)§,  -er. 
possible,  mdgltd^. 
possibly,  btelletd^t. 
postage-stamp,  ^  o  f t  marfe, 

f.  -n. 
post-office,  ^  0  ft,  f.  -en. 
pot,  %op^,  m.  -e§,  -opfe. 
pound,  ^  f  u  n  b,  n.  -e^,  -e. 
practice,  iiben. 
praise,  loben. 
praise,  Sob,  n.  -(e) §. 
precious,  noble,  ebel. 
precisely,  gerabe. 
prefer,    bor^gte^en,    O. ;    id) 

ginge  Iteber,  I  should  pre- 
fer to  go. 
prepare,  beretten. 
preposition,      SSortnort,      «. 

-(e)§,   -orter,   ^rebo^ 

f  1 1  i  0  n,  f.  -en. 
present,  antrefenb. 
prese'nt,  give,  fdjenfen. 
prese'nt,      introduce,      bor^ 

ftellen. 


334 


ENGLISH-GERMAN    VOCABULARY 


president,  ^  r  d  f  t  b  e  n  t',  m. 

-en,  -en. 
pretty,  pbfd^. 
pretty,  tolerably,  gtemltd). 
probably,  it)al^rf(^etnlt(^, 

produce,  ^ertJor^brtngen,  ir- 

reg.  N. 
promenade,   walk,   ©pagier^ 

gang,  in.  -(e)§,  -dnge. 
promise,  fc»erfprecC)en,  O. 
promise,  ^^erfprec^en,  w.  -§. 
prompt,  pUn!tIt(^. 
pronoun,  giirit)ort,  w.  -(e) §, 

-orter,  ^rono'tnen,  w. 

-§,  -nomina. 
pronounce,  au§-^pud)en,  O. 
Prussia,  ^  re  u  f  f  e  n,  w.  -§. 
pshaw!  O  pshaw!  ad)  tva^l 

ha^l 
public,  offentltd). 
pumpernickel,     ^  u  m  p  e  r  = 

nidel,  m.  -§. 
pupil,  (Bd)nlex,  m.  -§,  -. 
put,  place,  fteGen,  fe^en. 
put  on  (of  a  hat),  auf^fe^en. 
put    on    (of    clothes),    an^ 

sicken,  O. 
put   oneself   out,   bemii^en, 

refl. 


quarter,  SSiertel,  n.  -§,  -. 
question,  gragc,  f.  -n. 
quick,  fc^neH. 
quicksilver,         Ouedftl? 

hex,  n.  -§. 
quite,    gana;     (tolerably) 

gicmlid^. 


R 

railroad,  (Stfenba^n,  /.  -en. 
rain,  D^l  e  g  e  n,  m.  -§. 
rains     (it),    e§    regnet, 
raise,  er^eben,  O.     [impers. 
rapidly,  rafc^,  fd^neH. 
rascal,  ©d)elm,  m.  -§,  -e. 
rather,  I   should  rather,  id) 

modjte  lieber. 
reach,  r  e  t  d)  en. 
read,  lefen,  O. 
ready,  be  r  e  i  t,  ferttg. 
real,  lt)tr!It(^. 
receive,  come  in  possession 

of,  er^alten,  O. 
receive,  get,  befommen,  O. 
receive,    welcome,    emp\an^ 

gen,  O. 
reception   room,   93efn(^3tm== 

met,  n.  -§,  -   ©mpfangg^ 

gtmmer,  n.  -§,  -. 
recite,  l^er^fagen. 
reckon  together,  gufammen^^ 

xed)nex\. 
recommend,  empfe^Ien,  O. 
recover,  er^olen,  refl. 
red,  rot. 

refer  to,  ertnct^nen. 
regret,  bebaiiern. 
relate,  eract^Ien. 
relieve,    beru^igen,    erletd^- 

tern. 
remain,  bletben,  O.  s. 
remember,     ertnnern,     refl. 

(gen.  or  an  with  ace),  fi(^ 

cntfinnen      (gen.),     nid^t 

bergeffen. 
report,  (is  reported  to),  fcl^ 

len. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN    VOCABULARY 


335 


repose,  diii^c,  f. 
require,   (er^)forbern. 
reside,  toofinen. 
restaurant,    Dleftaura^ 

1 1 0  n',  f.  -en. 
result,    iSrfoIg,    m.    -(e)g, 

-e. 
retain,  Be^alten,  O. 
return,  guriid^fommen. 
reward,  BeIoI)nen. 
rich,  r  e  t  d}. 
rid  (be  —  of),  Io§  fctn  (gen. 

or  ace). 
ride    (on  horseback),  ret- 

ten,  O.  h.  or  s. 
right,  r  e  (^  t. 

right  (be  — ),  r  e  d}  t  ^aBen. 
right  away,  gletd^,  fogleic^. 
right  now,  foeben. 
ring,  91  i  n  0,  m.  -e§,  -e. 
ring-finger,  diinqfinqex, 

m.  —§,  —. 
ripe,  r  e  t  f . 
rise,    get     up,     a  H  f  fte^en, 

O.s. 
rise  (of  sun  and  moon),  auf- 

ge^en,  O.  s. 
river,  glnfe,  m.  -e§,  -iiffe. 
roast,  S3  r  a  t  e  n,  m.  -§,  -. 
rocking-chair,  ©diaufelftul)!, 

m.  -(e) §,  -n^lc. 
roll,  S3rotd)en. 
Roman   (the),  Dtomer,  m. 

-g, -. 
roof,  ®ad),  n.  -c§,  -dd^er. 
room,  3tmmer,  w.  -^,  -. 
rose,  9i  0  f  e,  /.  -n. 
round-trip   ticket,   9^1  u  n  b  ^ 

retfebtHet,  n.  -§,  -e  or  -§. 
route,  Sinie,  /.  -n. 


run,  laufen,  O.  s. ;  ten  nen, 
irreg.  N. ;  run  after,  nai^^ 
laufen  (dat.). 

Russia,  91  u  §  lanb,  n.  -§. 

Russian,  rufftfc^. 

Russian  (the),  9luffe,  m. 
-n,  -n. 


safe,  fid)er. 

sake  (for  my  — ),  itm  met* 

netintllen. 
same   (the  — ),  berfelbe. 
same  (all  the  — ),  gletd^,  eU 

nerlet. 
satisfied,  gnfriebcn. 
Saturday,    (Sonnahenb,    m. 

-§,  -c,  (Bam^taq,  m.  -^, 

-e. 
save,  fdjii^en,.  retten. 
Saxony,  ©  a  d^  f  e  n,  n.  -§. 
say,  tell,  f  a  g  en. 
saying,  proverb,  'Bpxif^tvoit, 

n.  -(e)§,  -iirter. 
scarcely,  !aum. 
scholar,  pupil,  ©  (^  ii  I  e  r,  m. 

-§,  -. 
school,  (5  (^  H I  e,  /.  -n. 
school   building,   ©  (^  u  I  ge* 

bdube,  n.  -^,  -. 
Scotland,  (Sd)ottIanb,  n. 

-§. 
search,  fndjen. 
season-of-the-year,     ^  a  ^  * 

reggett,  /.  -en. 
seat,  (S  t  ^,  w.  -e§,  -e,  ^la^, 

m.  -e§,  -d^e. 
seat  (take  a  — ),  ^la^  ne5== 

men,  fe^en,  refl. 


33^ 


ENGLISH-GERMAN    VOCABULARY 


second,  ^tvcit. 

see,  f  e  ^  en,  O. 

seem,  fc^einen,  O. 

seldom,  f  e  1 1  e  n. 

sell,  t)er!aufen. 

send,  fd^tden,  f  e  n  b  e  n,  ir- 

reg.  N. 
sense   (good  — ),  ^Serftanb, 

m.  —c§. 
sentence,  ©a^,  m.  -eg,  -d^e. 
September,    (September, 

m.  — §,  — . 
serve,    bienen;    (of    meals) 

auf-tragen,  O. 
set  (of  sun  and  moon),  un^ 

ter^ge^en,  O.  s. 
seven,  f  t  e  b  e  n. 
seventeen,       fteb  (en)  = 

seventh,  f  t  e  b  e  n  t. 
seventy,  f  t  e  b  (e  n)  g  t  g. 
several,  mel^rere  (pi.)- 
shade    (shield),  (5(^trm,  m. 
she,  fie.  [-§,  -c. 

shine,  f  c§  e  i  n  e  n,  O. 
ship,  (5  (^  t  f  f,  w.  -eg,  -e. 
shoe,  (B  d)Vi^,  m.  -e§,  -e. 
shoemaker,     ©  (^  u  1^  m  a  = 

(^  e  r,  w.  -§,  -. 
shop,  store,  Saben,  m.  -§,  - 

or  -ctbcn. 
short,  furg,  !Ietn. 
should,  foUen   (in  pret.  and 

plup.). 
show,  geigen. 
shut,  gu-mad^en. 
sick,  !ran!. 
side,    ©ette,    /.    -n;    this 

side,  biegfettg  (gen.)  ;  that 

side,  jenfeitg  (gen.). 


sidewalk,  gufelneg,  m.  -(e)g, 

-e. 
silver,  (S  1 1  b  e  r,  n.  -§. 
simple,  etnfad^. 
simply,  (merely),  nur. 
since,  f  e  1 1  (dat.). 
since,  as,  't>a. 
sing,  f  t  n  g  e  n,  O. 
single,  etngeln. 
singular  (number),  (Stn^ett, 
sir,  metn  §err.  [/. 

sister,  (S  (^  In  e  ft  e  r,  f.  -n. 
sit,  f  t  ^  en ;   sit  down,   ftc^ 

f  e  ^  en. 
sitting-room,  ©tube,  /.  -n. 
six,  f  e  (^  §. 
sixth,  f  e  c^  ft. 
sixty,  f  e  (^  3  X  g. 
sky,  §tmmel,  m.  -§,  -. 
sleep,  to  be  asleep,  f  (^  I  a  ^ 

fen,  O. 
sleeping  room,  (S  (^  I  a  f  gtm* 

mer,  n.  -§,  -. 
slow,  langfam. 
small,  !Ietn. 
smith,   ©  d}  m  i  e  b,  m.  -e§, 

-e. 
smoke,  raucC}en. 
smoking,  ^and^cn,  n.  -§. 
snow,  ©  d}  n  e  e,  m.  -§. 
snow  (it  — s),  e  §  f  d)  n  e  i  t, 

impers. 
so,  thus,  f  0. 
so    (is    it   not   — ),    ntd^t 

tna:^r? 
soft,  milb. 
soldier,  ©  o  I  b  a  t',  m.  -en. 

-en. 
some,  eintge  (pi.). 
some,  somewhat,  ettv  a§. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN    VOCABULARY 


337 


somebody,  some  one,  jcmanb. 

something,  ct\va§,  \va§. 

sometimes,  gutueilen. 

son,  ^  o^n,  m.  -e§,  -b^m. 

song,  2xeb,  n.  —e§,  -er. 

soon,  balb. 

sorry  (I  am  — ),  e§  titt  mtr 

letb. 
sorry  (I  am  —  to  say),  un- 
fortunately, leiber. 
sort,  kind,  ©  o  r  t  e,  f.  -n; 

what  sort  of,  to  a  §  fiir. 
sound,  run,  go,  lauten. 
soup,  (Bupp  e,  f.  -n. 
sour,  f  a  u  e  r. 
south,  (S  ii  b  e  n,  m.  -§. 
Spain,  (Bp  aniexi,  n.  -§. 
Spaniard,     Bp  anicv,    in. 

-§,  -. 
Spanish,  f  p  a  n  t  f  c^. 
speak,  f  p  r  e  (^  e  n,  O. 
speech    (part  of),  dieheteil, 

m.  — (e)§,  — e. 
spell,  bud^ftabte'ren. 
spend,  pass,  gu-brirtgen,  ir- 

reg.  N. 
splendid,  prad^tboH,  ^errlid^. 
spread,  belegen. 
spring,  ^riil^Iing,  m.  -§,  -e. 
square,  ^la^,  m.  -e§,  -d^e. 
stand,  ft  e  ^  e  n,  O. 
start,  ab-^aijxcn,  O.  s.,  ab- 

ge^en,  O.  s. 
station,  ©  t  a  1 1  o  n',  /.  -en. 
stay,  remain,  hleibcxi,  O.  s. 
steal,  ft  e  ^  I  en,  O. 
steel   pen,   (S  t  a  ^  I  f eber,   /. 

-n. 
step,  treten,  O.  s. 
stiff,  fteif. 


still,    yet    (of   time),    nod^; 

(adversative)  bod). 
stop,  an^^alten,  O. 
stop,  cease,  anf-^oren. 
store,  shop,  Saben,  m.  -§,  - 

or  -ctben. 
store    (at   the    —    of),    bet 

(dat). 
story,    S^ctrd^en,    n.    -§,   - 

§lnc!bo'te,  f.  -n. 
story    (of  a  house),   ^tod^ 

tvext,  n.  -(e) §,  -e. 
story  (first),  (£rbgefd}ofe,  n. 

-ffe§,  -offe. 
story  (second),  etne  ^repl^e 

stove,  Ofcn,  m.  -§,  ofen. 

straight,  gerabe. 

straw  hat,  Btxo^^ut,  m. 

-(e)§,  -iite. 
street,  Btva^e,  f.  -n. 
strike,  fc^Iagen,  O. 
strong,  ftar!. 
student,     ©  t  it  b  e  n  t',     m. 

-en,  -en. 
study,  ft  u  b  t  e'  r  e  n. 
study,   ©  t  n  b  i  u  m,   n.   -§, 

(S  tnb  ten. 
such,  such  a,  foI(5    (fol^ 

d)  er). 
summer,      ©  o  m  m  e  r,     m. 

-^,  -. 
sun,  (Sonne,  f.  -n. 
sun     shade,      sun     umbrel- 
la,   <3  0  n  n  e  n  fd)trm,    m. 

-(e)§,  -e. 
Sunday,     ©  o  n  n  t  a  g,     m. 

-§,  -e. 
supper,  STbenbbrob,  n.  -(e)§, 

^Ibenbeffen,  w.  -g. 


338 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY 


supply,  berforgcn. 

suppose,  glauben ;  I  suppose, 

tiermutltd^;  tDO^I. 
supposing,  gefe^t. 
sure,  secure,  f  i  (f)  e  r,  G^^^fe- 
surely,  getotfe. 
sure    (to    be    — ),    fretltdi, 

surprised  (I  am  — ),  e§ 
tDunbert  mt(^. 

Swede  (the),  ^d)tvehe, 
m.  -n,  -n. 

Sweden,  ©  (^  it)  e  b  e  n,  w.  -§. 

Swedish,  f  d^  tD  e  b  i  f  (^. 

sweet,  f  ii  fe. 

Swiss,  native  of  Switzer- 
land, ©  (^  li:)  e  1 5  e  r,  m. 
-^,  -. 

Switzerland,  ©  (^  h?  e  i  3,  /. 

syllable,  ^xlhe,  f.  -n. 


table,  5^tf(^,  m.  -c§,  -e. 
tailor,  (5d)nciber,  m.  -§,  -. 
take,  ne^men ;  (require)  for== 

bern,  erforbern. 
take  care,  ft(f)  ^iitcn. 
talk,  f^redjen,  reben. 
tall,  grofe. 
staste,  fd^medfen. 
taste,     ©efd^madf,     nt.    -§; 

matter      of      taste,      @e^ 

fd^mad^gfad)e,  f. 
tea,   Xee,    m.    -^,    ^Ibenb- 

brob,  n.  -(e)§,  -e. 
tea    (take    — ),    5lbenbbrob 

effen  or  ne^men. 
teach,  le^ren. 


teacher,  Secret,  m.  -§,  -. 

telephone,  ttlepl)on teren. 

tell,  fagen ;  eraa^Ien. 

ten,  3  e  ^  n. 

tenth,  3  e  ^  n  t. 

than,  al§. 

thank,     ban!en      (dat.) ; 

thank  you,  b  a  n !  e  fd^on. 
thankful,  ban!  bar. 
thanks,    gratitude,    S)  a  n  !, 

m.  — e§. 
that,  h  a^. 

that,  ien^  (jener),  ba§. 
the,  b  e  r,  b  i  e,  bag. 
theatre,  '^^ea'iex,  n.  -§, 

-,  ©d^aufptell^aug,  n.  -e§. 

-aufer. 
their,  i^r. 

then     (following    a    condi- 
tion), fo. 
then,  at  that  time,  b  a  n  n. 
then,   in   that  case,   b  e  n  n ; 

alfo. 
there,  b  a,  bort ;  over  there, 

ha  brii  b  e  n. 
there  are,  c§  ftnb,  e§  gibt; 

there  is,  eg  i  ft,  eg  gibt. 
therefore,      ba^er,      barum, 

beg^alb. 
therein,  in  that,  b  a  r  i  n. 
thereon,  on  that,  b  a  r  a  n. 
thereupon,  upon  that,  b  a  r^ 

ait  f. 
they,  fie. 

they,  people,  one,  man. 
think,      glauben,      meincn, 

b  e  n  !  en,  irreg.  N. 
think    (I  — ),   nevertheless, 

dodC). 
third,  b  r  i  1 1. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN    VOCxVBULARY 


339 


thirsty  (I  am  — ),  eg  b  iix^ 

ftet  mid},  impers. 
thirteen,  b  r  e  i  a  e  1^  n. 
thirty,  b  r  e  i  fe  t  g. 
this,  b  te§  (b  i  ef  er). 
thorn,  ^  0  r  n,  m.  -§,  -en. 
thorough,  burd^trte'ben. 
thou,  b  u. 
though,     bod},     abet ;      as 

though,  al§  oh. 
thousand,     ^  a  u  f  e  n  b,     n. 

-§,  -e. 
three,  b  r  e  i. 
through,  b  It  r  d)  (ace), 
through  or  done  with,  \ev^ 

tig. 
thumb,  ^  a  u  m  e  n,  m.  -§,  -. 
Thuringia,     3:^f)iiringen, 

n.  —§. 
Thursday,  ^onner^tag, 

m.  -g,  -e. 
thus,  so,  f  0. 
thy,  b  e  i  n. 
ticket,     mUcr,     n.     -(e)g, 

-e. 
ticket    office,    SSilletbureau, 

n.  -§,  -§. 
ticket  there  and  back,  'Sie- 

tourbiHet,  n.  -(e)  g,  -e. 
time,  ^eii,  f.  -en,  S)^al,  n. 

-eg,  -e. 
time  (that  — ),  bamalg. 
time  (at  the  same  — ),  also, 

mit. 
time-table,     %a^xplax\,     m. 

-(e) §,  -e  or  -cine. 
tired,  miibe. 
to,  big    (ace),  na'$   (dat.), 

an  (dat). 
to-day,  ]§en  t  e. 


together  with,  mit,  mit- 
tolerably,  giemlid).       [famt. 
to-morrow,  m  o  r  g  e  n. 
to-morrow    evening,    m  o  r  = 

gen  abenb. 
to-morrow  morning,  m  o  r  - 

gen  friii). 
tongue,  gunge,  f.  -n. 
too,  and)  (also),  gn,  mit^. 
town,  ^ia\)i,  f.  -abic ;  (go) 

down  town,  in  bie  ^ia\>i. 
trade,      ^anbiner!,      n. 

-(e)g,  -e. 
train,  Qng,  w.  -eg,  -iige. 
train  (  accommodation  ) , 

^erfonengug,    m.    -(e)  g, 

-iige. 
train      (fast     or     express), 

©d^neHgug. 
transitive,  tranfitifc). 
translate,  iiberfe':^en. 
treat  of,  ^anbeln  Don. 
tree,   S3anm,   m.  -eg,   -ai\^ 

me. 
tree  (little),  S3dnmd)en. 
trifle,     S3ifed)en     (bifed^en) ; 

Meinigfeit,  /.  -en. 
true    (is   it   not  —  or  so), 

nid^t   tna^r? 
trunk,  Coffer,  m.  -g,  -. 
try,  tjerfnc^en. 
Tuesday,   ^iengtag,    m, 

-g,  -e. 
twelfth,  aii^iJIft. 
twelve,  a  tn  0 1  f . 
twentieth,  a  in  a  n  a  i  g  ft. 
twenty,  a  it)  ct  n  a  i  g. 
twenty-one,       e  i  n  u  n  b  * 

atnanaig. 
two,  ^totx. 


340 


ENGLISH-GERMAN    VOCABULARY 


umbrella,    Dflegeufd^irm,    m. 

-(e)g,  -e. 
uncle,    £)^exm,    m.    -§,    -z, 

O  n !  e  I,  m.  -^,  -. 
under,     unter     (dat.     or 

ace). 
understand,  t)cx:  ft  e  ^  en,  O. 
undertake,      unter  ne^^ 

men,  O. 
uneasy,  u  n  ru^tg. 
unfortunately,  letber. 
United  States,  bie  ^ereiuxG^ 

ten  (Btaaten. 
until  (conj.),  bt§. 
until    (prep.),    hi^    (ace.)  ; 

not  until,  erft. 
unwell,  n  n  in  0  ^  I. 
unwise,  u  n  tn  e  i  f  e. 
up,  a  u  f ;  up  stairs,  oben. 
upon,  au  f   (dat.  or  ace), 
use,    ftc^    bebienen    (gen.), 

brand^en. 
useful,  nii^ltc^. 
usual,  ublid). 
usually,  getno^nltd^. 


vain  (in  — ),  t»ergeben§. 
valley,  '^al,  n.  -e§,  -dier. 
vegetables,  ©emiife,  n.  -^,  -. 
verb,    Qetttnort,    n.    -(e)§, 

-i3rter,    53  e  r  b  (n  m) ,    n. 

-§,  -a  or-en. 
very,  very  much,  fel^r. 
Vienna,  28  t  e  n,  n.  -§. 
village,  ^orf,  n.  -c§,  -i)rfer. 


visit,  ^efudC^,  m.  -e§,  -e. 
visit,  befud}en. 
voice,  ©timme,  /.  -n. 
vote,  ftimmen. 


W 

wagon,   carriage,   SB  a  g  e  n, 

m.  —§,  — . 
wait,    marten,    for,    auf 

(ace). 
waiter,  ^eUner,  m.  -§,  -. 
waiting-room,  SBartefaal,  m. 

-(e)§,  -die. 
walk,  ge^en,  O.  s. 
walk,  promenade,   ©pagier^ 

gang,  m.  -(e)§,  -dnge. 
walking  (to  go  out  — ),  fpa^ 

gte'ren  g  e  ^  en,  s. 
wall  (of  a  room),  SSanb,  f. 

-dnbe. 
want,  JnoHen,  irreg.  N.,  iniin^ 

f(^en,  braud^en. 
warm.  In  a  r  m. 
watch,      time-keeper,      IT^r, 

/.  -en. 
watch,  guard,  ^  ad)t,  f., 

-en. 
water,  28  a  f  f  e  r,  n.  -§,  -. 
way  (road),  28eg,  in.  -(e)^, 

-e. 
way  (manner),  28eij'c,  /.  -n. 
wear,  tragen,  O. 
weary,  ntiibe. 
weather,  28  e  1 1  e  r,  w.  -§. 
Wednesday,     Wiii'voo^,     m. 

-§,  -e. 
week,  28  0  (^  e,  f.  -n. 
well,  gut,  tn  0  ]^  I. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN    VOCABULARY 


341 


well,  I  suppose,  It)  0  5  I. 
well   (introductory),  nurt. 
well-done,  gar. 
west,  SB  eft  en,  m.  -§. 
what  (of  —  number),  iDte= 

t)iclft?    what    day    of   the 

month    have    we    to-day? 

ben  ti^tebtelften  b  e  §  Tlo  ^ 

nat§^ahentvix  ^eute. 
what,  that  which,  whatever, 

tt)a§. 
what  kind  of,  tva§  f iir  ? 
when,  al§,  inannPtrenrt. 
where,  U)  0  ? 
wherein,  in  what  or  which, 

h)ortn. 
whereof,  of  what  or  which, 

tv  0  i:)cin. 
whereout,    out   of   what   or 

which,  Wotan§. 
wherewith,    with    what    or 

which,  tv  0  mxt. 
whether,  ob. 
which,  (ttjeld^),  tDeld^er; 

rel.  ber  or  treld^er. 
while,  tva^icenh,  tnbem. 
white,  tD  e  i  fe. 

whitebread,  SSetfehrot,  n.  -§. 
who,  whoever,  he  who,  tt)  e  r. 
whole,  gang, 
why,  tuarum. 
why     (exclamation),    abet, 

bod>  \a. 
wife,  grau,  f.  -en,  @ema^== 

Itn,  f.  -nen. 
will,  SBtlle  (n),  m.  -§. 
will,  tt)  0  n  e  n,  irreg.  N. 
William,  SB  1 1 5  e  I  m,  m.  -^. 
William  street,  ^xl^elxn^ 

ft  r  a  6  e,  A  -n. 


willing  (be  — ),  tnollen. 
wind,  SB  t  n  b,  m.  -t^,  -c. 
window,  genfter,  n.  -§,  -. 
wine,  SBetn,  m.  -(e)§,  -e. 
winter,  SB  i  n  t  e  r,  m.  -§,  -. 
wise,  in  no  wise,  auf  fetne 

SB  e  t  f  c,  Mne§WeQ§. 
wish,    2B  u  n  f  (^,    m.    -c§, 

-iinfcCje. 
with,  mtt  (dat.). 
with,  at  the  house  of,  bet 

(dat). 
without,  o^ne  (ace). 
woman,  gran,  /.  -en. 
wonder   (I  — ),  e§  tnnn^ 

b  e  r  t  mt(^,  impers. 
wood,  ^olg,  n.  -ti,  -e  or  -61^ 

aer. 
wood,  grove,  SBalb,  m.  -c§, 

-alber. 
woolen,  in  0  n  e  n. 
word,  SBort,  n.  -(e)§,  -e 

or  -otter. 
work,.?][rbett,  f.  -en. 
work,  arbetten. 
world,  SB  e  1 1,  f.  -en. 
write,  fd^reiben,  O. 
write  over,  nm^fd^retben,  O. 
wrong,  nnredjt. 
wrong  (be  — ),  unred^t  ^a^ 

ben. 


year,  '^a^v,  n.  -c§,  -e. 

yellow,  gelb. 

yes,  i  a;  o  yes,  bod^. 

yesterday,  g  e  ft  e  r  n. 

yet,  nod^ ;  yet,  however,  bod§. 


342 


ENGLISH-GERMAN    VOCABULARY 


yet  (not  — ),  nod^  n t d^ t. 
yonder,  bort. 
you,  b  u,  (5ie. 


young,  lung. 
young  lady,  grctuletn. 
your,  betn,  ^^r. 


INDEX 


The  references  are  to  Pages,  and  {in  smaller  figures  above  the 
line  to)  sections. 


^btaut,  35,  ^  50,  \ 
ACCENT  10,  ^^;  in  inseparable 
and  separable  verbs,   126, 

^  Note  28. 

ACCUSATIVE    CASE,    office    of, 

15,  ^  244;  nominative  and 
accusative  have  the  same 
form  in  feminine  and  neu- 
ter, 16,  ^;  prepositions 
governing  dat.  or  ace,  53, 
Note  12 ;  in  expressions  of 
time  "  when  ?  "  and  "  how 
long?  "  86,  Note  19;  place 
of  dat.  and  ace.  depending 
upon  the  same  verb,  91, 
Note  21,  189,  ^^;  preposi- 
tions governing,  39,  Note 
10,  248;  after  verbs  of 
measure,  245,  ^;  absolute, 
245,  '. 

ADDRESS,  pronouns  in,  19, 
Note  I ;  70,  Note  14. 

ADJECTIVES,  of  nationality 
not  written  with  capital 
initial,  3,  ^  \  attributive, 
103,  ';  predicate,  103,  ^;  as 
adverb,    104,   ®;    as   noun. 


103, 


113,     ;  comparison 


of,  1 19  f f . ;  when  declined, 
104,  ^;  declension  of,  104, 
^"^^;  first  declension  of, 
104,  *;  irregular  compari- 
son of,  121,  Note  26;  sec- 
ond declension  of,  iii,  ^*; 
second  declension,  class  I 
(after  ber^words),  iii, 
^~^" ;  second  declension, 
class  II,  after  ein- words), 


113, 


governing    the 


genitive,   246,    the   dative, 
246,  the  accusative,  247. 

ADJUNCTS  OF  THE  VERB,  Order 

of,  in  the  sentence,  188, 
"-'°;  nouns,  189,  '''  ''  '; 
personal  and  reflexive 
pronouns,  190,  ^^'  ^ ;  ad- 
verbs, 190,  ^^*  ^ ;  preposi- 
tions, 191,  ^^  251,  ^  ^ 
ADVERB,  225,  '*~^^;  compound 
adverb  instead  of  preposi- 
tion with  demonstrative, 
22,  ^°,  or  relative  pronoun, 
84,  Note  18;  adjective 
used  as,  104,  ®;  comparison 
of,  119,  ^  *;  order  of  in 
the  sentence,  190,  ^^"  ^ 


343 


344 


INDEX 


ADVERBIAL  CONJUNCTIONS, 
228,  '\ 

ALPHABET,  German,  i ;  use 
of  capitals,  3,  ^;  19,  Note 
I,  112,  ^  103,  °;  in  German 
script,  271. 

al§   (when),  Appendix  255. 

am,  with  superlative  of  ad- 
jective, 119,  ^ 

ARRANGEMENT,  of  the  Sen- 
tence, 61,  Note  13;  70, 
Note  15;  78,  Note  16; 
Lessons  XXV  and  XXVL 

ARTICLE  (definite),  serves  to 
introduce  German  declen- 
sion,   15;    declension    of, 

16,  ^;  to  be  prefixed  in 
naming     German     nouns, 

17,  Remark;  abbreviated 
and  appended  to  preced- 
ing v^ord,  17,  Remark;  for 
English  possessive,  23, 
Note  4 ;  used  when  we  do 
not  have  it  in  English, 
Appendix  240;  separated 
by  intervening  words 
from  its  noun,  189,  ", 
211,  *. 

ARTICLE  (indefinite),  declen- 
sion of,  28,  *;  omitted  in 
German,  241. 

ATTRIBUTIVE  ADJECTIVE,  103,  ^ 

auf§,    with    superlative    of 

adverb,  120,  ^ 
AUXILIARIES,  of  tcusc,  57,  *~'^ ; 

fetn  instead  of  ^aben,  58,^ ; 
^    of     mood     see     "  modal 

AUXILIARIES  " ;  of  passive, 


172, 


'  causative  "  aux- 


iliary, 151, 


BRACKETS,  how  uscd  in  the 
Exercises,   19,   Remark. 

CAPITAL  LETTERS,  USC  of,  3,  ^ 

103,  ^  112,  ^;  in  pronouns 
of  address,  19,  Note  i. 

CARDINAL        NUMERALS,       SS, 

Note  8,  41. 
CASES,  16,  ^;  table  of  case 
endings  in  first  noun-de- 
clension, 76,  ^^;  different 
cases  in  German  and 
English  after  a  verb,  94, 
Note  22;  in  second  noun- 
declension,  96,  ^;  table  of 
noun-declensions,  98 ;  in 
class  IL  of  second  adjec- 
tive-declension, 113,  ". 

"  CAUSATIVE  AUXILIARY," 

isi, ". 

CHARACTER,  German  printed, 
I ;   written,  271. 

-f^cn,  -letn,  declension  of 
nouns  in,  76,  ^^;  significa- 
tion of,  78,  Note  17;  gen- 
der and  declension  of,  not 
indicated  in  the  vocabu- 
laries, 2yy,  ^ 

CLASSES,  in  first  declension 
of  nouns,  75,  " ;  in  second 
declension  of  adjectives, 
III,  ^  ^  ". 

COMMAND    OR    WISH,    USC    of 

the  subjunctive  to  ex- 
press, 218,  ^  220,  ^ 

COMPARISON,  of  adjectives 
and  adverbs,  Lesson  XVI, 
diminishing,  121,  ^ 

COMPOUND  ADVERBS,  uscd  in- 
stead of  preposition  with 


INDEX 


345 


relative  or  demonstrative 
pronoun,  84,  Note  18. 
COMPOUND  NOUNS,  declcn- 
sion  and  gender  of,  75,  ^\ 
91,  Note  20;  in  -mann 
have  -leute  in  plural,  129, 
Note  2^, 

COMPOUND    RELATIVES,     9O,     ^ 

COMPOUND  TENSES,  formation 
of,  57,  *~* ;  paradigm  of,  59, 
^°;  position  of,  in  the  sen- 
tence, 61,  Note  13,  188,  '', 
191,  ^^;  of  ^aben,  fein, 
iDerben,  66-69;  in  sub- 
junctive, 142,  ^ 

COMPOUND  VERBS,  SCC  INSEP- 
ARABLE and  SEPARABLE 
VERBS. 

CONDITION,  expressed  by  in- 
version of  subject  and 
verb,  70,  Note  15,  144, 
Note  30,  196,  ^\  sub- 
junctive of,  141,  ^ 

CONDITIONAL    MOOD,    I4I,    ^ 
CONDITIONAL     SENTENCE,    the 

clause      following     intro- 
duced by  fo,  220,  Remark. 

CONJUGATION   OF  VERBS,   Ncw 

and  Old,  35,  *~^;  New,  36, 
'-^^  Old,  43, '"'".    See  also 

VERBS. 

CONJUNCTIONS,  228-9;  gene- 
ral connectives,  196,  ^  Ap- 
pendix, 254 ;  adverbial,  78, 
Remark,  228,  ^^;  subor- 
dinating, 197,  ^^^^  Appen- 
dix, 255. 

CONSONANT  SOUNDS,  English 
equivalents,  4-9;  exercise 
on,  12. 


CONTRACTIONS,  Scarcity  of  in 
German,  24,  Footnote  2. 

bamit  (m  order  that)  intro- 
duces transposed  sen- 
tences, 78,  Note  16,  197, 
^";  followed  by  the  sub- 
junctive, 219,  ^ 

ha§,  referring  to  plural  num- 
ber and  different  genders, 
22,  I 

ba^,  introduces  transposed 
sentences,  78,  Note  16,  197, 
^^ ;  when  expressing  a  pur- 
pose followed  by  the  sub- 
junctive, 219,  ^;  omission 
of,  causes  change  from 
transposed  to  normal  or- 
der, 197,  'I 

DATIVE  CASE,  officc  of,  i6,  ®; 
Appendix  243 ;  always 
ends  in  n  in  plural,  16,  ^; 
as  indirect  object  after  a 
verb,  16,  ®;  prepositions 
governing,  45,  Note  11; 
prepositions  governing 
dat.  or  ace,  53,  Note  12; 
e  (in  parenthesis)  may  be 
dropped,  76,  ^^ ;  order  of 
dat.  and  ace.  depending 
upon  the  same  verb,  91, 
Note  21,  188,  '';  after  a 
verb  where  an  objective 
case  is  used  in  English, 
94,  Note  22  ;  of  possession, 
85,  Footnote  2 ;  with  verbs. 
Appendix  246;  with  adj. 
and  adv..  Appendix  246; 
prepositions,  Appendix 
248. 


346 


INDEX 


DAY,  time  of,  136,  Note  29; 
I39>  Conversation  17. 

DAY  OF  THE  MONTH,  8i,  Vo- 
cabulary. 

DAYS  OF  THE  WEEK,  ']2,  Vo- 
cabulary. 

DECLENSION,  general  intro- 
duction to,  15-16;  of 
nouns,  a  table  of,  98; 
see  nouns;  of  compound 
nouns,  91,  Note  20;  of  ad- 
jectives,  see  adjectives. 

DEFINITE  ARTICLE,   SCC   \itX. 

bein  (possessive  adjective), 
declension  of,  28,  ^ 

DEMONSTRATIVE       PRONOUNS, 

97,  ^ 

bcnn  (  for) ,  does  not  require 
transposed  order  of  sen- 
tence, 188,  ". 

DEPENDENT  SENTENCE,  ar- 
rangement of,  197,  ^". 

ber  and  ireld^er,  may 
both  introduce  a  relative 
clause,  90,  \ 

ber  (definite  article),  de- 
clension of,  16,  ^;  "ber" 
ap- 


words,  21,  ^  ^,  III, 


pended  in  abbreviated 
form  to  preceding  word, 
17,  Remark;  for  English 
possessive,  23,  Note  4; 
where  we  do  not  have  it 
in  English,  Appendix  240 ; 
declension  of  adjective 
after,  iii,  ^ 

ber  (demonstrative  pro- 
noun), declension  of,  97/. 

ber  (relative  pronoun),  de- 
clension of,  90,  ^ 


"  ber  "  WORDS,  21,  ^,  III,  ^"^; 
declension  of  adjective 
after,  iii,  *~^. 

'bxt^  (biefer),  declension  of, 
21,  ^ 

biefe^  referring  to  plural 
number  and  different 
genders,  22,  ^ 

DIMINUTIVES,  in  -d)en  and 
-letn,  76,  '',  78,  Note 
17- 

DIPHTHONGS,  table  of  Eng- 
lish equivalents  of,  4-9; 
Exercise  on,  12. 

DIRECT  OBJECT,  of  a  trausitivc 
verb,  16,  ®;  in  English  not 
always  so  in  German,  94, 
Note  22. 

bo(^,  f(^on,  etc.,  how  used 
and  importance  of,  78,  Re- 
mark. 

bu,  how  used,  19,  Note  i ; 
yi,  ^^  70.  Note  14 ;  declen- 
sion of,  69. 

biirfen,  signification  of,  151, 
^^;  conjugation  of,  153,  ^*; 
uses,  149,  ^"^l 

t,  in  personal  endings  of  the 
verb,  36,  ""^%-  when  in- 
serted before  preterit  end- 
ing, 2>7,  ^^  \  in  gen.  and  dat. 
of  nouns,. 76,  ^*. 

ein  (indefinite  article),  de- 
clension of,  28,  *;  (num- 
eral), declension  and  uses 
of,  33,  Note  8. 

"  ein  "  WORDS,  28,  ^^ ;  declen- 
sion   of    adjective    after, 

113,  "-"• 


INDEX 


347 


etntge  (some),  23,  Note  3; 
III,  \ 

-el,  nouns  in,  76,  ^l 

EMPHASIS,  inversion  to  ex- 
press, 196,  ^ 

-en,  nouns  in,  76,  ^^ 

ENDINGS,  of  nouns  and  ad- 
jectives, see  CASES. 

ENDINGS,  of  verbs,  see  per- 
sonal   ENDINGS. 

ENGLISH  AND  GERMAN,  Com- 
parison between,  with  ref- 
erence to  the  pronuncia- 
tion, 3,  ®"^";  periphrastic 
forms  of  the  verb,  19,  Note 
2,  39,  Note  9 ;  order  of  the 
sentence,  187,  ^  ^  195,  ', 
I97j  ^;  preposition  with 
case  and  compound  ad- 
verb, 84,  Note  18;  differ- 
ent cases  after  a  verb,  94, 
Note  22;  use  of  the  defi- 
nite article,  23,  Note  4 ;  use 
of  the  passive  voice,  173, 
^^;  use  of  reflexive  verbs, 
I79>  *;  genitive  after  re- 
flexives, 182,  Note  40; 
use  of  impersonal  verbs, 
182,  ^";  use  of  the  present 
and  perfect  tenses,  66,  °; 
use  of  the  subjunctive, 
218,  ^'®;  tenses  in  indirect 
statement,  219,  Note;  use 
of  the  perfect  and  preterit 
tenses,  66,  ^;  words  his- 
torically related,  see  the 
Vocabularies. 

entlDcber,  does  not  require 
transposed  order  of  sen- 
tence, 188,  '\ 


er,  declension  of,  78. 

-ex,  nouns  in,  76,  ". 

e§,  declension  of,  78;  mean- 
ing "  there,"  27,  Footnote 
I,  30,  Note  7;  in  imper- 
sonal verbs,  181,  ^"";  sub- 
stitute for  adjectives  and 
nouns,  18,  Footnote  i. 

e§  gibt,  e§  ift,  (there  is,  there 
are),  distinction  between, 
30,  Note  7. 

ettva§,  translates  some  when, 
23,  Note  3. 

euer  (gen.  plural  of  bu),  69. 

euer  (possessive  adjective), 
declension  of,  28,  ^"®. 

FEMININE   NOUNS,   rulcS   for, 

237 ;  do  not  change  for  de- 
clension in  the  singular, 
75,  ®;  in  first  declension, 
74,  \  76,  ",  83,  ' ;  in  sec- 
ond declension,  97,  *,  ^; 
in  -in,  99,  Note  24.     See 

also    GENDER. 
FIRST   DECLENSION,   of  UOUUS, 

74,  *~^^;  of  adjectives,  103, 
1-12 

FOREIGN  WORDS,  pronuncia- 
tion of,  10,  ". 

FRENCH  AND  GERMAN,  Com- 
parison between,  with  ref- 
erence to  the  pronuncia- 
tion, ox  7,  ii  8;  use  of  the 
passive  voice,  175,  ^;  in- 
definite pronoun  in,  25, 
Note  5. 

fiir,  in  tva^  fiir  (what  kind 
of),    63,    84,    Vocabulary. 

FUTURE  TENSE,  how  formed, 


348 


INDEX 


58,  ®;  of  conjecture,  92, 
footnote  7. 

qe^,  used  to  form  past  par- 
ticiple, 36,  ^;  omitted  in 
inseparable  verbs,  128,  ^^; 
omitted  in  geiDorben  as 
auxiliary  of  passive,  172,  ^ 

geben,  inflection  of  the 
simple  tenses  indicative, 
44,  ^°;  of  the  subjunctive, 
144,     . 

GENDER^  general  remarks  on, 

15,  ^  °;  of  infinitives  used 
as  nouns,  205,  " ;  of  nouns 
in  d)en  and  letn,  78,  " ;  of 
nouns  in  el,  en,  ex,  76,  ^^ ; 
of  nouns  in  !unft,  n\§,  and 
fal,  83,  '*;  of  compound 
nouns,  75,  ^\  91,  Note  20; 
of  nouns  in  -in,  99,  Note 
24;    See    Appendix,    237, 

238 ;         also         MASCULINE, 
FEMININE,    and    NEUTER. 
GENITIVE      CASE,      officC      of, 

16,  ^  243 ;  ending  in 
nouns,  75,  '^,  96,  '^;  must 
be  known  in  order  to  de- 
cline a  noun,  75,  "; 
whether -e§,  or-g,  75//*; 
after  reflexive  verbs,  182, 
Note  32;  mode  of  indica- 
tion of  in  the  vocabula- 
ries, 277,  ^;  with  prepo- 
sitions. Appendix  243 ; 
verbs,  Appendix  245  ;  adj., 
Appendix  246;  adverbial, 
Appendix  243,  ^ 

GERMAN  PRINTED  CHARAC- 
TER, I ;  written,  287. 


^abcn,  inflection  of  present 
indicative  of,  23;  of  pre- 
terit indicative  of,  29,  '; 
used  as  tense  auxiliary, 
57,  *,  ^ ;  distinguished  from 
fein,  58,  ^;  inflection  of 
compound  tenses  indica- 
tive of,  67;  simple  tenses 
subjunctive  of,  142,  ^ 

have  (let,  cause),  151,  ^ 

HOUR,  of  the  day,  mode  of 
expressing,  136,  Note  29, 
Conversation,  17. 

how  long?  when?  expres- 
sions of  time  in  answer 
to,  86,  Note  19. 

HYPHEN,  indicates  separable 
verbs  in  the  vocabularies, 
277,  '. 

\^,  not  written  with  a  capi- 
tal, 3,  ^;  declension  of,  61. 

if,  expressed  by  inverted 
order  of  sentence,  70, 
Note  15,  196,  ^ 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD,  formation 
of>  Z7i  ^^;  place  supplied 
by  the  subjunctive,  220,  ^ 

IMPERFECT  TENSE,  SCC  PRE- 
TERIT. 

IMPERSONAL  VERBS,  defini- 
tion of,  181,  ^;  proper  im- 
personals,  181,  ^;  verbs 
used  like  proper  imper- 
sonals,  181,  ®;  more  com- 
mon in  German  than  in 
English,  182,  ^^]  no  new 
mode  of  inflection,  182, ". 

-in,  feminine  nouns  in,  99, 
Note  24. 


INDEX 


349 


in  order  that,  expressed  by 
'tia'^,  batnit,  with  the  sub- 
junctive, 78,  Note  16, 
219,  '. 

INDEFINITE  ARTICLE,  SeC  AR- 
TICLE  (indefinite). 

INDICATIVE  MOOD,  nature  of, 
2j8,  *.     See  also  verbs. 

INDIRECT  OBJECT,  dative  the 
case  of,  16,  ^;  order  in 
sentence,  91,  Note  21, 
189,  ''. 

INDIRECT      STATEMENT,      SUb- 

junctive  of,  219. 
INFINITIVE  MOOD,  ending  of, 
36,  * ;  place  of,  in  the  sen- 
tence, 39,  Footnote,  61, 
Note  13,  188,  '\  191,  '') 
gender  of,  when  used  as 
noun,  205,  ";  omission 
after  the  "modal  auxil- 
iaries," 149,  *;  active 
translated  by  passive,  205, 
^^;  not  preceded  by  gu 
after  what  verbs,  149,  ^ 
204,  ^^  ^*;  two  at  the  end 
of  a  transposed  sentence, 
191,  ^®;  omission  of  sub- 
ject, 201,  ^;  used  instead 
of  the  past  participle  in 
"modal  auxiliaries,"  I50,l 

INSEPARABLE     PREFIXES,     125, 

*-*^ ;  separable  prefixes 
used  as,  136,  Note  28, 
meaning,  126,  ^^  See  also 
in  German-English  Vo- 
cabulary. 

INSEPARABLE  VERBS,    125,  ^"^^  ; 

inflection  of,  128,  ^^ 

INTERJECTIONS,    23O,    ^®. 


INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUN, 

89,  \ 
INTERROGATIVE  SENTENCE, 

order  of,  70,  Note  15, 
106,  ^ 

INTRANSITIVE    VERBS,    fettl    aS 

auxiliary  in  compound 
tenses,  58,  I 

INVERTED      SENTENCE,      Ordcr 

of,  31,  Footnote  i ;  46, 
Footnote  4,  70,  Note  15, 
187,  ^;  in  what  cases  re- 
quired, 196,  ^;  to  express 
a  condition,  70,  Note  15, 
144,  Note  30,  196,  ^;  not 
required  after  general 
connectives  or  adverbial 
conjunctions,  188,  ^\ 

IRREGULAR      COMPARISON,      of 

adjectives,  121,  Note  26. 

ITALICS,   signification  of,   in 

the  vocabularies,  277,  ^ 

jjen-  (jener),  declension  of, 
21,  ^;  contrasted  with, 
btefer,  22,  ^  97,  I 

feirt,  declension  of,  28,  ^ 
fonnen,  signification  of,  152, 
Note  13;  dependent  verb 
often  not  expressed,  149/, 
does  not  take  3U  before  a 
following  infinitive,  204, 
";  conjugation  of,  153, 
^*;  infinitive  used  for 
participle,  150,  **;  further 
uses  of,  151,  ^\ 

laffen,  "causative  auxilia- 
ry," 151,  ®;  does  not  take 


350 


INDEX 


5U  before  a  following  in- 
finitive,   204,    '',    205,    ^^; 
further  uses,  175,  ^ 
let  (have,  cause),  see  laffen. 

LETTERS     OF     THE     ALPHABET, 

printed,  i,  written,  171. 
See  also  alphabet. 

matt,  meaning  of,  25,  Note 
5 ;  difference  between 
man  and  fte  in  translating 
they,  30,  Note  6;  oblique 
cases  of,  25,  Note  5. 

tnand^-  (man(^er),  declen- 
sion of,  21,  ®. 

S)^ann,  distinguished  from 
Wen^d),  99,  Note  23 ;  form 
of  plural  of,  in  com- 
pounds, 129,  Note  37. 

MANNER  (adverbs  of),  posi- 
tion of,  in  the  sentence, 
190,  ^ 

MASCULINE       NOUNS,       rulcS 

for,  237 ;  of  the  first  de- 
clension, 83,  ^;  in  el,  en, 
ev,  76,  ^",  89,  ^;  of  second 
declension,  96,  *.    See  also 

GENDER. 

MEASURE,  case  of  the  noun 
after  words  of,  39,  Foot- 
note 2,  99,  Note  25. 

tnein  (possessive  adjective), 
declension  of,  28,  *. 

"  MODAL    auxiliaries/'    LcS- 

sons  XX-XXII ;  defective 
in  English,  149,  ^;  substi- 
tutes for,  150,  *;  verb  de- 
pending upon  them  often 
not  expressed,  149,  *;  do 
not  take  gu  before  a  fol- 


lowing infinitive,  149,  ^ 
204,  ^^;  inflection  of, 
153-4,  160-1,  167-8;  infini- 
tive used  for  participle, 
150,  ^;  peculiar  uses,  149- 
167 ;  signification  of,  see 
biirfen,  etc.,  in  this  index. 

MODIFIED    vowels,     SCC     Um^ 

laid. 

mi3gen,  signification  of, 
158,  ^;  dependent  verb 
often  not  expressed,  149, 
*;  does  not  take  gn  before 
a  following  infinitive, 
204,  ";  conjugation  of, 
160-1 ;  infinitive  used  for 
participle  150,  ^;  further 
uses,  159. 

MONOSYLLABIC  NOUNS,  re- 
tain e  (in  parenthesis)  in 
gen.  and  dat.,  76,  ^*. 

MONTHS,  names  of,  81,  Vo- 
cabulary. 

MOODS,  comparison  between 
indicative  and  subjunc- 
tive,  141,  ^"^  218,  *.     See 

also  IMPERATIVE,  INDICA- 
TIVE, INFINITIVE,  and  SUB- 
JUNCTIVE   MOODS. 

miiffen,  signification  of, 
165,  ^•^;  dependent  verb 
often  not  expressed,  149, 
*;  does  not  take  3U  before 
a  following  infinitive, 
204,  ^^;  conjugation  of, 
167,  * ;  infinitive  used  for 
participle,  150,  ^ 

NEGATIVES,  modify  the  per- 
sonal  verb,    150,   ^;   posi- 


INDEX 


351 


tion    of    in   the    sentence, 
190,  ''• 
NEUTER    NOUNS^    rules    for, 
237;    in    first    declension, 

74,  °-  ® ;  in  -(^en  and  -lein, 
76,  ^^  78,  Note  17;  in  class 
III  of  first  declension, 
89,  *.     See  also  gender. 

NEW  CONJUGATION,  charac- 
teristics of,  35,  °*;  forma- 
tion of,  36,  *"'°;  inflection 
of  a  verb  of,  37,  "*";  list  of 
irregular  verbs  of.  Ap- 
pendix 269. 

NEW    SOUNDS,    in    German, 

4-8. 

nid^t,  position  of,  in  the  sen- 
tence, 40,  Footnote  2. 

NOMINATIVE   CASE,   officC   of, 

16,  ^;  nominative  and  ac- 
cusative the  same  in  fem- 
inine and  neuter,  16,  ^; 
plural,  ending  of,  75,  ^^ 
96,  ^;  must  be  known  in 
order  to   decline   a  noun, 

75,  ^®;  plural,  mode  of  in- 
dication in  the  vocabula- 
ries, 277,  ^ 

NORMAL   ORDER  OF   SENTENCE, 

187,  ',  188,  '-'';  not  af- 
fected by  the  general  con- 
nectives, 188,  ^^;  instead 
of  transposed  order  when 
ha^  is  omitted,  197,  ^l 
NOUNS,  declension  of,  74, 
*"";    first    declension    of, 


75, 


^;    first   declension. 


class    I,    76,    '^";    excep- 
tions, 241 ;  class  II,  83,  ^'^, 


exceptions,  242;  class  III, 
89,  ^  ^  exceptions,  242 ;  de- 
clension and  gender  of 
compound,  75,  ^\  91,  Note 
21 ;  second  declension  of, 
96,  *^;  a  table  of,  98;  ad- 
jectives used  as,  103,  ^; 
order  of,  in  the  sentence, 
with  double  gender,  238, 
189,  '^ 

NUMERALS,  Cardinal,  33,  41  ; 
ordinal,     72,    Vocabulary. 

NUMERALS,  meaning  of,  be- 
fore words  in  the  Exer- 
cises, 40,  Footnote. 

OBJECT,  indirect,  16,  ®;  di- 
rect, of  a  transitive  verb, 
16,  '. 

OLD  CONJUGATION,  character- 
istics of,  35,  ^;  formation 
of,  43,  ^~^^ ;  classes  and  ir- 
regularities, 50,  '^'®;  in- 
flection of  a  verb  of,  see 
gehen;  list  of  verbs  of, 
Appendix  259. 

OPTATIVE  OR  IMPERATIVE  SEN- 
TENCE, arrangement  of, 
196,  ^ 

OPTATIVE    USE    OF    THE     SUB- 
JUNCTIVE,   220,    *. 
ORDER      OF       THE       SENTENCE, 

Lessons  XXV  and  XXVI. 

PARENTHESIS,  meaning  of, 
in  the  Exercises,  18,  Foot- 
note; 25,  Footnote  3. 

PARTICIPLE,  formation  of 
past,  36,  ^  44,^ ;  of  present, 
36,  ^,  44,  ^;  position  of,  in 


352 


INDEX 


the  sentence,  6i,  Note  13, 

188,  '',  191,  ''"'';  Lesson 
XXVIII;  declension  of, 
104,  \ 

PARTITIVE   CONSTRUCTION,  99, 

Note  25. 

PARTS  OF  SPEECH,  names  of, 
in  German,  64;  Vocabula- 
ry. 

PASSIVE  VOICE,  nature  and 
formation  of,  172,  ^^ ;  con- 
jugation of  a  verb  in  the, 
172,  ^;  distinction  between 
passive  and  form  with 
fein,  173,  *'^;  more  fre- 
quent in  English  than 
German,  175,  ^;  passive 
use     of     active     infinite, 

175,  °. 

PERFECT     TENSE,     formation 

of,  58,  '■'■';  use  of,  66, 
5. 7 

PERIPHRASTIC   FORMS   OF   THE 

VERB,  (/  do,  I  am,  I  have 
been,  etc.),  19,  Note  2, 
39,  Note  9,  47,  Footnotes. 
PERSONAL  ENDINGS,  of  pres- 
ent, 36,  ^°;  of  preterit,  37, 

12.  13 

PERSONAL  PART  OF  THE  VERB, 

position  of  in  the  sen- 
tence, 187,  \  188,  '\  19s,  ', 
197,  '. 

PERSONAL  PRONOUNS,  USC  of, 

in  address,  19,  Note  i,  37, 
^*,  70,  Note  14;  declension 
of,  61,  69,  78;  place  of  in 
the  sentence,  90,  Note  21, 

189,  ^^;  reflexive  use  of, 
180,  ^ 


PLACE  (adverbs  of),  position 
of  in  the  sentence,  189,  ^^ 
190,  \ 

PLUPERFECT  TENSE,  forma- 
tion of,  58,  '. 

PLURAL,  of  nouns,  76,  "; 
dative  always  ends  in  -n; 
ending  determines  class 
in  first  declension  of 
nouns,  75,  ^^;  ending  in 
second  declension,  75,  ^ 
96,  °;  nouns  with  double, 
239. 

POSITIVE  DEGREE  OF  ADJEC- 
TIVES,   104,  *®. 

POSSESSIVE  ADJECTIVES,  def- 
inite article  used  for,  23, 
Note  4;  declension  of, 
28,  ^;  pronouns,  29,  ^ 

POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS,  97,  " ; 
agreement  of,  99,  ^". 

PREDICATE    ADJECTIVE,    IO3,    ** 

';  its  form  in  the  super- 
lative, 119,  ^ 

PREFIXES,  separable  used  in- 
separably, 136,  Note  28, 
253.  See  also  inseparable 
and  separable  prefixes. 

prepositions,  contracted 
with  definite  article,  17, 
Remark ;  governing  dat. 
or  ace,  53,  Note  12  and 
Appendix  249 ;  com- 
pounded with  an  adverb 
instead  of  a  following 
case,  84,  Note  18 ;  govern- 
ing ace,  39,  Note  10,  and 
Appendix  248 ;  general 
uses,  227,  Appendix  249, 
with  inf.  202,  *;  with  gen., 


INDEX 


353 


22^,  ^*,  and  Appendix 
247;  dat.,  45,  Note  11,  and 
Appendix  248;  ace,  244, 
248. 
PRESENT  TENSE,  formation 
of,  in  the  indicative,  36,  ^° ; 
used   for   English   future, 

65,  *;  for  English  perfect, 

66,  ";  formation  of,  in  the 
subjunctive,  14T,  ^ 

PRETERIT  TENSE,  distin- 
guishes between  New  and 
Old  Conjugations,  35,  ^; 
formation  of,  in  New 
Conjugation,  y7y  ^^;  i^i 
Old,  43, '  and  ^' '' ;  in  sub- 
junctive,  141,  *. 

PRINCIPAL    PARTS    OF    A   VERB, 

36, '. 

PRONOUNS,  possessive,  29, 
^  97,  ^;  agreement  of,  99, 
'"•    personal,    61,    69,    78; 


relative,  90, 


mterrog- 


ative,  89,  ',  84,  Note  18; 
demonstrative,  22,  ^  97,  *; 
order  of  in  the  sentence, 
189,  '^;  reflexive,  180,  ^ 
PRONUNCIATION,  remarks 
on,  3,  «  ff.  II,  '\ 

QUANTITY^  9,  ^^l 

REFLEXIVE  PRONOUN,  pOsitioU 

of,  in  the  sentence,  189, 
" ;  form  of,  180,  \ 
REFLEXIVE  VERBS,  definition 
of,  179,  ^"^;  proper  reflex- 
ives, 179,  ^;  more  frequent 
in  German  than  English, 
179,    ^;    conjugation,    180, 


^;  followed  by  the  geni- 
tive, 182,  Note  32. 

REGULAR     OR     NORMAL     ORDER 

OF    SENTENCE,    1 88,   ^~^^. 
RELATIVE    PRONOUNS,    declcU- 

sion  and  use  of,  90,  ^"^^; 
never  omitted,  90,  ^^;  re- 
quire transposed  order  of 
sentence,  91,  ^^  197,  ^^. 

ROMAN,  printed  character, 
I ;   written,  271. 

ROOT,  of  a  verb,  36,  ^ 

SCRIPT,    German,    271. 
SEASONS,  names  of,  86,  Vo- 
cabulary. 

SECOND  DECLENSION,  of 

nouns,  96,  ^"^i  of  adjec- 
tives,   III,  '^ 

fctn  (verb),  inflection  of 
present  indicative  of,  17 ; 
of  preterit  indicative  of, 
29,  ^;  use  as  tense  aux- 
iliary, 57,  ^•^•■^;  distin- 
guished from  l)ahex\,  58, 
**;  inflection  of  compound 
tenses  indicative  of,  67 ; 
not  auxihary  of  the  pas- 
sive, 173,  ^;  inflection  cf 
simple  tenses  subjunctive 
of,  142,  I 

SENTENCE,  ordcr  of,  has 
three  forms,  187,  * ;  normal 
order  of,  187,  \  188,  ^- 
^'';  inverted  order  of,  187, 
^  195,  ^"^;  transposed  or- 
der of,  187,  \  197,  ^"" ;  or- 
der of  the  verbal  adjuncts 
in  the,  188,  ''-  '"'". 

SEPARABLE        PREFIXES,        I34, 


354 


INDEX 


^■^,  252 ;  separable  prefixes 
used  inseparably,  136, 
Note  28,  Appendix  253. 

SEPARABLE  VERBS,  Conjuga- 
tion of,  134,  ^;  separable 
used  inseparably,  136, 
Note  28;  Appendix,  253. 
See  also  verbs. 

fie,  declension  of,  69;  both 
singular  and  plural,  19, 
Note  I. 

foldj-  (folc^er) ,  declension 
of,  22,  ^ 

foUen,  signification  of,  165, 
^~^;  dependent  verb  often 
not  expressed,  149,  ^ ;  does 
not  take  gu  before  a  fol- 
lowing infinitive,  204,  ^^; 
conjugation  of,  167,  ^;  in- 
finitive used  for  parti- 
ciple, 150,  ^ 

some,  translation  of,  23, 
Note  3. 

sounds,    nev^,    in    German, 

4-8. 

STEM,  of  a  verb,  36,  ^ 
strong  verbs,  see  old  con- 
jugation. 
SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD,  forma- 
tion of,  141,  ^"®;  inflection 
of,  143,  '''''';  nature  of,  141, 
^  218,  ^~^;  in  conditions, 
220,  ^;  in  indirect  state- 
ment, 219,  ®;  to  express  a 
wish  or  command,  218,  ^ 
220,  \ 

SUBORDINATING  CONJUNC- 

TIONS,  146,   Note  31,  255. 

SUBSTANTIVE,    SCC    NOUN. 
SUPBRIvATIVE    DEGREE    OF    AD- 


JECTIVES, 119,  *-'^;  forma- 
tion of,  119,  *;  declension 
of,  119,  ^ 

TENSES,  formation  of  the 
compound,  57,  *~^;  corres- 
pondence of,  65,  ^~^;  pres- 
ent for  English  perfect,  66, 
^;  in  subjunctive  of  indi- 
rect statement,  219;  per- 
fect for  English  preterit, 
66,  \ 

there  is,  there  are,  how  to 
translate,  30,  Note  7. 

TIME  (adverbs  of),  position 
of,  in  the  sentence,  190,  ^. 

TIME,  expressions  of,  in  an- 
swer to  "when?"  "how 
long?",  86,  Note  19;  of 
day,  mode  of  expressing, 
136,  Note  29 ;  and  Conver- 
sation 17. 

TRANSITIVE       VERB,       CaU       be 

turned  into  passive,  can  be 
used  reflexively,  175,  ^ 
179,  '. 

TRANSPOSED  ORDER  OF  SEN- 
TENCE, 187,  \  197,  *"'*;  47, 
Footnote  4,  146,  Note  31 ; 
when  required,  197,  ^^ ; 
changed  to  normal  order 
when  baJ3  is  omitted,  197, 
" ;  changed  to  inverted  or- 
der when  iDCnn  is  omitted, 
198,  ";  position  of  per- 
sonal part  of  verb  when 
there  are  two  infinitives 
at  end  of,  191,  ^l 

Um'laul,    nature    of,    2,  ^ 


INDEX 


355 


0  7,  ii  8;  in  conjugation  of 
the  verb,  52,  ^  141,  ^  in 
plural  of  nouns,  76,  ^°;  in 
nouns  in  d^en  and  letn,  78, 
Note  17;  in  feminines 
with  ending  ^tn,  99,  Note 
24;  in  comparison  of  ad- 
jectives, 119,  ^ 
unfer  (possessive  adjec- 
tive),   declension    of,    28, 

5.  6 

VARIATION,  of  radical  vowel 
in  verbs  of  the  Old  Con- 
jugation, 43,  \  50,  \ 

VERBS,  emphatic  and  pro- 
gressive forms,  19,  Note 
2;  conjugation  of,  35, 
'"'^  stem  of,  36,  ";  prin- 
cipal parts  of,  36,  '^;  New 
Conjugation,  s^,  ®~^'';  per- 
sonal endings  of  present 
and  preterit,  36,  ''"'' ;  Old 
Conjugation,  43,  ^~^^ ;  com- 
pound tenses  of,  57,  ''' 
(^ahen,  fetn,  ii^erbcn),  66. 
^ff;  inseparable  and  sep 
arable,  125,  ";  inseparable. 


125, 


separable,    134, 


*~^;  separable  used  insep- 
arably, 136,  Note  28;  in 
the  passive  voice,  172, 
"  causative  auxiliary,'' 
151,  *;  omission  of  gu  be- 
fore the  infinitive  of,  204, 
^^;  position  of,  in  the  sen- 
tence. Lessons  XXV  and 
XXVI ;  order  in  the  sen- 
tence of  adjuncts  of,  188, 
"^;  reflexive,  179,'^;  re- 
flexive with  genitive,  182, 


Note  32;  impersonal,  181, 
^^^;  conjugation  of  in  the 
subjunctive,  143,  ^'^^ ;  na- 
ture and  uses  of  the  sub- 
junctive, 218,  '"';  of  Old 
and  Irregular  Conjuga- 
tion, list  of,  259;  gov- 
erning the  genitive,  245 ; 
the  dative,  246. 

VOCABULARY,  Germau-Eng- 
lish,  277 ;  English-Ger- 
man, 319. 

VOICE,  passive,  172,  ^'^;  act- 
ive translated  by  English 
passive,  175,  ^'  *. 

VOWELS,  modified,  7,  8; 
quantity  of,  9,  ®"^^;  Eng- 
lish equivalents,  3,  ®  ff; 
pronunciation  of,  3,  ^"^; 
exercise  on,  11 ;  change 
of,  in  the  Old  Conjuga- 
tion, 52,  ^  141,  \ 

tr)a§,  declension  of,  89,  ^ 

tva§  fiir,  signification  of,  63, 
84,  Vocabulary. 

WEAK  VERBS,  marks  of,  50,  ^ 

tt)eld)-  (hjeMjcr),  declension 
of,  21,^;  use  of,  90,  ^^. 

tvcnn,  signification  of,  258. 

ir»cr,  declension  of,  89,  ^ ;  sig- 
nification of,  90,  ^ 

it>crbcn,  inflection  of  pres- 
ent and  preterit  indicative 
of,  29;  use  as  tense  aux- 
iliary, 58,  ®;  inflection  of 
compound  tenses  of,  68, 
use   as   auxiliary   of   pas- 


sive, 173, 


;  does  not  take 


^U  before  a  following  in- 


356 


INDEX 


f initive,  204/^ ;  forms  con- 
ditional mood,  141,  *"'. 

what  kind  of?  what  sort 
of?  how  to  translate,  6:^, 
84,  Vocabulary. 

when,  how  to  translate,  255, 
257,  258. 

when?  how  long?  expres- 
sions of  time  in  answer 
to,  86,  Note  19. 

WISH  OR  COMMAND,  SUbjunC- 

tive  to  express,  218,  ^ 
220,  \ 
tDoKen,  conjugation  of,  160, 
^\  signification  of,  158,  \ 
^;  principal  verb  often 
not  expressed,  149,  "*;  does 
not  take  gu  before  a  fol- 


lowing infinitive,  204,  ^^; 
infinitive  used  for  parti- 
ciple, 150,  ^;  further  uses, 

159,  ^ 

iDorben,  instead  of  getr)or^ 
ben,  in  conjugation  of 
passive,  172,  ^ 

WRITTEN  CHARACTER,  Ger- 
man, Appendix  271. 

YEAR,    months    of    the,    81 ; 

seasons  of  the,  88. 
you,   how    to   translate,    19, 

Note  I,  2>7,  ". 

gu,  when  omitted  before  a 
following    infinitive,    204, 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THF,  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 

AN  INITIAL  PINE  OF  25  CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED   FOR   FAILURE  TO   RETURN 
THIS    BOOK   ON   THE   DATE   DUE.    THE   PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  SO  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY    AND    TO    il.OO    ON    THE    SEVENTH     DAY 
.    OVERDLPE. 

^t^           7          -JQO-, 

'  *      <>^o7 

.    g  1S38 

JUN    8    1939 

OCT  141941  W 

AUG   5    -QA-l 

OCT    7  i5^ 

-M 

ISMarOoCiD 

APR  2  3 1956  Lli 

■ 

YB  55150 


926706 


y 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


